Departure of our Old Universe to the Source of All Life

Hollow Earth





Весь сайт на русском и английском.

Важное Сообщение - эта Страница теперь может быть просмотрена на мобильных телефонах !

Link to Site Map listing other articles, books and useful websites:  SITE MAP


ANNOUNCEMENT: This page has been modified to be viewable on Mobile devices

LIST OF SECTIONS ON THIS PAGE
(TO GO QUICKLY TO DESIRED SECTION, CLICK ON ITS HEADING IN THIS LIST)


Our Videos

'Alone' - Admiral Byrd's Autobiography

Inner Earth - Plutonia

Internet Articles about the Life Underground

American 'South Pole' Program in Pictures

Hollow Jupiter

Legacy From the Stars

Photo-Gallery

Two Earths

Creators of Inner and Outer Earth Life




Our New Video (in english and по-русски)

Part 1 -  Color Vibrational Layers of Universe and Parallel Universes are the same thing! Disappearance of first 4 Levels of our Old Universe and Gradual Gathering of Players on 5th Level ! Merging of Life Forms of all Parallel Universes (all Color Vibrational Layers) in our Old Universe.
Часть 1 - Понятие - Цветовой Вибрационный Слой Вселенной и Понятие Параллельная Вселенная это - одно и то же ! Исчезновение первых 4х Уровней нашей Старой Вселенной и Постепенное Сбор Игроков на 5м Уровне! Смешение Форм Жизни всех Параллельных Вселенных (или всех Цветовых Вибраций) в нашей Старой Вселенной.



SOLVING VIDEO PLAY PROBLEMS - UPDATED 25 June 2015

Video links to Apple Player and Adobe Flash Player have been modified in order to solve the following problems:

1. Browsers on mobile phones generally have their own in-built ("native") video player made possible with the latest web programming language ("HTML5"). These browsers do not accept either Apple or Adobe Flash Players ("Plugins").
2. Early 2015, from its update 39, Google Chrome disallowed use of Apple Player Plugin, with recommendation that websites be upgraded to HTML5.

To solve the above 2 problems, both Apple and Adobe video links have been upgraded with HTML5. Either link will play the video in (so called) .mp4 format compatible with HTML5. HOWEVER, if a website visitor has an OLD desktop computer browser that does NOT recognise HTML5, the video will be played with Apple or Adobe Flash Player plugin (depending on which link has been clicked). You may be asked to activate (enable) the Player.

On a desktop computer, you may also view the video by the 3rd method- by clicking the link to the video file. At present browsers like Internet Explorer or Firefox would open a new window to play the video. For Google Chrome (probably from its update 39), it downloads the video into your DOWNLOADS folder- there will be a message on the bottom left of the screen showing the name of the video- if you left-click on a small arrow and then on "OPEN"- the video should play.







Click to Animation "Departure of Our Old Universe" on Adobe Flash Player

LINK to the third method of playing Video "Departure of Our Old Universe": http://www.theshiftofconsciousness.info/OldUniverseDeparture.mov




You will be able to see this video (Part 1) on other 4 links (apart from this Page
) :  English Home Page

Russian Home Page

Our Videos

New Earth


Other Parts 2, 3, 4 will be finished within 5-6 months.




Resemblance between our Old Universe, our Old Earth-Sun, our Higher Selves (Graduates) and Humans

Сходство Нашей Старой Вселенной, Нашей Планеты-Cолнца, наших Высших Существ (Выпускников) и Людей

Structure of our Old Universe, of our Old Planet-Sun, of our Higher Selves and of Humans is based on the same Holographic Principle. All four of these are Luminous Spheres, but of a different size. Our Universe is the biggest White Luminous Sphere with the Central Sun in the middle. Our Planet Earth is a Huge White Luminous Sphere with our Sun in the centre; Sun and Earth are the same things! Higher Selves of Humans are White Luminous Spheres with many little Spirits-Suns (us) inside! A Human is the smallest (out of all 4) White Luminous Ball with a Spirit (a tiny Sun) inside (according to Don Juan & Carlos Castaneda) !
Структура нашей Старой Вселенной, нашей Старой Планеты-Солнца, наших и нас (Humans) базируется на одном и том же Принципе - Голографическая Основа! Наша Вселенная, наша Земля-Солнце (что одно и то же) и Человек, все три имеют одну и ту же Форму - Форму Белого Светящегося Шара только разного размера. Наша Вселенная - это самый большой Белый Светящийся Шар с Центральным Солнцем в центре; наша Планета-Солнце - это Белый Светящийся Шар меньше размером с Солнцем в центре; и настоящая Форма Человека - это маленький Белый Светящийся Шар с маленьким Солнцем (Spirit) в центре. Высшее Существо Человека это - только больше Светящаяся Белая Сфера с маленькими Сонцами (мы) внутри! Солнце и Планета Земля - это одно и то же!

Suns are always the first, who start forming a New Universe by creating Shells for themselves for Life Forms to develop (like chicken in an egg). Mind-Field helps to achieve it, Mind-Field gives Life to Universe. Mind-Field is created by the Stream of White Energy of Balance emitted from the Source of All Life through the Portal on the Highest Level of Consciousness (11th).
Солнца всегда первые, кто начинает формировать Новую Вселенную тем, что создают Оболочку (Кору) для себя, чтобы Формы Жизни могли развиваться (как цыплёнок в яйце). Поле Разума помогает этого добиться - Поле Разума даёт жизнь Вселенной. Поле Разума создаётся Потоком Белой Энергии Баланса, выпускаемого из Источника Всей Жизни через Портал на самом Высоком Уровне Сознания (11й).

Part 1 -  Color Vibrational Layers of Universe and Parallel Universes are the same thing! Disappearance of first 4 Levels of our Old Universe and Gradual Gathering of Players on 5th Level ! Merging of Life Forms of all Parallel Universes (all Color Vibrational Layers) in our Old Universe.
Часть 1 - Понятие - Цветовой Вибрационный Слой Вселенной и Понятие Параллельная Вселенная это - одно и то же ! Исчезновение первых 4х Уровней нашей Старой Вселенной и Постепенное Сбор Игроков на 5м Уровне! Смешение Форм Жизни всех Параллельных Вселенных (или всех Цветовых Вибраций) в нашей Старой Вселенной.

Part 2 -  Gradual Disappearance of first 4 Levels of Consciousness from Old Earth-Sun and Gathering of all Players on the 5th Level of Earth-Sun !
Часть 2 - Постепенное Исчезновение первых 4х Уровней из Старой Планеты Земля-Солнце и Общий Сбор всех Выпускников на 5ом Уровне Планеты Земля-Солнце !

Part 3 - Rainbow Color Vibrations of our Universe, our Earth-Sun and Us - Picture Gallery.
Часть 3 - Колоритные Цвета нашей Вселенной, нашей Планеты-Солнца и нас. Фото - Галерея.

Part 4 - Close Examination of Internal Structure of Old Planet Earth-Sun. Levels of Evolutionary Developement of Life Forms as a Pyramid.
Часть 4 - Детальный Рассмотр Внутренней Структуры Нашей Старой Планеты-Солнца. Уровни Эволюционного Развития Форм Жизни в виде Пирамиды.





Earth Rings


This picture is from our old Video "Our Planetary Game" (in English and in Russian), which you can find a way down this Page.
The Null Point or the Border (the Wall) between two Fields, influencing each other, is nothing but a Layer of Neutral Aquamarine Energy, a Wall between vibrationally low Sizzling and vibrationally high Wavy Energies! Since 23 March 1994 this Border has been breaking down, Aquamarine Energy has been penetrating and mixing Low Levels or Low Color Vibrations of Earth-Sun and of Old Universe for more than 20 years! This Process is important for generating more of White Sun Energy of Balance!

Первый кадр из нашего старого видео "Планетарная Игра Земли-Солнца" (это видео ниже на Странице), где обозначена Нулевая Точка или Граница между Низкими Вибрационными Полями Кипящей Энергии и Высокими Вибрационными Полями Волнистой Энергии, влияющими друг на друга! Нейтральный Аквамариновый Пояс это и есть Нулевая Точка - не что иное как Стена (Аквамариновая Вибрация), которая рушится и смешивает вместе Цветовые Вибрации Земли-Солнца (и вообще Цветовые Вибрации Всей Старой Вселенной) 1, 2, 3, 4го Уровней Сознания (уже больше 20ти лет)! Этот Процесс необходим для превращения всей Энергии Старой Вселенной в Белую Энергию Солнца - Баланса для взятия её в Источник Созидательной Силы!

Video - Description is in english and in russian

1. Opening Title is symbolic, it shows the resemblance and the connection between our Old Universe, Sun-Earth, Higher Self and a Human. All Colored and White Levels of our Old Universe are represented as big External Rings around Universal Central Sun. Another name for Colored Rings is Parallel Universes. Our Sun, surrounded by physical Shell (Crust) with more such Shells with smaller Suns inserted inside of it, is called Earth. Suns of internal Spheres are parts of our visible Sun (smaller Suns inside each Sphere). These Shells are placed in different Color Vibrations and resemble layers of an onion or russian matreschki, inserted into each other. Our Universe, our Sun-Earth, our Higher Self and a Human are built up exactly the same way! Opening Title shows Internal Colored Rings of Earth with a Human in the centre, surrounded by Colored Rings of different Vibrations of our Old Universe. There is another name for these Colored Rings of the Universe - Parallel Universes. Human Chakras are connected to all Colored Rings of Earth respectively.
2. We posted four Diagrams and an Opening Title from this video on 5 Pages (english and russian) in advance, for preliminary introduction (though we had to correct them a few times).
It is advisable to read them beforehand, because they (each) only last for 12 seconds in this video.
3. Next. You will see the last Diagram in action: the movements of Players of Earth Planetary Game and Aliens, struggles between Aliens, fights between Humans and Aliens with and without UFO's, explosions of their Planets and their UFO's; Flights and Explorations of our Universe (Colored Rings and White Levels of it).
I must add, that representation of our Solar System, which we've been taught, is totally wrong! Some people wrote, that we always lived inside Earth, and they were right ! I repeat, there are a few Earths of lower Vibrations (or Shells) one inside the other. Inside Earth there is a Planet Pluto of low Red Vibration with internal Sun and it is not just one such Planet inside Earth right now (together 5 to 8)! All these Planets are necessary for Arrival and Acclimatization to our Wavy Energy of New Civilizations of different low Vibrations.
4. Watch how Aliens from different Color Vibrations abandoning their blowing up Planets in colored Layers and moving through Portals into Earths-Suns and other Planets-Suns with Planetary Games on them! Aliens become Players (2 such Planets with similar processes are shown in this video). Pay attention on the movements inside Universal Central Sun - it is exactly how I saw our Sun emitting Waves of Balanced Energy ! You know who, artificially divided our Sun into: "Mother" Earth and "Father" Sun.

THERE IS NO SUCH A THING ! EARTH AND SUN ARE THE SAME THING ! THE SAME WAY HUMAN WAS DIVIDED INTO WOMAN AND MAN ! THERE IS NO SUCH A THING, WOMAN AND MAN ARE THE SAME THING - ONE HUMAN +.
5. In this video you'll see a Chain of Parts of Our Earth-Sun in every Colored Vibration, from the low Level to the higher one, later our released Sun merges with Universal Central Sun.

"Ed explains, that when a Planet is formed it is first just gas, which is rotating... the heavy particles eventually expand out and create the Planet's surface..."
Our Sun was always creating suitable physical Shells (Crusts, Spheres) for all its parts in every Colored Vibration like : Brown, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green and partially Aquamarine.
This is how a Sun becomes a Planet and starts building Life inside of its physical Shell (like birds in an egg). First a Sun creates a Shell (using the Law of Intent), let it to settle down, then smaller part of the same Sun hits the surface at the right moment, making a huge Hole in it, let gases to get out, then penetrates inside the Shell and position itself in the Centre of Hollow Shell. Our Sun is a Great Live Being, it started from the lowest physical Color Vibration - Brown, then, as Red Pluto, striked the surface, making a Hole (an Opening) and positioned itself in the centre of Interior of a Sphere, then more stages of the same action followed. This way parts of the same Sun got inside of other physical Shells in Brown, Orange, Yellow, Green, Vibrations, till the group of Suns with Shells became known as Planets of "Solar System". Sun has also non-physical (holographic) Spheres around its other parts in higher Color  Vibrations: Blue-Indigo, Violet-Purple, Magenta, Pink (or Earth of 4th Level Of Consciousness). From 5th to 11th Levels Sun doesn't have Spheres around it anymore. I repeat, Shell in every Color Vibration is really Planet Earth of different Vibrations, which is shown in this video. To confuse us, for each Earth in each Colored Vibration another name was invented (Proserpina, Minerva, Pluton, Mercury, Mars, Venus, Marduk-Faeton, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune etc.), but in fact, it is still the Same Chain of Parts of our Original Sun !
"A fellow by the name of Symmes (fearless captain), postulated, that inside the Earth was another Earth and another (5 or 8). But Symmes was somewhat different.
The Earth is Hollow and has a few concentric firm spheres inside each other and 2 huge Openings at the Poles."
Symmes was right, he inspired russian researchers, like Truchanov, who formed a polar expedition of scientists-explorers to Hollow Earth in 1913 (with his own money), to whom I have a great respect !
6. Watch in the video how Streams of Moving Aquamarine Energy are penetrating Colored Levels of low Vibrations and how Dark Matter is constantly moving out of Old Universe in a form of bedge-colored Stream.
7. Pay attention on how one Colored Level after another are collapsing, till none of them is left; how Aquamarine Layer disappears, how the physical Shells of Earth-Sun change to other colors of non-physical Spheres around Inner Suns, then Spheres disappear after reaching the 5th Level, internal Sun comes out of the Sphere and moves through the Levels up. Our Sun goes through a chain of transformations, becoming bigger and brighter, then joins Universal Central Sun. Our Old Universe is becoming pure White and only Levels from 5th to 11th are left, we are gathered in the 5th Level, before moving higher!
8. There is a Table of Color Vibrations at the upper corner (in english and in russian) to refer to. Names or explanations of processes, which will take place, are given, but for a short time.
9. Our Video, all its 4 parts, will be accompanyed by Indonesian music with sounds of volcanos, composed by a talanted guy Sa'aban Yahun, we thank him and we hope that you will enjoy the video !




"This scenario is apparently what is beginning to happen now in our Universe, 21 trillion years after its Creation. Everything in our Universe, including us, came from a Black Hole. The Andromedans say there is no age to us. We truly are infinite. You can take that any way you want. According to Vasais and Moraney, on March 23rd of 1994 a specific (Aquamarine) colour and sound frequency began to emanate from all the Black Holes in the known (this Old) Universe. In terms of their science, which goes back a long way, this is the first time this has ever happened. What this energy and frequency is doing is that it is creating a holographic impression throughout all dimensional levels, of which they say there are ELEVEN CREATIONAL DENSITIES. This new holographic impression has become a 12th density (the 12th LEVEL OF CONSCIOUSNESS. LM). They say, that this new holographic impression has one frequency - that it does not carry a duality within it (It is White Sparkling Sun Energy of Balance! LM). What this frequency (Balance, LM) is doing is that it is pulling up all the dimensional levels below it. They say, that by December 2013, third density, as we know it here, will cease to exist - it is imploding in on itself as everything is being drawn up. Those on the 11th are going to 12th. We are supposed to go to 4th and then to 5th density. From the Andromedan perspective, 4th density is a consciousness. It is where an entire raceis telepathic with each other, they are aware of each other, they feel each other - they are of one mind, separate individuals, but still one. Fifth density is where we would be considered from the third density as being Light. They say, that this is what is going to happen to us, no later than 2013, based on their science. Do I know if this is right? I will know when you know, but they have not been wrong yet. Now, there are individual consciousness', which have appeared in this 12th density Holographic Consciousness. They apparently are like nothing, that has ever been seen before. The Andromedans don't know who they are, what they are, and don't know even how to describe them. But, apparently, these 12th dimensional Beings have the capability to gaze down through all of the dimensions and see everything, that is going on there. That is all I know about that..." Alex Collier





Simplified Diagram of our Old Universe

We, Humans live in Binary Star-Sun System, it means we alternate living in 3rd physical and in 4th non-physical Levels of Consciousness. Lower Part of Us of 3rd Physical Level (Parallel Personalities of Red, Orange, Yellow, Green Vibrations) acts inside Physical Earths-Suns. This group of Inner Suns will change physical Shell (Crust) for non-physical Sphere, when Red, Orange, Yellow, Green Vibrations of physical Levels disappear. All Inner Suns are slowly merging with each other and becoming bigger and brighter!
Higher Vibrational Part of us moves to the 4th non-physical Level when our Physical Body is unconscious (or asleep) and acts in those Worlds of Blue-Indigo, Violet-Puple, Magenta, Pink Vibrations.
When 4th Non-Physical Level of Blue-Indigo, Violet, Magenta, Pink Vibrations disappear, we and Earth-Sun will get to the White 5th Level of Consciousness! We will merge with our Higher Selves on 5th Level! I must say, that our Centre in Australia has been concentrating Consciousness! Our Centre connects with the whole Chain of our Sun inc. our Inner Earths-Suns.
According to the info Robert Monroe got from some Being on his travels: these first 4 Levels of Consciousness (or Colored Rings) are inclosed into a bigger Circle and on top of this Circle lies a Stack of 7 Rings of Higher Levels (from 5th to 11th). 4 Levels and 7 Levels makes 11 Levels of Consciousness. These 11 Levels are also inclosed into a bigger Circle or a Ball, which forms Our Old Universe!
From 23 of March 1994 All Levels were moved one Level up: the 1st became 2nd...11th became 12th. The Source of Life is temporarily on the Highest 12th Level and will change back to the 11th after the Departure of Our Old Universe into the Source of All Life.
Our Old Core Universe also looks like an onion with multicolored layers of color vibrations around white Core with Central Sun. The further colored layer (like brown) is from the Central Sun, the longer, lower and slower would be its Vibration; the closer is a colored layer (like pink) is to the Central Sun, the shorter, higher and faster would be its Vibration. All Color Vibrations are of 1, 2, 3, 4 Levels of Consciousness. Pink, Magenta, Violet and Blue-Indigo are higher Vibrations and have Wavy Energy, which is stronger towards Central Sun. Green, Yellow, Orange, Red, Brown are lower Vibrations and have Sizzling Electrifying Energy. This Sizzling Energy is, in fact, deliberately distorted, Wavy Sun Energy of Balance, same as eyes of Reptilians are distorted Human eyes. Pupil is the aperture of iris in human eye, which looks like a Black Hole. That Black Hole is distorted into a slot in Reptilian eyes. At the End of life of Old Universe this distorted Sizzling Energy has to return to its Original State - Sun Energy of Balance.
Artificial Fabric of Time is connected to the Timeline of the whole physical Universe (just to the first 4 Levels). At the End of Life of Old Universe (like in our case), when the Timeline comes to 0 (Null Point), artificial Fabric of Time becomes more and more distorted. Fabric of Time is generated by Electro-Magnetic Field outside Earth (most likely on the Moon). There is an Artificial Crystalline Structure in one of the Layers of the Crust, but it is not Crystalline Core of Earth or of Universe. Universal Core is Central Sun, which has lots of Suns in the centre and a Black Hole, not crystals! Black Holes are in our eyes, but in reptilian eyes these Black Holes are distorted. Reptilians and their Energy World were made of deliberately distorted Sizzling Energy.
White Vibration is the Highest and has Wavy Energy. Neutral Aquamarine Energy was a Border, a Wall between Sizzling and Wavy Energies. Robert Monroe called this Wall - 'Null Point'.
On 23 March 1994 All Black Holes of our Old Core Universe started emitting this Neutral Aquamarine Energy, that started ruining the Border and mixing Life Forms of all Color Vibrations of the first 4 Levels of Consciousness of Earth, of Our Old Universe and of Our Parallel Universes. Auroras or Northern Lights are showing Arrival of New Civilizations of all Color Vibrations esp. above the Openings in Arctica and Ant-Arctica. The Beginning of the End of Life of our Old Universe already lasted for 20 years!
More 2-way Portals turned up for Scouts of different Color Vibrations to penetrate low and high colored Layers and mix with different Life Forms. This is what we witness on Earth today. White Energy of Balance can only be generated if both Energies (Wavy-Positive and Sizzling-Electrifying-Negative) are present and mixed up with the help of Emotions. Good example of generating Balanced Energy are catastrophes/wars/sports games/money. Arrival of New Civilizations of Sizzling Energy
to Earth-Sun are marked by lots of Lightnings turning up with or without rain and storm.
Andromedans told Alex Collier, that we need to raise the Vibration of our Old Universe starting from the lowest Physical Levels up! Sorcerers of Don Juan Lineage (in their Energy Bodies) became some of the first pioneers to reach these low Levels of Sizzling Energy (like Yellow) and raise them up. It was so electrifying, foggy, hot to stay there long, but still they left there our Wavy Energy, which started speeding up the Vibration of those Layers. Astronauts and ordinary people from Earth followed Sorcerers and Scouts. At the same time, for many centuries Scouts from lower Levels have been constantly penetrating different Worlds of higher Color Vibrations, mixing their Sizzling Energy with Wavy Energy of Life Forms to generate Balanced Energy (esp. at the End of Life of our Old Universe).

Mixing of Life Forms of Earths-Suns with Life Forms of Old Universe

Aquamarine Energy started breaking up 1, 2, 3 physical Levels of Consciousness into Low Viscosity Plasma. That Plasma is called - Dark Matter and it has been constantly taken out of our Old Universe to a younger Universe. We will lose our Human Form, we don't need it any more. 1st Level was Brown Vibration or Amber, which is gone by now, Red Layer or Vibration is just about to disappears and other Color Vibrations will gradually disappear too (this video shows it). The Old Universe will become of One Vibration - White!
According to Sorcerers like Don Juan, everything on modern Earth covered with a layer of shimmering White Sun Wavy Energy. In this video you will see Fighting and Merging of Beings of different Vibrations (as сolored balls or as UFO's), lots of explosions and a lot of release of White Energy of Balance. You will see how Beings of Higher Vibrations are examining our Sun and Universal Central Sun. Humans combine 2 opposing Energies: Wavy (Sun Energy of Soul) and Sizzling-Electrifying Energy of Body. Sizzling Energy + Wavy Energy + Emotions = Sun Energy of Balance! The major Goal at the End of Life of this 21 trillion year old Universe is to mix and turn all its Energies into Sun Energy of Balance and take it to the Source of All Life. Another Goal is to create a perfect Human Body (Human+), which would be able to contain all Universal Civilizations in Human Genetic Code. Then it would be easier to turn all existing Energies into Balanced Energy. That is the reason for constant genetic changes and mixtures in human/alien/animal/plant bodies and in other physical Life Forms of the whole Universe. Emotions are a Catalyst for a Reaction between Wavy and Sizzling Energies, a Force of a scratchy nature, which is difficult for many to withstand (esp. for little children and Men). Emotions are generated in Humans and Animals as a result of long Emotional and Physical Pain. Usually Old Human Females have the highest Level of Emotions and better control of them.

Mixing of Life Forms of all Inner Earths-Suns! Levels of Developement of Life Forms as a Pyramid. Genetic Experiments

Robert Monroe was told by his non-physical Inspec-friends, that we - Humans can create anything! When we want to create Matter, we use our Intent/Thoughts, our Soul Energy and Emotions in Low Physical Levels of Vibration like Red, Orange, Yellow, Green. When we (with the hidden Intent of our Higher Selves) create Sun Energy of Balance, we use our Soul Energy and Emotions by combining all Color Vibrations. Initially, with the help of Intent/Thoughts, we created multiple Holograms of physical Life on Earth-Sun. In every case we use Mind-Field (the Energy of Balance in a form of White Threads), which is created by a Beam of White Energy of Balance, coming from the Source of All Life. What we consider DENSE: physical objects, mountains, forests etc. was made out of MULTIPLE LAYERS OF SIZZLING - ELECTRIFYING ENERGY (not of our Wavy Flowing Energy). Sizzling Energy is a temporarily Distorted Energy of Balance. Сentury after century Layers of these Holograms were STANDING ON ONE SPOT, LIKE A HAMPSTER ON THE WHEEL, accumulating, till wars/disasters/atomic explosions destroed and mied them together! Eventually Earth-Sun's physical Crust had to be broken into pieces (Continents and Islands), and not just once, opening way for creating Worlds of New (to Earth) Arrivals- Alien Civilizations! After removal of Colored Layers-Vibrations of 1, 2, 3rd Physical Levels (inc. Aquamarine), the Shell of Earth-Sun will implode, releasing Earth's Soul-Sun.
Pieces of Crust will turn into Dark Matter and move out of Old Universe. At the very beginning the Shell of our own Planet Earth-Sun was created from Dark Matter left from collapse of Old Planets. Dark Matter is a building material of Low Viscosity Plasma, formed from remnants of old Planets' physical bodies (or multi-layered holograms) of former Old Departing Universe, which no longer exists. The same is happening right now. Many Planets-Suns in our Universe have been losing their Physical Bodies (Spheres) as a result of catastrophes, releasing their Souls and becoming Suns. Those, who lived on these Planets, had to move into their UFO's, travelling in them, mixing with other races of Universe or becoming Players of Planetary Games. As a result of explosions a lot of Low Viscosity Plasma (Dark Matter) has appeared in our Universe, in our video you will see how this Plasma is constantly moved out of our Old Universe.




These are 2 photos of Human Rainbow Auras of people in a plane and of a person on a mountain. Below is a photo of Aurora and Aquamarine Energy Layer on snow.
2 фото цветной Ауры группы людей в самолёте и радужной Ауры отдельного человека на горе.





Aurora & Aquamarine snow


There is an excellent old book (printed in 1941) called "Plutonia", written by one of Russian researchers - Vladimir Obruchev, about a group of Russian scientists-explorers, who in May  1913 started this expedition from Vladivostok, then Kamchatka, Beringov sea, Northern ocean. There they found island, called it Nansen Land, which had an entrance to Hollow Earth-Sun of lower vibration. They thouroughly explored this Hollow Earth-Sun's inner animal/plant Worlds, withnessed life of first Humans (who resembled Yowies), met Ant like Alien Races, how they were hunting and eating all kinds of dinosaurs in there, went through hardships and survived to return to Moscow. This group of tough Humans was allowed to explore this inside World, because their Wavy Energy was needed there for Arrivals of New Civilizations of Sizzling Energy. For the same reason (Arrivals of New Civilizations of Sizzling Energy) the First World War started a year later in 1914, just when this expedition was returning from their extremely difficult journey. Near Kamchatka peninsula their ship was invaded by Austrian-
Hungerian warship (with Reptilians behind them), who was waiting for them to arrive from behind Arctic Circle. All their collections of different plant and animal life of Hollow Earth (and much more) were confiscated never to be returned, they nearly were taken hostage in Russian territorian waters
. After final arrival to Moscow all these scientists were scattered: some were killed at war, some died or vanished. Vladimir Obruchev had to write a book getting information from this expedition's diaries: the only evidence , which they managed to bring to Moscow. Plutonia, this is how the explorers of that time (1913) called prehistoric World of Hollow Earth of Low with its Sun, covered with low Red Vibration. Now more and more of those prehistoric animals' bodies people find all over the World and video. I posted the content of this book in electronic form on our site's new link called "Plutonia" (in russian):
"Plutonia" (Плутония)

It is not just each one of us came from a different civilization, but we live in a Sea of different civilizations, which are different Life Forms visible/invisible, who came from far corners of our Old Universe to adapt here and eventually to turn into Sun Energy of Balance!
Wavy Energy MOVES in Waves. Higher Forces find places on Earth, where and when these 2 Energies could be MIXED TOGETHER WITH A HELP OF OUR Human EMOTIONS ! It explains why we still lit our cities up with ELECTRICITY and not with any other available alternative energy: to provide easier Penetration of Sizzling - Electrifying Energy into Earth-Sun fields ! Each catastrophe, whichever took place on Earth, was caused by Penetration of Foreign Civilizations!
My Observation: when a dog or a cat is in a positive mood (Wavy Energy), his tail is moving in Waves, but when a dog or a cat is in a negative mood, aggressive, his tail isn't wavy and all his body for some time would stand on one spot, shivering with rage, boiling with Sizzling-Electrifying Energy of invisible Inorganic Being (that happens to people too).


Объяснение Видео. Это Видео на русском и английском

1. Открывается видео с символической картины, которая доказывает насколько похожи по строению наша Старая Вселенная, наше Солнце-Земля, наши Высшие Существа и Игроки Планетарной Игры (Человек). Все Цветные и Белые Уровни Сознания нашей Вселенной показаны как большие внешние Кольца вокруг Центрального Солнца Вселенной. Планета Земля - это на самом деле только часть нашего огромного Солнца, окружённого физической Сферой (Кора), внутри которой находится ещё несколько таких Сфер, с маленькими Солнцами внутри (напоминают слои лука или матрёшки, вставленные друг в друга). Эти маленькие Солнца в каждой Сфере являются частями нашего огромного видимого Солнца. Сферы, находящиеся в Цветовых Вибрациях : Коричневой, Красной, Оранжевой, Жёлтой, Зелёной, Аквамариновой являются физическими. А те Сферы, которые находятся в Синей-Индиго, Фиолетовой-Лиловой, Magenta, Розовой Вибрациях - нефизические, но все можно назвать одним словом - Земля, а точнее : Цепочка частей одного и того же Солнца!
Наша Вселенная, Наше Солнце-Земля, наши Высшие Существа и Человек (Human+) построены совершенно одинаково и это показывает самая первая Картина (Opening Title) : Внутренние Цветные Круги Солнца-Земли разной Вибрации, окружённые Цветными и Белым Поясами Вселенной с девушкой в центре. Её Чакры присоединены ко всем Цветным Поясам Земли по назначению: Красная Чакра к Красной Вибрации и т.д.
2. Мы также послали 4 Диаграммы из нашего видео на обе Домашние Страницы (английскую и русскую), чтобы вы заранее ознакомились с ними. Я очень рекомендую вам в них сначала разобраться, т.к. эти Диаграммы появляются в видео (всего 12 сек. каждая).
3. Следующим будет последняя Диаграмма в движении.
Планетарная Игра также происходит между Планетами Земля разной вибрации, между их Игроками. В результате этой борьбы поднимается вибрация Планеты и когда достигает определённой скорости, Кора Планеты - Солнца разрывается. Солнце освобождается и сливается с Планетой-Солнцем вибрацией повыше. Например, Кора Красной Земли разрывается, Солнце сливается с Солнцем Оранжевой Земли! И так происходит до тех пор пока Солнце не дойдёт до Аквамаринового Уровня и не перейдёт в Планету Земля-Солнце  нефизического Уровня.
Вибрация Планеты-Солнца продолжает повышаться, и на 5ом Уровне Солнце освобождается от всяких Оболочек физических и нефизических.

Игроки Планетарной Игры сражаются между собой и с Инопланетянами; сражения между разными НЛО с Инопланетянами разной Вибрации; Взрывы их кораблей и их Планет-Солнц. Вы увидите исследовательские полёты Вселенной Людьми и Инопланетянами. К этому я должна добавить что та Солнечная Система, которой нас пичкали с детства, в корне не верная ! Некоторые умные люди писали, что мы всегда жили внутри Планеты, не снаружи её, и они были правы.  Я повторяю опять, существует несколько Планет Земля-Солнце более низкой Вибрации и находятся они внутри той, на которой мы находимся. Внутри Земли находится Планета Плутон низкой Красной Вибрации с маленьким Солнцем внутри (частью нашего Главного Коренного Солнца). Помимо этой Планеты внутри Земли находится ещё от 5 до 8 Планет разного размера и разной Вибрации с внутренними маленькими Солнцами. Все они - части большого Солнца и все они нужны для прихода новых цивилизаций разных Вибраций.
4. Понаблюдайте как Инопланетяне разных Цветовых Вибраций бросают свои Планеты в Цветных Уровнях и двигаются  через Порталы на Землю и другие Планеты с Планетарными Играми (в видео показаны две такие). Так Инопланетяне становятся Игроками. Обратите внимание как движется Волнами Энергия Баланса Центрального Солнца Вселенной - точно так я несколько раз видела Волны Энергии Баланса нашего видимого Солнца двигаются. Мы часто слышим или читаем такие слова: "Мать-Земля, Батюшка-Солнце". Ни Матери-Земли, ни Батюшки-Солнца - не существует, это временное разделение одного Существа (Солнца) на два было создано искусственно.
ЗЕМЛЯ И СОЛНЦЕ - ЭТО ОДНО И ТОЖЕ ! ТОЧНО ТАКЖЕ ЦЕЛЬНЫЙ ЧЕЛОВЕК БЫЛ ВРЕМЕННО РАЗДЕЛЁН НА ДВЕ ПОЛОВИНЫ ИСКУССТВЕННО : ЖЕНЩИНУ И МУЖЧИНУ. МУЖЧИНА И ЖЕНЩИНА - ЭТО ОДНО ЦЕЛОЕ, НАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ЭТО HUMAN + !
5. В этом видео вы увидите части нашего огромного Солнца-Земля в виде цепочки в каждой Цветной Вибрации, затем наше Солнце освобождается от своей Сферы, движется вверх по направлению к Центральному Солнцу Вселенной и смешивается с ним. Для того чтобы лучше видеть как новые Игроки из разных Вибраций включаются через Портал в Планетарную Игру на Земле-Солнце, как Выпускники переходят из Планетарной Игры на 5й Уровень и собираются там.
"Эд объясняет, что когда Планета формируется, то сначала из газа, который быстро вращается. Тяжёлые частицы расширяются и двигаются от центра, образуя поверхность Планеты..."
Наше Солнце всегда находило или само создавало Сферу для себя (согласно Закону Намерения) для каждой Вибрации Физического Уровня Сознания: Коричневой, Красной, Оранжевой, Жёлтой, Зелёной и частично Аквамариновой. Так любое Солнце становится Планетой (если захочет, и также создаются Вселенные) и так начинает строить жизнь внутри своей физической Сферы. Создав  подходящую для себя физическую Сферу, Солнце пережидает пока всё утрамбуется, потом небольшая часть этого же Солнца врезается в поверхность Сферы, образуя огромную Дыру для выхода вредных для жизни газов. Затем кусок Солнца проникает внутрь и устраивается в центре Полой Сферы. Ещё Аристотель когда-то написал:
"Земля - Пустая, Воздух - Светится, внутри движутся 2 Планеты: Прозерпина (наверно Коричневой Вибрации) и Плутон (Красной Вибрации). Плутон производит магнитные бури и землетрясения..."
Наше Солнце - это Великое Живое Существо, оно начало свою работу с самого низкого Коричневого Вибрационного Уровня. Когда-то одна из его частей - Плутон - проделал огромное отверстие в Коре и занял своё место в центре внутри Полой Сферы. Так же появились и другие физические Планеты-Солнца (Оранжевой, Жёлтой, Зелёной и частично Аквамариновой Вибраций) нашей Солнечной Системы с частями нашего Солнца внутри каждой. Все эти Планеты находятся внутри Земли, а не снаружи. Им дали разные имена, хотя на самом деле это - всё та же Земля или точнее - наше Коренное Солнце. Эти понятия нельзя отделять друг от друга.
"Бесстрашный капитан по имени Симс был убеждён, что внутри Земли была другая Земля и ещё одна - всего 5 или 8. Земля - Полая, содержит несколько твердых сфер, концентрических, лежащих одна в другой, и имеет на полюсах отверстия..." Симс был необыкновенный человек, призывал возглавить полярную экспедицию в Полую Землю, но не получил поддержки. Симс был прав. Позже его мысли поддержали русские исследователи такие как Труханов, и снарядили полярную экспедицию исследовать Полую Землю на свои деньги в 1913 году.
6. Обратите внимание в видео на Потоки Аквамариновой Энергии текущие во всех Цветных вибрационных слоях 3го Физического Уровня во Вселенной и в нашей Планете-Солнце (Коричневый, Красный, Оранжевый, Жёлтый, Зелёный), чтобы постепенно убрать из этого Уровня всё физическое, в то время как Поток Тёмной Материи перемещает все обломки в виде Лёгкой Невязкой Плазмы бежевого цвета из нашей Старой Вселенной в другие.
7. Самое интересное в видео это когда Цветные Вибрационные Слои исчезают из нашей Вселенной один за другим, пока все они не уйдут и вся Вселенная не станет - Белого цвета. Останутся только Уровни с 5го по 11й. Уйдёт и Аквамариновый Поток т.к. нужда в нём пропадёт. Вы увидите прогрессию изменения Оболочки нашей Планеты-Солнца с физической на нефизическую; увидите как Оболочка, в которой развивалась Жизнь, исчезает совсем когда достигает 5го Уровня, освобождая Солнце. Это напоминает полупрозрачную Оболочку (Placenta) новорождённого, из которой его вытаскивают при рождении и которую обычно выбрасывают. В этой Оболочке зародыш развивался в утробе матери.
Белое Солнце становится всё больше и больше и движется всё дальше и дальше, пока не достигает и не сливается с Центральным Солнцем Вселенной. Вы увидите как все Выпускники собираются на 5ом Уровне Сознания чтобы всем вместе двигаться вверх.
8. В верхнем левом углу находится таблица Цветовых Вибраций для сравнения. Все названия в видео появляются и исчезают, чтобы не отвлекать внимание от происходящего. После просмотра этого видео вам придётся перестраиваться и пересматривать всё, чему вас учили в учебных заведениях, с совсем другого угла.
9. В этом видео (во всех 4х Частях) будет проигрывается музыка со звуками вулканов талантливого индонезийского композитора и исполнителя Sa'aban Yahun, которого мы благодарим. Надеемся что видео вам понравится!


segment of our new video


Упрощённая Диаграмма нашей Старой (Коренной) Вселенной


our Old Universe


Перемены в нашей Старой Вселенной в Конце её Жизни. Смешение Форм Жизни разных Уровней Сознания Старой Вселенной и Смешение Форм Жизни Планет Земля-Солнце Разных Вибраций!


Эта Песня означает очень многое - "Пусть всегда будет Солнце, пусть всегда буду я".
Наша Старая Коренная Вселенная похожа на головку лука: белая сердцевина, окружённая цветными слоями разной Вибрации. Чем дальше цветной слой (как коричневый) от Белого Центрального Солнца, тем ниже, медленнее и длиннее его Вибрация; чем ближе цветной слой (как розовый) к Центральному Солнцу, тем выше, короче и быстрее его Вибрация. Розовый, Тёмно-розовый, Фиолетовый, Синий-Индиго выше Вибрацией и имеют Волнистую Энергию, которая становится сильнее и белее по направлению к Центральному Солнцу. Зелёная, Жёлтая, Оранжевая, Красная, Коричневая: низкие стоячие Вибрации Кипящей-Электризующей Энергии.
Кипящая Энергия - это не что иное как искажённая (на время) Волнистая Энергия или деформированная Энергия Баланса.
Все Цветовые Вибрации принадлежат 1, 2, 3, 4 Уровням Сознания. Вибрация Белого цвета - самая Высокая и имеет Волнистую Энергию. Аквамариновая Вибрация - нейтральна и служила границей между Кипящей-Электризующей и Волнистой Энергиями.
Аквамариновая Вибрация (граница) представляет собой Смешение Зелёной (Кипящей) и Синей (Волнистой) Вибраций. Роберт Монро называл эту границу Аквамариновой Вибрации - Нулевой Точкой, где Влияние друг на друга (или Сила) двух разных Энергий (Кипящей-негативной и Волнистой-позитивной) почти одинаково.
23 марта 1994 года все Чёрные Дыры нашей Старой Вселенной начали испускать Аквамариновую Энергию (и до сих пор), что значило Начало Окончания Жизни нашей Вселенной! Аквамариновая Вибрационная Граница стала ломаться и эта Энергия стала выходить из Чёрных Дыр и втекать в 1, 2, 3, 4 Уровни Сознания, всё стало смешиваться друг с другом. Стена между Кипящей и Волнистой Энергиями развалилась. Появилось больше 2х-сторонних Порталов для Разведчиков разных Вибраций (особенно низкой), проникающих во все цветовые слои Вселенной, смешиваясь с физическими и нефизческими Формами Жизни. Это усилилось в самом конце Вселенской Игры, что мы сейчас и наблюдаем на нашей Планете. Без Кипящей-Электризующей Энергии нельзя создать Белую Энергию Баланса; чтобы получить Белую Энергию Баланса, нужно чтобы Волнистая и Кипящая-Электризованная Энергии смешивались с помощью Эмоций. Лучшим примером Ввода Новых Цивилизаций и Смешивания их разных Вибраций с Волнистой Энергией Земли (прямо или косвенно) являются разного рода катастрофы/войны/революции/создание и развал империй/Диктаторские Режимы/Депрессии как в 30е годы в Америке, в Европе и в России/Спорт игры/Соревнования всякого вида/Олимпиады/Эпидемии/Скростные многорядные дороги в двух направлениях и Деньги. Всё перечисленное не только смешивает разные Энергии, но также создаёт много Душевной и Физической Боли, создаёт много людских Эмоций особенно негативных. Это и нужно для производства Солнечной Энергии Баланса.
Люди с Андромеды сказали Алекс Колие, что мы должны сначала поднять Вибрацию Вселенной, начиная с самых низших слоёв! Маги по линии Дон Хуана (Карлос Кастанеда) были одни из первых, кто  в своих Энергетических телах стал посещать Миры низких вибрационных слоёв (как Жёлтый) через Порталы и поднимать вибрацию этих слоёв. Им было нелегко в этих Кипящих наэлектризованных Мирах, полных Жёлтого тумана. Тем не менее им удалось оставить свою Белую Волнистую Энергию, которая начала ускорять Вибрацию Миров низших слоёв. За Магами последовали космонавты и обычные люди с Земли.
Аквамариновая Энергия начала разваливать 1-2-3 физические Уровни Сознания не только Старой Вселенной, но и нашей Планеты-Солнца, превращая всё физическое в лёгкую невязкую Плазму. Эту Плазму называют Тёмным Веществом, которое постоянно выводится из Старой Вселенной и используется для строения других Вселенных. Физические тела Людей, Инопланетян, Животных, Растений тоже имеют слабую Кипящую-Электризующую Энергию (отсюда и произошли выражения: кровь в жилах кипит; не кипятись; в лучшем случае: не волнуйся).  С уходом  1-2-3 физических Уровней, что и показывается в этом видео, мы потеряем физ. тела (в них мы больше не нуждаемся), но продолжим существовать на 4ом нефиз. Уровне (Синий-Индиго, Фиолетовый, Розовый) до тех пор, пока все Цветные Вибрации не превратятся в Вибрацию Солнечной  Энергии Баланса. Вся Старая Вселенная станет Белой от Солнц. Коричневый Вибрационный Пояс уже ушёл, скоро и Красный Пояс уйдёт, а потом все остальные физические и нефизические Пояса (в видео вы это увидите).
Групповая Душа Инопланетян на Земле тоже имеет Солнечную Волнистую Энергию, много инопланетян разной вибрации исследующих или сражающихся между собой в этом видео (в виде шариков разного цвета). Люди с земли тоже исследуют Планеты разных Вибраций или сражаются с инопланетянами (они представлены как белые шарики). В людях находятся две противоположные Энергии: Волнистая (Души) и Кипящая (Тела). Волнистая Энергия + Кипящая Энергия + Эмоции = Солнечная Энергия Баланса! Главной Целью в Конце Жизни любой Вселенной является Смешение и Превращение Всех имеющихся Энергий в Солнечную Энергию Баланса чтобы увести её в Источник Всей Жизни ! Это получается в результате постоянной борьбы Форм Жизни разной Цветовой Вибрации между собой (Пищевая Цепочка). В видео вы увидите обзоры Солнца и Центрального Солнца Вселенной нефизическими Существами более Высокой Вибрации. Создание Совершенного Человеческого Тела (Human+), включающего, в его Генетический Код, все Цивилизации Старой Вселенной, и есть Причина постоянных Генетических Экспериментов над всеми Формами Жизни. Выпускник Планетарной Игры (Graduate или Human+) также включает в себя и приобретение опыта (даже короткого) в каждой цивилизации Старой Вселенной. С таким Совершенным Телом будет легче производить Энергию Баланса. Эмоции - это Катализатор-Ускоритель Реакции между Волнистой и Кипящей Энергиями! Свойство Эмоций - это царапать, что многим трудно вынести (особенно детям и Мужчинам). Эмоции образуются в результате долгой, мучительной Физической или Эмоциональной Боли. Обычно Старые Женщины имеют наивысший Уровень Эмоций и лучший контроль над ними.


Пирамида Уровней Развития Форм Жизни. Генетические Эксперименты


Нефизические друзья Роберта Монро были высокого Уровня Сознания (Интеллигенты), они сказали ему, что нет того чтобы Мы-Люди не могли создать. Когда мы хотим создать физическое вещество, мы используем наше Намерение/Цель и Мысли, наши Эмоции, нашу Энергию Души в низких Физических Уровнях или Вибраций как Красная, Оранжевая, Жёлтая, Зелёная. Когда мы, не зная этого (это - Цель наших Высших Существ), создаём Солнечную Энергию Баланса, мы используем наши Эмоции и Энергию Души во всех Цветовых Вибрациях: в низких и в высоких. Так мы создаём Миры не только на Земле, но и на других Планетах, когда они созрели для этого. Но во всех случаях мы используем Поле Разума (Энергия Баланса в виде Белых Нитей), посылаемого из Источника Всей Жизни в нашу Старую Вселенную пока она не уйдёт из жизни (потом этот Поток останавливается). Что мы считаем Плотным: физические тела/предметы, горы, леса и т.д. были созданы путём многолетнего наслаивания наших Голограм, наложенных друг на друга, созданных нами из Кипящей-Электризующей Энергии (не из Волнистой Энергии). Эти Голограммы тысячилетиями кипели на одном месте как вулкан (образуя Земную Кору), пока их не разрушали и не смешивали войны, бедствия или атомные взрывы. Таким образом Земная Кора была разбита на куски (континенты и острова) и не один раз, открывая путь на Землю Новым Инопланетным Цивилизациям! Мы живём в море разных Цивилизаций Вселенной, принявших разные обличия или Формы Жизни (и не знаем об этом). Каждый из нас также является Представителем какой-то Цивилизации и тоже не знает об этом. Я советую подумать над всем написанным и постараться по крайней мере использовать Вселенский Закон Невмешательства (Law of Allowence), а ещё лучше морально помогать Смешению Всех Цивилизаций Нашей Вселенной!
После Ухода Цветных Поясов 1, 2, 3го Физических Уровней (вкл. Аквамариновый), физичекая Кора Земли взорвётся, освобождая Душу-Солнце Земли, куски Коры превратятся в Тёмное Вещество  выйдут через Центральную Чёрную Дыру в Молодую Вселенную. С самого начала Кора нашей Планеты была создана из Тёмной Материи Старых Планет-Солнц. Тёмная Материя - это строительный материал (Лёгкая Невязкая Плазма). Кора Земли была образована из остатков физической Коры разрушенных Старых Планет-Солнц (многочисленные слои Голограмм) ушедших из жизни предыдущей Старой Вселенной, которая давно не существует. То же самое происходит и сейчас. Много Планеты-Солнца уже потеряли свои физические тела (Кору) в результате катастроф, освобождая свои Души и превращаясь в Солнца. Те, кто жил на них, были вынуждены передвигаться в своих НЛО, смешиваясь с остальными расами или становится Игроками на таких Планетах-Солнцах как Земля.
В результате взрывов много Тёмного Вещества появилось в нашей Старой Вселенной и в нашем видео показано как это Вещество (Лёгкая Невязкая Плазма) удаляется из Старой Вселенной в другие. Для многих, вновь прибывающих, цивилизаций вода - лучший способ приземления и привыкания к нашей необычной Волнистой Энергии, которой пропитано всё и все на Земле.
Поэтому наводнения (и другие стихийные бедствия) участились. Всё на Земле сияет и колышется.

Существует прекрасная старая книга (напечатана в 1941) и называется она "Плутония". Написана она была одним из русских исследователей Владимиром Обручевым с уцелевших (чудом) дневников участников полярной экспедиции, упрямых учёных-исследователей, к которым я питаю глубокое уважение. Не зная что их ждёт, готовые на смерть, они сумели побывать в недрах Полой Земли,  которая оказалась Доисторическим Миром людей и животных. В 1913 году экспедиция начала свой маршрут с Владивостока через Камчатку и Берингов Пролив, попав в Северный Ледовитый океан. Они искали Землю Нансена и нашли её, там находился вход в Полую Землю-Солнце, Доисторический Мир, который они назвали Плутонией и который они детально изучили. Они там не только убивали динозавров, но и ели их, также как и первобытные люди Полой Земли, которые были скорее похожи на бесхвостых обезьян. Животные там достигали огромных размеров, например муравьи были ростом с небольшого человека и представляли больше опасности, чем динозавры. Полярники прошли через льды и жуткие испытания, исследовали вулканы, много раз были на волоске от смерти, но выдержали и все остались живы чтобы вернуться в Москву. Немногим в истории было разрешено побывать в тех Мирах и рассказать о них. В данном случае это случилось потому, что в том Мире нужно было оставить Человеческую Волнистую Энергию для того, чтобы Новые Цивилизации Кипящей Энергии могли проникнуть в Полую Землю-Солнце. Началом этого проникновения послужило извержение внутренних вулканов и начало Первой Мировой Войны в Европе в 1914. Войны, как и многие другие события всегда указывают на прибытие Новых, и не всегда дружелюбных,  цивилизаций. Как раз в мае 1914 года полярная экспедиция возвращалась из своего трудного путешествия обратно во Владивосток. Недалеко от Камчатки их корабль бандитским образом был захвачен австрийско-венгерским крейсером в русских водах (чувствуется что рептоиды за всем этим стоят). Участники экспедиции чуть не оказались в плену, с трудом освободились, их высадили на берег почти голыми. Весь их корабль был разграблен: исчезли с концами, как говорится, все их собранные коллекции, фотоаппараты, снимки и всё самое ценное, что имелось на корабле и сам корабль, только дневники удалось сохранить. После долгих мытарств по Японии им наконец удалось попасть в Россию. После прибытия в Москву все участники были разбросаны повсюду, кто погиб в войне, кто просто умер. Плутонией они назвали Мир Полой Земли так как Солнцем являлся Плутон в одной из самых низких Красных Вибрациях, окрашивая Солнце и поверхность красными оттенками. Замороженные мамонты и другие ископаемые животные происходят оттуда, вот поэтому в настоящее время по миру всё больше и больше находят тела мёртвых доисторических животных, особенно в воде. На нашем сайте имеется много таких фото и адресов видео, где это можно увидеть. Мы открыли Страницу с полным содержанием книги "Плутония" на русском, советую почитать такой редкий материал :  "Plutonia" (Плутония)





Recommended videos:

Alien Species from A-Z: "The Second Edition"
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YuwDXukkI9U

Alien Races A-Z: Third Edition
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3MGnskLmpA8

The Alien Races Book - Best Shocking Secret Revealed
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yq0leR787t0

SECRET RUSSIAN ALIEN BOOK
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uw_WyuJV_8w

Admiral Richard E Byrd - Hollow Earth Video Interview
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tzWHqooAJtM

THE LOST WORLD OF LAKE VOSTOK - Sep 27, 2012
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4-cRDkuFaQQ

In 1957 the Russians established a remote base in Antarctica -- the Vostok station. It soon became a byword for hardship, dependent on an epic annual 1000km tractor journey from the coast for its supplies. The coldest temperature ever found on Earth (-89°C) was recorded here on the 21st July 1983. It's an unlikely setting for a lake of liquid water. But in the 1970's a British team used airborne radar to see beneath the ice, mapping the mountainous land buried by the Antarctic ice sheet. Flying near the Vostok base their radar trace suddenly went flat. They guessed that the flat trace could only be from water. It was the first evidence that the ice could be hiding a great secret. But 20 years passed before their suspicions were confirmed, when satellites finally revealed that there was an enormous lake under the Vostok base. It is one of the largest lakes in the world -- at 10,000 square km it's about the extent of Lake Ontario, but about twice as deep (500m in places). The theory was that it could only exist because the ice acts like a giant insulating blanket, trapping enough of the earth's heat to melt the very bottom of the ice sheet.

Destination Antarctica (full show) - May 1, 2013 - I traveled with a camera and a tripod more than 10,000 miles to get a glimpse of Antarctica and show the Ohio News Network viewers (1.7 million households) what is really happening at the bottom of the world. I got a very rare glimpse and full access to the US Antarctica program at McMurdo Station, South Pole Station
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7V26wCXi9fc

Jan 31, 2013- McMurdo Cribs: Living Quarters in Antarctica -A little tour of our digs in McMurdo Station, Antarctica.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=n0ZKtCQsenA

Nov 3, 2010 - BLAST! - Life in McMurdo
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qw21MGy56yI

Mar 10, 2009 - McMurdo Fire Department - How do you put out a fire at below freezing temperatures? Join Howie on this look at a firehouse in Antarctica.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=149&v=GmnZv3hwdK0

20 удивительных фактов об Антарктиде - 2 videos - AntArctica2015Station.jpg   AntArcticaPenguin.jpg  AntArctica2015StationMacMerdo.jpg
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2015-08-20-83250
Что интересного может быть на самом удаленном континенте мира? Ничего, кроме того, что Антарктида — самое высокое, сухое, ветреное, пустое и холодное место на Земле? 20 необычных фактов о самом южном континенте Земли помогут вам узнать Антарктиду с новой стороны.
1. Вы не можете работать в Антарктиде, если ваши зубы мудрости и аппендикс не удалены. Хирургических операций на антарктических станциях не проводят, поэтому удалить зубы мудрости и аппендикс надо заранее, даже если вы абсолютно здоровы.
Антарктическая станция.
2. Антарктида — самое сухое место в мире. А самое сухое место в Антарктиде — Сухие долины Мак-Мердо.
3. Антарктида имеет свой собственный домен первого уровня
4. 53 миллиона лет назад в Антарктиде было тепло: температура превышала 20 градусов Цельсия.
5. «Металлика» провела концерт в Антарктиде под названием «Заморозь их всех» (Freeze ‘Em All). Именно «Металлика» стала первой группой, которая выступала на всех континентах, посетив их за один год.
6. В Антарктиде была атомная электростанция, работавшая с 1960 по 1972 годы. Сейчас антарктическая станция Мак-Мердо — самое большое поселение в Антарктиде.
Вид на Мак-Мердо.
7. В Антарктиде есть пожарная команда.
8. Несмотря на экстремальную температуру, в Антарктиде обитают водоросли, лишайники, мхи, а также два вида цветковых растений:
Луговик антарктический.
9. В Антарктиде (технически) есть все часовые пояса планеты.
10. В Антарктиде нет белых медведей.
11. В Антарктиде есть бар. Самый южный бар в мире находится на станции «Академик Вернадский».
Станция «Академик Вернадский».
12. Самая низкая температура на Земле была зарегистрирована на станции «Восток» в Антарктиде 21 июля 1983 года — −89,2 градуса Цельсия. Станция «Восток».
13. Антарктида — пятый по величине континент. Ее площадь — 14 миллионов кв. км.
14. 99 % Антарктиды покрыты льдом.
15. Средняя толщина антарктического льда — 1,6 км. Антарктида содержит почти 70 % запасов пресной воды на Земле.
16. Трансантарктические горы разделяют Антарктиду на Восточную и Западную. Длина горного хребта — 3500 км.
17. О существовании Антарктиды не знали, пока континент не был впервые замечен в 1820 году. До этого люди считали Антарктиду просто группой островов.
18. Норвежский исследователь Руаль Амундсен был первым человеком, который добрался до Южного полюса 19 декабря 1911 года.
Хельмер Хансен и Амундсен.
19. После тайных переговоров 12 стран подписали «Договор об Антарктике» в 1959 году, решив проводить на континенте только мирные исследования. Сегодня договор подписали уже 48 государств.
Эмблема Договора об Антарктике
20. В январе 1979 года в Антарктиде родился первый ребенок — аргентинец Эмиль Марко Палма. Аргентина специально послала на континент беременную женщину, чтобы стать первой страной, гражданин которой родился бы в Антарктиде.


Отрывки из "Плутонии" , вся книга на русском на Странице : "Plutonia"

"Земля Полая, содержит несколько твердых сфер, концентрических, лежащих одна в другой, и имеет на полюсах отверстия...Письмо Симмеса обратило на себя внимание, и в редакции газет и журналов, а также к ученым посыпались вопросы заинтересованных читателей. Предложение отважного капитана, не боявшегося оставить после себя вдову и десять сирот, обсуждалось в печати, но ни ста смелых спутников, ни денег на экспедицию не собрало. Ученые, избранные покровителями, вероятно, сочли бедного Симмеса просто фантазером или сумасшедшим...эта гипотеза воскресила учение Лесли и других, правда без внутренних планет и наружных отверстий, оправдала даже мнение капитана Симмеса о концентрических сферах... И вот целый ряд наблюдений на разных сейсмических станциях Земли и в особенности моей обсерватории на Мунку-Сардыке, где я установил новые, чрезвычайно точные и чувствительные инструменты на дне глубокой шахты, у подножия горного хребта, обнаружили факты, не согласные с гипотезой Цеприца. Оказалось, что земное ядро должно состоять не из сильно уплотненных давлением газов, а, наоборот, из разреженных, немного разве плотнее нашего воздуха, занимающих около трех четвертей диаметра. Иными словами, это газообразное ядро должно иметь примерно восемь тысяч километров в диаметре, так что на долю жидких и твердых слоев остается не более двух тысяч четырехсот километров толщины с каждой стороны. А среди газообразного ядра приходилось допустить существование твердого или почти твердого тела, то есть внутренней планеты диаметром не более пятисот километров.
– Как вы могли определить диаметр этого невидимого тела? – поинтересовался Боровой.
– Очень просто. Это тело попадалось на пути ударов только тех землетрясений, которые случались прямо на антиподах моей обсерватории, именно в Тихом океане к востоку от Новой Зеландии; если же землетрясение случалось в самой Новой Зеландии или в Патагонии, то на прямом пути его распространения твердого тела не оказывалось. Целый ряд наблюдений позволил определить максимальные размеры этого тела, конечно, с приблизительной только точностью.
Итак, эти наблюдения показали, что внутри Земли имеется большое пространство, занятое газами, мало отличающимися по плотности от воздуха, а среди них в центре находится внутренняя планета диаметром не более пятисот километров. В общем, эти наблюдения лучше согласовывались с гипотезами более старых ученых, а не Цеприца. Но в таком случае возникает сомнение в правильности всех подсчетов распределения тяжелых веществ в земной коре. Средняя плотность Земли, как известно, составляет пять и пять десятых, а плотность горных пород в поверхностном слое коры только два и пять десятых – три и пять десятых и даже меньше, если принять во внимание большие массы воды океанов. Поэтому ученые считают, что по направлению к центру должны залегать вещества все более высокой плотности, достигающей в центре ядра десяти-пятнадцати. Но если внутри Земли большое пространство занято газами с плотностью воздуха, среди которых помещается маленькая планета, то приходится принять совершенно иное распределение плотностей в земной коре, окружающей внутреннюю пустоту с газами. Я принимаю, что легкая поверхностная часть коры имеет около семидесяти семи километров толщины, тяжелая внутренняя часть с большим содержанием тяжелых металлов имеет две тысячи триста километров и внутренняя полость газов – четыре тысячи километров (включая и планету); в сумме это равно шести тысячам тремстам семидесяти семи километрам – радиусу Земли. Если принять среднюю плотность тяжелой части коры в семь и восемь десятых то плотность Земли в целом и будет пять и пять десятых соответственно определениям геофизиков…На доске, имевшейся в кают-компании, Труханов выполнил перед слушателями все вычисления объема и веса составных слоев Земли, чтобы доказать распределение масс, предполагаемое им. Приняв в таком измененном виде гипотезу Цеприца, Труханов рассмотрел вопрос, как образовалось отверстие, сообщающее земную поверхность с внутренней полостью, по которому должны были вылететь сгущенные и горячие газы из полости. Отметив частое падение на Землю из космического пространства каких-то небесных тел, называемых метеоритами, Труханов высказал предположение, что когда-то на Землю упал огромный метеорит, который пробил кору толщиной в две тысячи триста семьдесят семь километров и остался внутри, превратившись в планету Плутон. В доказательство возможности такого падения он указал на огромную впадину, называемую метеоритным кратером, известную в штате Аризона Северной Америки и представляющую выбоину, сделанную когда-то огромным метеоритом, судя по найденным во впадине его обломкам. Но этому метеориту не удалось пробить кору, он отскочил и, вероятно, упал в Тихий океан, тогда как Плутон пробил кору и остался внутри.
– Когда же случилась эта катастрофа? – спросили слушатели.
– Не позднее юрского периода, судя по тому, что в самой отдаленной части внутренней полости, достигнутой экспедицией, найдены представители юрской фауны и флоры, которые переселились в эту полость с поверхности Земли после образования отверстия, выхода через него газов и охлаждения внутренней полости. А позже таким же путем постепенно переселялись туда фауна и флора мелового, третичного и четвертичного периодов, последовательно оттесняя вглубь полости пришельцев предшествующего времени. Пока Земля Нансена скована льдами, внутренняя полость гарантирована от проникновения в нее представителей современной флоры и фауны с земной поверхности. И только человек двадцатого века в вашем лице отважно преодолел эту преграду и проник в таинственную страну, где чудесно сохранились благодаря постоянному климату и жизненным условиям представители флоры и фауны, давно исчезнувшие на Земле. Вы открыли этот палеонтологический музей, о существовании которого я не мог и думать.
– Вы прекрасно обрисовали заселение внутренней поверхности, – заметил Каштанов, – хотя палеонтологи, может быть, найдут и спорные пункты в ваших предположениях. Но я хотел еще спросить: куда же исчезли обломки земной коры, получившиеся при образовании пробоины?
– Я полагаю, что более мелкие были выброшены обратно вырвавшимися из недр газами, а более крупные могли частью сплавиться вместе с метеоритом в светящееся тело Плутона, частью могли упасть на внутреннюю поверхность и образовать там холмы и целые плоскогорья. Может быть, те большие холмы из оливиновой породы, богатой железом, которые вы открыли на берегах реки Макшеева в ее среднем течении, представляют такие обломки; может быть, и все плато черной пустыни на южном берегу моря Ящеров состоит из подобного огромного обломка, – все это требует дальнейшего изучения.
– А вулканы, потухшие и действующие, которые мы нашли на этом плато, – как объясните вы их существование?
– Мне кажется, это нетрудно. Согласно гипотезе Цеприца, поверх слоев или поясов, состоявших из газов, располагался слой огненно-жидкий. После образования пробоины, когда газы устремились в нее и давление внутри Земли начало резко ослабевать, часть этого слоя должна была превратиться в пары и газы а остальная представляла кипящее огненное море. Пары и газы постепенно вышли через отверстие, температура и давление во внутренней полости все более понижались, и лавовое море начало покрываться твердой корой. Сначала последняя была тонка и слаба, часто разрывалась под напором газов и паров, продолжавших еще выделяться из расплавленной массы. Но постепенно она окрепла, прорывы случались все реже и реже, – как на поверхности Земли в первый период ее жизни. Вулканы показывают только, что на некоторой глубине под этой корой сохранились еще бассейны с огненно-жидкой лавой, которая и производит извержения, как на земной поверхности, с той разницей, что продукты представляют сплошь очень тяжелые переполненные железом породы, каких мы на Земле не знаем.
– Но ведь если внутренняя поверхность представляла сначала огненное море, как вы сказали, – заметил Макшеев, – то обломки коры, упавшие в него должны были утонуть в нем или расплавиться.
– Это необязательно, – вступился Каштанов. – Мелкие обломки, конечно, расплавились, но крупные благодаря своим размерам – ведь они могли достигать нескольких километров в диаметре – подверглись расплавлению только отчасти. Что же касается их погружения в глубь огненного моря, то это зависело от их удельного веса. Если они были легче расплавленной массы – а это вполне допустимо для части обломков, – то они плавали на ее поверхности, подобно льдинам на море, и, подобно льдинам, по краям и снизу таяли.
– Я не настаиваю на своей мысли, – заявил Труханов, – это было первое предположение, которое пришло мне в голову при вашем вопросе. Все это требует дальнейшего исследования. Мы знаем теперь только узкую полоску Плутонии вдоль реки Макшеева и по берегам моря Ящеров. А что представляет эта огромная страна в обе стороны от реки? Далеко ли уходит черная пустыня на юг? Что лежит за этой пустыней? Нет ли там опять оазисов жизни?..
– Мне кажется, что нет, – заметил Папочкин, – и вот почему. Влагу, без которой жизни быть не может, приносят ветры, дующие с севера, из отверстия. Эта влага – продукт главным образом земной поверхности. Как мы убедились, дожди не распространяются дальше южного берега моря Ящеров. Ветры оставляют всю свою влагу на этом сравнительно небольшом расстоянии от отверстия, а за морем, на всем остальном пространстве внутренней поверхности, залегает безводная и бесплодная пустыня застывшей лавы. Я думаю даже, что первоначально юрская жизнь распространялась на очень близкое расстояние от отверстия, и только постепенно, по мере того как количество влаги в виде речек и озер увеличилось благодаря постоянному притоку ее через отверстие, эта жизнь продвигалась все дальше и дальше на юг. Может быть, и море Ящеров образовалось сравнительно недавно, и потому вода его не так солона, как вода океана.
– Ну, с этим нельзя согласиться, – сказал Каштанов. – Если бы это море образовалось недавно, в нем не могли бы жить представители юрской фауны, подобно рыбам, ихтиозаврам и плезиозаврам. Ни рыбы, ни ихтиозавры не могли переселиться с земной поверхности внутрь посуху, подобно муравьям, или по воздуху, подобно птеродактилям. Из этого следует, что в пробоину все-таки проникло море, хотя бы на непродолжительное время, – и узким проливом.
– Но позвольте! – воскликнул Папочкин. – Как могло море проникнуть вслед за метеоритом внутрь? Оно встретило бы раскаленные газы и огненную поверхность, и все зверы и рыбы дали бы только колоссальную уху, но не потомство.
Я же не говорил, что море проникло вслед за метеоритом. Последний упал, как предполагает Николай Иннокентьевич, в триасовый период, а фауна моря юрская. Следовательно, мы имеем достаточный промежуток времени для выхода газов и охлаждения внутренней полости. Может быть, в другой части Плутонии море Ящеров тянется значительно дальше на север, указывая тот путь, по которому морская фауна переселилась когда-то внутрь.
Все разошлись по каютам. «Полярная звезда» шла уже полным ходом к Камчатке под конвоем крейсера, держа курс на Усть-Камчатск, первое жилое место к северу от Петропавловска на берегу моря. Вскоре приунывшие пассажиры собрались со своими чемоданами и узлами на палубе, где австрийцы подвергли багаж легкому осмотру, но не рылись в нем и не лазали в карманы. Поэтому Макшеев избег опасности лишиться своего золота, которое он пересыпал в широкий кожаный пояс золотоискателей, представляющий длинный и узкий мешочек. Навьючив на себя целый пуд, инженер сделался очень неповоротливым. Но колбаса, начиненная золотом, которой он опоясался, была скрыта под кухлянкой, и австрийцы не обратили внимания на неуклюжесть ее носителя. Коллекция и все экспедиционное имущество, давно упакованные в ящики для перевозки по железной дороге, были сданы австрийцам по описи.
О том, где в действительности побывала экспедиция, им, конечно, не сообщили...Только Иголкин, торопившийся к жене в Петропавловск, взяв с собой Генерала, отправился этим путем и повез письмо губернатору. В письме Труханов сообщал о конфискации «Полярной звезды», о вражеской базе на Командорах и просил помощи..."


'Alone' - Admiral Byrd's Autobiography




Обложка автобиографии Ричарда Бёд. Ниже я поместила орывки из 6ти частей этой книги на английском, в которых Ричард описывает какие трудности ему и всем остальным членам экспедиции пришлось пережить. Интересно он также феноменон Красного, Зелёного и Жёлтого окрашенных Солнц трёх внутренних Земных Сфер: Красной, Зелёной и Жёлтой Вибраций. Белее снега и льда в том месте Антрктиды (Белая Энергия Баланса) он нигде больше не видел. Он видел 4 Солнца нанизанные на Белый Поток Энергии Баланса (как шашлык) - это Солнца Цветных нефизических Сфер Земли как Синей-Индиго, Фиолетовой и Розовой. Как-то ему удалось увидеть Розовую Поверхность Земли, что только можно было увидеть в Антарктике в те годы (1930 год). Всё, что он пережил там, все эти боли и физические и эмоциональные, повысили его вибрацию, его Уровень Сознания. Он (и я тоже) всегда восхищался серьёзными полярными исследователями прошлого, стал многое понимать, исходя из опыта своих тяжёлых испытаний! Я всегда восхищалась серьёзными полярными исследователями и бывает так неприятно читать и на русском и на английском когда о таких людях пишут неприятные вещи и пишут те, кто никогда даже и не подумал бы подвергнуть себя какому-нибудь риску! Скоро я открою отдельную Страницу содержания этой книги на английском.

There is a separate link on our site with the book "Alone" - Richard Byrd's description of his Antarctic expedition in 1933. I admire serious Polar Explorers of all times and of all nationalities, for their stamina, their determination and scientific approach. Below are some important extracts from this book,
Chapter 3&4 :

A terrific story of human endurance. Admiral Richard Byrd is one of the great Polar explorers and is responsible for transforming Antarctic expeditions from the dangerous days of the heroic era to the comfort and safety available in modern Antarctic stations. Byrd organised several American expeditions to Antarctica and built the research station Little America in the Bay of Whales next to the remains of Roald Amundsens base Framheim. He did all this with little government support and paved the way for todays US Antarctic Program. In 1929 he became the first man to fly over the South Pole, and the first to see it since Scott left it in 1911. In 1933, frustrated by the limited meteorological observations he could make at his coastal station he determined to establish a second base far inland. So was Advance Base born. Initially to be manned over winter by three men, time and material constraints resulted in a sole occupant over five months of winter: Admiral Byrd himself. In this book we see the hopeful, but wary Byrd descend slowly into despair, as unknown to him, toxic carbon monoxide gas from his heater begins to slowly kill him. After recovering from a coma, he realises his predicament and tries to nurse his broken, poisoned body back to health.
It is a harrowing tale as a bedridden Byrd tries to feed and water himself. He is forced to make the daily decision as to how long he can run his heater without further worsening his condition. Lying alone in the dark with only his thoughts for company he enters the darkest parts of the human psyche and somehow finds the strength to fight. All through this Byrd maintains his daily observations and his weekly radio contact with his colleagues at Little America. Tapping out morse code messages he hopes will disguise his desperate state and prevent a dangerous mid winter rescue.



ALONE

by Richard E. Byrd, Rear Admiral U.S.N. (Ret.)
originally published 1938 by G.P. Putnam's Sons

"...Now, this book is called Alone; but obviously no one man could have done, what I did, without the loyal and sympathetic support of many other men. That support was one of the fine things of the whole experience
...Almost always there was fog, the pale, mischievous fog of the Bay of Whales, which is like no other fog I have ever seen; almost milky in consistency, but turning the snow and atmosphere into a flat plane, where all proportions are horribly twisted and imparting to a traveler the queer feeling, that he is treading the bottom of a heaving ocean...crew, returning from an experimental flight, got lost in a fog...In the course of the voyage through the Devil's Graveyard, far to the north and east of Little America, we had counted no less, than 8,000 bergs in a single day, some of them twenty miles long... the fog, that sometimes thinned, but never lifted...dark and monstrous shadows sliding through the fog...
And melting snow in the food cookers to make water for radiators, that leaked like sieves. And leaving the flesh of your fingers on metal parts...
Unless you know something about the character of Antarctic snow, the reference to sawing it out in blocks may be puzzling. Except, that it has been fused by cold, rather than heat, the Barrier snow is like a kind of sandstone. It is hard and brittle. You can't make snowballs with it. When you rub it, tiny icelike globules shred off. The color is the whitest white you ever saw (White Energy of Balance, LM)...
But supper, by rights the high spot in an explorer's day, the hot meal, toward which a cold and hungry man looks with mounting anticipation — this meal for a while was a daily fiasco. I have only to close my eyes to witness again the succession of culinary disasters. Consider what my diary designated as The Corn Meal Incident. Into a boiler I dumped what seemed a moderate quantity of meal, added a little water, and stood it on the stove to boil. That simple formula gave birth to a Hydra-headed monster. The stuff began to swell and dry up, swell and dry up, with fearful blowing and sucking noises. All innocently I added water, more water, and still more water. Whereupon the boiler erupted like Vesuvius. All the pots and pans within reach couldn't begin to contain the corn meal, that overflowed. It oozed over the stove. It spattered the ceiling. It covered me from head to foot. If I hadn't acted resolutely, I might have been drowned in corn meal. Seizing the container in my mittened hands, I rushed it to the door and hurled it far into the food tunnel. There it continued to give off deadly golden lava, until the cold finally stilled the crater.
There were other disasters of the same order. There was the Dried Lima Beans Incident of April 10th. (“It's amazing,” the diary reports soberly, “how much water lima beans can absorb, and how long it takes them to cook. At supper time I had enough half-cooked lima beans to feed a ship's company.”) My first jelly dessert bounced like a rubber ball under my knife; the flapjacks had to be scraped from the pan with a chisel.
(“And you, the man, who sat at a thousand banquets,” goes the accusing entry of April 12th.) I dreaded banquets, before I went to Advance Base; and I have come to dread them since. But in April's dark hours
I ransacked my memory, trying to remember what they were like. All that I could recall was filet mignon spiced and darkened to the color of an old cavalry boot; or lobster thermidor; or squabs perched on triangles of toast; or chicken salad heaped on billowing lettuce. All these were far beyond the simple foods in my larder. When I did experiment, the results filled the shack with pungent burning smells and coated the skillets with awful gummy residues. But, in spite of the missing cook book, the record was not one of unmitigated failure. Resolved to make a last stand, I took the surviving chicken, hung it for two days from a nail over the stove to thaw, boiled it all one day, seasoned it with salt and pepper, and served. The soup, which was an unexpected by-product, was delicious; that night I broached a bottle of cider and drank a toast to Escoffier.

April 9 . . . I have just seen (at 9 p.m.) a curious phenomenon. At first it appeared to be a Ball of Fire, which was smaller and redder, than the Sun (the Sun of the Inner Sphere of Red Vibration! LM). It bore about 205 degrees true. I couldn't identify it. Going below, I got the field glasses and kept watching it. It changed from deep red to silver, and every now and then blanked out. It was astonishing how big it looked at first. But after long study I finally figured out, that it consisted of four brilliant Stars, very close together in a vertical line. However, they may not have been four Stars, but one having three images of itself refracted by ice crystals (Vertical Line of our 4 Suns of 4 Internal Colored Spheres of Earth, LM)...The Sun rose this morning at about 9:30 o'clock, but never really left the horizon. Huge and red and solemn, it rolled like a wheel...nothing was left, but a blood-red incandescence...An unearthly twilight spread over the Barrier, lit by flames thrown up as from a vast pit, and the snow flamed with liquid color...The morning may be compounded of an unfathomable, tantalizing fog...And on such a day I have seen the sky shatter like a broken goblet, and dissolve into iridescent tipsy fragments — ice crystals falling across the face of the Sun. And once in the golden downpour a slender column of platinum leaped up from the horizon, clean through the Sun's Core; a second luminous shadow formed horizontally through the Sun, making a perfect cross. Presently two miniature Suns, green and yellow in color, flipped simultaneously to the ends of each arm. These are parhelia, the most dramatic of all refraction phenomena; nothing is lovelier...The Sun had dropped below the horizon, and a blue — of a richness I've never seen anywhere else — flooded in, extinguishing all, but the dying embers (dying fire or what is left of a once intense feeling, LM) of the Sunset. Due west, halfway to the zenith, Venus was an unblinking diamond; and opposite her, in the eastern sky, was a brilliant twinkling star set off exquisitely, as was Venus, in the sea of blue. In the northeast a silver-green-serpentine aurora pulsed and quivered gently. In places the Barrier's whiteness had the appearance of dull platinum. It was all delicate and illusive...
Here were the imponderable processes and Forces of the Cosmos, harmonious and soundless. Harmony, that was it! That was what came out of the Silence — a gentle Rhythm, the strain of a Perfect Chord, the Music of the Spheres, perhaps. It was enough to catch that Rhythm, momentarily to be myself a part of it. In that instant I could feel no doubt of Human's Oneness with the Universe. The conviction came, that the Rhythm was too Orderly, too Harmonious, too perfect to be a product of blind chance — that, therefore, there must be Purpose in the Whole and that Human was a part of that Whole and not an accidental offshoot. It was a Feeling, that transcended reason; that went to the heart of Human's despair and found it groundless. The Universe was a Cosmos, not a Chaos; Human was rightfully a part of that Cosmos, as were the day and night...Chapter 4
At noon the northern horizon continued to erupt with explosive reds and yellows and greens...In addition to the weather observations I now had to make five auroral observations every day...The Aurora occurs in complicated patterns, called rays, arcs, curtains, bands, and coronas...
Remembering the way it all was, I still wonder how my wife ever succeeded in bringing up four such splendid children as ours, wise each in his or her way, and each one as orderly, as Father almost never was. Certainly it has been done in spite of the example set by that haphazard man, who came and went at 9 Brimmer Street. However, I have often explained to the children how lucky they were to have in their mother one parent, who offered a perfect example of what to do, and in their father another, who was an example of what not to do... and yet, at the same time, I, the most unsystematic of mortals, endeavored to be systematic...It was wonderful to be able to dole out time in this way. It brought me an extraordinary sense of command over myself and simultaneously freighted my simplest doings with significance. Without that or an equivalent, the days would have been without purpose; and without purpose they would have ended, as such days always end, in disintegration.
April 21
The morning is the hardest time. It is hard enough anywhere for a man to begin the day's work in darkness; where I am it is doubly difficult. One may be a long time realizing it, but cold and darkness deplete the body gradually; the mind turns sluggish; and the nervous system slows up in its responses. This morning I had to admit to myself, that I was lonely. Try as I may, I find I can't take my loneliness casually; it is too big. But I must not dwell on it. Otherwise I am undone. At home (in US) I usually awaken instantly, in full possession of my faculties. But that's not the case here. It takes me some minutes to collect my wits; I seem to be groping in cold reaches of interstellar space, lost and bewildered. The room is a non-dimensional darkness, without shadow or substance; even after all these days I sometimes ask myself:
Where am I? What am I doing here?
...The slightest move, disturbing the nice temperature balance in the sleeping bag, sends a blast of frosty air down my back or stomach. My skin crawls at the thought of touching foot to the deck. But up I must for the 8 a.m. observation; and so I lie there, mustering resolve for a wrenching heave into the dark. Clear of the bag, I feel around on the shelf at the head of the bunk, until I locate the silk gloves, which I wear to protect my fingers, while handling cold metal. After putting these on, I light the lantern, which hangs from a nail over the bunk. The wick, hard with frost, seldom takes fire easily. The flame catches and goes out, catches and goes out. Then, as it steadies on the wick, the light gradually pushes a liquid arc into the room, bringing my possessions one by one into its wavering yellow orbit. I suppose it is really a gloomy light. Things on the opposite wall are scarcely touched by it. But to me, that feeble burning, is a daily miracle. With light the day begins, the mind escapes from darkness, and numbness leaves the body. I sleep in my underclothes, with my pants and shirt and socks heaped upon the table. Needless to say, I dress faster than a fireman... It was still very dark, but an impalpable fog lay close to the surface, giving the day a gray look...The days I don't read I feel like a barbarian brooding over a chunk of meat. A moment ago there came a tremendous boom, as if tons of dynamite had exploded in the Barrier...This is what is known as a Barrier quake...Because of the fog and the threat of blizzard in the air, I decided not to go very far...The last half of the walk is the best part of the day, the time, when I am most nearly at peace with myself and circumstances. Thoughts of life and the nature of things flow smoothly and so naturally as to create an illusion, that one is swimming harmoniously in the broad current of the Cosmos...The negative aspects — the betrayals, the disappointments, and the bitternesses — I shut out entirely. Only by ruthlessly exorcising the disillusioning and unpleasant thoughts can I maintain any feeling of real detachment, any sense of being wholly apart from selfish concerns... But I find, that I crave light, as a thirsting man craves water; and just the fact of having this lantern alive in the night hours makes an immense difference. I feel like a rich man...My whole life here in a sense is an experiment in harmony, and I let the bodily processes achieve a natural equilibrium...a cottony gray fog deadened the twilight hours, and a somber red tinge smeared the northern horizon at noon...So bright was the moonlight at the beginning of my walk, that I could read the second hand on the wrist watch. The whole sky was bathed with light, and the Barrier seemed to exhale a soft, internal luminescence of its own. At first there was not a cloud anywhere, and the stars glittered with an unnatural brightness. Overhead, in the shape of a great ellipse, was a brilliant Aurora...Waves of light pulsed rapidly through the structure. Beyond the south end of the ellipse, scintillating in the sky, was what appeared to be a drapery hanging over the South Pole. It hung in folds, like a gigantic curtain, and was composed of brilliant light rays. The snow was different shades of silver gray (not white as one would suppose) with the brightest gray making a pathway to the moon...When Antarctica displays her beauty, she seems to give pause to the winds, which at such times are always still. Overhead the Aurora began to change its shape and become a great, lustrous serpent moving slowly across the zenith. The small patch in the eastern sky now expanded and grew brighter; and almost at the same instant the folds in the curtain over the pole began to undulate, as if stirred by a celestial presence. Star after Star disappeared as the Serpentine folds covered them. It was like witnessing a tragedy on a cosmic scale; the Serpent, representing the forces of evil, was annihilating beauty. Suddenly the Serpent disappeared. Where it had been only a moment before, the sky was once more clear; the Stars showed, as if they had never been dimmed. When I looked for the luminous patch in the eastern sky, it, too, was gone; and the curtain was lifting over the pole, as if parted by the wind, which at that instant came throbbing over the Barrier. I was left with the tingling feeling, that I had witnessed a scene, denied to all other mortal men...

Yet, this harmony was mostly of the mind: a temporary peace won by a physically occupied body. But the glory of the celestial is one, and the glory of the terrestrial is another. Even in my most exalted (elevated, noble) moods I never quite lost the feeling of being poised (assured, held balanced) over an undermined footing, like a man negotiating a precipice (extremely steep cliff), who pauses to admire the sunset, but takes care, where he places his feet...Fright and pain are the most transitory of emotions. And, since they are so easily forgotten, I never ceased drilling into the men, who served under me the absolute authority of safety rules. “Not just for today or tomorrow; but so long as you are on this expedition,” is the way I'd put it to a new man. Relax once in the polar regions, and the artificial wall of security, which you have so painstakingly erected about yourself, may give way without warning. That appreciation of discipline I carried with me to Advance Base; and, though at times I had to drive myself to respect it, the necessity was always there. As I saw it, three risks stood out before all the others. One was fire. Another was getting lost on the Barrier. And the third was being incapacitated, either by injury or illness. Of the three, the last was the most difficult to anticipate and prepare for. Yet, the possibilities were authentic enough, and I had carefully taken them into account. My health was sound. A thoroughgoing medical examination, before I left New Zealand, had confirmed that fact. From disease I had little to fear. Antarctica is a paradise in that respect. It is the germless continent. Vast oceans, frozen most of the time, seal it from the germ-laden civilization to the north...
And on occasion the path led back down the eons, while I watched the slow pulsations of the Ice Age, which today grips the once semi-tropical Antarctic Continent even as it once gripped North America. By speeding up the centuries I could visualize a tidal wave of ice flooding down from the Arctic and crushing everything before it. I could see it surging forward until the advancing edge made a zigzag line from what is now New York to what is now California, blotting out everything but the peaks of the mountains, and forming towering barriers on the margins of the sea. I could see bottomless chasms and enormous ridges thrown up by pressure, and blocks of ice strewn about in endless confusion. And for centuries I could see nothing, but the obliterating ice, hear nothing, but the wind, and feel nothing, but the rigidity of death. But finally, I could see the ice imperceptibly sinking; and the ocean rising as the ice melted; and the land resurrecting under the Sun, with the mountains scoured and planed, and the rivers pushed into new courses. And along the edges of the land in Europe and Asia I could see men with primitive tools laying the foundations of history. Thus it was in the Northern Hemisphere, and so it will some day be in the Antarctic, where the ice still holds mastery over the land. Except, I used to tell myself, that long before the ice rolls back, excursion boats will be steaming down from Sandy Hook and every moraine will have its tourist hotel. All this was fun. But, if I wasn't careful, it could also be dangerous, as an experience, which I went through just about this time, will testify. Being in a particularly fine mood, I had decided to take a longer walk, than usual. It was drifting a bit, and the Barrier was pretty dark, but that didn't bother me. After parading up and down for half an hour, I turned around to go back. The line of bamboo sticks was nowhere in sight! In my abstraction, I had walked completely past and beyond it; and now, wondering, which way to turn, I was overwhelmed by the realization, that I had no idea of how far I had walked, nor the direction, in which I was heading. On the chance, that my footsteps would show, I scanned the Barrier with a flashlight; but my boots had left no marks on the hard sastrugi (russian - long wavelike ridge of snow). It was scary. The first impulse was to run. I quelled that, and soberly took stock of my predicament. Since it was the one fact I had to work with, I again pulled the flashlight up out of my pants, where I carried it to keep it from freezing, and scratched into the snow with the butt end an arrow in the direction whence I had come. I remembered also, from having glanced at the wind vane as I started, that the wind was in the south. It was then on my left cheek and was still on the same cheek, but that meant little. For the wind might have changed, and subconsciously I might have veered with it. I was lost, and I was sick inside. In order to keep from wandering still farther from the shack, I made a reference point. I broke off pieces of sastrugi with my heel and heaped them into a little beacon about eighteen inches high at the butt end of the arrow. This took quite a little while. Straightening up and consulting the sky, I discovered two stars were in line with the direction, in which I had been walking when I stopped. This was a lucky break, as the sky had been overcast, until now and had only cleared in a couple of places. In the navigator's phrase, the stars give me an range and the beacon a departure. So, taking careful steps and with my eyes on the stars, I started forward; after 100 paces I stopped. I swung the flashlight all around and could see nothing but blank Barrier. Not daring to go farther for fear of losing the snow beacon, I started back, glancing over my shoulder at the two stars to hold my line. At the end of a hundred steps I failed to fetch the beacon. For an instant I was on the edge of panic. Then the flashlight beam picked it up about twenty feet or so on my left hand. That miserable pile of snow was nothing to rejoice over, but at least it kept me from feeling, that I was stabbing blindfolded. On the next sortie, I swung the course 30 degrees to the left. And as before, after a hundred steps, I saw nothing. You're lost now, I told myself. I was appalled. I realized, that I should have to lengthen my radius from the beacon; and in lengthening it I might never be able to find the way back to the one certainty. However, there was no alternative, unless I preferred to freeze to death, and I could do that just as thoroughly 1,000 yards from the hut, as 500. So now I decided to take 30 steps more in the same direction, after scraping a little heap of snow together to mark the 100-pace point. On the 29th step, I picked up the first of the bamboo sticks, not more, than 30 feet away. No shipwrecked mariner, sighting a distant sail, could have been more overjoyed...
Chapter 5
I was learning what the philosophers have long been harping on — that a man can live profoundly without masses of things. For all my realism and skepticism there came over me, too powerfully to be denied, that exalted sense of identification — of oneness — with the outer World, which is partly mystical, but also certainty. I came to understand what Thoreau meant when he said, “My body is all sentient.” There were moments when I felt more alive, than at any other time in my life. Freed from materialistic distractions, my senses sharpened in new directions, and the random or commonplace affairs of the sky and the Earth and the Spirit, which ordinarily I would have ignored, if I had noticed them at all, became exciting and portentous...
Later, during my walk, I saw a moon Halo, the first since I've been here (that wasn't the moon; it was one of Inner Suns - Green). I had remarked inwardly, that the moon seemed almost unnaturally bright, but thought no more about it, until something — perhaps a subtle change in the quality of moonlight — fetched my attention back to the sky. When I glanced up, a haze was spreading over the moon's face; and, as I watched, a system of luminous circles formed themselves gracefully around it. Almost instantly the moon was wholly surrounded by concentric bands of color, and the effect was as if a rainbow had been looped around a huge silver coin. Apple-green was the color of the wide outer band, whose diameter, I estimated, was nineteen times that of the moon itself. The effect lasted only five minutes or so. Then the colors drained from the moon, as they do from a rainbow; and almost simultaneously a dozen massive streamers of crimson-stained aurora, laced together with blackish stripes, seemed to leap straight out from the moon's brow (border). Then they, too, vanished.
May 3. . . I again saw in the southeast, touching the horizon, a Star so bright, as to be startling. The first time I saw it several weeks ago I yielded for an instant to the fantastic notion, that somebody was trying to signal me; that thought came to me again this afternoon. It's a queer sort of Star, which appears and disappears irregularly, like the winking of a light...
May 5
This has been a beautiful day. Although the sky was almost cloudless, an impalpable haze hung in the air, doubtless from falling crystals. In midafternoon it disappeared, and the Barrier to the north flooded with a rare pink light, pastel in its delicacy.The horizon line was a long slash of crimson, brighter than blood; and over this welled a straw-yellow ocean, whose shores were the boundless blue of the night. I watched the sky a long time, concluding, that such beauty was reserved for distant, dangerous places, and that nature has good reason for exacting her own special sacrifices from those determined to witness them. An intimation of my isolation seeped into my mood; this cold, but lively afterglow was my compensation for the loss of the Sun, whose warmth and light were enriching the World beyond the horizon...
Then I had a horrible feeling of falling, and at the same time of being hurled sideways. Afterwards I could not remember hearing any sound. When my wits returned, I was sprawled out full length on the snow with one leg dangling over the side of an open crevasse. I lay still, not daring to make a move lest I shake down the ledge supporting me. Then, an inch at a time, I crawled away. When I had gone about two yards, I came slowly to my feet, shivering from the closeness of the escape. I had broken through the snow bridging of a blind crevasse — a roofed-over one, which you cannot tell from the solid surface. I edged back with my flashlight and took a look. The hole I had made was barely two feet across; and I could see., that the roof was twelve inches or so thick. Stretched out on my belly, I pounded the roof in with the marker stick for a distance of several feet; then I turned the flashlight into the crevasse. I could see no bottom. My guess was, that the crevasse was at least several hundred feet deep. At the surface it was not more, than three feet across; but a little way down it bellied out, making a vast cave. The walls changed from blue to an emerald green, the color of sea ice. The usual crystals, created by the condensed exhalations from the warmer depths, did not festoon the walls; their absence indicated, that the crevasse was of fairly recent origin. I was glad to leave that place. Good luck had carried me across the crevasse at right angles to its length. Had I been walking in any other direction, I might well have gone to the bottom. Odd, I thought, that it hadn't let me through, when I had hit the one weak spot. So as not to make a similar mistake, I fetched back two bamboo poles and planted them in front of the hole...Suppose the disorder is organic and lies in a deep-seated complaint. Suppose it comes from bad food, from germs, or from the gases given off by the stove. How much resistance, then, can my mind impart to the body if the mind is properly directed?
Possibly something is harming me physically, and I am making things worse by some negative subconscious emotion. Then my mind and body are both sick, and I have a vicious circle to break. Do the mind and the body exist separately, along parallel lines? Is the physical part mostly mental, or the mind mostly physical? Indeed, how much division is there between mind and body? The body can take charge of the mind, but isn't it natural and best for the mind to take charge of the body? The brain is part of the body, but I am not conscious of my brain. The mind seems to be the real “I.” . . .Which is it, then? My mind or my body or both? It is of vital importance, that I find the truth...
May 11
At midnight I went topside to have a last look at the Aurora, but found only a spotty glow on the horizon extending from north to northeast. I had been playing the victrola while I waited for the midnight hour. I was using my homemade repeater and was playing one of the records of Beethoven's Fifth Symphony. The night was calm and clear. I left the door to my shack open and also my trapdoor. I stood there in the darkness to look around at some of my favorite constellations, which were as bright, as I had ever seen them. Presently I began to have the illusion, that what I was seeing was also what I was hearing, so perfectly did the music seem to blend with what was happening in the sky. As the notes swelled, the dull Aurora on the horizon pulsed and quickened and draped itself into arches and fanning beams, which reached across the sky, until at my zenith the display attained its crescendo. The music and the night became one; and I told myself, that all beauty was akin and sprang from the same substance. I recalled a gallant, unselfish act, that was of the same essence as the music and the Aurora...
My table manners are atrocious — in this respect I've slipped back hundreds of years; in fact, I have no manners whatsoever. If I feel like it, I eat with my fingers, or out of a can, or standing up — in other words, whichever is easiest. What's left over, I just heave into the slop pail, close to my feet. Come to think of it, no reason why I shouldn't. It's rather a convenient way to eat; I seem to remember reading in Epicurus, that a man living alone lives the life of a wolf. A life alone makes the need for external demonstration almost disappear. Now I seldom cuss (curse), although at first I was quick to open fire at everything, that tried my patience...
Perhaps this period was just the repeated pattern of my youth. I sometimes think so. When I was growing up, I used to steal out of the house at night, and go walking in Glass's woods, which were a little way up the road from our place. In the heavy shadows of the Shenandoah Valley hills, the darkness was a little terrifying, as it always is to small boys; but, when I would pause and look up into the sky, a feeling, that was midway between peace and exhilaration would seize me. I never quite succeeded, as a boy, in analyzing that feeling, any more, than I did when it used to come to me as a naval officer, in the night watches at sea, and later when, as an explorer, I first looked upon mountains and lands, which no one before me had ever seen. No doubt it was partly animal: the sheer expanding discovery of being alive, of growing, of no longer being afraid. But there was more to it, than just that. There was the sense of identification with vast movements: the premonition of destiny, that is implicit in every Human; and the sense of waiting for the momentary revelation."


"Land of no Horizon" book about Hollow Earth, written by Michael Kevin Taylor (father and son) in Australia

Rev. Douglas James Cottrell PhD: The hollow Earth and Admiral Richard E. Byrd (video)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1_6398OFmBQ

Admiral Richard E Byrd - Hollow Earth Video Interview
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tzWHqooAJtM

The Earth But Not As We Know It (video)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gjOar3QGzNM


Hollow Earth: Agartha - complete!


лhttp://humansarefree.com/2011/05/hollow-earth-agartha-complete.html

I.     Agartha - Inside the Hollow Earth;
II.    USA Admiral Richard E. Byrd's Diary;
III.   William Reed: 'Phantom of the Poles';
IV.  US Air Force Colonel: Billie Faye Woodard's Testimony;
V.   Agartha: by the Members of the Galactic Federation Council of Sirius;
VI.  Willis Emerson: 'A Voyage to the Inner World';
VII.  Olaf Jensen's Amazing Story;
VIII. 'Messages from the Hollow Earth' by Dianne Robbins;
IX.   TELOS - A Subterranean City beneath Mt. Shasta” - Dianne Robbins;
X.    Voyage to Hollow Earth: CANCELLED - Organizer: Dead!


I. Agartha In The Hollow Earth!



by Dr. Joshua David Stone
The biggest cover-up of all time is the fact, that there is a civilization of people living in the center of Earth, whose civilization's name is known as "Agartha" (variations: 'Agharta' & 'Aghartha'). This may be hard for some of you to believe. I know it was for me at first, however, I now have an absolute knowingness of the truth of this. To begin with, the Buddhists, in their theology fervently believe in its existence. They believe it to be a race of super men and women (I that they are not as highly spiritual as some of us, besides the word Masters to do with lower Level of Consciousness! LM), who occasionally come to the surface to oversee the development of the human race. They also believe, that this Subterranean World has millions of inhabitants and many cities, and their capital is Shamballa. The Master of this World was believed to have given orders to the Dalai Lama of Tibet, who was his terrestrial representative. His messages were being transmitted through certain secret tunnels connecting this Inner World with Tibet.
(One of many Worlds in Inner Earths-sSuns of different vibrations, LM).
The famous Russian channel, Nicholas Roerich, who was a channel for the Ascended Master, El Morya, claimed that Lhasa, the capital of Tibet, was connected by a tunnel with the Inner Earth, Shamballa. The entrance of this tunnel was guarded by lamas, who were sworn to secrecy. A similar tunnel was believed to connect the secret chambers at the base of the great pyramid at Giza, and Agartha. The Indian epic, the Ramayana and the Bhagavad Gita are the two most famous texts of India. The Ramayana tells the story of the great Avatar Rama. The Bhagavad Gita tells the story of Krishna. The Ramayana describes Rama as an "emissary from Agartha", who arrived on an air vehicle. This is quite extraordinary in that both the Buddhist and Hindu religions separately refer to Agartha. The first public scientific evidence occurred in 1947 when Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd of the United States Navy flew directly to the North Pole and instead of going over the pole, actually entered the Inner Earth. In his diary with other witnesses, he tells of entering the hollow interior of the Earth, and traveling 1700 miles over mountains, lakes, rivers, green vegetation and animal life. He tells of seeing monstrous animals resembling the mammoth of antiquity,
moving through the underbrush. He eventually found cities and a thriving civilization. His plane was finally greeted by flying machines, the type he had never seen before. They escorted him to a safe landing place and he was graciously greeted by emissaries from Agartha. After resting, he and his crew were taken to meet the Ruler of Agartha. They told him, that he had been allowed to enter Agartha, because of his high moral and ethical character (and because Admiral Byrd proved it by surviving 6 months of winter in Antarctica alone! LM). They went on to say, that ever since the United States had dropped atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, they had been very concerned for their own safety and survival. They had decided that it was time to make greater contact with the outside world to make sure we didn't destroy this Planet and their civilization with it. They had been allowed in for this express purpose, as a way of making contact with someone they trusted. To make a long story short, Admiral Byrd and his crew, upon their visit, were guided by their hosts in their plane back to the outer World, and their lives were changed forever. In January, 1956, Admiral Byrd led another expedition to the Antarctic and/or the South Pole. In this expedition he and his crew penetrated for 2,300 miles into the center of Earth again. Admiral Byrd states, that the North and South Pole are actually two of many openings to the center of Earth. I can't, but help to think about Jules Vernes famous science fiction book, "Journey to the Center of the Earth", which many of you may have read or watched the movie version. Admiral Byrd also states Inner Earth has an inner Sun. Admiral Byrd said, that the poles of the Earth are convex, rather than concave (means they are outside of the Globe, perhaps the 4th Level of Consciousness, but we are still inside! LM).
Ships and planes can actually fly or drive right in. The American press announced Admiral Byrd's discovery, however it was immediately suppressed by our good friends, the Secret Government. Ray Palmer, the editor of "Flying Saucer Magazine" did a detailed story on Admiral Byrd's discoveries. The United States Government either bought, stole or destroyed almost every copy and then destroyed the plates at the printing press. I have been told, that the exact same thing happened in respect to an article done on Admiral Byrd's discovery by the "National Geographic". The magazine was released and the U.S. Government gobbled up almost every issue. If the story wasn't true how come the Government was so uptight?
Another interesting fact, is that the United States Government does not let planes fly over the poles. All flights are directed to go around the Poles, and any airline pilot flying in these areas will tell you this. Another interesting phenomena is the fact, that the icebergs are composed of fresh water and not salt water, that drift from the Poles. An interesting question is why it is warmer nearer the Poles, than it is 600 to 1000 miles away from it.
In Dr. Raymond Bernard's book called "The Hollow Earth" he tells of a man, who confirmed Admiral Byrd's story. Dr. Nephi Cotton of Los Angeles reported, that one of his patients, a man of Nordic descent, told him the following story:
"I lived near the Arctic Circle in Norway. One summer my friend and I made up our minds to take a boat trip together and go as far, as we could into the North country. So we put a months worth of food provisions in a small fishing boat and set to sea. At the end of one month we had traveled far into the north, beyond the Pole and into a strange new country. We were much astonished at the weather there. Warm, and at times at night it was almost too warm to sleep. Then we saw something so strange, that we were both astonished. Ahead of the warm open sea we were on what looked like a great mountain. Into that mountain at a certain point, that ocean seemed to be emptying. Mystified, we continued in that direction and found ourselves sailing into a vast canyon leading into the interior of the Earth. We kept sailing and then we saw what surprised us… a Sun shining inside the Earth. The ocean, that had carried us into the hollow interior of the Earth, gradually became a river. This river led, as we came to realize later, all through the inner surface of the World from one end to the other. It can take you, if you follow it long enough, from the North Pole clear through to the South Pole. We saw, that the inner surface of the Earth was divided, as the other one is, into both land and water. There is plenty of sunshine and both animal and vegetable life abounds there. We sailed further and further into this fantastic country, fantastic, because everything was huge in size, as compared with things on the outside. Plants are big, trees gigantic and finally we came to giants. They were dwelling in homes and towns, just as we do on the Earth surface, and they used a type of electrical conveyance like a mono-rail car, to transport people. It ran along the river's edge from town to town. Several of the Inner Earth inhabitants, huge giants, detected our boat on the river, and were quite amazed. They were, however, quite friendly. We were invited to dine with them in their homes, and so my companion and I separated, he was going with one giant to that giant's home and I was going with another giant to his home. My gigantic friend brought me home to his family and I was completely dismayed to see the huge size of all the objects in his home. The dinner table was colossal. A plate was put before me and filled with a portion of food so big, it would have fed me abundantly an entire week. The Giant offered me a cluster of grapes and each grape was as big, as one of our peaches.
I tasted one and found it far sweeter, than any I had ever tasted outside. In the interior of the Earth all the fruits and vegetables taste far better and more flavorsome, than those we have on the outer surface of the Earth. We stayed with the Giants for one year, enjoying their companionship as much, as they enjoyed knowing us. We observed many strange and unusual things during our visit with these remarkable people, and were continually amazed at their scientific progress and inventions. All of this time they were never unfriendly to us, and we were allowed to return to our own home in the same manner, in which we came… in fact, they courteously offered their protection, if we should need it for the return voyage."
Another different account about a visit to the Hollow Earth was cited by another Norwegian by the name of Olaf Jansen, and was recorded in a book called "The Smoky God", written by Willis George Emerson. The term "Smoky God" refers to the Central Sun in the hollow interior of the Earth, which is smaller and less brilliant, than our outer Sun, of course, and hence appears as smoky. The book relates the experiences of a Noarse father and his son, who in their small fishing boat attempted to find the "land beyond the North wind", which they had heard about. A windstorm apparently carried them through the Polar Opening into the hollow interior of the Earth. The book was published in 1908. It tells of the son's experiences. They apparently spent two years there and upon returning through the South Polar Opening, the father lost his life when an iceberg broke in two and destroyed the boat. The son was rescued and told his incredible story. He was placed in a prison for the insane, because no one would believe him. After being released and spending 26 years as a fisherman, he moved to the United States. In his nineties he befriended Willis George Emerson and told him his story. On his death bed he also gave him maps, that he had made of the interior of the Earth and the manuscript of his experiences. The book, "The Smoky God", tells of his experiences.
(The full text of "The Smoky God" is available near the end of this document, preceding the more recent Inner Earth communications made through Dianne Robbins in her two Inner Earth books.)
In the book he said, that the people live from 400 to 800 years and are highly advanced in science. They can transmit their thoughts from one to another by certain types of radiations and have sources of power greater, than our electricity. They are the creators of flying saucers, which are operated by this superior power, drawn from the electromagnetism of the atmosphere. They are twelve or more feet in stature.
(What about level of Consciousness, not Science? Their consciousness is lower, than ours, because their Sun is not as bright, as ours! If they higher than us, they think, than they should be above us, not below,  under our feet! Their city looks more like fabled Rainbow City. LM).
One other interesting side note is that, in 1942, Nazi Germany sent out an expedition composed of some of its leading scientists in an attempt to find an entrance to the Hollow Earth. Göring, Himmler, and Hitler enthusiastically endorsed the project. The Fuehrer was convinced, that the Earth was concave and that man lived on the inside of the globe. In "The Hollow Earth", Raymond Bernard also tells of a photograph published in 1960 in the Toronto, Canada Globe and Mail, which shows a beautiful valley with lush, green hills. An aviator claimed, that the picture had been taken from his airplane as he flew "beyond the North Pole".
The Channelings of Djwhal Khul on the Hollow Earth
Whenever I do research on a given subject I like to get Djwhal Khul's feedback on the information I have come up with. Upon sharing with Him, what I have shared with you in this book, he had a number of interesting things to add. First off, he confirmed, that Admiral Byrd did, indeed, travel to the Inner Earth as he said, he did. He said, that there is a Sun in the Inner Earth, but it is different, than our outer Sun.
He said, that the Aurora Borealis was not caused by the Sun of the Inner Earth, but from a different light source.
(That light source is different Color vibrations of Spheres or Crusts and Civilizations living in those Spheres of  Earths-Suns. The lower physical Spheres are inside each other; the higher Level is non-physical and is above us! LM).
He said, that the Opening at the Poles were very wide and ships and planes can fly into it, however it is naturally protected by some kind of energy field. People can find it if they really search for it, however, it is slightly camouflaged by this energy field. He confirmed, that there were entrances to the Inner Earth in Egypt, Tibet and the Yukatan, and also added, that there were other entrances in the Bermuda Triangle, Soviet Union, and Africa. He said, that there were different races in the Inner Earth just like on the surface of the Earth, and some of them are quite tall. He also confirmed, that the United States Government and other countries are aware of the Inner Earth and are covering up the fact as they are with UFO's and extraterrestrials. Dr. Joshua David Stone




II. Admiral Richard E. Byrd's Diary (February - March 1947)



(I find a lot of resemblance between Robert Monroe and Admiral Byrd. Both were good, experienced pilots, both were writing books, both were born Scorpios: Bob, born 30 October, Richard, born 25 October;
both were true warriors; Bob Monroe organised Monroe Institute with his own money; Admiral Byrd organised his expeditions with his own money; both spent considerable part of their life in Virginia. LM)


The exploration flight over the North Pole. The Inner Earth - My Secret Diary

I must write this diary in secrecy and obscurity. It concerns my Arctic flight of the nineteenth day of February in the year of Nineteen and Forty-Seven. There comes a time when the rationality of men must fade into insignificance and one must accept the inevitability of the Truth! I am not at liberty to disclose the following documentation at this writing ...perhaps it shall never see the light of public scrutiny, but I must do my duty and record here for all to read one day. In a world of greed and exploitation of certain of mankind can no longer suppress, that which is truth.
Flight Log: Base Camp Arctic, 2/19/1947
06.00 Hours - All preparations are complete for our flight northward and we are airborne with full fuel tanks at 0610 Hours.
06.20 Hours - fuel mixture on starboard engine seems too rich, adjustment made and Pratt Whittneys are running smoothly.
07.30 Hours - Radio Check with base camp. All is well and radio reception is normal.
07.40 Hours - Note slight oil leak in starboard engine, oil pressure indicator seems normal, however.
08.00 Hours - Slight turbulence noted from easterly direction at altitude of 2321 feet, correction to 1700 feet, no further turbulence, but tail wind increases, slight adjustment in throttle controls, aircraft performing very well now.
08.15 Hours- Radio Check with base camp, situation normal.
08.30 Hours - Turbulence encountered again, increase altitude to 2900 feet, smooth flight conditions again.
09.10 Hours - Vast Ice and snow below, note coloration of yellowish nature, and disperse in a linear pattern. Altering course for a better examination of this color pattern below, note reddish or purple color also. Circle this area two full turns and return to assigned compass heading. Position check made again to Base Camp, and relay information concerning colorations in the Ice and snow below.
09.10 Hours - Both Magnetic and Gyro compasses beginning to gyrate and wobble, we are unable to hold our heading by instrumentation. Take bearing with Sun compass, yet all seems well. The controls are seemingly slow to respond and have sluggish quality, but there is no indication of Icing!
09.15 Hours - In the distance is what appears to be mountains.
0949 Hours - 29 minutes elapsed flight time from the first sighting of the mountains, it is no illusion. They are mountains and consisting of a small range, that I have never seen before!
09.55 Hours - Altitude change to 2950 feet, encountering strong turbulence again.
10.00 Hours - We are crossing over the small mountain range and still proceeding northward as best, as can be ascertained. Beyond the mountain range is what appears to be a valley with a small river or stream running through the center portion. There should be no green valley below! Something is definitely wrong and abnormal here! We should be over Ice and Snow! To the portside are great forests growing on the mountain slopes. Our navigation Instruments are still spinning, the gyroscope is oscillating back and forth!
10.05 Hours - I alter altitude to 1400 feet and execute a sharp left turn to better examine the valley below. It is green with either moss or a type of tight-knit grass. The Light here seems different. I cannot see the Sun anymore. We make another left turn and we spot what seems to be a large animal of some kind below us. It appears to be an elephant! NO!!! It looks more like a mammoth! This is incredible! Yet, there it is! Decrease altitude to 1000 feet and take binoculars to better examine the animal. It is confirmed - it is definitely a mammoth-like animal! Report this to Base Camp.
10.30 Hours - Encountering more rolling green hills now. The external temperature indicator reads 74 degrees Fahrenheit! Continuing on our heading now. Navigation instruments seem normal now. I am puzzled over their actions. Attempt to contact Base Camp. Radio is not functioning!
11.30 Hours - Countryside below is more level and normal (if I may use that word). Ahead we spot what seems to be a city!!!! This is impossible! Aircraft seems light and oddly buoyant. The controls refuse to respond!! My GOD!!! Off our port and starboard wings are a strange type of aircraft. They are closing rapidly alongside! They are disc-shaped and have a radiant quality to them. They are close enough now to see the markings on them. It is a type of Swastika!!! This is fantastic. Where are we! What has happened. I tug at the controls again. They will not respond!!!! We are caught in an invisible vice grip of some type!
11.35 Hours - Our radio crackles and a voice comes through in English with what perhaps is a slight Nordic or Germanic accent! The message is: 'Welcome, Admiral, to our Domain. We shall land you in exactly seven minutes! Relax, Admiral, you are in good hands.' I note the engines of our plane have stopped running! The aircraft is under some strange control and is now turning itself. The controls are useless.
11.40 Hours - Another radio message received. We begin the landing process now, and in moments the plane shudders slightly, and begins a descent as though caught in some great unseen elevator!
The downward motion is negligible, and we touch down with only a slight jolt!
11.45 Hours - I am making a hasty last entry in the Flight Log. Several men are approaching on foot toward our aircraft. They are tall with blond hair. In the distance is a large shimmering city pulsating with rainbow hues of color. I do not know what is going to happen now, but I see no signs of weapons on those approaching. I hear now a voice ordering me by name to open the cargo door. I comply. End Log.



From this point I write all the following events here from memory. It defies the imagination and would seem all but madness if it had not happened. The radioman and I are taken from the aircraft and we are received in a most cordial manner. We were then boarded on a small platform-like conveyance with no wheels! It moves us toward the glowing city with great swiftness. As we approach, the city seems to be made of a crystal material. Soon we arrive at a large building that is a type I have never seen before. It appears to be right out of the design board of Frank Lloyd Wright, or perhaps more correctly, out of a Buck Rogers setting!! We are given some type of warm beverage, which tasted like nothing I have ever savored before. It is delicious. After about ten minutes, two of our wondrous appearing Hosts come to our quarters and announce, that I am to accompany them. I have no choice, but to comply. I leave my Radioman behind and we walk a short distance and enter into what seems to be an elevator. We descend downward for some moments, the machine stops, and the door lifts silently upward! We then proceed down a long hallway, that is lit by a rose-colored light, that seems to be emanating from the very walls themselves! One of the Beings motions for us to stop before a great door. Over the door is an inscription, that I cannot read. The great door slides noiselessly open and I am beckoned to enter. One of my Hosts speaks. "Have no fear, Admiral, you are to have an audience with the Master..."
I step inside and my eyes adjust to the beautiful coloration, that seems to be filling the room completely. Then I begin to see my surroundings. What greeted my eyes is the most beautiful sight of my entire existence. It is in fact too beautiful and wondrous to describe. It is exquisite and delicate. I do not think there exists a Human term, that can describe it in any detail with justice! My thoughts are interrupted in a cordial manner by a warm rich voice of melodious quality, 'I bid you welcome to our Domain, Admiral.' I see a man with delicate features and with the etching of years upon his face. He is seated at a long table.
He motions me to sit down in one of the chairs. After I am seated, he places his fingertips together and smiles. He speaks softly again, and conveys the following.
“We have let you enter here because you are of noble character and well-known on the Surface World, Admiral.”
“Surface World?”, I half-gasp under my breath!
“Yes,” the Master replies with a smile, “you are in the domain of the Arianni, the Inner World of the Earth. We shall not long delay your mission, and you will be safely escorted back to the surface and for a distance beyond. But now, Admiral, I shall tell you why you have been summoned here. Our interest rightly begins just after your race exploded the first atomic bombs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki, Japan.
It was at that alarming time we sent our flying machines, the "Flugelrads", to your surface World to investigate what your race had done. That is, of course, past history now, my dear Admiral, but I must continue on. You see, we have never interfered before in your race's wars, and barbarity, but now we must, for you have learned to tamper with a certain power, that is not for Man, namely, that of atomic energy.
Our emissaries have already delivered messages to the powers of your world, and yet they do not heed. Now you have been chosen to be witness here that our world does exist. You see, our Culture and Science is many thousands of years beyond your race, Admiral.”
I interrupted, “But what does this have to do with me, Sir?”
The Master's eyes seemed to penetrate deeply into my mind, and after studying me for a few moments he replied, “Your race has now reached the point of no return, for there are those among you, who would destroy your very World, rather than relinquish their power as they know it...”
I nodded, and the Master continued, “In 1945 and afterward, we tried to contact your race, but our efforts were met with hostility, our Flugelrads were fired upon. Yes, even pursued with malice and animosity by your fighter planes. So, now, I say to you, my son, there is a great storm gathering in your World, a black fury, that will not spend itself for many years. There will be no answer in your Arms, there will be no safety in your Science. It may rage on until every flower of your culture is trampled, and all Human things are leveled in vast chaos. Your recent War was only a prelude of what is yet to come for your race. We here see it more clearly with each hour, do you say I am mistaken?”
“No,” I answer, “it happened once before, the Dark Ages came and they lasted for more than five hundred years.”
“Yes, my son,” replied the Master, “the Dark Ages, that will come now for your race will cover the Earth like a pall, but I believe, that some of your race will live through the storm, beyond that, I cannot say.
We see at a great distance a new world stirring from the ruins of your race, seeking its lost and legendary treasures, and they will be here, my son, safe in our keeping. When that time arrives, we shall come forward again to help revive your culture and your race. Perhaps, by then, you will have learned the futility of war and its strife...and after that time, certain of your culture and science will be returned for your race to begin anew. You, my son, are to return to the Surface World with this message...”
With these closing words, our meeting seemed at an end. I stood for a moment as in a dream....but, yet, I knew this was reality, and for some strange reason I bowed slightly, either out of respect or humility, I do not know which. Suddenly, I was again aware, that the two beautiful Hosts, who had brought me here were again at my side. “This way, Admiral,” motioned one. I turned once more before leaving and looked back toward the Master. A gentle smile was etched on his delicate and ancient face. 'Farewell, my son,' he spoke, then he gestured with a lovely, slender hand a motion of peace and our meeting was truly ended.
Quickly, we walked back through the great door of the Master's chamber and once again entered into the elevator. The door slid silently downward and we were at once going upward. One of my hosts spoke again, “We must now make haste, Admiral, as the Master desires to delay you no longer on your scheduled timetable and you must return with his message to your race.”
I said nothing. All of this was almost beyond belief, and once again my thoughts were interrupted, as we stopped. I entered the room and was again with my Radioman. He had an anxious expression on his face. As I approached, I said, “It is all right, Howie, it is all right.”
The two Beings motioned us toward the awaiting conveyance, we boarded, and soon arrived back at the aircraft. The engines were idling and we boarded immediately. The whole atmosphere seemed charged now with a certain air of urgency. After the cargo door was closed the aircraft was immediately lifted by that unseen force, until we reached an altitude of 2700 feet. Two of the aircraft were alongside for some distance guiding us on our return way. I must state here, the airspeed indicator registered no reading, yet we were moving along at a very rapid rate.
2.15 Hours - A radio message comes through. “We are leaving you now, Admiral, your controls are free. Auf Wiedersehen !”
We watched for a moment as the flugelrads disappeared into the pale blue sky. The aircraft suddenly felt as though caught in a sharp downdraft for a moment. We quickly recovered the control. We do not speak for some time, each man has his thoughts....
Entry in Flight Log continues:
2.20 Hours - We are again over vast areas of ice and snow, and approximately 27 minutes from Base Camp. We radio them, they respond. We report all conditions normal...normal. Base Camp expresses relief at our re-established contact.
3.00 Hours - We land smoothly at Base Camp. I have a mission...
End Log Entries:
March 11, 1947. I have just attended a Staff Meeting at the Pentagon. I have stated fully my discovery and the message from the Master. All is duly recorded. The President has been advised. I am now detained for several hours (six hours, thirty- nine minutes, to be exact.) I am interviewed intently by Top Security Forces and a medical team. It was an ordeal ! I am placed under strict control via the National Security provisions of this United States of America. I am ORDERED TO REMAIN SILENT IN REGARD TO ALL THAT I HAVE LEARNED, ON THE BEHALF OF HUMANITY!!! Incredible! I am reminded, that I am a Military Man and I must obey orders.
30/12/56 - Final Entry:
These last few years elapsed since 1947 have not been kind...I now make my final entry in this singular diary. In closing, I must state, that I have faithfully kept this matter secret as directed all these years.
It has been completely against my values of moral right. Now, I seem to sense the long night coming on and this secret will not die with me, but as all truth shall, it will triumph and so it shall. This can be the only hope for Humankind. I have seen the truth and it has quickened my spirit and has set me free! I have done my duty toward the monstrous military industrial complex. Now, the long night begins to approach, but there shall be no end. Just as the long night of the Arctic ends, the brilliant sunshine of Truth shall come again....and those who are of darkness shall fall in it's Light. FOR I HAVE SEEN THAT LAND BEYOND THE POLE, THAT CENTER OF THE GREAT UNKNOWN.
Admiral Richard E. Byrd - United States Navy. 24 December 1956






III. 'Phantom of the Poles'


by William Reed

One of the early writers to present the theory of the Earth being hollow with openings at its poles was an American thinker, William Reed, author of the book, "Phantom of the Poles" published in 1906. This book provides an early compilation of scientific evidence, based on the reports of Arctic explorers, in support of the theory, that the Earth is hollow with Openings at its poles. Reed estimates, that the Crust of the Earth has a thickness of 800 miles, while its hollow interior has a diameter of 6,400 miles. Reed summarizes his revolutionary theory as follows:
"The Earth is hollow. The Poles, so long sought, are phantoms. There are Openings at the northern and southern extremities. In the interior are vast continents, oceans, mountains and rivers. Vegetable and animal life are evident in this New World, and it is probably peopled by races unknown to dwellers on the Earth's surface."
Reed pointed out, that the Earth is not a true Sphere, but is flattened at the Poles, or rather it begins to flatten out as one approaches the hypothetical North and South Pole, which really do not exist, because the Openings to its hollow interior occur there. Hence the Poles are really in midair, in the center of the polar Openings and are not on its surface as would-be discoverers of the Poles suppose. Reed claims, that the Poles cannot be discovered, because the Earth is hollow at its Pole points, which exist in midair, due to the existence there of polar Openings leading to its interior. When explorers thought they reached the Pole, they were misled by the eccentric behavior of the compass in high latitudes, north and south. Reed claims, that this happened in the case of Peary and Cook, neither of whom really reached the North Pole, as we shall later see. Starting at 70 to 75 degrees North and South latitude the Earth starts to curve INWARDS. The Pole is simply the outer rim of a magnetic circle around the polar opening. The North Magnetic Pole, once thought to be a point in the Arctic Archipelago, has been lately shown by Soviet Arctic explorers to be a line approximately 1000 miles long. However, as we stated above, instead of being a straight line it is really a circular line constituting the rim of the polar opening. When an explorer reaches this rim, he has reached the North Magnetic Pole; and though the compass will always point to it after one passes it, it is really not the North Pole even if one is deluded into thinking it is, or that he discovered the Pole due to having been misled by his compass. When one reaches this magnetic circle (the rim of the polar opening), the magnetic needle of the compass points straight down. This has been observed by many Arctic explorers who, after reaching high latitudes, near to 90 degrees, were dumbfounded by the inexplicable action of the compass and its tendency to point vertically upward. (They were then inside the Polar Opening and the compass pointed to the Earth's North Magnetic Pole, which was along the rim of this Opening).
As the Earth turns on its axis, the motion is gyroscopic, like the spinning of a top. The outer gyroscopic pole is the magnetic circle of the rim of the Polar Opening. Beyond the rim the Earth flattens and slopes gradually toward its hollow interior. The true Pole is the exact center of the Opening at the Poles, which, consequently, do not really exist, and those, who claimed to have discovered them, did not tell the truth, even if they thought they did, having been misled by the irregular action of the compass at high latitudes. For this reason, neither Cook, nor Peary, nor any other explorer ever reached the North or South Poles, and never will.




IV. US Air Force Colonel: Traveler to the Inner Earth



Billie Faye Woodard - USAF Colonel

Below is an incredible first-hand account from a US Air Force Colonel about the inside of our Planet [courtesy abovetopsecret.com/onelight.com]
This information was gathered and written down with permission, from a recording taken on the phone January 10, 2002 (Greg Gavin/Onelight.com):
My name is Colonel Billie Faye Woodard of the United States Air Force.
Arrival and Indoctrination
I was first stationed at Area 51, Nevada, Jan.28, 1971 through 1982. In that period of service I visited the Hollow Interior of the Earth six times, 800 miles deep. Upon my arrival to Area 51 I was indoctrinated to the existence of tunnels beneath Area 51, and soon after I met several of the Underground Shuttle Operators, that have a stature of 13 to 14 feet in height. These tunnels, that transverse the world, are built by a species of Beings, who have existed here before we, a very long time.

(No, it's not true! According to Robert Monroe - watch the videos, some of us have been on this Earth 150000, means hundred and fifty thousands years ago! Maybe some of us visited the above-mentioned World as well, later we will know all about it! LM).
The History of Research at the Monroe Institute
http://www.monroeinstitute.org/research/the-history-of-research-at-the-monroe-institute
Videos with Robert Monroe I advise to watch
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=V96Ty5L2jMM&list=PL46FC150F88931111#t=0

Immediately on my arrival to Area 51, I was made aware of the tunnels and all the workings of the facility itself. They told me, that the first 15 levels of the Area 51 facility were man made; that Levels 16-27 were already there. Nobody from our government made them. We were just facilitating them. My father had been stationed at Roswell. As part of my induction into the military he requested, that I be stationed along with him at the Pentagon. There they said "We have a new duty station for you, which will be Area 51 facility, Nevada", Commonly referred to as S-4. When I went into the Pentagon I was a Second Lieutenant.
When I came to the Pentagon they gave me the field commission as First Lieutenant. After 3 weeks of being there they handed me my full Colonel rank, saying "you have to be a full Colonel to be stationed at this next facility". There were 150,000 personnel in this facility, approx. 85% military personnel and 15% civilian. Following my arrival I was taken underground and did not see the light of day for 11.5 years.
The Tunnels and Shuttles
The Walls of the Tunnels are very smooth. If you were to pull a hollow tube through a ball of clay you can get an idea of how smooth. The walls have what is likened to a marble finish, which are made of a metal substance, impenetrable; the surface of the walls cannot be penetrated even by a diamond drill, nor will a laser penetrate the surface. Remember there was a time when we used to see troop movements from point A to B on the Earth's surface, continually. It was not that long ago. Now, you rarely see this. Now they use tunnels to move all these troops at long distances. The tunnels are wide enough to drive two, 18 foot wheelers side by side. Stemming from Area 51, one shuttle goes out to the Pacific Ocean - 350 miles due west of Monterey - where there is a Pyramid; another shuttle goes to the Cheyenne Mountain facility.
The length of a large shuttle machine is approx 1/4 mile long. Interior inhabitants make use of these machines - a huge vessel for moving large numbers of people/beings/whatever quickly. The smaller shuttle is 50-60 feet in length, this was the kind I was in. The speed of the shuttles is faster, than the speed of sound, they can travel from Area 51 to the main interior of the Earth in less than 10 Earth minutes. In 5-6 minutes you are there. The material used to make the shuttles is the same substance, that made up the skin of the spacecraft at Roswell. The shuttles run on electromagnetic power using the Earth's grid line.
The operators, who I mentioned earlier, who are of a stature of 13-14 ft. in height, look like us in their appearance, but much more highly evolved, and speak through telepathy. The men have beards or not, and the women's skin is flawless, indeed having a perfect clear complexion. Their expression for Humans is one of concern for Us - as they see where we Humans are headed.
(I don't know about them, but all the Graduates of Planetary Game are going to the Source! There are a few Inner Earths-Suns and hundreds of Civilizations, inhabiting them ! LM).
There are seven civilizations residing in the Inner Earth - which are governed by the principles of harmony. They understand and they speak all languages of the Earth. Their understanding of medical knowledge is phenomenal.
My Personal History
At the age of 12, while walking through a field of corn with another friend I had a paranormal experience. I was taken into a UFO vehicle and transported into the Inner Earth. Here, I lived for 6 months among the Hollow Earth residents. You may imagine the wonder of my parents especially of my Father, who was in the Military Service, at that time when I disappeared, then I mysteriously returned in 6 months. It was due to this experience, that I believe my Father made certain, that I was engaged under his wing at the Pentagon and later directed to serve at Area 51. I am not the biological offspring of my Father, but an adopted child, as was my Sister. My Sister was killed by what is referred to as the “Secret Government”. I was able to combat their negativity with my mind, which is stronger, and survived their attacks.
It is my knowledge through my Guide Zora, an Inner Earth scientist, who is 150,000 years old, that my Sister and myself are originally from the Inner Earth, that our true parents live in the Inner Earth. When our Father took us in, as adopted children, we did not speak a language known to any surface culture. I have an unknown blood type. I have never had a disease of any kind. My blood has been medically examined and destroys all viral infections, when combined with other blood samples in a lab setting.
Hollow Earth Vortexes
The Hollow Earth residents have the ability to split the ocean floor and create a vortex, as is shown with the Bermuda Triangle. There are 7 different levels in these vortexes, and equipment and Beings are brought in and placed corresponding to these different levels. The vortexes act as doorways for entrance or exit to the hollow interior of the Earth. There is more, than one triangle area off of Florida, one at Lake Erie, and another off the coast of Mexico, one off of Japan; as well as other geographic locations of the Earth. These are called "Quiet Zones". These doorways allow creatures from the interior to come out and in such as the Sasquatch, LochNess...etc. All Planets are hollow as is the Sun, which is really a Planet. There are civilizations in the Sun, which have colonies in the Earth' subterranean regions.
Seeking Entry
In order to locate an entrance to the Inner Earth, where ever you are underground, all that you need is your compass. The compass will spin as if you are standing at the North Pole at the tunnel entrance to the Inner Earth. When I left the Military Service, I no longer had means of going into the Hollow Earth. It was necessary, that I seek another way. I and a party of interested seekers, rented a plane, which took us to the very rim of the North Pole.
The People of the Interior
The people of the interior were very free with showing me around, very articulate in showing you, what is exactly going on - they do not hold anything back. They always ask permission when working with Nature, they ask the plants for permission before consuming them or cutting them down, they ask the Mother Earth before they build on it, and do so build with the lay of the land, which best suits their environment, a practice similar to the American Indians;
(there is no such a thing like Mother-Earth or Father-Sun! Sun and Planet is the same thing! Sun just makes a Shell around itself and starts growing Life-Forms internally, like a chicken in the egg! The world, described below, reminds me the world, visited by Robert Monroe, only there is no Food Chain like in our World! It means, that they don't generate as much of White Sun Energy of Balance, as we do! They don't grow spiritually as fast, as we do, because they don't experience Pain! I don't trust systems, which are ruled by kings or queens. LM).
therefore seeking to preserve a harmonious state at all times; wanting to be one with Nature at all times; they are more spiritually advanced, than surface dwellers and greatly respect Mother Earth.
The atmosphere is crystal clear, as a rule, there are at times clouds, but nothing like rain clouds. The temperature is a constant 73 degrees. The people in the interior speak directly with the animals, and the animals speak directly to the people of the interior. There is no need for hoarding, for everything is free, no need to create in abundance, as everything is ample. A process of bartering is more common, than trade in money. This is basically a utopian culture with no depression leading into violence. No parties seeking to make war and gain dominance over each other. There are none richer, nor poorer. There are aero-ships (we term on the surface as flying saucers), in which a part of themselves, a part of their personality goes into the creation of the aero-ship through the process of thought, due to their very powerful minds.
This makes the aero-ships perfect in design and execution in motion. Only a few persons of the surface have these similar abilities to create, due to the repression of these abilities in childhood by religion, education, and family fears. The people of the interior are allowed to enter the space of their imagination, if you will, and there they create. Disease will not enter their bodies - for it is not allowed. As surface Humanity enters into the coming 4th dimensional phase, the Inner Earth people will come forward and more deeply work with us on the surface. People on the surface are presently so involved with the sense of "me", that they can not live together harmoniously. People of the surface, who seek to reach the Inner Earth inhabitants through meditation, will receive it. Children, who are being born now, are becoming more capable of using the wholeness of their brain, which is in common practice in the Interior. One of the first things they showed us in the interior was their capability of interplanetary travel and time travel. The basis of time travel is likened to bending space, which comes through the power of meditation and by the acceptance of being an unlimited Being. If you train your mind at a subconscious level, that you are an unlimited Being, all things are possible. On the surface, capabilities to experience this infinite power are more easily awakened at such Portals as Mt. Shasta, which serves as a Space Time Portal directly to the Inner Earth. Once in the surroundings of Mt. Shasta you are drawn into the “harmonious state”. In my experiences at Mt. Shasta the Telosians in their civilisation underground in that area are projecting an aura of great harmony in a lovely atmosphere.
Area 51
Of all I saw at Area 51, 95% remains hidden from the public. Going into Area 51 is like going into another world, where they are terribly afraid, that other countries and other parties are going to get "this" information. Their thoughts being "if we admit that the Earth is hollow, with a central intelligence in it, this is going to cause discord and fear". This fear process is generated by the private companies, who seek to control and advance their own needs and personal agendas through Area 51. I left the Air Force due to their domineering ways by those, who sought to act like control freaks, who were stagnating my ability to think and act in a creative manner. In accepting their Orders not to talk about such information, they take it for granted, that one will automatically obey. Because of my outgoing desire to share information and inform the public at large my Service Pension and all my benefits and rights such as the use of the Commissary, dental and medical, were taken away. I was in the military for 13.5 years, from basic to the Pentagon and then to Area 51. The genetic engineering, that is taking place at Area 51, is with our younger generation. The "milk carton children", whose photos were commonly seen in the markets in the past, were abducted and taken to Area 51. Level 16 of Area 51 is the genetic engineering level, where they are using our children for experimentation in longevity and powers of the mind. The major force behind this is what is termed as the "Secret Government". There are civilians of the Secret Government, which are in control in several areas of Area 51. There is a network of tunnels underground, that go all the way to Europe, South America - the several continents. And there is an intermingling of this great network of tunnels throughout the globe, of which many governments use. Colonel Bill Faye Woodard






Entrances to Hollow Earth - Allegedly a genuine NASA picture, taken by ESSA-7 in 1968 (I seriously doubt the opening can be this big)



VI. Galactic Federation Council of Sirius: The Realm of Agartha



The Realm of Agartha as described by the Members of the Galactic Federation Council of Sirius – 7 February 2006 [Through Sheldan Nidle]
As we move inexorably toward the revelation, that is “First Contact”, we intend to turn our attention briefly toward your inner neighbors. Inner Earth is a concept, that has inspired numerous myths, legends, and fantastic stories. The first point to be made is, that Inner Earth does indeed exist!
Today, we come to tell you that Mother Earth's configuration is quite different. Like all celestial objects such as Planets or Stars, the Earth is hollow. This fact is suppressed by those, who secretly rule you, because the truth of this has a knock-on affect, that can upset other core misperceptions, used to manipulate you. When wisely used, it can reveal vast new vistas of knowledge and encourage you to apply your inner wisdom to your current circumstances.
Inner Earth consists of two main features: The first is Mother Earth's inner Crust, which is a continuation of the external surface Crust. The two Polar Regions each have a large entrance or hole, somewhat like a cored apple, and the Crust wraps itself down and around into the hollow interior. The outer and inner crusts have very similar topography: Both comprise oceans, continents, mountain ranges, lakes, and rivers.
It is merely, that the Inner Crust faces the Earth's Core-Sun. This Core glows and is surrounded by a cloudy veil. The light, given off, is more diffuse, that the light of the Sun, so the daylight in Inner Earth is softer and gentler, than on the Earth's external surface. The second main feature of inner Earth is the so-called cavern worlds. These are immense hollows within the Layer of the Crust, some of which are natural features, created by Mother Earth, while others were made using the advanced technology of inner Earth's major society, the land of Agartha. This land is the last living remnant of Earth's second Galactic
Federation colony, Lemuria. Lemuria, in her original form, was a surface society with a subterranean component. The primary capital city was situated on the large island, that sank beneath the waves of the Pacific some 25,000 years ago. A secondary capital city was located in Inner Earth. It was to this city, that the government of Lemuria moved after the cataclysm. The new ruler of the surface, the Empire of Atlantis, ordered the major tunnel entrances to be sealed. It was only during the final days of Atlantis, that the Lemurians broke these seals and thus saved many surface dwellers from certain death.
These people formed a society, that subsequently returned for a time to the surface and became the Rama Empire situated in Southern Asia. Then the Great Flood of 8,000 BC ended this attempt to save Humanity from the dark ways of the Anunnaki. Despite this setback, Lemuria persisted in her role of protecting the surface world from these havoc-wreaking rapscallions. It was her Galactic emissaries, that maintained membership for this Solar System in the Galactic Federation. After the Great Flood and the demise of the Rama Empire, the Lemurians regrouped and named their newly combined society Agartha. The capital Shamballah was relocated to a cavern, located far beneath the city of Lhasa in modern Tibet. Many tunnels connect Shamballah to the surface in the Himalayas. These were used by holy men, who came to spread their great energy and divine wisdom to the outside world. In this area, an extraordinary place was kept for special occasions, where holy men and their chosen disciples met in order to maintain Mother Earth's sacred energy grids. This work, together with numerous rituals, performed daily throughout Inner Earth, is largely responsible for keeping alive the energy, that is Lemuria's main legacy to the surface peoples of Mother Earth. Lemuria, and later on Agartha, have continuously held the Light for your transformation back into fully conscious Beings of Light.

Artistic interpretation

Agartha is a world much like yours. Inner Earth contains a thriving ecosystem, in which can be found creatures no longer existing on the surface. This exotic menagerie is carefully supervised. Close to the various cities of Inner Earth are special areas, where Agarthans care for and, when necessary, heal the many creatures of this varied ecology. Agarthans reside in a network of Crystal Cities spread throughout Inner Earth. These vary in size from roughly 10,000 to 1,000,000 inhabitants, although most range from around 100,000 to 200,000 people. These cities more closely resemble mini-settlements, that together form the whole society. The underlying unit is the "podlet." Podlets sharing a similar life purpose group together to form "clans." Clans are the primary building blocks of Galactic Society. Over time, fully conscious humans developed a format for harmonious living called Galactic Society, of which Agartha is a prime example. In her case, a system of 12 clans forms the core of this society's operation, and these are organized according to task, e.g. administration, engineering, healing sciences, etc. Each clan breaks down into podlets, that contain a maximum of 64 individuals. It is common for podlets from one clan to associate freely with those from the other 11 clans. These larger groupings form mini-communities, that each possesses the resources for creatively solving any problem, that arises. These mini-communities, in turn, blend to form the neighborhoods of a city. Thus, each city is a beehive of individuals, who come together to share and contribute to their neighborhood, their city, and their world. The ruling council of Agartha is composed of the 12 clan heads elected to this post for their past meritorious service to clan and society. From this council is chosen an individual considered to be the wisest and most deserving of the titular honor of
King or Queen of Agartha. This person is in charge of the vast army of emissaries and liaisons sent to the surface world and to the appropriate councils of the Galactic Federation. Their responsibility is to see, that your transformation back into physical goes according to the plan. Their work on your behalf helped us to refocus this first contact mission and indirectly resulted in "Decra Zau," or Operation Spirit. Moreover, the King and his council have set the agenda for the amazing period, that is to follow the actual mass landings on your world. Advanced technology, which allows each person to create his or her daily food and clothing, makes each crystal city self-sufficient. The farming, building, and manufacturing industries of the surface world are rendered obsolete by this Light technology. For example, each individual can change the appearance and interior design of her residence on a whim. This technology also transports a person from one point to another almost instantaneously. This means, that the world becomes a community as accessible to you, as your immediate neighborhood. Thus, Agarthans' thinking is not constrained by the limiting conditions, that their surface neighbors live under.
The freedom, conferred by this Light technology, has released wonderfully creative talents, that are put to full use by their society. Happily, the Agarthans are now using these skills to reunite Agartha with their surface brethren.
(No, we are sandwiched between them and higher non-physical Spheres of Earths-Suns of the 4th Level! LM).



A Voyage to the Inner World - The Smoky God - by Willis George Emerson - 1908

It was just two o'clock in the morning when I was aroused from a restful sleep by the vigorous ringing of my doorbell. The untimely disturber proved to be a messenger bearing a note, scrawled almost to the point of illegibility, from an old Norseman by the name of Olaf Jansen. After much deciphering, I made out the writing, which simply said: "Am ill unto death. Come." The call was imperative, and I lost no time in making ready to comply. Perhaps I may as well explain here that Olaf Jansen, a man who quite recently celebrated his ninety-fifth birthday, has for the last half-dozen years been living alone in an unpretentious bungalow out Glendale way, a short distance from the business district of Los Angeles, California.



It was less than two years ago, while out walking one afternoon, that I was attracted by Olaf Jansen's house and its homelike surroundings, toward its owner and occupant, whom I afterward came to know as a believer in the ancient worship of Odin and Thor. There was a gentleness in his face, and a kindly expression in the keenly alert gray eyes of this man, who had lived more, than four-score years and ten; and with a sense of loneliness, that appealed to my sympathy. Slightly stooped, and with his hands clasped behind him, he walked back and forth with slow and measured tread, that day when first we met. I can hardly say what particular motive impelled me to pause in my walk and engage him in conversation.
He seemed pleased, when I complimented him on the attractiveness of his bungalow, and on the well-tended vines and flowers clustering in profusion over its windows, roof and wide piazza. I soon discovered, that my new acquaintance was no ordinary person, but one profound and learned to a remarkable degree; a man who, in the later years of his long life, had dug deeply into books and become strong in the power of meditative silence. I encouraged him to talk, and soon gathered,  that he had resided only six or seven years in Southern California, but had passed the dozen years prior in one of the middle Eastern states. Before that he had been a fisherman off the coast of Norway, in the region of the Lofoden Islands, from whence he had made trips still farther north to Spitzbergen and even to Franz Josef Land. When I started to take my leave, he seemed reluctant to have me go, and asked me to come again. Although at the time I thought nothing of it, I remember now, that he made a peculiar remark as I extended my hand in leave-taking.
"You will come again?" he asked. "Yes, you will come again someday. I am sure you will; and I shall show you my library and tell you many things, of which you have never dreamed, things so wonderful, that may be you will not believe me."
I laughingly assured him, that I would not only come again, but would be ready to believe whatever he might choose to tell me of his travels and adventures. In the days that followed I became well acquainted with Olaf Jansen, and, little by little, he told me his story, so marvelous, that its very daring challenges reason and belief. The old Norseman always expressed himself with so much earnestness and sincerity, that I became enthralled by his strange narrations. Then came the messenger's call that night, and within the hour I was at Olaf Jansen's bungalow. He was very impatient at the long wait, although after being summoned I had come immediately to his bedside.
"I must hasten," he exclaimed, while yet he held my hand in greeting. "I have much to tell you, that you know not, and I will trust no one, but you. I fully realize," he went on hurriedly, "that I shall not survive the night. The time has come to join my fathers in the great sleep."
I adjusted the pillows to make him more comfortable, and assured him I was glad to be able to serve him in any way possible, for I was beginning to realize the seriousness of his condition. The lateness of the hour, the stillness of the surroundings, the uncanny feeling of being alone with the dying man, together with his weird story, all combined to make my heart beat fast and loud with a feeling, for which I have no name. Indeed, there were many times that night by the old Norseman's couch, and there have been many times since, when a sensation, rather than a conviction, took possession of my very soul, and I seemed not only to believe in, but actually see, the strange lands, the strange people and the strange World, of which he told, and to hear the mighty orchestral chorus of a thousand lusty voices. For over two hours he seemed endowed with almost superhuman strength, talking rapidly, and to all appearances, rationally. Finally he gave into my hands certain data, drawings and crude maps. "These," said he in conclusion, "I leave in your hands. If I can have your promise to give them to the world, I shall die happy, because I desire, that people may know the truth, for then all mystery,  concerning the frozen Northland, will be explained. There is no chance of your suffering the fate I suffered. They will not put you in irons, nor confine you in a mad-house, because you are not telling your own story, but mine, and I, thanks to the gods, Odin and Thor, will be in my grave, and so beyond the reach of disbelievers, who would persecute."
Without a thought of the far-reaching results the promise entailed, or foreseeing the many sleepless nights, which the obligation has since brought me, I gave my hand and with it a pledge to discharge faithfully his dying wish. As the Sun rose over the peaks of the San Jacinto, far to the eastward, the spirit of Olaf Jansen, the navigator, the explorer and worshiper of Odin and Thor, the man, whose experiences and travels, as related, are without a parallel in all the world's history, passed away, and I was left alone with the dead. And now, after having paid the last sad rites to this strange man from the Lofoden Islands, and the still farther "Northward Ho!", the courageous explorer of frozen regions, who in his declining years (after he had passed the four-score mark) had sought an asylum of restful peace in sun-favored California, I will undertake to make public his story.

VII. Olaf Jansen's Amazing Story



My name is Olaf Jansen. I am a Norwegian, although I was born in the little seafaring Russian town of Uleaborg, on the Eastern coast of the Gulf of Bothnia, the Northern arm of the Baltic Sea. My parents were on a fishing cruise in the Gulf of Bothnia, and put into this Russian town of Uleaborg at the time of my birth, being the twenty-seventh day of October, 1811. My Father, Jens Jansen, was born at Rodwig on the Scandinavian coast, near the Lofoden Islands, but after marrying made his home at Stockholm, because my mother's people resided in that city. When seven years old, I began going with my Father on his fishing trips along the Scandinavian coast. Early in life I displayed an aptitude for books, and at the age of nine years was placed in a private school in Stockholm, remaining there until I was fourteen. After this I made regular trips with my Father on all his fishing voyages. My Father was a man fully six feet three in height, and weighed over fifteen stone [210lb / 95kg], a typical Norseman of the most rugged sort, and capable of more endurance, than any other man I have ever known. He possessed the gentleness of a woman in tender little ways, yet his determination and will-power were beyond description. His will admitted of no defeat. I was in my nineteenth year when we started on what proved to be our last trip as fishermen, and which resulted in the strange story, that shall be given to the world - but not until I have finished my Earthly pilgrimage. I dare not allow the facts, as I know them, to be published while I am living, for fear of further humiliation, confinement and suffering. First of all, I was put in irons by the Captain of the whaling vessel, that rescued me, for no other reason than, that I told the truth about the marvelous discoveries, made by my father and myself. But this was far from being the end of my tortures. After four years and eight months' absence I reached Stockholm, only to find my Mother had died the previous year, and the property left by my parents in the possession of my Mother's people, but it was at once made over to me. All might have been well, had I erased from my memory the story of our adventure and of my Father's terrible death. Finally, one day I told the story in detail to my Uncle, Gustaf Osterlind, a man of considerable property, and urged him to fit out an expedition for me to make another voyage to the strange land. At first I thought he favored my project. He seemed interested, and invited me to go before certain officials and explain to them, as I had to him, the story of our travels and discoveries. Imagine my disappointment and horror when, upon the conclusion of my narrative, certain papers were signed by my Uncle, and, without warning, I found myself arrested and hurried away to dismal and fearful confinement in a madhouse, where I remained for twenty-eight years - long, tedious, frightful years of suffering! I never ceased to assert my sanity, and to protest against the injustice of my confinement. Finally, on the seventeenth of October, 1862, I was released. My Uncle was dead, and the friends of my youth were now strangers. Indeed, a man over fifty years old, whose only known record is, that of a madman, has no friends. I was at a loss to know what to do for a living, but instinctively turned toward the harbor, where fishing boats in great numbers were anchored, and within a week I had shipped with a fisherman by the name of Yan Hansen, who was starting on a long fishing cruise to the Lofoden Islands. Here my earlier years of training proved of the very greatest advantage, especially in enabling me to make myself useful. This was, but the beginning of other trips, and by frugal economy I was, in a few years, able to own a fishing-brig of my own. For wenty-seven years thereafter I followed the sea as a fisherman, five years working for others, and the last twenty-two for myself.
During all these years I was a most diligent student of books, as well, as a hard worker at my business, but I took great care not to mention to anyone the story, concerning the discoveries made by my Father and myself. Even at this late day
I would be fearful of having anyone see or know the things I am writing, and the records and maps I have in my keeping. When my days on Earth are finished, I shall leave maps and records, that will enlighten and, I hope, benefit Humankind.
The memory of my long confinement with maniacs, and all the horrible anguish and sufferings are too vivid to warrant my taking further chances. In 1889 I sold out my fishing boats, and found I had accumulated a fortune quite sufficient to keep me the remainder of my life. I then came to America. For a dozen years my home was in Illinois, near Batavia, where I gathered most of the books in my present library, though I brought many choice volumes from Stockholm. Later, I came to Los Angeles, arriving here March 4, 1901. The date I well remember, as it was President McKinley's second inauguration day. I bought this humble home and determined, here in the privacy of my own abode, sheltered by my own vine and fig-tree, and with my books about me, to make maps and drawings of the new lands we had discovered, and also to write the story in detail from the time my Father and I left Stockholm, until the tragic event, that parted us in the Antarctic Ocean. I well remember, that we left Stockholm in our fishing-sloop on the third day of April, 1829, and sailed to the southward, leaving Gothland Island to the left and Oeland Island to the right. A few days later we succeeded in doubling Sandhommar Point,
and made our way through the sound, which separates Denmark from the Scandinavian coast. In due time we put in at the town of Christiansand, where we rested two days, and then started around the Scandinavian coast to the westward, bound for the Lofoden Islands. My father was in high spirit, because of the excellent and gratifying returns he had received from our last catch by marketing at Stockholm, instead of selling at one of the seafaring towns along the Scandinavian coast. He was especially pleased with the sale of some ivory tusks, that he had found on the west coast of Franz Joseph Land during one of his Northern cruises the previous year, and he expressed the hope, that this time we might again be fortunate enough to load our little fishing-sloop with ivory, instead of cod, herring, mackerel and salmon. We put in at Hammerfest, latitude seventy-one degrees and forty minutes, for a few days' rest. Here we remained one week, laying in an extra supply of provisions and several casks of drinking-water, and then sailed toward Spitzbergen. For the first few days we had an open sea and a favoring wind, and then we encountered much ice and many icebergs. A vessel larger, than our little fishing-sloop could not possibly have threaded its way among the labyrinth of icebergs or squeezed through the barely open channels. These monster bergs presented an endless succession of crystal palaces, of massive cathedrals and fantastic mountain ranges, grim and sentinel-like, immovable as some towering cliff of solid rock, standing; silent as a sphinx, resisting the restless waves of a fretful sea. After many narrow escapes, we arrived at Spitzbergen on the 23rd of June, and anchored at Wijade Bay for a short time, where we were quite successful in our catches. We then lifted anchor and sailed through the Hinlopen Strait, and coasted along the North-East-Land. A strong wind came up from the southwest, and my Father said, that we had better take advantage of it and try to reach Franz Josef Land, where, the year before he had, by accident, found the ivory tusks, that had brought him such a good price at Stockholm. Never, before or since, have I seen so many sea-fowl; they were so numerous, that they hid the rocks on the coast line and darkened the sky. For several days we sailed along the rocky coast of Franz Josef Land. Finally, a favoring wind came up, that enabled us to make the West Coast, and, after sailing twenty-four hours, we came to a beautiful inlet. One could hardly believe it was the far Northland. The place was green with growing vegetation, and while the area did not comprise more, than one or two acres, yet the air was warm and tranquil. It seemed to be at that point, where the Gulf Stream's influence is most keenly felt. On the east coast there were numerous icebergs, yet here we were in open water. Far to the west of us, however, were icepacks, and still farther to the westward the ice appeared like ranges of low hills. In front of us, and directly to the north, lay an open sea.
My Father was an ardent believer in Odin and Thor, and had frequently told me they were Gods, who came from far beyond the "North Wind." There was a tradition, my Father explained, that still farther northward was a land more beautiful, than any that mortal man had ever known, and that it was inhabited by the "Chosen." My youthful imagination was fired by the ardor, zeal and religious fervor of my good Father, and I exclaimed: "Why not sail to this goodly land? The sky is fair, the wind favorable and the sea open." Even now I can see the expression of pleasurable surprise on his countenance as he turned toward me and asked:
"My Son, are you willing to go with me and explore -- to go far beyond, where Man has ever ventured?" I answered affirmatively. "Very  well," he replied. "May the God Odin protect us!" and, quickly adjusting the sails, he glanced at our compass, turned the prow in due northerly direction through an open channel, and our voyage had begun. The Sun was low in the horizon, as it was still the early Summer. Indeed, we had almost four months of day ahead of us before the frozen night could come on again. Our little fishing-sloop sprang forward, as if eager as ourselves for adventure. Within thirty-six hours we were out of sight of the highest point on the coast line of Franz Josef Land. We seemed to be in a strong current running north by northeast. Far to the right and to the left of us were icebergs, but our little sloop bore down on the narrows and passed through channels and out into open seas - channels so narrow in places that, had our craft been other, than small, we never could have gotten through. On the third day we came to an island. Its shores were washed by an open sea. My Father determined to land and explore for a day. This new land was destitute of timber, but we found a large accumulation of drift-wood on the northern shore. Some of the trunks of the trees were forty feet long and two feet in diameter. After one day's exploration of the coast line of this island, we lifted anchor and turned our prow to the North in an open sea. I remember, that neither my father nor myself had tasted food for almost thirty hours. Perhaps this was because of the tension of excitement about our strange voyage in waters farther north, my Father said, than anyone had ever before been. Active mentality had dulled the demands of the physical needs. Instead of the cold being intense as we had anticipated, it was really warmer and more pleasant, than it had been while in Hammerfest on the north coast of Norway, some six weeks before. We both frankly admitted, that we were very hungry, and forthwith I prepared a substantial meal from our well-stored larder. When we had partaken heartily of the repast, I told my Father I believed, I would sleep, as I was beginning to feel quite drowsy. "Very well," he replied, "I will keep the watch."
I have no way to determine how long I slept; I only know, that I was rudely awakened by a terrible commotion of the sloop. To my surprise, I found my Father sleeping soundly. I cried out lustily to him, and starting up, he sprang quickly to his feet.
Indeed, had he not instantly clutched the rail, he would certainly have been thrown into the seething waves. A fierce snow-storm was raging. The wind was directly astern, driving our sloop at a terrific speed, and was threatening every moment to capsize us. There was no time to lose, the sails had to be lowered immediately. Our boat was writhing in convulsions. A few icebergs we knew were on either side of us, but fortunately the channel was open directly to the North. But would it remain so?
In front of us, girding the horizon from left to right, was a vaporish Fog or Mist, black as Egyptian night at the water's edge, and white like a steam-cloud toward the top, which was finally lost to view as it blended with the great white flakes of falling snow. Whether it covered a treacherous iceberg, or some other hidden obstacle, against which our little sloop would dash and send us to a watery grave, or was merely the phenomenon of an Arctic Fog, there was no way to determine.
By what miracle we escaped being dashed to utter destruction, I do not know. I remember our little craft creaked and groaned, as if its joints were breaking. It rocked and staggered to and fro, as if clutched by some fierce undertow of whirlpool or
maelstrom. Fortunately our compass had been fastened with long screws to a crossbeam. Most of our provisions, however, were tumbled out and swept away from the deck of the cuddy, and had we not taken the precaution at the very beginning to tie ourselves firmly to the masts of the sloop, we should have been swept into the lashing sea. Above the deafening tumult of the raging waves, I heard my Father's voice.
"Be courageous, my Son," he shouted, "Odin is the God of the waters, the companion of the brave, and he is with us. Fear not."
To me it seemed there was no possibility of our escaping a horrible death. The little sloop was shipping water, the snow was falling so fast as to be blinding, and the waves were tumbling over our counters in reckless white-sprayed fury.
There was no telling, what instant we should be dashed against some drifting ice-pack. The tremendous swells would heave us up to the very peaks of mountainous waves, then plunge us down into the depths of the sea's trough, as if our fishing-sloop were a fragile shell. Gigantic white-capped waves, like veritable walls, fenced us in, fore and aft. This terrible nerve-racking ordeal, with its nameless horrors of suspense and agony of fear indescribable, continued for more, than three hours, and all the time we were being driven forward at fierce speed. Then suddenly, as if growing weary of its frantic exertions, the wind began to lessen its fury and by degrees to die down. At last we were in a perfect calm.
The Fog Mist had also disappeared, and before us lay an iceless channel perhaps ten or fifteen miles wide, with a few icebergs far away to our right, and an intermittent archipelago of smaller ones to the left.
I watched my Father closely, determined to remain silent, until he spoke. Presently he untied the rope from his waist and, without saying a word, began working the pumps, which fortunately were not damaged, relieving the sloop of the water it had shipped in the madness of the storm. He put up the sloop's sails as calmly, as if casting a fishing-net, and then remarked, that we were ready for a favoring wind when it came. His courage and persistence were truly remarkable.
On investigation we found less than one-third of our provisions remaining, while to our utter dismay, we discovered, that our water-casks had been swept overboard during the violent plungings of our boat. Two of our water-casks were in the main hold, but both were empty. We had a fair supply of food, but no fresh water. I realized at once the awfulness of our position. Presently I was seized with a consuming thirst.
"It is indeed bad," remarked my Father. "However, let us dry our bedraggled clothing, for we are soaked to the skin. Trust to the God Odin, my Son. Do not give up hope."
The Sun was beating down slantingly, as if we were in a Southern latitude, instead of in the far Northland. It was swinging around, its orbit ever visible and rising higher and higher each day, frequently mist-covered, yet always peering through the  lacework of clouds like some fretful eye of fate, guarding the mysterious Northland and jealously watching the pranks of Man.
Far to our right the rays decking the prisms of icebergs were gorgeous. Their reflections emitted flashes of garnet, of diamond, of sapphire. A pyrotechnic panorama of countless colors and shapes, while below could be seen the green-tinted sea, and above, the purple sky (Rainbow Colors of Earth's Spheres. LM).
I tried to forget my thirst by busying myself with bringing up some food and an empty vessel from the hold. Reaching over the side-rail, I filled the vessel with water for the purpose of washing my hands and face. To my astonishment, when the water came in contact with my lips, I could taste no salt. I was startled by the discovery.
"Father!" I fairly gasped, "the water, the water; it is fresh!" "What, Olaf?" exclaimed my Father, glancing hastily around. "Surely you are mistaken. There is no land. You are going mad." "But taste it!" I cried. And thus we made the discovery that the water was indeed fresh, absolutely so, without the least briny taste or even the suspicion of a salty flavor.
[In vol. I, page 196, Nansen writes: "It is a peculiar phenomenon - this dead water. We had at present a better opportunity of studying it, than we desired. It occurs, where a surface layer of fresh water rests upon the salt water of the sea, and this fresh water is carried along with the ship gliding on the heavier sea beneath it, as if on a fixed foundation. The difference between the two strata was in this case so great, that while we had drinking water on the surface, the water we got from the bottom cock of the engine-room was far too salty to be used for the boiler."]
We forthwith filled our two remaining water-casks, and my Father declared it was a Heavenly dispensation of mercy from the Gods Odin and Thor. We were almost beside ourselves with joy, but hunger bade us end our enforced fast. Now, that we had found fresh water in the open sea, what might we not expect in this strange latitude, where ship had never before sailed and the splash of an oar had never been heard? We had scarcely appeased our hunger when a breeze began filling the idle sails, and, glancing at the compass, we found the Northern point pressing hard against the glass. In response to my surprise, my Father said, "I have heard of this before; it is what they call the dipping of the needle."
We loosened the compass and turned it at right angles with the surface of the sea, before its point would free itself from the glass and point according to unmolested attraction. It shifted uneasily, and seemed as unsteady, as a drunken man, but finally pointed a course. Before this we thought the wind was carrying us North by Northwest, but, with the needle free, we discovered, if it could be relied upon, that we were sailing slightly North by Northeast. Our course, however, was ever tending northward. The sea was serenely smooth, with hardly a choppy wave, and the wind brisk and exhilarating. The Sun's rays, while striking us aslant, furnished tranquil warmth. And thus time wore on day after day, and we found from the record in our logbook, we had been sailing eleven days since the storm in the open sea. By strictest economy, our food was holding out fairly well, but beginning to run low. In the meantime, one of our casks of water had been exhausted, and my Father said: "We will fill it again." But, to our dismay, we found the water was now as salty, as in the region of the Lofoden Islands off the coast of Norway. This necessitated our being extremely careful of the remaining cask. I found myself wanting to sleep much of the time; whether it was the effect of the exciting experience of sailing in unknown waters, or the relaxation from the awful excitement incident to our adventure in a storm at sea, or due to want of food, I could not say.
I frequently lay down on the bunker of our little sloop, and looked far up into the blue dome of the sky; and,
not withstanding the Sun was shining far away in the East, I always saw a single Star overhead. For several days, when I looked for this Star, it was always there directly above us. It was now, according to our reckoning, about the first of August. The Sun was high in the heavens, and was so bright, that I could no longer see the one lone Star, that attracted my attention a few days earlier. One day about this time, my Father startled me by calling my attention to a novel sight far in front of us, almost at the horizon. "It is a Mock Sun," exclaimed my father. "I have read of them; it is called a reflection or mirage. It will soon pass away."

But this dull-Red, false Sun, as we supposed it to be, did not pass away for several hours; and while we were unconscious of its emitting any rays of light, still there was no time thereafter, when we could not sweep the horizon in front and locate the illumination of the so-called false Sun, during a period of at least twelve hours out of every twenty-four. Clouds and mists would at times almost, but never entirely, hide its location. Gradually it seemed to climb higher in the horizon of the uncertain purply sky as we advanced. It could hardly be said to resemble the Sun, except in its circular shape, and when not obscured by clouds or the Ocean Mists, it had a Hazy-Red, Bronzed appearance, which would change to a White Light like a Luminous Cloud, as if reflecting some Greater Light beyond. We finally agreed in our discussion of this smoky furnace-colored Sun, that, whatever the cause of the phenomenon, it was not a reflection of our Sun, but a Planet of some sort - a reality.

One day soon after this, I felt exceedingly drowsy, and fell into a sound sleep. But it seemed, that I was almost immediately aroused by my Father's vigorous shaking of me by the shoulder and saying: "Olaf, awaken; there is land in sight!"
I sprang to my feet, and oh! joy unspeakable! There, far in the distance, yet directly in our path, were lands jutting boldly into the sea. The shore-line stretched far away to the right of us as far, as the eye could see, and all along the sandy beach were waves breaking into choppy foam, receding, then going forward again, ever chanting in monotonous thunder tones the song of the deep. The banks were covered with trees and vegetation. I cannot express my feeling of exultation at this discovery. My Father stood motionless, with his hand on the tiller, looking straight ahead, pouring out his heart in thankful prayer and thanksgiving to the Gods Odin and Thor. In the meantime a net, which we found in the stowage, had been cast, and we caught a few fish, that materially added to our dwindling stock of provisions. The compass, which we had fastened back in its place, in fear of another storm, was still pointing due North, and moving on its pivot, just as it had at Stockholm. The dipping of the needle had ceased. What could this mean? Then, too, our many days of sailing had certainly carried us far past the North Pole. And yet the needle continued to point North. We were sorely perplexed, for surely our direction was now South. We sailed for three days along the shoreline, then came to the mouth of a fjord or river of immense size. It seemed more like a great bay, and into this we turned our fishing-craft, the direction being slightly Northeast of South. By the assistance of a fretful wind, that came to our aid about twelve hours out of every twenty-four, we continued to make our way inland, into what afterward proved to be a mighty river, and which we learned was called by the inhabitants Hiddekel. We continued our journey for ten days thereafter, and found we had fortunately attained a distance inland, where ocean tides no longer affected the water, which had become fresh. The discovery came none too soon, for our remaining cask of water was well-nigh exhausted. We lost no time in replenishing our casks, and continued to sail farther up the river when the wind was favorable. Along the banks great forests miles in extent could be seen stretching away on the shore-line. The trees were of enormous size. We landed after anchoring near a sandy beach, and waded ashore, and were rewarded by finding a quantity of nuts, that were very palatable and satisfying hunger, and a welcome change from the monotony of our stock of provisions. It was about the first of September, over five months, we calculated, since our leave-taking from Stockholm. Suddenly we were frightened almost out of our wits by hearing in the far distance the singing of people. Very soon thereafter we discovered a huge ship gliding down the river directly toward us. Those aboard were singing in one mighty chorus that, echoing from bank to bank, sounded like a thousand voices, filling the whole Universe with quivering melody. The accompaniment was played on stringed instruments not unlike our harps. It was a larger ship, than any we had ever seen, and was differently constructed. At this particular time our sloop was becalmed, and not far from the shore. The bank of the river, covered with mammoth trees, rose up several hundred feet in beautiful fashion. We seemed to be on the edge of some primeval forest, that doubtless stretched far inland. The immense craft paused, and almost immediately a boat was lowered and six men of gigantic stature rowed to our little fishing-sloop. They spoke to us in a strange language. We knew from their manner, however, that they were not unfriendly. They talked a great deal among themselves, and one of them laughed immoderately, as though in finding us a queer discovery had been made. One of them spied our compass, and it seemed to interest them more, than any other part of our sloop. Finally, the leader motioned as if to ask whether we were willing to leave our craft to go on board their ship. "What say you, my son?" asked my Father. "They cannot do any more, than kill us."
"They seem to be kindly disposed," I replied, "although what terrible giants! They must be the select six of the Kingdom's crack regiment. Just look at their great size."
"We may as well go willingly as be taken by force," said my Father, smiling, "for they are certainly able to capture us." Thereupon he made known, by signs, that we were ready to accompany them. Within a few minutes we were on board the ship, and half an hour later our little fishing-craft had been lifted bodily out of the water by a strange sort of hook and tackle, and set on board as a curiosity. There were several hundred people on board this, to us, mammoth ship, which we discovered was called "The Naz," meaning, as we afterward learned, "Pleasure," or to give a more proper interpretation, "Pleasure Excursion" ship. If my Father and I were curiously observed by the ship's occupants, this strange race of giants offered us an equal amount of wonderment. There was not a single man aboard, who would not have measured fully twelve feet in height. They all wore full beards, not particularly long, but seemingly short-cropped. They had mild and beautiful faces, exceedingly fair, with ruddy complexions. The hair and beard of some were black, others sandy, and still others yellow. The captain, as we designated the dignitary in command of the great vessel, was fully a head taller, than any of his companions. The women averaged from ten to eleven feet in height. Their features were especially regular and refined, while their complexion was of a most delicate tint heightened by a healthful glow. Both men and women seemed to possess that particular ease of manner, which we deem a sign of good breeding, and, notwithstanding their huge statures, there was nothing about them suggesting awkwardness. As I was a lad in only my nineteenth year, I was doubtless looked upon as a true Tom Thumb. My Father's six feet three did not lift the top of his head above the waist line of these people. Each one seemed to vie (content, complete) with the others in extending courtesies and showing kindness to us, but all laughed heartily, I remember, when they had to improvise chairs for my Father and myself to sit at table. They were richly attired in a costume peculiar to themselves, and very attractive. The men were clothed in handsomely embroidered tunics of silk and satin and belted at the waist. They wore knee-breeches and stockings of a fine texture, while their feet were encased in sandals adorned with gold buckles. We early discovered, that gold was one of the most common metals known, and that it was used extensively in decoration. Strange as it may seem, neither my Father, nor myself felt the least bit of solicitude for our safety.
"We have come into our own," my Father said to me. "This is the fulfillment of the tradition told me by my Father and my Father's Father, and still back for many generations of our race. This is, assuredly, the Land beyond the North Wind."
We seemed to make such an impression on the party, that we were given specially into the charge of one of the men, Jules Galdea, and his Wife, for the purpose of being educated in their language; and we, on our part, were just as eager to learn as they were to instruct. At the Captain's command, the vessel was swung cleverly about, and began retracing its course up the river. The machinery, while noiseless, was very powerful. The banks and trees on either side seemed to rush by.
The ship's speed, at times, surpassed that of any railroad train, on which I have ever ridden, even here in America. It was wonderful.
In the meantime we had lost sight of the Sun's rays, but we found a radiance "within", emanating from the Dull-Red Sun, which had already attracted our attention, now giving out a white light seemingly from a cloud-bank far away in front of us. It dispensed a greater light, I should say, than two full moons on the clearest night. In twelve hours this cloud of whiteness would pass out of sight as if eclipsed, and the twelve hours following corresponded with our night. We early learned, that these strange people were worshipers of this great cloud of night. It was "The Smoky God" of the "Inner World."
The ship was equipped with a mode of illumination, which I now presume was electricity, but neither my father, nor myself were sufficiently skilled in mechanics to understand whence came the power to operate the ship, or to maintain the soft beautiful lights, that answered the same purpose of our present methods of lighting the streets of our cities, our houses and places of business. It must be remembered, the time of which I write was the autumn of 1829, and we of the "outside" surface of the Earth knew nothing then, so to speak, of electricity. The electrically surcharged condition of the air was a constant vitalizer. I never felt better in my life, than during the two years my Father and I sojourned on the inside of the Earth.
To resume my narrative of events; The ship, on which we were sailing, came to a stop two days after we had been taken on board. My Father said as nearly, as he could judge, we were directly under Stockholm or London. The city we had reached was called "Jehu," signifying a seaport town. The houses were large and beautifully constructed, and quite uniform in appearance, yet without sameness. The principal occupation of the people appeared to be agriculture; the hillsides were covered with vineyards, while the valleys were devoted to the growing of grain. I never saw such a display of gold. It was everywhere. The door-casings were inlaid and the tables were veneered with sheetings of gold. Domes of the public buildings were of gold. It was used most generously in the finishings of the great Temples of Music. Vegetation grew in lavish exuberance, and fruit of all kinds possessed the most delicate flavor. Clusters of grapes four and five feet in length, each grape as large as an orange, and apples larger, than a man's head typified the wonderful growth of all things on the "inside" of the Earth. The great redwood trees of California would be considered mere underbrush, compared with the giant forest trees extending for miles and miles in all directions. In many directions along the foothills of the mountains vast herds of cattle were seen during the last day of our travel on the river.
"We heard much of a city called "Eden," but were kept at "Jehu" for an entire year. By the end of that time we had learned to speak fairly well the language of this strange race of people. Our instructors, Jules Galdea and his wife, exhibited a patience, that was truly commendable. One day an envoy from the Ruler at "Eden" came to see us, and for two whole days my Father and myself were put through a series of surprising questions. They wished to know from whence we came, what sort of people dwelt "without," what God we worshiped, our religious beliefs, the mode of living in our strange land, and a thousand other things. The compass, which we had brought with us attracted especial attention. My Father and
I commented between ourselves on the fact, that the compass still pointed North, although we now knew, that we had sailed over the curve or edge of the Earth's aperture, and were far along southward on the "inside" surface of the Earth's Crust, which, according to my Father's estimate and my own, is about three hundred miles in thickness from the "inside" to the "outside" surface. Relatively speaking, it is no thicker, than an egg-shell, so that there is almost as much surface on the "inside" as on the "outside" of the Earth.
The Great Luminous Cloud or Ball of Dull-Red Fire - fiery-red in the mornings and evenings, and during the day giving off a beautiful White Light, "The Smoky God," - is seemingly suspended in the center of the great vacuum "within" the Earth, and held to its place by the immutable law of gravitation, or a repellant atmospheric force, as the case may be. I refer to the known power, that draws or repels with equal force in all directions. The base of this Electrical Cloud or Central Luminary,  dark and non-transparent, save for innumerable small openings, seemingly in the bottom of the Great Support or Altar of the Deity, upon which "The Smoky God" rests; and, the lights, shining through these many openings, twinkle at night in all their splendor, and seem to be Stars, as natural, as the Stars we saw shining when in our home at Stockholm, except that they appear larger. "The Smoky God," therefore, with each daily revolution of the Earth, appears to come up in the east and go down in the West, the same, as does our Sun on the external surface. In reality, the people "within" believe, that "The Smoky God" is their Sun, and is stationary. The effect of night and day is, therefore, produced by the Earth's daily rotation.
I have since discovered, that the language of the people of the Inner World is much like the Sanskrit. After we had given an account of ourselves to the emissaries from the Central Seat of Government of the Inner Continent, and my Father had, in his crude way, drawn maps, at their request, of the "outside" surface of the Earth, showing the divisions of land and water, and giving the name of each of the continents, large islands and the oceans, we were taken overland to the city of "Eden", in a conveyance different from anything we have in Europe or America. This vehicle was doubtless some electrical contrivance (clever plan). It was noiseless, and ran on a single iron rail in perfect balance. The trip was made at a very high speed. We were carried up hills and down dales, across valleys and again along the sides of steep mountains, without any apparent attempt having been made to level the Earth, as we do for railroad tracks. The car seats were huge yet comfortable affairs, and very high above the floor of the car. On the top of each car were high geared fly wheels lying on their sides, which were so automatically adjusted that, as the speed of the car increased, the high speed of these fly wheels geometrically increased.
Jules Galdea explained to us, that these revolving fan-like wheels on top of the cars, destroyed Atmospheric Pressure, or what is generally understood by the term Gravitation, and with this Force thus destroyed or rendered (0) nugatory, the car is as safe from falling to one side or the other from the single rail track, as if it were in a vacuum; the fly wheels in their rapid revolutions Destroying Effectually the so-called Power of Gravitation, or the Force of Atmospheric Pressure or whatever potent influence it may be, that causes all unsupported things to fall downward to the Earth's Surface or to the nearest point of resistance.
The surprise of my Father and myself was indescribable when, amid the regal magnificence of a spacious hall, we were finally brought before the Great High Priest, Ruler over all the land. He was richly robed, and much taller, than those about him, and could not have been less, than fourteen or fifteen feet in height. The immense room, in which we were received, seemed finished in solid slabs of gold thickly studded with jewels, of amazing brilliancy. The city of "Eden" is located in what seems to be a beautiful valley, yet, in fact, it is on the loftiest mountain plateau of the Inner Continent, several thousand feet higher, than any portion of the surrounding country. It is the most beautiful place I have ever beheld in all my travels. In this elevated garden all manner of fruits, vines, shrubs, trees, and flowers grow in riotous profusion. In this garden four rivers have their source in a mighty artesian fountain. They divide and flow in four directions. This place is called by the inhabitants the "Navel of the Earth," or the beginning, "the Cradle of the Human Race." The names of the rivers are the Euphrates, the Pison, the Gihon, and the Hiddekel. The unexpected awaited us in this palace of beauty, in the finding of our little fishing-craft. It had been brought before the High Priest in perfect shape, just as it had been taken from the waters that day when it was loaded on board the ship by the people, who discovered us on the river more, than a year before.
We were given an audience of over two hours with this great dignitary, who seemed kindly disposed and considerate. He showed himself eagerly interested, asking us numerous questions, and invariably regarding things, about which his emissaries had failed to inquire. At the conclusion of the interview he inquired our pleasure, asking us whether we wished to remain in his country or if we preferred to return to the "outer" world, providing it were possible to make a successful return trip, across the frozen belt barriers, that encircle both the Northern and Southern Openings of the Earth. My Father replied:
"It would please me and my Son to visit your country and see your people, your colleges and palaces of music and art, your great fields, your wonderful forests of timber; and after we have had this pleasurable privilege, we should like to try to return to our home on the 'outside' surface of the Earth. This Son is my only child, and my good Wife will be weary awaiting our return."
"I fear you will find it very difficult to return," replied the Chief High Priest, "because the way is a most hazardous one. However, you shall visit the different countries with Jules Galdea as your escort, and be accorded every courtesy and kindness. Whenever you are ready to attempt a return voyage, I assure you, that your boat, which is here on exhibition, shall be put in the waters of the river Hiddekel at its mouth."
Thus terminated our only interview with the High Priest or Ruler of the continent. We learned, that the males do not marry before they are from seventy-five to one hundred years old, and, that the age, at which women enter wedlock, is only a little less, and that both men and women frequently live to be from six to eight hundred years old, and in some instances much older. During the following year we visited many villages and towns, prominent among them being the cities of Nigi, Delfi, Hectea, and my Father was called upon no less, than a half-dozen times to go over the maps, which had been made from the rough sketches he had originally given of the divisions of land and water on the "outside" surface of the Earth.
I remember hearing my Father remark, that the Giant Race of People in the land of "The Smoky God" had almost as accurate an idea of the geography of the "outside" surface of the Earth, as had the average college professor in Stockholm.
In our travels we came to a forest of gigantic trees, near the city of Delfi. There were trees towering over three hundred feet in height, and more, than thirty feet in diameter, growing in the Garden of Eden, the Ingersolls, the Tom Paines and Voltaires would doubtless have pronounced the statement a myth. Yet this is the description of the California sequoia gigantea; but these California giants pale into insignificance, when compared with the forest Goliaths found in the "within" continent, where abound mighty trees from eight hundred to one thousand feet in height, and from one hundred to one hundred and twenty feet in diameter; countless in numbers and forming forests extending hundreds of miles back from the sea. The people are exceedingly musical, and learned to a remarkable degree in their arts and sciences, especially geometry and astronomy. Their cities are equipped with vast Palaces of Music, where not infrequently as many, as twenty-five thousand lusty voices of this Giant Race swell forth in mighty choruses of the most sublime symphonies. The children are not supposed to attend institutions of learning before they are twenty years old. Then their school life begins and continues for thirty years, ten of which are uniformly devoted by both sexes to the study of music. Their principal vocations are architecture, agriculture, horticulture, the raising of vast herds of cattle, and the building of conveyances peculiar to that country, for travel on land and water. By some device, which I cannot explain, they hold communion with one another between the most distant parts of their country, on air currents. All buildings are erected with special regard to strength, durability, beauty and symmetry, and with a style of architecture vastly more attractive to the eye, than any I have ever observed elsewhere. About three-fourths of the "inner" surface of the Earth is land and about one-fourth water. There are numerous rivers of tremendous size, some flowing in a northerly direction and others southerly. Some of these rivers are thirty miles in width, and it is out of these vast waterways, at the extreme northern and southern parts of the "inside" surface of the Earth, in regions, where low temperatures are experienced, that fresh-water icebergs are formed. They are then pushed out to sea like huge tongues of ice, by the abnormal freshets of turbulent waters that, twice every year, sweep everything before them. We saw innumerable specimens of bird-life no larger, than those encountered in the forests of Europe or America. It is well known, that during the last few years whole species of birds have quit the Earth. A writer in a recent article on this subject says:
"Almost every year sees the final extinction of one or more bird species. Out of fourteen varieties of birds found a century since on a single island -- the West Indian island of St. Thomas - eight have now to be numbered among the missing."
Is it not possible, that these disappearing bird species quit their habitation without, and find an asylum in the "within world"? Whether inland among the mountains, or along the seashore, we found bird life prolific. When they spread their great wings some of the birds appeared to measure thirty feet from tip to tip. They are of great variety and many colors. We were permitted to climb up on the edge of a rock and examine a nest of eggs. There were five in the nest, each of which was at least two feet in length and fifteen inches in diameter. After we had been in the city of Hectea about a week, Professor Galdea took us to an inlet, where we saw thousands of tortoises along the sandy shore. I hesitate to state the size of these great creatures. They were from twenty-five to thirty feet in length, from fifteen to twenty feet in width and fully seven feet in height. When one of them projected its head it had the appearance of some hideous sea monster. The strange conditions "within" are favorable not only for vast meadows of luxuriant grasses, forests of giant trees, and all manner of vegetable life, but wonderful animal life as well. One day we saw a great herd of elephants. There must have been five hundred of these thunder-throated monsters, with their restlessly waving trunks. They were tearing huge boughs from the trees and trampling smaller growth into dust like so much hazel-brush. They would average over 100 feet in length and from 75 to 85 in height. It seemed, as I gazed upon this wonderful herd of giant elephants, that I was again living in the public library at Stockholm, where I had spent much time studying the wonders of the Miocene age. I was filled with mute astonishment, and my Father was speechless with awe. He held my arm with a protecting grip, as if fearful harm would overtake us. We were two atoms in this great forest, and, fortunately, unobserved by this vast herd of elephants, as they drifted on and away, following a leader as does a herd of sheep. They browsed from growing herbage, which they encountered as they traveled, and now and again shook the firmament with their deep bellowing.
There is a hazy Mist, that goes up from the land each evening, and it invariably rains once every twenty-four hours. This great moisture and the invigorating electrical light and warmth account perhaps for the luxuriant vegetation, while the highly charged electrical air and the evenness of climatic conditions may have much to do with the giant growth and longevity of all animal life.
In places the level valleys stretched away for many miles in every direction. "The Smoky God," in its clear white light, looked calmly down. There was an intoxication in the electrically surcharged air, that fanned the cheek as softly, as a vanishing
whisper. Nature chanted a lullaby in the faint murmur of winds, whose breath was sweet with the fragrance of bud and blossom. After having spent considerably more, than a year in visiting several of the many cities of the "within" World and a great deal of intervening country, and more, than two years had passed from the time we had been picked up by the great excursion ship on the river, we decided to cast our fortunes once more upon the sea, and endeavor to regain the "outside" surface of the Earth. We made known our wishes, and they were reluctantly, but promptly followed. Our hosts gave my Father, at his request, various maps showing the entire "inside" surface of the Earth, its cities, oceans, seas, rivers, gulfs and bays. They also generously offered to give us all the bags of gold nuggets - some of them as large, as a goose's egg - that we were willing to attempt to take with us in our little fishing-boat. In due time we returned to Jehu, at which place we spent one month in fixing up and overhauling our little fishing sloop. After all was in readiness, the same ship "Naz", that originally discovered us, took us on board and sailed to the mouth of the River Hiddekel. After our Giant Brothers had launched our little craft for us, they were most cordially regretful at parting, and evinced much solicitude for our safety. My Father swore by the Gods Odin and Thor, that he would surely return again within a year or two and pay them another visit.
And thus we bade them adieu. We made ready and hoisted our sail, but there was little breeze. We were becalmed within an hour after our Giant Friends had left us and started on their return trip. The winds were constantly blowing south, that is, they were blowing from the Northern Opening of the Earth toward that, which we knew to be South, but which, according to our compass's pointing finger, was directly North. For three days we tried to sail, and to beat against the wind, but to no avail. Whereupon my Father said: "My Son, to return by the same route as we came in is impossible at this time of year. I wonder why we did not think of this before. We have been here almost two and a half years; therefore, this is the season when the Sun is beginning to shine in at the Southern Opening of the Earth. The long cold night is on in the Spitzbergen country."
"What shall we do?" I inquired.
"There is only one thing we can do," my Father replied, "and that is to go South." Accordingly, he turned the craft about, gave it full reef, and started by the compass North but, in fact, directly South. The wind was strong, and we seemed to have struck a current, that was running with remarkable swiftness in the same direction. In just forty days we arrived at Delfi, a city we had visited in company with our guides Jules Galdea and his wife, near the mouth of the Gihon river. Here we stopped for two days, and were most hospitably entertained by the same people, who had welcomed us on our former visit. We laid in some additional provisions and again set sail, following the needle due North. On our outward trip we came through a narrow channel, which appeared to be a separating body of water between two considerable bodies of land. There was a beautiful beach to our right, and we decided to reconnoiter. Casting anchor, we waded ashore to rest up for a day before continuing the outward hazardous undertaking. We built a fire and threw on some sticks of dry driftwood. While my Father was walking along the shore, I prepared a tempting repast from supplies we had provided. There was a mild, Luminous Light, which my Father said resulted from the Outer Sun, shining in from the South aperture of the Earth. That night we slept soundly, and awakened the next morning as refreshed, as if we had been in our own beds at Stockholm.
After breakfast we started out on an inland tour of discovery, but had not gone far when we sighted some birds, which we recognized at once as belonging to the penguin family. They are flightless birds, but excellent swimmers and tremendous in size, with white breast, short wings, black head, and long peaked bills. They stand fully nine feet high. They looked at us with little surprise, and presently waddled, rather than walked, toward the water, and swam away in a northerly direction.
The events, that occurred during the following hundred or more days, beggar description. We were on an open and iceless sea. The month we reckoned to be November or December, and we knew the so-called South Pole was turned toward the Sun. Therefore, when passing out and away from the internal Electrical Light of "The Smoky God" and its genial warmth, we would be met by the light and warmth of the Sun, shining in through the South Opening of the Earth. We were not mistaken. There were times when our little craft, driven by wind, that was continuous and persistent, shot through the waters like an arrow. Indeed, had we encountered a hidden rock or obstacle, our little vessel would have been crushed into kindling-wood. At last we were conscious, that the atmosphere was growing decidedly colder, and, a few days later, icebergs were sighted far to the left. My Father argued, and correctly, that the winds, which filled our sails came from the warm climate "within the Earth. The time of the year was certainly most auspicious for us to make our dash for the "outside" World and attempt to scud our fishing sloop through open channels of the frozen zone, which surrounds the Polar Regions.
We were soon amid the ice-packs, and how our little craft got through the narrow channels and escaped being crushed, I know not. The compass behaved in the same drunken and unreliable fashion in passing over the Southern Curve or Edge of the Earth's Shell as it had done on our inbound trip at the Northern Entrance. It gyrated, dipped and seemed like a thing possessed. One day as I was lazily looking over the sloop's side into the clear waters, my Father shouted "Breakers ahead!" Looking up, I saw through a lifting Mist a white object, that towered several hundred feet high, completely shutting off our advance. We lowered sail immediately, and none too soon. In a moment we found ourselves wedged between two monstrous icebergs. Each was crowding and grinding against its fellow mountain of ice. They were like two Gods of War contending for supremacy. We were greatly alarmed. Indeed, we were between the lines of a battle royal; the sonorous thunder of the grinding ice was like the continued volleys of artillery. Blocks of ice larger, than a house were frequently lifted up a hundred feet by the mighty force of lateral pressure; they would shudder and rock to and fro for a few seconds, then come crashing down with a deafening roar, and disappear in the foaming waters. Thus, for more than two hours, the contest of the icy giants continued. It seemed as if the end had come. The ice pressure was terrific, and while we were not caught in the dangerous part of the jam, and were safe for the time being, yet the heaving and rending of tons of ice as it fell splashing here and there into the watery depths filled us with shaking fear. Finally, to our great joy, the grinding of the ice ceased, and within a few hours the great mass slowly divided, and, as if an act of Providence had been performed, right before us lay an open channel. Should we venture with our little craft into this opening? If the pressure came on again, our little sloop, as well as ourselves, would be crushed into nothingness. We decided to take the chance, and, accordingly, hoisted our sail to a favoring breeze, and soon started out like a race-horse, running the gauntlet of this unknown narrow channel of open water. For the next forty-five days our time was employed in dodging icebergs and hunting channels; indeed, had we not been favored with a strong south wind and a small boat, I doubt if this story could have ever been given to the World. At last, there came a morning when my Father said: "My Son, I think we are to see home. We are almost through the ice. See! The open water lies before us."
However, there were a few icebergs, that had floated far northward into the open water still ahead of us on either side, stretching away for many miles. Directly in front of us, and by the compass, which had now righted itself, due North, there was an open sea.
"What a wonderful story we have to tell to the people of Stockholm," continued my Father, while a look of pardonable elation lighted up his honest face. "And think of the gold nuggets stowed away in the hold!"
I spoke kind words of praise to my Father, not alone for his fortitude and endurance, but also for his courageous daring as a discoverer, and for having made the voyage, that now promised a successful end. I was grateful, too, that he had gathered the wealth of gold we were carrying home. While congratulating ourselves on the goodly supply of provisions and water we still had on hand, and on the dangers we had escaped, we were startled by hearing a most terrific explosion, caused by the tearing apart of a huge mountain of ice. It was a deafening roar like the firing of a thousand cannon. We were sailing at the time with great speed, and happened to be near a monstrous iceberg, which to all appearances was as immovable, as a rockbound island. It seemed, however, that the iceberg had split and was breaking apart, whereupon the balance of the monster along, which we were sailing, was destroyed, and it began dipping from us. My father quickly anticipated the danger, before I realized its awful possibilities. The iceberg extended down into the water many hundreds of feet, and, as it tipped over, the portion coming up out of the water caught our fishing-craft like a lever on a fulcrum, and threw it into the air as if it had been a football. Our boat fell back on the iceberg, that by this time had changed the side next to us for the top. My father was still in the boat, having become entangled in the rigging, while I was thrown some twenty feet away. I quickly scrambled to my feet and shouted to my Father, who answered: "All is well." Just then a realization dawned upon me. Horror upon horror! The blood froze in my veins. The iceberg was still in motion, and its great weight and force in toppling over would cause it to submerge temporarily. I fully realized what a sucking maelstrom it would produce amid the worlds of water on every side. They would rush into the depression in all their fury, like white-fanged wolves eager for human prey. In this supreme moment of mental anguish, I remember glancing at our boat, which was lying on its side, and wondering if it could possibly right itself, and if my Father could escape. Was this the end of our struggles and adventures? Was this death? All these questions flashed through my mind in the fraction of a second, and a moment later I was engaged in a life and death struggle. The ponderous monolith of ice sank below the surface, and the frigid waters gurgled around me in frenzied anger. I was in a saucer, with the waters pouring in on every side. A moment more and I lost consciousness. When I partially recovered my senses, and roused from the swoon of a half-drowned man, I found myself wet, stiff, and almost frozen, lying on the iceberg. But there was no sign of my Father or of our little fishing sloop. The monster berg had recovered itself, and, with its new balance, lifted its head perhaps fifty feet above the waves. The top of this island of ice was a plateau perhaps half an acre in extent. I loved my Father well, and was grief-stricken at the awfulness of his death. I railed at fate, that I, too, had not been permitted to sleep with him in the depths of the ocean. Finally, I climbed to my feet and looked about me. The purple-domed sky above, the shoreless green ocean beneath, and only an occasional iceberg discernible! My heart sank in hopeless despair. I cautiously picked my way across the berg toward the other side, hoping, that our fishing craft had righted itself. Dared I think it possible, that my Father still lived? It was but a ray of hope, that flamed up in my heart. But the anticipation warmed my blood in my veins and started it rushing like some rare stimulant through every fiber of my body. I crept close to the precipitous side of the iceberg, and peered far down, hoping, still hoping. Then I made a circle of the berg, scanning every foot of the way, and thus I kept going around and around. One part of my brain was certainly becoming maniacal, while the other part, I believe, and do to this day, was perfectly rational. I was conscious of having made the circuit a dozen times, and while one part of my intelligence knew, in all reason, there was not a vestige of hope, yet some strange fascinating aberration bewitched and compelled me still to beguile myself with expectation. The other part of my brain seemed to tell me, that while there was no possibility of my Father being alive, yet, if I quit making the circuitous pilgrimage, if I paused for a single moment, it would be acknowledgment of defeat, and, should I do this, I felt that I should go mad. Thus, hour after hour I walked around and around, afraid to stop and rest, yet physically powerless to continue much longer. Oh! horror of horrors! to be cast away in this wide expanse of waters without food or drink, and only a treacherous iceberg for an abiding place. My heart sank within me, and all semblance of hope was fading into black despair. Then the hand of the Deliverer was extended, and the death-like stillness of a solitude rapidly becoming unbearable was suddenly broken by the firing of a signal-gun. I looked up in startled amazement, when, I saw, less than a half-mile away, a whaling-vessel bearing down toward me with her sail full set. Evidently my continued activity on the iceberg had attracted their attention. On drawing near, they put out a boat, and, descending cautiously to the water's edge,
I was rescued, and a little later lifted on board the whaling-ship. I found it was a Scotch whaler, "The Arlington." She had cleared from Dundee in September, and started immediately for the Antarctic, in search of whales. The Captain, Angus MacPherson, seemed kindly disposed, but in matters of discipline, as I soon learned, possessed of an iron will. When I attempted to tell him, that I had come from the "inside" of the Earth, the Captain and Mate looked at each other, shook their heads, and insisted on my being put in a bunk under strict surveillance of the ship's physician. I was very weak for want of food, and had not slept for many hours. However, after a few days' rest, I got up one morning and dressed myself without asking permission of the physician or anyone else, and told them, that I was as sane as anyone. The Captain sent for me and again questioned me concerning where I had come from, and how I came to be alone on an iceberg in the far off Antarctic Ocean. I replied, that I had just come from the "inside" of the Earth, and proceeded to tell him how my Father and myself had gone in by way of Spitzbergen, and come out by way of the South Pole country, whereupon I was put in irons. I afterward heard the Captain tell the Mate, that I was as crazy as a March hare, and that I must remain in confinement, until I was rational enough to give a truthful account of myself. Finally, after much pleading and many promises, I was released from irons. I then and there decided to invent some story, that would satisfy the Captain, and never again refer to my trip to the land of "The Smoky God," at least until I was safe among friends. Within a fortnight I was permitted to go about and take my place as one of the seamen. A little later the Captain asked me for an explanation. I told him, that my experience had been so horrible, that I was fearful of my memory, and begged him to permit me to leave the question unanswered, until some time in the future.
"I think you are recovering considerably," he said, "but you are not sane yet by a good deal." "Permit me to do such work as you may assign," I replied, "and if it does not compensate you sufficiently, I will pay you immediately after I reach Stockholm - to the last penny." Thus the matter rested. On finally reaching Stockholm, as I have already related, I found, that my good Mother had gone to her reward more, than a year before. I have also told how, later, the treachery of a relative landed me in a madhouse, where I remained for twenty-eight years - seemingly unending years - and, still later, after my release, how I returned to the life of a fisherman, following it sedulously for twenty-seven years, then how I came to America, and finally to Los Angeles, California.
But all this can be of little interest to the reader. Indeed, it seems to me the climax of my wonderful travels and strange adventures was reached when the Scotch sailing-vessel took me from an iceberg on the Antarctic Ocean. [thenewearth.org]

Finally, there are now available some very important recent communications from the Inner Earth (c.2000-7) in two books by Dianne Robbins, firstly, “Messages from the Hollow Earth” from Mikos within the Hollow Inner Earth Realm on the inside of the Planet's cavity, and secondly, “TELOS - A Subterranean City beneath Mt. Shasta” from Adama of the cavern city-civilisation of Telos within the Earth's crust, situated several miles below Mt Shasta in California. Here are a few excerpts from the above books:

"Messages from the Hollow Earth"

Introduction by Dianne:

Not just our Earth, but all Planets are Hollow! Planets are formed by hot gases, thrown from a Sun into an Orbit, and the Shell of Planets is created by Gravity and Centrifugal forces and the POLES REMAIN OPEN and lead to a Hollow Interior.
(No, Shells-Crusts are created by Suns, who are using the Law of Intent! Sun, not civilization or Shamballa, is in the centre or in the Core of a Shell ! In Hollow Earth there are many more Spheres of different vibrations with Suns in them and each one of them inhabited by a different civilization! Each one of these Spheres-Planets has numerous genetic labs to create hybreds to match the vibration of the highest sub-level of Physical 3D Earth with the brightest White Sun. Suns of smaller Spheres are lower in brightness! Coloful Northern Lights or Auroras are not generated by the White Sun, but by the vibrations of representatives of different civilizations from low - Red to higher - Pink. White color is all colored lights of Vibrations combined! I found quite a few mistakes in this introduction! From this description Life seems to be too easy for the inhabitants of Inner Earth! They have twice as less the Force of Gravity, than we do, and that explains why everything there reached giant size. Looks like they use crystals to generate their small Sun from our brighter Sun using electromagnetism. We supply them with our Energy. Andromedans say that Gravity comes from an outside Field, not in the centre of the Earth and not in the Crust ! Same as generation of Fabric of Time.
LM).
This process forms a Hollow Sphere with an Inner Sun, smoky in color, which gives off soft and pleasant full spectrum sunlight, making the inside surface highly conducive to growth of vegetation and Human life, with only a long-long day and no nights.
The HOLLOW EARTH BEINGS are very spiritually evolved and technologically advanced, and live inside the Interior Core of our Hollow Earth. These advanced civilizations live in peace and brotherhood in the Center of our Earth, which contains an Inner Central Sun, with oceans and mountains still in their pristine state. The Hollow Earth cavity is still in its pristine state, because they don't walk or build upon their land. There are no buildings, shopping malls or highways. They travel in electromagnetic vehicles, that levitate a few inches above ground. They walk along streams, rivers, and oceans and climb mountains - but that's the extent of their foot contact with the ground. They leave the rest of their land to nature, because it's nature's land too. The governing city within the Hollow Earth is called Shamballa. It is located inside the very Center of the Planet, and can be accessed through the holes at either the North or South poles. The Northern and Southern Lights, that we see in our skies are actually reflections from our Hollow Earth's Inner Central Sun, which emanates from her Hollow Core. They use Free Energy to light up their cities, homes, and tunnels. They use crystals, coupled with electromagnetism, which generates a Small Sun with full-spectrum lighting, that lasts for half a million years, and gives them all the power they need.
The Earth's Crust is approximately 800 miles from the outer to the inner surface. Because our Earth is hollow, and not a solid Sphere, the Center of Gravity is not in the Center of the Earth, but in the Center of its Crust, which is 400 miles below the
surface. The Force of Gravity in the Inner Earth is half, that of the outer surface, which may be one explanation for the greater height of the people, plants and the trees; some of their Redwoods reach over a thousand feet in height.
The source of Earth's Magnetic Field has been a mystery. The Inner Sun at the Center of Earth is the mysterious Power Source behind the Earth's Magnetic Field. There are entry caverns all over the Earth, where interactions can take place.
Only some are currently open. Nikola Tesla, the genius inventor of electrical technology, is now living inside the Hollow Earth. He began to receive information in the latter part of the 1800's and discovered that: “electric power is everywhere present in unlimited quantities and can drive the world's machinery without the need of coal, oil, gas or any other of the common fuels”. In the 1930's the tunnel entrances and passageways were closed off by the Hollow Earth civilizations,  because “corporations” at that time were misusing Tesla's technology to gain entrance into the Inner Earth. The Hollow Earth's two main Portals are at the Holes at the Poles, which were closed off in the year 2000, because our governments were setting detonations at the Poles to blow open entrances into their world. They have installed a Magnetic Force Field around Earth's Polar Openings to further camouflage the entrances. This way, the Openings are protected from air and land sightings. In the past there were entrances to the Library of Porthologos on the surface. One such entrance was the Library of Alexandria, which was destroyed by fire in A.D. 642.
There is more landmass inside (3/4 land and 1/4 water) and the land is more condensed, than ours. Everything in the Hollow Earth is very carefully maintained to balance the ecological system of all Life Forms, that reside there. There are several million Catharians/Agharthians currently residing in the Hollow Earth. There are Catharians, who have incarnated as Humans on the surface. There are also Catharians, that live on the Planet Jupiter
(I don't believe it! Planet Jupiter is one of non-physical Planets Earth, where size of the body is irrelevant! Planet Earth-Jupiter is also of a much higher vibration. Looks like these Catharians didn't get their Knowledge  of our Solar System and our Universe by trial and error, by sweat, by hard labour and pain, by raising their vibration, but by another way - from their computerised library of virtual reality Universe! They even guard this Knowledge. Their Library doesn't look like the Library on Focus 27, described by Robert Monroe! Neither he, nor his explorers of Universe used computers or any drugs to help them! LM).
The average Catharian is 15 feet tall, rising to 23 feet for certain of the Masters. There are also 36,000 Humans from our outer surface, who now live inside the Earth. Over the last 200 years approximately 50 surface Humans went inside to live; however, during the last 20 years only 8 have gone inside to live there.
The Library of Porthologos
I am Mikos, Guardian of the Earth's records, and all records in your Solar System and Universe. I am here, in the cavity of Earth, primarily to guard the history of all life everywhere. This is our prime purpose and the purpose for the Library of
Porthologos. Our Library is the only one of its kind in our vast system of Planets. Our Library is so vast, that it covers 456 square miles of terrain and has vast storage vaults, containing records all stored on crystal slides, that are viewed through our crystal projectors. Our storage facilities are vast, organized and categorized, so that you can easily locate the information you are looking for and retrieve it for viewing. We have vast conveyers, that will deliver your order within minutes, and then return it back to its storage location again. This way, every item in the Library is always where it should be and can be easily found and perfectly preserved. Such is our technological capabilities. For we have drawn on the technology of the Universe we reside in, and have the most advanced methods of preservation and storage and retrieval, that would marvel your library systems. . .And now, I and my entourage have been awaiting you on the doorstep to the Library of Porthologos, where the white alabaster steps twinkle with the sparks of embedded crystals and diamonds, leading into the great halls of our Library, located inside the Earth's Vast Interior. Today we will take you on a tour through our halls, and show you what a true library in your future will look like. Your future libraries will look like ours, as ours is the model, that all libraries will replicate. We will start with the outer grounds, as there are inner grounds too. The outer grounds are lush with grasses, flowers, bushes and trees; and there are circular clearings with soft benches and lounging chairs in the center, accompanied by small, round, tall tables to set your accouterments on. There are small springs of waterfalls and fountains in these enclosures, for our water is alive and in a full state of consciousness, that sings. Yes, our water sings, and as you lounge in our secluded enclosure you are sung to by the water of life, as it sprays from our fountains with melodies of deep love, that harmonizes and balances all the cells in your body. From this state of deep peacefulness and harmony, we sit and relax at intervals during our work-day. And now we go inside the Library of Porthologos, and walk up the crystal staircase, where the door opens up into the Universe. Yes, the Library is multidimensional! As you enter, you see the Milky Way Galaxy floating around you, and can glance into the heavens beyond, which encompasses our whole Universe. You see the Stars and Suns and other Solar Systems, revolving around our Central Sun; and you feel part of “All That Is”, as indeed you are….You see people everywhere - walking, talking, studying, sitting, reclining, dreaming and just soaking in the vibrations of peace. Everywhere there are flowers of great vibrancy and fountains and pools of water spilling forth their choruses of song. You look around and see secluded alcoves interspersed throughout the vast halls, with the most ergonomically structured chairs beckoning you to recline upon them. You find one calling to you, and you sit down and experience a connection to this chair, that tunes you to its vibration, so that you are connected to the mainframe of the internal computer in the library. You are, so to speak, “wired up” with the wireless wires, and fully connected to the operating system, which you operate with your thoughts and feelings, and which will take you anywhere you “wish” to go in our Galaxy. You navigate with your mind, using your thoughts, as your directional compass for coordinates of latitude and longitude. And it is so natural, that you marvel at its simplicity and naturalness. And you travel in Consciousness (like in water, LM), and explore our Galaxy and Universe “first hand” and for the first time in your fully conscious Human state. This is yet another aspect of what our library offers to its visitors, along with its crystal slides of all recorded History of our entire Universe. And you are here through the vibrational frequency of our words, as you read them and envision the sights in your “imagination”.
We welcome you, and invite you to enter at any time. Just call to us for entry, as our call is always going out to you. I am Mikos, and I am here to guide you personally through our Library whenever you call. You don't need a “Library Card”, as your identification is inscribed in the DNA of your cells. We await your visit.
Our Oceans and Beaches - Our Water is Alive with Consciousness.
Good morning. It is Mikos calling to you from the ocean shore in the Hollow Earth, where I am walking along the beach watching the waves lap the sand. Our oceans are large, nay (no) huge in comparison to yours, with waves larger in size and
stronger in force. The oceans flow swiftly around our Inner Globe, ebb and flow in tides, affected by the Earth's outer Moon, just as your tides are. For the magnetic pull of the Moon is felt inside the Earth as well. We all spend much of our time on the beaches, walking on the sand along the shore, and swimming in the ocean's clean, clear water. The water in oceans and rivers is composed of living consciousness, and it is our water's consciousness, that keeps us young forever. Our shorelines are packed with the purest of sand, white colored and soft and crystal clear specs of the smoothest particles you have ever stepped on. Walking on our sandy beaches is akin to having the best foot massage possible. And we do walk on our beaches for this very purpose, for its massage soothes our feet and mind simultaneously. Our ocean's waves lap our shorelines with the purest and cleanest of water you have ever seen or tasted. And the temperature is always perfect for our bodies. Not too warm and not too cold. We walk into our oceans, where it is shallow, and swim out great distances without ever getting tired or cold. No one here ever drowns. This is unheard of and unimaginable. We are all great swimmers, and our oceans and lakes support us, so that we stay on top of the water. Water has consciousness, and talks to us while we are immersed in it. Yes, our water talks. When we swim, our water becomes part of our body, and we are one body, one ocean, swimming along the currents and through the waves. We merge ourselves completely with the water's consciousness, and our swim is a trip in consciousness itself. It is so much more, than what you experience in your surface lakes and oceans, where the Consciousness of your Water has become so densified and polluted, that it has lost its voice and vitality and life force. It weakly calls out to you, but you don't hear it...The Inner Earth's Oceans contain all of the life, that's in the upper oceans, and more. Our oceans are teeming with life, and all of the marine forms live in harmony with one another. (It was like that before, but not anymore: our Old Universe's Life is soon over! LM).
All are on a vegetarian diet and do not hunt others. All live in harmony. All the marine life is very evolved compared to the life in the surface oceans. All are used to the peace and safety of our waters, and all are accessible to us. We all communicate directly to the Cetaceans and fish, live cooperatively and in peace with one another. Since we are all on a vegetarian diet, we don't hunt the Whales, go fishing or farm shrimp. Therefore, Mother Nature is free to evolve in our oceans and our oceans are sanctuaries to all ocean life. We just call to whomever we want to talk to, and they swim to our shores and converse with us. It would seem truly magical to you, but to us it is commonplace. Remember, all of us in the Hollow Earth know we are ONE….On our land areas, our fields of grains sparkle and thrive and are perfectly touched by the “Sun” and rain to produce the most luscious of crops, that are so pleasing to our palates and so invigorating for our bodies. Our food pulses with the force of life, and when eaten by us, transfers the life-force into our very cells, which results in perfect health and longevity of years. This is the secret of life; this is the hidden fountain of youth you've all been looking for on your surface. It is found in the Earth herself, just waiting to give you its Life-force, if you will but follow Nature's laws of planting and harvesting crops, using only Nature herself to direct the process and oversee the growth. With the great forces of Nature working with you, you don't need to add anything to the soil, and the harvests are always magnificent in size and nutrients and taste. The Earth's Interior is the mirror image of the surface foundation.
(It means that if you have landslides on outside surface, you have them on inner surface as well. The Inner Worlds are collapsing too as a result of Old Universe inevitable Departure! LM).

Everything is in reverse order in the inside of the Earth. The mountain ranges are in direct proportion to the dimensions of the Earth's cavity, and tower above the landscape. The oceans are larger, and flow calmly and swiftly around the inside of the Globe. The air is crisp and clean, and the sand is white. The Central Sun is dimmer, than the Sun on the outside. (This is to our advantage - it means we are of higher vibration! LM). The cities are all nestled in lush woodlands, overflowing with flowers and huge trees. There is green growth surrounding all human-made structures. Everything is in perpetual blossom and bloom. It is a land of wonder and beauty. All is in perfect proportion to the size of the circumference of the interior. Everything is larger - even the great Beings, who inhabit the interior, are larger, than the Humans on the outside. All is beauty, and all is in a heavenly state of bliss. Just picture the interior foundation, reflecting the exterior foundation; with mountain ranges higher, and the ocean currents swifter, and the green land growth lush beyond compare. You do not need to picture a change in the contour of the land. It is still in its pristine beauty, and replicates how life on the surface once was. The exact location of the mountain ranges and oceans is not necessary to know at this time. What is necessary to know is that this Inner World exists, and co-exists with the surface, under peaceful and contrary conditions….The Hollow Earth is a Paradise, with tall, graceful mountains jutting into the “sky”; and large, clear, clean lakes and oceans, that abound with life. The diet in the Hollow Earth is strictly vegetarian, and people are healthy, robust, and strong. They, too, have isolated themselves from the surface population, although they come and leave the Earth freely, using the spacecraft, that are kept there in the Spaceport in the inside of the Earth. So although they are inside the Earth, they have freedom and health, abundance and peace - all the necessary components of life, that you on the surface have been crying out for. There is Free Travel between the Subterranean Cities and the Hollow Earth through the Tunnels, using our Electromagnetic Trains, that can take us from one part of the Earth to another in a fraction of the time, it takes you on the surface. Our transportation is quick and efficient, and burns no fuels. Therefore, there's no pollution underground. We live inside Cavern Homes, from which we can look out onto our green world outside. Now that you are somewhat familiar with the Hollow Earth, we can “dig” further into your credibility and introduce another factor of our living arrangements underground. Underground, we do not live out in the open spaces the way you do on the surface. Our Hollow Earth cavity is pristine, because we don't tread upon her inner surface, nor build upon her. We don't have shopping malls and expanses of highways, nor towering buildings. We live inside caverns, with openings facing outward towards the open, wide spaces of the Hollow cavity inside the Earth. Sure, we travel inside the cavity on our electromagnetic vehicles, that levitate a few inches above the ground, never touching the ground. We walk softly on the earthen paths and run along the streams, rivers and oceans, and climb the towering mountains. But that is the extent of our foot contact with the terrain. The rest we leave to Nature's Devas and Elementals, as it is their land, too. All our living activity takes place within our inner caverns, which are vast and wide and high and composed of crystalline rocks and gemstones and crystal arches radiating full-spectrum Colored Rainbows of Sparkling Light into our cavern atmosphere. Our walls are lined with natural Rainbow-Hued Waterfalls, humidifying the air with the vibrancy and song of its water cascading down. Yes, our water “sings” - and its chorus brings our body cells into harmony, so that our bodies are always vibrating to our water and crystalline surroundings, that keep us energized and vibrant all day long. We need little sleep, because our cells are always tuned and in harmony to the natural rhythm of Mother Earth herself.

(There is no Mother-Earth and Farther-Sun or Farther-God! Our Bright Sun and Planet Earth is the same thing! Why can't they learn it in their "great libraries"? LM).
When you are tuned like a tuning fork, then you carry the full Life Force of our Mother, and your battery never runs down. Hence, there is little need for the long hours of sleep, such as you experience it. You are drained and run-down after a day in your “sweatshops”, but we are always as vibrant at the end of our days, as we are when we begin them. We live “in” and “with” the Earth, whereas you live “outside” and “separate” from her. Hence, you are “cut off”, while we are a “part” of her. This is the big difference.
(Everything is free for you, you don't have to run and earn money to support yourselves and your children like people on the surface! That's why you don't get old, but you also wouldn't experience pain to raise your vibration! That's a Huge Difference between surface people and Inner Earth people! LM).

Your Spiritual Hierarchy has been preparing housing for you inside these vast, uninhabited caverns in Earth's interior, and when the external “Earth Changes” come, many of you will be moved en masse into them to continue your present incarnation inside Earth, not “on” her. You will encounter a “whole” new way of living, that is wholesome and rich and perfect in every way. It will expand your consciousness and expand your horizon, and your horizon will be an inner horizon vaster, than when you walk outdoors on the surface. A whole new horizon is waiting for you to experience. Events will start happening fast now, as time is speeding up even faster... Just ride with the tide and know you are safe wherever you are. You are all being directed and guided from within, and you are all being provided for. What you witness through your media is only a “play”, a drama that they want you to believe is real, just because the actors are real. But the actors are just “playing out their part” in the World's Drama, and this is the biggest “hit” yet of the new Millennium, playing on your TV and movie theater screens everywhere. Just turn the knob off, go within yourself, and feel and focus on World Peace. Peace is the real movie, and the only “reel” to watch. Soon, you will see us, and soon you, too, will be living perfectly suited to your new way of life.

IX. TELOS - A Subterranean City beneath Mt. Shasta by Dianne Robbins
Greetings from Telos, a Subterranean City beneath Mt. Shasta in California. I am dictating this message to you from my home beneath the Earth, where over a million of us live in perpetual peace and prosperity. We are Human and physical just as you, except for the fact, that our mass consciousness holds thoughts of only Immortality and Perfect Health. Therefore, we can live hundreds and even thousands of years in the same body. I, myself, have been in the same body now for over 600 years. We came here over 12,000 years ago before a thermal nuclear war took place, that destroyed the Earth's surface. We faced such hardships and calamities above ground, that we decided to continue our evolution underground.
We appealed to the Spiritual Hierarchy of the Planet for permission to renovate the already existing cavern inside Mt. Shasta, and prepare it for the time when we would need to evacuate our homes above ground.When the war was to begin, we were warned by the Spiritual Hierarchy to begin our evacuation to this underground cavern by going through the vast tunnel system that's spread throughout the Planet. We had hoped to save all our Lemurian people, but there was only time to save 25 thousand souls. The remainder of our Race perished in the blast. For the past 12,000 years, we have been able to rapidly evolve in consciousness due to our isolation from the marauding bands of extraterrestrials and other hostile races, that prey on the surface population. The surface population has been experiencing great leaps of consciousness in preparation for Humanity to move through the Photon Belt. It is for this reason, that we have begun to contact surface dwellers to make our existence known. For in order for the Earth and Humanity to continue to ascend in consciousness, the whole Planet must be united and merged into ONE Light (Sun) from below and ONE Light (Sun) from above. It is for this reason, that we are contacting you to make you aware of our underground existence, so you can bring the fact of our existence to the attention of our fellow brothers and sisters above ground. Our book of channeled messages is written to Humanity, in hopes, that they will recognize and receive us when we emerge from our homes beneath ground and merge with them on the surface, in the not too far distant future. We will be grateful to you for the part you play in helping us broadcast the reality of our existence.
Q: What are your days like?
We are sitting here, under a tree, in the lushness of our environment. I, Adama, am here. Mikos of course is in the Hollow Earth. So would you like to begin?
Today we will talk about ourselves... Although you think, that our lives are easy, which they certainly are, we have many responsibilities and many duties to perform each and every day, the foremost of which is to connect with our Higher Selves for guidance for the day. We plan our days thoroughly, so that we can complete our duties and still have time left over for relaxation and fun. Our days are filled with laughter, no matter what we do, and we are always surrounded by our family and friends. For as we have said, there are no strangers here. We understand the concept of Oneness, and we practice it in everything we do. For example, when we are doing our work in whatever area it is, we rely on each other and help each other by working in unison to complete the task, and to complete it perfectly. We don't skip details to finish quicker, as some people on the surface do, because we have our very lives invested in the outcome. We know the importance of doing everything well, for we all depend on the quality of what we produce. Nothing here breaks down or becomes obsolete, as it does above ground, so we don't have to keep replacing things. This is why we have so much free time here, because we don't have to keep reproducing the same things over and over again, because nothing breaks down. Most everything lasts hundreds, if not thousands, of years. This also accounts for our not having any land fills in Telos, because there is no waste produced. All our by-products are recycled and reused, and if there are any ingredients left over, that we cannot use, we just dematerialize them. Voila, and they are gone! So this frees up all our land space for living space, parks and streams. And of course we have no roadways, just paths to walk on and our vehicles, that levitate and take us wherever we direct them to take us. We fly with our minds, using our thoughts, as our directional compass. Our vehicles are small for inner city travel, and we just talk to them and tell them where our destination is, and we hold that thought and vision, until we are there. It is all very simple, as you will someday see. Our city is a fun place, with many activities always going on. There are plays, musicals, and everything you can think of, except for competitive sports. We don't compete here; we only cooperate in our athletics and have fun. Nothing is done to “win”, only to enjoy to its fullest. Our forest is rich in oxygen, and we take daily walks in the woods to rejuvenate ourselves, just as you on the surface do. Our lifestyles are not that different, except that ours are free from stress and worry, and filled with joy over-brimming. This helps account for our long lives. For stress causes cells to decay and depression accelerates the process. Even in your healing books today, they talk about the importance of laughter and merriment in combating diseases and living longer lives. So our lives are not that much different from yours; we just learned how to live them fully, with no impediments. And now, Mikos is here.
Greetings from the city of Catharia, where my home is. I live in a small alcove, nestled inside a small hill surrounded by lush vegetation, flowers, bushes, and tall trees. Actually, everything here is tall, including our body frames, which generally reach 15 feet high for most of our population. The Telosians average 7 feet, and Adama is 7 feet, 2 inches tall. I myself am a little over 15 feet tall, which is about half the height of your surface trees. We were all meant to be tall, even surface folk were once averaging 15 feet in height, when the surface was protected from the Sun's radiation by the firmament. Your Sun is now changing and becoming magnetic

(this is bullshit, natural Sun is White Energy of Balance, it is never magnetic, unless the Sun is artificial and our Sun is not artificial! LM).

This will stop the declining of your heights, and in time you will again begin to gain in height. You will notice how so many of your youth are taller, than your own generation. We just wanted to give you a little clarity on this subject....

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

If we are successful in finding the polar opening, then within 1,700 miles from any farthest north Arctic land bordering the Arctic Ocean, we should reach the inner continent just as Admiral Richard E. Byrd did on his 1947 flight beyond the pole, as
described in Amadeo Giannini's 1959 book, Worlds Beyond the Poles. At that time, Giannini wrote:
"This United States Navy's polar exploratory force was preparing to embark upon one of the most memorable adventures in world history. Under the command of Rear Admiral Richard Evelyn Byrd, U.S.N., it was to penetrate into land extending beyond the North Pole supposed end of the Earth... As the hour approached for the air journey into the land beyond, Admiral Byrd transmitted from the Arctic base a radio announcement of his purpose, but the announcement was so astonishing that its import was lost to millions who avidly read it in the press headlines throughout the world...The words of the message were momentous: 'I'd like to see that LAND BEYOND the Pole."... "That area BEYOND the Pole is THE CENTER OF THE GREAT UNKNOWN!" Subsequently, "...the admiral and his airplane crew accomplished a physical flight of seven hours duration in a northerly direction beyond the North Pole. Every mile and every minute of that journey beyond was over ice, water, or land that no explorer had seen...As progress was made beyond the Pole point, there was observed directly under the plane's course iceless land and lakes, and mountains where foliage was abundant. Moreover, a brief newspaper account of the flight held that a member of the admiral's crew had observed a monstrous greenish-hued animal moving through the underbrush of that land beyond the Pole."
It is the intention of this expedition to search out and explore that area Beyond the Pole that Rear Admiral Richard Evelyn Byrd discovered. It is estimated, that within 1,500 miles of the Pole, the expedition should reach the inner continent.
The coastline of the inner continent could then be followed looking for the River Hiddekel and sail up the river to the City of Jehu to meet the inner earth inhabitants, just as Olaf Jansen and his father did in 1829. Within Our Hollow Earth at the City of Jehu, expedition members could take an Inner Earth monorail train to visit the lost Garden of Eden located under America on the highest mountain plateau of the Inner Continent. It is also the capital city of Inner Earth, according to Olaf Jansen.
Perhaps in this City we can visit the palace of the King of the Inner World, as did Olaf Jansen and his father.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

A Description of Rainbow City - From The Hefferlin Manuscript
http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/tierra_hueca/esp_tierra_hueca_26.htm

THE RAINBOW CITY BUILT BY MARTIANS (ALIENS) IN ANTARCTICA
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Nf9_fQOeQpM

1 - THE HEFFERLIN MANUSCRIPT

Typewritten and handwritten copies of these manuscripts have been in circulation since the Hefferlins, began releasing them from Livingston, Montana in the late 1940s. At the time the Hefferlins first heard of Rainbow City in the Antarctic, some time in 1940 according to them, the information was so fantastic, as to be beyond belief. It is still unbelievable to most people, that there in the frozen wastes lies a great city, comfortably warm, full of scientific marvels from some great, hitherto unknown civilization of the past. Nevertheless they were convinced the information was true and cautiously released it a little at a time to the few they found understanding and receptive. Hefferlin claims he designed a flyable, circle-winged plane before Frying Saucers became news in 1947. In fact, much of his material in the manuscripts, utterly fantastic in the 1940s, now seems worthy of consideration in 1960? Most UFOlogers have heard of the manuscripts or seen references to them in Saucer literature. Mrs. Hefferlin accuses Ray Palmer of misinterpreting them for his own purposes, as you will read an the introduction on the opposite page. Having reviewed a loan copy of the manuscript, how complete is not known, the Director of BSRA decided it was time the Associates had a chance to look over the material and form their conclusions.
In his book "Agharta" R.E. Dickhoff seems to have drawn liberally from Hefferlin without crediting the source. After reading this book in 1953, our former Director, Meade Layne, asked the head of the Inner Circle, Yada Di Shi-ite, if there was such a vast tunnel system under the Earth. To Headers surprise the Yada confirmed its existence.
In "Isis Unveiled" H.P. Blavatsky writes:
"Spheres unknown below our feet; spheres still more unknown and more unexplored above us, between the two a handful of moles blind to God's great lights and deaf to whispers of the invisible world..."
The whole of the MS loaned to us contains some 160 pages of material, all of which we hope to release eventually. This first portion of 30 pages gives the description of Rainbow City. Other portions give the occult Instructions from the Book of Imri, the philosophy of Rani Khatani of the Ancient Three, a History of Humankind, which includes a description of the eternal conflict with the Serpent Race, and reference to the King of the World. Hefferlin also describes his radical power plant, the GHYT motor. The Hefferlins were operating one of San Francisco's trolleys in 1949; but we haven't found anyone, who knows, where they are at present. They seem to have disappeared from the face of the Earth. Maybe they succeeded in fulfilling their wish, of being transported to Rainbow City via one of the Portals. Who knows?

2 - Introduction to THE HEFFERLIN MANUSCRIP by Gladys Hefferlin
Notice to all of you, who have read the Shaver Mystery by way of the stories and articles written by Richard S. Shaver. Our material has no connection with the Shaver Mystery. In our correspondence with Mr. Raymond A, Palmer, editor of the Amazing Stories Magazine, we requested him to keep our material separate from the Shaver Mystery and not to use it in connection with the Mystery. Mr. Palmer ignored our request and has deliberately distorted our statements for his own purpose, thereby misleading the readers of Amazing Stories Magazine. This group or organization of which we speak has no name. It is not a Lodge or Mystery School or anything of that sort. No one can buy his way into Rainbow City.
We, ourselves, who are the North American spokesmen, cannot enter Rainbow City at this time. Therefore we cannot promise entry to anyone else. We are not the ones, who decide, who shall go to Rainbow City and who shall not.
The Leaders, "The Ancient Three", Who Were, Who Are, Who Will Be, decide all those matters.
(No, it is a Higher Self of a Human decides and noone else! LM).

The two thousand people, who are down there now, wore picked by the Leaders, because of their peculiar abilities and the fact, that they are reincarnations of Ancient Ones, who lived and worked there, when Rainbow City was founded. The ancient "memory" pools are awakened and they have much knowledge innate within them to help in the work now being done there. There is not enough room in Rainbow City for all of the so called worthy people of the World, much less for all of Humanity. Who is to say, which ones are worthy and which unworthy? And if the icecaps of Antarctica were melted to release the six other cities from the ice to make more room. The melted ice, as water flowing into the oceans, would wreak more havoc, than the atom bomb. The Leaders are the modern reincarnations of the young Leaders, who led the first migration of HUmankind from Mars to Earth. They, in those days, were known as "The Ancient Three - Who were, Who are, Who will be, Always." When Humankind reaches a very critical period in its history, these three are born again to lead Humankind in the proper path and give them another chance. These Leaders are right now guiding the destinies of three-quarters of the population of the World, and three-quarters of the land mass. All of Asia, the islands of the seas, all of the natives of Africa, all of the Latin American States, and the Negroes, Red Indians and Eskimos of North America accept their leadership and guidance. The Occident, the White Race, is hearing about this now for the first time. For the purpose of this group is to bring about the Brotherhood of Man on Earth, and to abolish all wars. And to do this, it was necessary to give the exploited, the oppressed and the enslaved people of the World the first opportunity to make their move for freedom. The means, by which this material has been gathered, is a form of telepathy, called by us "Controlled Mental Communication". Before you say it is silly, stop to think of the work of Alexis Carrel, of Dr. Rhine of Duke University and other scientists. Then think of the many chairs of Mental Telepathy established in the Department of Psychology in the largest universities in the United States. Therefore it cannot be silly.
THE FIRST CONTACT
In 1927 in San Francisco we met a man, who became a very great friend of ours. In his moving around, in our moving around, we lost touch with each other. Both regretted the lost contact. In February, 1935 when we were in Elwood, Indiana, we learned, that our friend, Emery, was in New York in radio circles. We immediately got in touch with him and he was very glad of it. We started to develop this system we call Controlled Mental Communication. He helped us in every way. Mrs. Hefferlin was the one, who established the mental 'link.' Emery came to Elwood several times during the process, to check for accuracy. It was accurate. He had occasion to go to several places in the United States. Each time would transmit information and then check with us. When it was found, that the system of telepathy was accurate he went to other places in the World, transmitting much information, which has nothing to do with the question now in hand. However, confirmation of that information was always forthcoming by way of Newspapers and radio, anywhere from two days later to five years later . We had such a mass of confirmatory evidence by that medium, that it became monotonous putting it down. We cannot doubt the information given us now, no matter how fantastic it seems. Our communication is as fast, as ordinary, open conversation. Mrs. Hefferlin receives the information telepathically and transmits by spoken word to Mr. Hefferlin. Both speak aloud to answer Emery. Our friend can hear spoken conversation, and can see anything, that is held up before the "channel", as we call the medium, which is used. He hears all, that is said, if one speaks loudly enough, It is not necessary to shout only to speak clearly. Street noises from here go through to him. There is no  mystery about this channel, only a definite use of vibrational focus. No need of mystic actions or trance, or incense, or mirrors, or candles, but the simple use of a picture. This channel was opened in the spring of 1935, more than 12 years ago. Emery and some others, working under orders, discovered Rainbow City in the fall of 1942 around Thanksgiving time. So you see, in the interval of over 7 years we had plenty of time to check all angles of our communication channel. So, no matter how fantastic the information is, we have every reason to accept it as true; no reason to believe it false. We have sufficient proof for ourselves but no concrete, material proof that can be held in the hand and passed from person to person. Therefore we warn each reader to take this information with a grain of salt, and examine the material for himself. We are not putting it forth as indisputable fact, that must be accepted, just because we say so. But each reader must let his own reason and logic speak to him, and he is free to accept or reject it, as he sees fit. It is immaterial to us which one he does.
THE GHYT MOTOR
In 1940 we gave to our friend Emery the designs and information of Ghyt Motor No. 1, burn water for fuel; Circle Winged Plan, and the instruments sketched in the article "Power"! All articles were printed in the Amazing Stories Magazine for September  1946. Emery turned them over to the Ancient Three, eventually. We ourselves could do nothing with them for we had no money to develop them, but Emery ran out of money in caring for the first "Circle Winged Plane", which was built, and the Space Ship. Finally he appealed to his personal friend the Grand Lama, head of the Temple in the Valley of Harmonious Peace, in Tibet, which we call "Shangri-La." The Grand Lama opened the valley for Emery. From there they went into the hands of the Ancient Three. Since then, 350 of the "Circle Winged Planes" have been built. They are powered by a motor called Ghyt No. 2, because they are a combination of Ghyt No. 1 plus the principle described in "Burn Water For Fuel". The so-called Flying Saucers were a group of these ships. On a mapping expedition to discover the types of terrain, in which the ends or mouths of the tunnels opened, as described in the article "Man No. 4 Tunnels". In the summer of 1946, by action of the Ancient Three, the atomic laboratory of the Russians was blown up. That laboratory was not outside of Moscow, as the "Glacier Priest" said in June, 1947, it was in the northeast tip of Siberia and much too close to Alaska. Therefore, the orders were sent out to destroy it, and the orders were obeyed. There are only a chosen few, who are operators of the Portals (see "Man No. 3 Portals"), of which Emery is one. The three Leaders themselves grew up in the World, and learned what the World could teach. They had to unlearn much, that was taught to them, but who doesn't in the course of a lifetime? Outside of Three or four babes, who have been born in Rainbow City in the last four and a half years, everyone down there was born in the World in the last 70 odd years. No one is a freak of any sort.
THE TEMPLES
There are seven Temples in the World, all linked together by what we call ''Thought Machines". The Thought Machines are large Crystals, which "transmit thoughts and mental pictures." These temples are ideated in Tibet, that master Temple, in India, Iran, Turkey, Egypt, Morocco, and the high Andes of South America. The master thought Machine is in the Temple in Tibet. But gathered at those temples are Representatives of all of the peoples of Asia, including the natives of Siberia, but not "any Russians." All of the natives of Africa, but not any Butch, or English, or Belgians, etc. All of the peoples of the islands of the seas. The Latin American States, the Negroes, the Red Indians - and the Eskimos of North America receive their orders from the South American Temple. In 1936 the Ancient Three began to take over in the East. Though prior to that time they "were feeling out in Hungary, and to a certain extent in Poland" and Finland. By the action of the Ancient Three keeping Hungary "from aligning herself with Britain and France, on one hand, because they were much too weak if trouble started and keeping her from aligning herself with Italy and Germany, on the other hand, because they were rotten to the core. The Ancient Three delayed the starting of the European War by two years (The war, which started in 1939.) In 1938 India owed England a debt of over $300 million. India was ordered to industrialist, so that she could gain her economic independence. She "was told, that her political independence would follow as a matter of course, without bloodshed in getting it, India industrialized. In 1945 she had paid off her debt to England, and had England owing India to the tune of more, than $3 billions. India gained her political "independence", as was promised. But England saw to it, that India was divided, which brought on Civil War. It was against the orders of the Ancient Three. So India will have to work it out for herself. Turkey was ordered to stay "out of the war," no matter how much pressure was brought to bear on her from any direction. She obeyed Orders and she did not suffer blasting during the war. America herself finally admitted, that it was a good thing Turkey stayed out of the wax. It worked out better for America. Egypt was ordered not to draw a single man up for military service, even when the "enemy was within her gates." The British and the Americans called the Egyptians "sniveling cowards". But they were not. It took the grandest kind of faith in the Ancient Three, for the Egyptians to obey blindly, with every evidence against obeying. But they were saved, as every one know, so Rommel was driving tip blow up the Suez Canal... When he would have reached that point, the German army massed on the borders of Turkey, would have moved into Turkey and taken the Dardanelles. Then the two armies would have joined forces and they would "have driven into the oil fields of Iraq, Iran and the Russian Caucasus, thereby outflanking the Russians and Stalingrad...It was not Montgomery. He was down in Southeast Egypt with only a token force. He could not even keep in sight of the dust of the famed Afrikan Corps. The Germans ran so fast, that they dumped Italians all over the desert, and the Italians had to walk many weary miles, before they could find any one to whom to surrender. The Ancient Three stepped in there and caused Rommel to run. They laid down the law to Rommel, and scared him so much, that he dared not take another step into Egypt. By the action of the Ancient Three, they broke the back of the German war effort and the Allies won. What stopped the Japanese at the gates of Australia? They had moved down the islands and were practically on the door step of Australia. The Australian Army was "away from home fighting Britain's battles elsewhere. Britain could not get Australians army home fast enough. America could not get men and material to Australia. Most of the American Pacific Fleet was on the floor of the Pacific Ocean at Pearl Harbor. The Atlantic Fleet was fighting Britain's battles in the Atlantic. The few ships, that were in the Pacific, could not hold the war themselves, nor save Australia from invasion. The Allies needed a base desperately in the Pacific, and Australia was the only base left. If the Japanese captured Australia, America would be fighting the Japs in the Rocky Mountains of North America. The Ancient Three knew that, so they stepped in and stopped the Japs in their own way. Australia was safe, until men and supplies could be gotten there. From then on it was up to America. All of you know now, the strange right-about-face of the Japanese. How docile and obedient they have become under General MacArthur. How the people of Japan are working for peace and want to be a part of that peace. Again the Ancient Three stepped in, in their own peculiar way, and warned the Japanese people, that they had hopelessly condemned themselves by their previous actions and blood lust. The Japanese could only Redeem themselves by the long hard climb upward of obedience, co-operation and the will to show the World, they were willing to suffer the necessary steps to gain back nationhood. And they were also told, that the Ancient Three were with the man, who would become the conqueror of the Japanese. And only by obedience, co-operation and work could they redeem themselves back to a place under the Ancient Three. You have seen how the Japanese have obeyed that dictum. And now you know why they have boldly announced, that they would take order, from General MacArthur and no one else.
WORLD FEDERATION
Syria and Lebanon gained their independence by action of the Ancient Three. The Arabian States united into a Federation by act of the Ancient Three. And the strength of the Federation, as a unit, is greater, than the combined strength of the individual states. They organized according to the pattern of the United States, which is the pattern, that all the World will follow, when the time is ripe. That is, the pattern of government among the States of the World, There are many necessary changes to be made in all departments of living before the Perfect Plan is established. The pattern in the United States is: the forty-eight States are forty-eight individual nations combined into one Federation. Each State has it's own laws, traditions and history. Those things are sacred to each State. But each of those forty-eight States co-operates" with all the rest of the States on vital issues. There are no tariff walls between the States. There are no import or export duties to pay between the States. Trade flows freely in every direction. No passports are needed for the citizens of one State to move into another State. The citizen of another State is treated like one of the local citizens, when she/he is in any one of the forty-eight States. There is a single unit of currency among all States. It has the same unit of value from Seattle to Miami, from Bangor, Maine to San Diego. There are no exchange premiums to pay between the States for changing coin from the currency of the State to the currency of another state. "Each person in the United States is paid for his services in equal proportion to any one else in the United States" for the same or similar services. There are no extra-territorial rights imposed by one State upon another State, as has been done by the European nations and America to the nations of Asia and Africa and they would try to do to South America and other Latin American States. And all of the forty-eight States of the United States follow the same foreign policy. That is the pattern of the Arabian League also, and that will be the pattern of all the World eventually. Each country, people, nation must earn its independence from the European Empire Nations. Only in that way can these people know freedom, understand it, and work to retain it when it is theirs. If it were handed to them on a silver platter they would not know what to do with it, and would lose it again. Therefore, they must earn their own freedom and help others to earn theirs. All people shall have equal opportunity of achievement of expression, of access to the beauty of the Earth, equal access to the resources and materials to make their lives better. No nation will exploit another nation, put burdensome taxes on them, nor enslave them in any way. And war will be abolished; for all people will have room, in which to live, food to feed their starving bodies, arid will be paid in proportion to their services to all — no matter if the person be a Negro, an Indian, a South Sea Islander or a White. For this the Ancient Three are working. And for this, we here in Livingston, Montana are contributing our little bit in the only way, that we can at this time. So, take it or leave it. It is immaterial to us. We know the goal, and are working toward it.
3.   HORIZONS UNLIMITED by W. C. Hefferlin
The dream of all Humankind, as a child and often when grown, when gazing into the heavens, has been to explore the far reaches of space and the Stars, some day. That day is now at hand, and our children will soon know that great feeling of
expansion as well, as the fact, that we, as individuals, and our Planet Earth, are but a tiny spark of Cosmic Dust in All of Creation. Have you looked at the Moon with a prospective eye since the Radar experiment? If not, do so now; for the' time comes soon when perhaps your children, if not yourself, may stake a claim there. Space flight was our dream of almost forty years ago, and the beginning of a search, that has since led through mythology, history, physics, chemistry, mechanics and what have you. The search for power, speed, control, has been long and rarely fruitful those many years. But now horizons, horizons unlimited, and the Expansion of Knowledge is a deep and sincere driving force, that keeps one going. Once long ago we sat high up on the side of a mountain here in the Rocky Mountains and looked across a broad and long valley, one thousand feet below us, and day dreamed how it would be to sweep out from where we sat, out over the valley in a long arc toward the horizon above the mountain peaks ahead, and up, up, ever up into the blue sky, faster and faster, and ever faster, until we might speed with the speed of Light through Space. No, not yet have we, the writer, personally taken off into space; but we did design parts of the machine that was built five years ago; and it has since made two trips out into space, once accidentally, and recently a planned trip carrying equipment and scientists. Yes, far enough out into space that the Earth was the size of a marble and the moon the size of a small pea, and all space a Purple Glare with the Earth and moon as dark spots. Cosmic radiations were found to be much stronger in space, but there were other radiations observed, that as yet cannot be classified; and new instruments of recording and qualifying methods of analysis must be developed before the next trip. A strange distortion shows up in watches, clocks and chronometers using a gear train assembly, just as if the gears had slipped. Distortion, as seen from the Earth, is evidently due to refraction factors of our local atmosphere. Cosmic radiation effect on the human body, as well as animals, birds and insects, was found to be not detrimental, but rather of benefit as a source of evolutionary development. Contrary to fiction writer's ideas, there is no outward change in appearance. The period of change in the human's case took about three years. On animals birds and insects, a much shorter time, depending in proportion to their normal life Span. Second and third generations in the animals, etc., showed no change beyond the parent's development. Any and all changes appear to be for the betterment of those concerned, increasing the mental activity and ability of perceptions, a greater reasoning capacity, and in the case of the human, corrections on any weak organs. The human during the period of change has violent headaches, goes partially blind and deaf at times, and seems at times to be thoroughly wretched. But after the period is over he sees with a wider range of perception and hears with a wider tonal register. All weak spots are toned up to top performance. These observations were made by one doctor and several accredited scientists studying the results in the case history of the human. Much has been written on the subject of cosmic radiation, fictionally und professionally, and great concern has been as to the effects. What the resulting effects might be under prolonged exposure was naturally open to question. But judging from the observed results it certainty looks as though this atmospheric blanket surrounding the Earth retards and slows down evolutionary progression. After all, we all are constantly bathed by this radiation in a slightly reduced degree all our lives, so why be afraid?
Fear, the most potent weapon and humanity's worst disease, rules our lives beyond all reason. Just because we are slow to learn, or lazy enough mentally not to open our eyes and ears and mind, we don't know the answers of Cause and Effect.
Therefore if it is beyond our immediate vicinity or experience, we shun it as something accursed. Ignorance breeds fear in the thinking human mind and thanks to our training from the cradle up, fear is taught and instilled into our minds daily by our parents and all those we come in contact or associate with. If we can't explain something rationally to ourselves and our children, we then form a great number of "do not or else", alibis to build a fence around us to protect us from evil. The mind controls the body and as we think, so it is reflected through our structure and all of its organs, glands, etc. In fact if someone had placed a modern radio on your table fifty years ago and it started to talk and sing, just how fast would you have left that vicinity; and would you have been superstitious, afraid? We feel, that the Truths should be given to the World, as we find them, without the usual sugar coating. After all, ignorance is not bliss, but it breeds fear and fear breeds disaster. Look around you and there you will find the basis for all war. When man has something more, than his own backyard as a horizon, he must go afield and strive to reach that horizon. We now give you the sky, heavens and all of space as a real goal to reach for.
Will you do it?  THE SPACE SHIP
This space ship we mentioned in the earlier part of this article is not some illustrating artist's dream, but a very practical and efficient job, designed for speed-arid maneuverability. Its top speed is entirely theoretical, a possible 186,000 miles per
second, actual speed in space unknown as yet
(there is no Space and Time, no Speed, no ms-kms, no light years, because the Universe is - HOLOGRAPHIC IN NATURE ! LM).
Three separate walls are incorporated in the body construction each separated from the other by many inches of insulation and self-healing material in case of puncture. The landing field lights were on in Tibet, waiting for the ship to land. But the
speed was so great that they missed the light beams the first trip around the Earth and had to slow down to even see a slight streak of light the second time. By the third time around they had slowed down enough to see the lights and land at the air field. Flight elevation was stratospheric and the total time elapse was five hours. Do you still want to ride to the stars? Then all aboard. The above space ship was a derivative of an atmospheric flight ship, as described in the article "Circle-Winged Plane" and the ship is now based in far of Tibet, back from four years exploration of the Antarctic Continent by our scientists. They, living in a Great City made from Rainbow-Colored Plastics, the only Accessible City, one of Seven, six of which are now covered by ice ten thousand feet deep.
THE ANCIENT CIVILIZATION
Studying the cultural evidence of an ancient civilization they found it by the records to be over 2 million years old? A City using Plastics for paving, building and clothing. Controlled static electricity for light and heat., and city power, and to run the great trains, that are waiting in the underground terminal yards and station below this "Rainbow City." There are maps shoving the vast, over 100 feet in diameter, dual Train-Tunnel System below Ground and Seas throughout the World, location of System Terminals and all Side Lines and Tunnel ends. Farm machinery is powered by a radium-like substance contained in small boxes. Personal Flying Suits are powered by this substance. Duplicating machines produce, by rearrangement of the atomic structure, any number of copies equal to the original. There is evidence, that there are over two hundred elements of matter, with the laws of combination and usage. "Portals" are a means or entering or traveling between places thousands of miles distant; these are used also for tracing back through the past, all done by space warpage. These Portals are mentally or manually controlled. Here are machines to teach mentally the language and type for writing. Great libraries and museums are filled with all the Knowledge and Wisdom and machines of this Ancient Race, left here by the First Humans to be on this Earth, and evidence from whence they came. They, our remote ancestors! And all of this is our heritage. Whom among today may say for sure that this be false. When again, as justification for the reopening of the cities...
RAINBOW CITY in Ant-Arctica
From the Temple and Libraries of a Great City, one of Seven Built of Plastics, here even now on this Earth, as it was over 2 million years ago, does our information come. Six of these Great Cities are encased in eternal ice, and the seventh only is in open ground, protected and warmed by hot springs. Yet it is isolated, as to ordinary approachable means by ice walls ten thousand feet high. The seventh city, called by us for want of a better name "Rainbow City", and the other six cities were built over 2½ million years ago on the only (then as now) stable continent or land mass on this Earth, the Antarctic. The valley surrounding the city is somewhat dumbbell shaped, with the city at the narrowest section, the valley spreading at both ends, about ten miles wide at its narrowest and about 25 mile long from end to end, protected from storms and hidden in the southern winter by mists, and only open to the Sun's Rays by ice-wall reflection during the southern Antarctic summer. The city is made of plastic, the streets are paved with plastic; and all buildings are so constructed, that all Colors of the Rainbow are used. For color in those days seemed to have had a meaning. In the heart of this large surface is a great temple, Center of the Higher Learning and a museum of the culture of this Ancient Civilization of ours, and its machines. Below this city are five underground levels, part of the Surface City, and the Main Terminals of a Vast Tunnel Train System, with miles of yards, trains standing ready for the main lines, and maps of the old surface of the Earth, showing where the Great Tunnels lead to. From this Temple in this Ancient, yet Futuristic City did we learn, that the beginning of Humankind had been lost so long ago, that only a very sketchy history has been forwarded at all (this is bullshit: human history can easily be restored with and without technology, LM). And that, starts millions of Earth-measured years ago, far across Galaxy after Galaxy, Solar System after Solar System and Planet to Planet, a long Chain of Migrations and Colonization by the Human Race, their rise and decline, Cycle after Cycle. From across space to the fourth Planet from this Sun, known to us as the Planet Mars, came the migration of Humankind to colonize; and upon this Planet Mars rose again, a Vast Civilization of Great Wisdom and Knowledge, with very wise Leaders and Councilors.
THE REPTILE, THAT WALKS LIKE A HUMAN
At some time during the migration periods across Galaxies of Space, the Race of Snakes or Lizard-like species was encountered. From then on there was friction and war. Also of great knowledge and ability were they, this ancient Serpent Race, but far alien in thought and culture to Humankind's ways. For some reason, not known now,
(it is known very well: there is a need to merge Human and Serpent races at the End of life of Old Universe, but not without a fight, in order to turn these Energies into White Sun Energy of Balance! LM)
there had always been between the Humans and the Snake People, competitive strife for the dominating position of control and power. Great wars were fought and slowly Humankind lost ground. When it became apparent, that the fourth Planet would eventually no longer support life for the Human Species, the Great Ruler of the Human Races sent spaceships and scientists, with his own son and daughter, and some of the Council of Elders, to the Third Planet now known to us as Earth. And here on, what is now the Antarctic continent, a great Colony was established, patterned after the homeland. This was the first of Humankind on this Planet Earth. Such was the beginning of the fabled "Golden Age" of Antiquity, spoken of in the Ancient Mythology of all Peoples on Earth today. These may be the original "Seven Cities" hinted at in story and folklore of all Humankind. Here is the heritage of Humankind in all of its wondrous beauty, its Greatest Knowledge and Wisdom stored, waiting for the time when "Humankind" shall have arisen once again from this own-made mire, and shall have earned the right to stand before the heritage...Here in books, talking books that impress the mind through the audio nerves the speech of long ago, are given the original commands and laws, that have come down to us today in very garbled form through mythology, folklore...there is nothing new on Earth. Proof, that history and life repeat themselves endlessly cycle after cycle; and that which we learn or design or invent today or in the future was and is in existence now, TODAY. Here, too, is science in its fullest bloom of maturity, whereby the very building blocks and cement of Creation are known and used, as needed. Two hundred and five elements of matter are given, and the means, by which they may be combined, as desired. So called atomic fission and power were common enough, that they were used to drive farm machinery, automobile-like three wheeled vehicles, spaceships and individual flying suits. New? No, it's there from over two million years ago, ready for use.
Rainbow City contains great libraries of books on all subjects, arid great laboratories with their own special libraries. All of these books are made of some metal known not to the world today, still untarnished these millions of years. The leaves are of a silvery metal, gray in color and thin, light weight and flexible. The characters and symbols of the ancient tongue are etched in. The mathematics system is based upon the count of seven. In equations on all physical constants they use "seven over seven" instead of the modern "square root of minus one". On mental and spiritual constants, ten over seven is used. If we would examine our modern periodic table of the elements in the hand book of Chemistry and Physics, we would find the key to the system of count as used so long ago, for both are based on natural law. A circle is divided by 2. 4, 8, 16, etc, never into 12. Plastics were used to build the walls, floors and roofs of houses, the stores and the Temple, also furniture, tables, beds, etc. The cloth made in those days and still there is woven of a plastic thread softer, than the finest modern silks, lighter in weight, and all of this is fire proof. In fact, to wash the cloth or bed linen you place it over an open flame and burn the impurities away. Beautiful jewels of all colors are made of plastic, so hard the surface of a diamond is cut and powdered, as if it were ordinary glass. Many plastic spheres of all colors and sizes are there for special purposes and are treated, so as to retain their power and influence.
CHEMICAL FORMULA FOR A PLASTIC
Macerate the vegetation to very fine particles and mix with water. Boil this mash at a very high heat, strain off the liquid and reboil this, as a high heat. Skim off all scum and strain the liquid again. Reboil the liquid again at high heat and strain through a final filter. Now subject this remaining liquid for 24 hours to an electronic process conditioning, under a high vibratory or high frequency condition to rearrange the polarity of the molecules. The liquid is then ready for pouring and molding. After having been molded it is still soft enough to carve immediately. After that the plastic sets and becomes harder each succeeding day. Machines are used for either heating or refrigerating their vicinity, by vibration. They now bathe their vicinity and above with cold vibrations. This undoubtedly makes the Antarctic colder, than any other place on Earth today. Tests were made by our group at the ice covered cities, of temperatures close to minus 150 deg. F.
The homes and all buildings are heated or cooled by hot or cold radiations from the walls and floors. The very color of the dwellings can be adjusted through a change in the color vibration control, and walls become opaque or transparent where and as desired by adjusting a switch in the walls. Here is radio without static noise; radio, that operates and some how impresses upon the audio centers of the mind, music or voice messages. The television operates differently from ours, inasmuch as the impulses seem to follow back to the source of our present day radio waves from the transmitting , and even into the studio at the microphone. The microphone seems to act as a pickup eye, and a view is given of any person or object in front of it. These radios are in all buildings and are powered from city power. In the gardens are great shade trees and flowering plants, luxurious beyond belief, whose individual blooms often measure at least three feet in diameter. Very few insects are found here, with the exception of the butterflies, whose wing spread measures seven to eight feet across, and whose body would fill a large sized turkey platter. In fact, they are as large, as full sized eagles and are beautiful beyond words. Fruit trees are smaller in size, than the vast shade trees, but they bear huge sized fruits. All in all, some of the fruits, though resembling the appearance of modern fruit, taste far different. One fruit colored and looking like a large apple tasted like a pear. A peach-like fruit has numerous seed pits and tastes like nothing else on Earth. The same applies to berries, some, that look similar to raspberries and blackberries. Vegetable seeds were found in storage cupboards in one room of the Rainbow Temple. This room contained at one end a large Glowing Ball of Radiant Energy. This is believed to have preserved these seeds these millions of years. The vegetables, although different in appearance from our common varieties, served much the same purpose. One large leaf type takes the place of lettuce, but grows into a head formation more like cabbage, Another green vegetable, which even when ripe remains green, tastes similar to our present day tomatoes. Those of our group, who were farmers or horticulturists in their youth and preferred this service, handle the working and harvesting of crops, using plows and other implements found there, powered by atomic or radio-active substance contained in a small metal box on the machine. All conveniences and luxuries found in the city homes are also in the farm homes.
SHANGRI LA OF THE ANTARCTIC
Radiation lamps and heaters furnish the valley with an almost even temperature and the necessary rays for health and growth. The Mists, that hang thinly over the valley during the long summer season, are much thicker and heavier in the long Antarctic winters, thus helping to protect life there. In the middle of the winter the temperature is cool, about 65 degrees, in summer 75. All country roads are paved with plastic, as are all country buildings. Here also are the landing fields and hangars for housing the different types of flying machines, including a Great Ship for Planet-to-Planet travel. Travel from farm to city and vice versa is by three-wheeled conveyances somewhat similar to our cars and trucks. These vehicles are controlled by levers and push buttons, and are powered by the same type of Radiant Energy Mass (Uranium) in metal boxes, as the farm equipment. The tires on the wheels of these are made of plastic much like our present day balloon tires. From the evidence as shown by the life-sized pictures and the sizes of beds, chairs. garments, etc., they, our original ancestors averaged around seven to eight feet tall. The original skin color of the race was a reddish-brown, eyes and hair somewhat the same. Only the pictures of the Ancient Rulers showed blue eyes. One of them had blue-black hair and the other two were blondes. The akin of these rulers was much lighter in color, sort of a golden hue. These three, two Men and one Woman, were the Rulers, and with them were the Council of Elders and Wise Men. The one dark-haired Man was the fiancée of the blond Woman. The blond Man was brother to her. The two were children of the Ruler on Mars; the black-haired one was of the high nobility on that Planet. Foods and fruits were preserved in storage in such a manner of canning, that when opened these millions of years later were as edible, as when first preserved. It is quite evident by the careful preparations, that this land and city were deliberately left for future generations of the Human Race; although it is doubtful, that this was expected to be a million or so years later. Yes, here in this almost magical land is the dream and home of enchantment, come true to all of us.
RAINBOW TEMPLE
Tremendous in size and appearance are the wondrous temples of learning, each located in the heart of each of the Seven Cities of that fabulous ancient past, from the beginning of our Humankind on this Planet Earth. The Rainbow City of the
Antarctic continent lies almost due south of a point midway between south of India and the land mass of Australia. It's great Temple is in the center of the city. The area of the base is in the form of a great square about two of our modern city blocks wide on any side.
"X" MARKS THE LOCATION of RAINBOW CITY
To aid the reader in locating Rainbow City, according to Hefferlin's instructions above, we have chosen an angular view of the Earth, unfamiliar to most of us. This view is quite common, however, to those, who approach the Antarctic continent - and its Saucer bases - from outer space! We are almost directly above Australia, from which we have drawn a dotted line to the South Pole and we have put in another dotted line from the southernmost point of India to the South Pole. Midway between these we placed the "X" to give the general location of Rainbow City. It was into this vastly unexplored area, that Rear Admiral Byrd looked so wistfully in 1947 during his flight to the South Pole. Navy flights inland from the Indian Ocean along that bleak coast discovered open water, and called it Hunger's Oasis. More exploratory flights have been made since then. Two years ago Russian explorers made a surface dash from the coast to the Pole in that area, were they looking for Rainbow City? Who knows...
THE TEMPLE A PYRAMID
There are five stories in the Temple proper and above, that are fire stories mere in the Pyramid-shaped structure topping the Temple. Below the main floor are five underground levels in the Temple basement. The fifth floor of the Temple has
apartments for the three Rulers, plus numerous apartments for Councilors and guests. In the door of each of the Ruler's and Councilor's apartments is a jewel of color designating the apartment's owner and rank or position. Here on the fifth floor are great Libraries and museums. The Libraries are so arranged, that they are accessible to the laboratories above them in the Pyramid, as well, as to the Ruler's apartments. In the Pyramid top are located completely equipped laboratories and facilities for research in chemistry, electricity and all other allied sciences, as well, as an observatory for astronomy. Below the fifth story, the second, third and fourth stories house museums of all types of machines for all sorts of purposes...
there is a room of the Glowing Sphere, that radiates out in all directions. The corridor leading to this room goes almost the full length of the room and here are cupboards, that house the plant seeds. After turning the corridor corner one must go back the full length of the room to reach the Glowing Sphere. The rear rooms of the first floor are devoted to hospital and medical research. It contains charts of the human system, showing the entire circulatory system, the nervous system, and all of the ducted and ductless glands. On the level immediately below are the dissecting rooms, with the necessary instruments for the study of the human body. It is here, that the doctor-surgeon of our group spends much of his time studying the records and charts. He was once the court physician at the Palace in Budapest, Hungary and he finds great interest in this, his own department of research. On the same level of the basement are the rooms containing the Power Control Tanks and the control panels for the distribution of power throughout the city. Now, here are the school rooms for the primary grades and the machines for opening the mental understanding of the written and spoken language. Elevators run through the five floors of the Temple, the five lower levels and to the third level of the Pyramid. Host of the walls are elaborately decorated, whether carved or molded we do not know. But that plastic is now extremely hard and tough. All heat is radiated from floors, walls and ceilings. There are no light fixtures, as light too is radiated from floors, walls and ceilings. A simple push on a button chooses the kind of light, that is desired. In here there is no difference between night and day, because one has the choice of choosing that particular light. This same light source seems to revitalize the air and to act as an air conditioner as well. Draftless, shadowless peace and quiet is here for rest and relaxation, study or contemplation, thought or concentration.
GLASS HOUSES
By means of switches, set in walls, these walls become opaque, colored or clear, as crystal glass, giving a view of outside, with one-way or two-way vision as desired. Here, too, even as found in the houses, the kitchens have vibratory type heaters and cookers. All refrigeration either box or cabinet type, as well, as room cooling, is also vibratory in nature. There is no fluctuation in temperatures in the refrigerators, as compared with our modern day types. Here, too, there are no locks on the doors, such as those with which we are familiar. The Ruler apartment doors are operated by a code word and pressing on a certain section of the door. The carpets, rugs, hangings, furniture, robes, bed covers are all of plastic. Cleaning them is very simple for there is a special container in each apartment similar to those in the houses in the city. These special containers have a vibratory flame activated by a push button. Throw anything into it and leave the flame on for a short time; shut the flame off and when the item is cooled take it out. It is cleaned of all impurities by vibratory flame and sterilized; this is an ideal laundry system.
THE CITY
On all sides of the Temple are avenues and all buildings in the vicinity are two-and-a-half stories high, then two stories high; and as one goes farther from the Temple, one story high. Close in near the Temple there are buildings stocked full of all
things, similar to our present day retail stores. Here in this city there are no apartment houses or tenements, no crowding, each house has a spacious lot for flower gardens and lawns. Each house, even as the Temple apartments, is completely
furnished with everything, that any of them may need, with the stores as additional supply, as needed. Some of the lower levels of the Temple have vegetable vats for the growing of produce by chemical means, and re-conversion laboratories.
At another section of the Temple on the first level below, are the storage garages for the wheeled vehicles for those living in the Temple. Here too are shops for minor repairs. All of the heavy industry of the city is carried on in the underground of five levels surrounding the Temple basement, below and extending for miles underground far beyond the reaches of the surface city. There are houses, stores and gardens, workshops of all types and kinds in these levels.
Sunlight is simulated by special ray lamp lighting, and the air is fresh and pure even in the Temple. There are large parks and playgrounds for the children. Here too flowers grow blooms as large, as those in the Temple gardens and here too the great butterflies float as on 'silent wings of night' from flower to flower. The saying often referred to in history, that there were Giants in those days could well have applied here; for everything is of larger, than to us normal size, as though the average man height in those days was about 75 feet tall. Within the corridor entrance to the ground level floor of the Temple, close to the back end, are three massive pillars supporting the ceiling at this spot. Almost directly behind these pillars and on the corridor's end wall, are pictures of three Beings, two Males, one on either side of a Female figure. These pictures seem to be of a human cast in face and figure, but still have a haunting reptilian touch as well, as if of a smooth blending of the two types.
SNAKES IN THE GLASS
Immediately below this area on the first and second levels there are rooms in a central position relative to the Temple basement, and below these rooms are the third and fourth levels of a section. This section from the first level to the fifth level
inclusive was hermetically sealed off from the upper structure, as well, as from the rest of the Temple basement levels. In this upper room were found three Humanoid Serpentine bodies, in upright transparent containers and behind these, three more of the same type, evidently consorts (spouses) of the other three. The first three were the originals of the three pictures above on the corridor's end wall. In the area of the second level immediately below this room, were found great numbers of similar humanoid serpentine bodies, and in the areas beneath this second level, the third and fourth, reposing on beds stacked in tiers four high, lay vast numbers of these same types of figures. In the fifth level were animals and vegetation. This sealed up section contained a strange mist like gas, the purpose of which was to hold in suspended sleep of preservation all life this area contained. Through research efforts our scientists discovered, that these Humanoid Serpentine Bodies were reconstructed robot containers made from the flesh substance of the original bodies, which long ago had been serpent bodies with arms. The types of animals and vegetation held in suspended animation in this area were such as should ever seen on this Planet, Earth. They don't belong!
Food Production and Consumption
In Telos, food production takes priority. We are all trained in growing and producing food. We have a very varied diet, eating only those foods, that contain the Life Force in them. Hence, we only eat vegetables, grains, fruits, and nuts. All meat is
banned. You on the surface are still eating dead foods - foods, that no longer carry the Life Force. All in Telos work in the hydroponic gardens growing our foods. We all take turns developing and experimenting with our crops. Once the food is grown, it is then taken to our distribution center, where everyone comes to pick up their supplies. We don't freeze food, as you do on the surface. All our food is eaten fresh, for this is the way, that all nutrients are consumed. Every day people pick up their food for the day. It is easier for us to “shop” every day for our food. Since our workday is only four hours long, we have much more time available to tend to our nourishment and health. We have time to cook nourishing foods, time to exercise, and time to indulge in our creativity. This slower pace has many advantages. We don't have the pressure and stress as you do on the surface. All we do is in harmony and peace. Our lives are tranquil and in tune with the Creator
(the word 'Creator' is wrong. The Source of All Life doesn't have a gender, LM). All that we use in the production for food consumption is re-used. We have no land fill sites as you do on the surface, because all we use is recycled over and over again. This is the advantage of having advanced technologies. All that we use, we re-use. For nothing is wasted or over-produced. All is in harmony with nature, and all we do supports nature. Nature, in her glory and abundance, bears great quantities of food. Nature, left alone, produces abundance. So, we live close to nature, and follow her rhythms and cycles in the food chain. First and foremost, we are all trustworthy and responsible workers. We cherish the Earth, and all our food production is carried on in honor and respect for the Earth's resources. We don't use paper or plastics, nor do we wrap our food in any way. Our food is produced and then delivered directly to our distribution centers. This way, all that we use can be immediately replaced. It is all computerized through a master food computer, that keeps all of our dietary requirements in mind. Of course, it is all guided and directed by our people, who take turns in shifts in different areas of “household” work. All our food is grown and produced by us. It is pure, and free of chemicals and contaminants. We practice organic gardening, as it is the only way to survive and still retain our full consciousness. We do use containers to store our food, and these containers are used over and over again. We never discard anything, nor do we ever bury anything in our soil; for the Earth is alive also, and we respect and protect her
.
(Earth doesn't have a gender. It is White Sun, surrounded by a hard 3D shell, LM)
.
So, our way of producing and distributing food is vastly different from yours, as we have technology, that far surpasses yours. We thrive on our way of life, and we invite you to join us at our table when you do visit us here. For we shall share our feast of life with you, and you will delight in its simplicity and taste. We welcome you all to Telos, where we will entertain, and show you the wonders of living in a Higher State of Consciousness.
Q: Do you eat only living food with the Life Force, or do you also use heat for cooking?
Our food is very delicately prepared and it is all 'live' and freshly picked. We eat mostly fruits and vegetables and grains, and our soy products, which we ferment out in the open air. We do “cook” some of our foods, but our type of “cooking” is much different from yours, because we don't use electricity or microwaves or skillets or ovens or fire. We use technology, that funnels heat into the food causing it only to warm up without changing its molecular structure in any way. We have technology that warms, without harming the Life Force. But most of our foods we eat at room temperature, and we are used to eating foods at this temperature. Since it is always warm here in Telos and in the Hollow Earth, we have no craving for warm foods. We prefer cool foods, that have just been picked and prepared in salad variations. We don't do any baking here, at least not the kind you do on the surface. Yes, we do have “baked” goods, but they are “baked” in a different way, much like the food dryers you use to dry banana chips. We can make delicious cakes this way, that still maintain their Life Force and keep their enzymes intact. We understand, that in the colder regions of the Earth, people need warming foods, not just for their body's temperature, but for the comforting effect. And yes, the Life Force is destroyed through electrical heat. This is yet another reason why your lifespans are so short and your energy levels are so low, compared to ours. It is because the way you prepare your food robs you of its Life Force, the giver of life. It is a Force (Soul Energy or White Sun Energy of Balance, LM), that gives you life, that gives your life the energy it needs to sustain you in any kind of physical climate and situation. But over the millennia as the climate in many locations on the surface changed from temperate to cold, people's eating habits and lifestyles changed to accommodate these colder climates, and hence people's lifespans decreased from hundreds of years down to only 70-80 years now. There is a very definite connection between the amount of Life Force in one's food, the stamina in the body, and the length of years the body can live. It is the Life Force, that keeps us alive, and the more Life Force we have, the more “alive” we are, and the livelier we feel. We thank you for this question.
Q: What is the difference between your trees and your plants?


I am Mikos. We thank you for your question. Here in the Hollow Earth we don't distinguish between our trees, plants, and vegetables, as they are all living entities, each with their own consciousness carrying the Life Force. However, the plants and vegetables give themselves freely to us for our consumption, as long, as we leave the plant intact and eat only its fruits, so that it can multiply and reproduce year after year. We don't pull out the plant after harvesting its fruits, as you do on the surface. You see, we have one long continual growing season, which is forever - not like on the surface with your seasons. With the seasons, after the plants and vegetables produce their crops, they are discarded and their seeds replanted the next growing season. We don't do this in the Hollow Earth. We let the plants govern themselves, and reproduce as often, as they like, without our interference. Mother Earth herself is the director and governs their growth cycle. Our plants give themselves to us freely, allowing us to eat the fruits of their harvests, because we never remove or kill the plant, upon which the fruit or vegetable grows. Because they are alive in consciousness and contain their Life Force intact, we are consuming the Life Force of the plant and it continues its existence in us. So in effect, it lives on. It is the same with the trees. We eat their fruits, but never cut down a tree. Our trees are huge and magnificent and reproduce cycle after cycle, giving us the most abundant, succulent fruits. So our trees live on, and we live on by consuming the fruits and vegetables from them, without disturbing them in the least. We do use crop rotation, which maintains the minerals, vitamins, and enzymes, that go into the plants, so our Earth is always rich in minerals and perfect for growing our crops. We do the least to the Earth, and the Earth does the most herself. This is why we are so hearty, healthy and strong. So there really is no difference between our trees and plants - we treat them each with sacredness and honor their beings. We talk to them, we thank them for their bounty, and we then eat their fruits and vegetables. Our trees are just big plants, yielding more fruit, than the smaller plants and vegetables. Our trees serve another great purpose, that of producing the rich, clean, oxygen we breathe and sheltering our landscape, while at the same time consuming the carbon dioxide we exhale. They are sentinels, stand vigilant, and maintain our environment. Our trees are Great Beings of Light, and our plants and vegetables are like their children, reaching up to the sky, hoping to someday evolve into a tree. For all life evolves from lower to higher states of Consciousness, just as we Humans are ever evolving in Consciousness. Just know, that when you eat fruits or vegetables, from trees or plants, it is their Life Force you need for your health. It is the Life Force you want and this is what keeps you connected to the Creative Force. When you eat dead, toxic foods, you become just that - dead and toxic - and your life is shortened and it becomes difficult to sustain your body. Then disease sets in. All our food is grown organically, obviously, which is another reason we are so healthy and strong and can live hundreds and thousands of years in the same body. The less you tamper with Mother Nature, the more nutrients you receive in the food you eat. People are just beginning to realize this, and it is why the organic food industry is growing so fast.
It is hard to make a distinction between the plants and the trees, but the distinction is in the amount of Consciousness each can hold. The trees can hold vast amounts of Consciousness compared to plants, and the trees have an underground network, that connects them all telepathically to each other on the Planet. They have their own news service, and know what is happening on the Earth before we do. They rapidly communicate to each other events, that are about to happen on the Planet. They have firsthand information. We often tap into their communication system, so that we know, what is about to occur on different locations of the surface. You, too, can tap into this system. Just plant your feet solidly on the ground next to a tree, put your hand on its trunk, and merge with its essence. Ask your question, then wait and listen. You will hear it speak to you. The trees have been waiting for eons to begin communicating with you again on the surface. It is their deepest desire. For we are literally made of the Earth, and are truly One, which is why we can communicate with them.

Q: Do Telos and other cities in the Inner Earth exist physically?
We will answer your question. Yes and no. Yes, Telos does exist in your Third Dimension, and it also exists in the Fifth Dimension. It actually does physically exist inside of Mt. Shasta in the Third Dimension. There are no volcano activities inside of Mt. Shasta. The lava tunnels in Mt. Shasta were re-routed by us over 12,000 years ago when the Lemurians went underground and traveled through the tunnels to reside in Mt. Shasta, as a result of the Atlantean and Lemurian Wars, which devastated the surface. So we do exist in our Third Dimensional body forms, which we can now move in and out of at will. We have evolved to the point, where we can raise and lower our energy fields and move in and out of embodiment.
So if you were in Telos in your Third Dimensional form, you would see us. However, when we come up to the outside of the Mountain, we modify our energy field and move up to the Fifth Dimension and are “shielded” from your physical eyes, unless you can see into the Fifth Dimension. If you can perceive the Fifth Dimension energy, then you would see us. And yes, we look exactly like you. There are no differences in our physical bodies, except for the fact, that we now have more DNA strands as a result of our long lives of being able to evolve in peace and harmony and brotherhood. For it takes a peaceful environment to evolve, and this is what we created for ourselves when we left the surface and came into Mt. Shasta. When we want to be seen by those on the outside of the Mountain, we can easily make ourselves visible to you. But for the most part, we prefer to stay invisible for our own protection. The time will come when we will be appearing to your surface folk, and that time is very near. We hope this has answered your question. I am Mikos.
Q: What is the difference between the Inner Earth and the Hollow Earth?
The Inner Earth consists of Telos and over 120 other Agartha Subterranean Cities of Light just a few miles beneath Earth's surface, including the city of Catharia, which is directly inside the center core of the Earth (beneath the Aegean Sea) and is
where the Library of Porthologos is located and where Mikos is from. The Inner Earth consists of all the area, that is below the Earth's surface throughout the globe, including caverns and a vast Tunnel System. It includes all 800 miles from the top of the Earth's surface to the Inner Hollow Opening in the center. The Hollow Earth is just the area, that exists in the very center core of the Earth, which is Hollow, and starts at 800 miles down. Once you are inside the hollow cavity of Earth, the diameter of open space is 6,400 miles. The diameter of the whole Earth is 8,000 miles (this is not the full picture! LM).
Q: Why are we skipping the Fourth Dimension, when we move into the Fifth Dimension?
We will all attempt to answer this question, because it is a complex one. We are the Inner Earth Council, Mikos presiding. We say to you not to be so caught up in dimensions, but rather to concentrate on bringing up your energy and raising it up into higher levels of Consciousness, because this is where the higher dimensions exist. They exist in higher states of Awareness. So you can access higher dimensions by accessing higher states of Consciousness.
You will move directly into the Fifth Dimension, because the Fourth Dimension will no longer exist. It is in the process of being dismantled and removed by the Spiritual Hierarchy, as part of the accelerated Ascension Plan, that will catapult you directly into the Fifth Dimension. The Fourth Dimension was used in the past by departing Souls, who didn't go directly to the Light, but lingered for great lengths of time.
(and again : this is not the full picture! We all visit the 4th Level daily when we are unconscious or asleep. LM).
This departure passageway has now changed, or been “re-routed” as you might say, so that departing Souls no longer become trapped in obsolete dimensions waiting for hundreds or thousands of years to move on to the Light. That is now all over with. Therefore, you will all move directly up to the Fifth, with no dimensions in between. The next step is wherever you want to put your foot. After you reach Fifth Dimensional consciousness and are securely in the Fifth Dimension, you will then choose your future destination at that time. Some of you may choose to return to a Third Dimensional world to help other Souls regain their full consciousness, and some of you may choose to go back to your Home Planets. Your Home Planets exist in many different dimensions throughout the Universe, depending on how evolved your Soul is. Your Soul's frequency matches your Planet's frequency. So yes, some of you may choose to go home to your Sixth Dimensional Planet and some may choose to go home to your Seventh Dimensional Planet and some of you may choose to go home to your Eighth Dimensional Planet, and so on. Do you understand this? Many Souls may want to stay in the Fifth Dimension and experience its peacefulness, abundance, riches and continue their Soul advancement there for a while before moving on. There will be a myriad of choices once you reach the Fifth Dimension, so there is no need to concern yourself about this now or try to make decisions about where you want to go. There is no hurry. The only hurry is to reach the Fifth Dimensional Plane of existence, where you will be once again pain free, disease free, lack free, and totally free in all ways. You will be supplied with all you could ever wish for, and then more. So stay tuned into your Consciousness, be alert to all that is around you, make positive and loving choices, and send love to everyone. This is the fastest way to increase your Awareness and evolve your Consciousness. Always remember, that we in the Inner Earth are all standing beside you, gently guiding you on your path to the Stars.
In the Human Ruler's apartments on the fifth level or floor above ground, well concealed in the wall of the living room of each compartment, is a small closet-like room. By a strange assortment of coils of odd shapes and other strange appearing
apparatus concealed in the walls, very strange and exceedingly interesting things occur. A television screen is at one end, and levers, a dial and green colored lens crystal are arranged at a control panel in one side wall. By following the book of
instructions, as found in a concealed drawer at the control panel, the mechanism became operative, and here was the key to most of the research, that followed.
"PORTAL ACTION"
This room, by some electronic means, could act as a television viewer of any place on Earth, and above and below the surface. It can view the interior of anything desired, and using some form of a space-time warp can view the Past. Future viewing was found to be impossible, evidently, because there are too many variant possibilities, that may happen. Television viewing with Soul included made the other important actions of these rooms possible. This we call for want of a better name, Portal Action. When we say Portals we mean, that in more ways, than one. By some form of electronic vibrational manipulation this room can be caused to make contact, through a Portal door at one end of the room, with almost any place on Earth! Yes, we mean, that when the machine is directed to some place as viewed on the screen, and a lever is thrown into position, the end or Portal door can be opened and you can step out in that locality. Mythology, folklore and religion seem to give some hints to substantiate these Portals, and we must consider that mythology, folklore and religion are but a resume of the past.
MORE ON THE PORTALS
The apartments of the three Rulers, in Rainbow Temple, are of different color and each is exclusive of the other, but inter-connected by doors. One apartment is furnished in blue, another in green and the third in red; each is the private color
identification of it's owner. The closet-like Portal rooms are about six feet by ten in size and are neutral in color. One side of the wall of the closet room is a dial set in the face of a control board; above there is a green colored crystal lens. In the end wall is the television screen. Beside travel the other use of the Portal was for research into the past. Not as a time-traveler in a material way, but only as a means of seeing and hearing at any time into any point or interval of time of the ancient Past. In this phase it is impossible to use the second door, as only the audio and vision side works. The purpose of the crystal lens is for establishing mental control and direction of the Portal by concentrating one's gaze into it and holding the mental vision in your mind of the place you desire to go. The dial and some lever switches on the control panel below the crystal lens are for adjusting the power and position of the image on the view finding screen and controlling the Portal action. One lever locks the Portal at any place under view, and another lever allows the second door of the room to be opened. Upon stepping through this doorway when opened, you find yourself actually at the place on view in the screen. Fantastic? Yes, but true in this time period. An experienced operator of the Portals can pick up a man or an object in Chicago and another in London, and deposit them in Tokyo or any other place in the world in a few minutes. There seem to be only a few things, that will prevent or stop Portal penetration at this time.
KILROY WAS HERS, TOO
One of our operators in the group was an ex-pilot of the early-Chinese-Burma-India theater of World War II named Kilroy, a red headed Irishman with a puckish sense of humor. He is believed by us to know something about the "Kilroy was here"
storied in the Saturday Evening Post. As to that part of it all we can say is, that our Kilroy had the method and means of travel at his command in the Portals, but only time will tell for sure. We personally suspect he knew more, than he cared to admit. We used the Portals to transport material and men from and to many places on Earth. These same Portals will reach out through local space to the moon, but not much farther at present.
LIFE ON THE MOON
What life remains on the moon is a very decadent and dwarfed, degenerate human type, because of lack of air. They are confined to caves and underground caverns, and that part of the old cities underground still usable. Very little exploration was done on the Moon and that was confined to a cavern with a temple area and altar at one end. The remains of the human race there still await the return of the old rulers. Compared to almost any standard of living here now on Earth, they are really in a pitiable state of existence. Machines are there, but dead from lack of the proper power. This seems to have been a radioactive substance similar to radium.
STILL MORE ON THE PORTALS
The Portals have been in almost steady use for most of the time our group has been in the Antarctic. A great deal of shuttle service was to our base in the Himalayas we call it Shangri La Valley. When Hungary was taken over by the Germans the then Regent of Hungary and his family were moved to Shangri La and then to the Antarctic Rainbow City by one of the Portals. Early in World War II the scientists of Hungary, who had developed the Invisibility Ray, as pictured in Life Magazine, also a Paralysis Ray, joined our group by plane to Shangri La. Later, they, with their families, were moved by Portal to Rainbow City. There are seven full-fledged scientists and twelve assistants and all of their equipment, that was movable, now in Rainbow City. Sixty—five of our group are men the rest are women, children and servants; all told there are one hundred. Thirty-nine of the group are American ex-pilots of the China-Burma-India theater before the United States entered the war. Two of the Americans are veterans of World War I and belonged to the old "Glory-makers", the famous Thirty-Ninth. The rumored Japanese tunnel to Korea was started by captured slave-labors, but it was checked and blown up by use of the Portals with a form of atom bomb developed by the scientists. The bomb size is about the diameter of a grape fruit and weight about five pounds, and will pulverize an area of about five city blocks.The Portal's open door is not visible to anyone outside, unless he knows what to look for. Then it shows up as a very faint blue shimmering outline, but if touched on the edge of the outline it is as solid feeling, as any door sill. A person on the inside of the Portal can reach through the open doorway with his hand and only the part on the outside shows. In other words, the hand would appear out of thin air, to the vision of anyone on the outside of the Portal. Closing of the second door and opening of the first door (into the apartment) causes the Portal to return to Antarctica to it's original position. Both doors must be closed before any Portal operation is possible. These Portal rooms will hold about seven people at a time.
ALADDIN'S LAMP
There are numerous crystal spheres tuned to each Portal. By resting a Crystal Sphere in one's hand and concentrating the gaze into the crystal and thinking strongly your wish, the Portal obeys your command and comes to you when you are away from and on the outside of the Portal. The fable of Aladdin and his Lamp may have originally come from this source. The Portals might explain the ancient Irish myth of the boat with two eyes painted on the prow, to see where it went, and it moved with the speed of thought. Also the Magic Carpet in Arabian folklore might be explained by the Portals. Perhaps, here too, is the reference to the Portals and the tunnels, as quoted from the Egyptian Book of the Dead, Chap. 57.
THE GREEN GEM OF THE SOUTH
From Myths and Legends, Hindus and Buddhists, by Coomaraswamy, page 111 we quote:
"Rama thought of the self-coursing car Pushpaka and it knew his mind and came to him straightaway. He searched the west and north and east and south."
Can we say, "No, these things are not true?" when all of mythology and legend speak either directly of or in parallel to these things?
This we do know from observations made via the Portals, that Lemuria and Atlantis did exist and they did attain to great cultures and high civilizations, before sinking beneath the ocean. Also at one time a continent existed south of India, between India and the northwestern coast of Australia. On this land was established the first colony from the Antarctic Continent civilization. It was by the use of these Portals, that part of the exploration of the Great Tunnel System, that networks the entire globe was accomplished, including the vast yards full of trains and the main station terminal below Rainbow City. By the use of these Portals the many "sealing off" doors to the Tunnels were found and opened, in preparation for train passage through on the lines we desired to operate. It is quite evident that these Portals are operating under reduced power at present, but our group expects to have them running at full strength soon. Then further exploration of space may be possible as well, as increased penetration in other lines of research. Consider how handy these Portals are for the research scientists who, upon discovering an ancient ruin or anything else of the past, may at will - almost with the speed of thought - examine its history from beginning to end.
THE TUNNELS
The Great Underground City beneath the surface at Rainbow City is built and strengthened by an odd metal, the same, as used in the construction of the railroad tunnels and terminals. This metal is made by a machine, that takes the raw earth and rock and turns it, by some atomic manipulation, into a soft, plastic-like metal, that slowly hardens. When this metal has finally set to its full hardness, an atomic cutting torch takes five hours to cut one and one half inches. This underground city was used for manufacturing, food processing, and artificial growing, as well, as storage space and living quarters for workers. It surrounds the Great Tunnel depot Terminal and its vast yards are stored with great trains ready for use. Elevators and ramps are commonly used to all sections and levels. Light is furnished by some sort of "cold light" process, which gives off beneficial rays of the Sun. The air in the city as well, as the tunnels seems to be revitalized from or by these same lamp sources.
At the fifth lower level of the underground city is the main depot and traffic office and dispatcher system, that controls the entire network of train tunnels throughout the World. There is also a communication system for voice and vision to all trains and to all terminals and their branch lines. The Tunnels of the main lines are always dual, one above the other, and operate on a one-way system of handling trains. The tunnels are lined with the tough metal, which supports and reinforces the underground city. Each Tunnel has a diameter somewhat over one hundred feet. The trains arc about one hundred feet in diameter and each coach length is three and one half times its diameter, each engine two times its diameter. When in operation the trains float free of all walls; when at rest they fit into grooved channels in the side walls.
FASTEST TRAINS IN THE WORLD
The top speed of these trains is unknown to us at present, but our group of scientists tested them well above two thousand miles per hour. As to air resistance and pressure within the tunnels at this speed we do not at present know the answer, they are made of tough metal, the same, as used is the tunnel linings... At present only a few mainlines and their terminals and trunk lines and branches have been used by our associate's party. But according to the tunnel map routes these tunnels run deep underground and spread throughout the entire World, beneath the seas and land surfaces in all directions. Of the tunnels explored, one branch line ends in what is now a swamp in the heart of South America. Here, from the evidence of old ruins in the vicinity, was once a great sea port and thriving city of ancient times on an ancient seashore. According to the Maps of today, this is in the upper reaches of the present Amazon river in that mysterious district, in which a number of explorers from the United States and other countries have gone into and, from which they have not returned. Another tunnel ends in a new-closed cave in the southwestern part of the United States in an Indian territory or reservation. Another branch line ends in northwestern Wyoming, due west of Sheridan and some two hundred feet or more up the side of a mountain. This tunnel seems to have been twisted and sheared off, leaving a distorted and pinched outlet. When we consider the great density and toughness of the metal lining the tunnels, a metal that even earthquakes and great land mass movements cannot break, we wonder what titanic force sheared and twisted the Sheridan tunnel end. When we have time we shall use the Portals to find the answer. At tunnel ends and all terminals there are Great Doors, that seal each tunnel, section by section, and all Tunnels are empty. Only the Terminal depots have any machinery in them, and these are for handling freight and fighting equipment.
Each Terminal depot is a great storehouse of numerous levels deep for medical supplies, concentrated foods and food essences, and concentrates of what today might be called vitamins, a tablespoon measure of which will relieve all fatigue and need of nourishment, liquid or sleep for over twenty-four hours with modern human today. Here too are stored many fighting machines and quantities of small arms (personal equipment) for army uses. These are mostly atomic blaster types.
All of this perhaps stored over one or two million years ago, yet still in perfect condition.
THE EGYPTIAN BOOK OF THE DEAD AGAIN
These Terminals may be the far famed and often written of "Tunnels of the Earth" perhaps referred to in the Egyptian Book of the Dead:
"I am the offspring of yesterday; the Tunnels of the Earth have given me birth; and I am revealed at my appointed time....It is I who carry away thy might, that I may come and seize upon the Tunnels of Ra." Chapter 108.
All Tunnels are lighted by a cold light system similar to that in the Great Underground City and the air vitalized in the same manner, Terminals likewise. According to the comparisons of modern maps with the ancient ones, the Tunnels are in a vast network underlying just about all nation today, and reaching many regions, that today are inaccessible to modern man, referred to only in mythology, such as the sunken continent of Atlantis and the lost LeMuria of the Pacific ocean. By the evidence of the Portals and the ancient maps, Great Civilizations did exist and an interchange of commerce linked them together through their common heritage with the Motherland, at the present South Polar continent. Star maps of the ancient days established a fair estimate of the time when all of this was in use.
ENTRANCES COVERED
Most Tunnel Openings have long since been covered by land slides and shifts in Earth structures and only a few at this time remain open to the outside World, some in Tibet, Siberia and Africa, as well as South America and North America. There are some entrances in the interior of certain remote islands. One train alone can carry enough troops and their equipment, modern style, to completely make up a small army. These trains are five-decked inside and have a tremendous capacity of load and storage. Automatic equipment for safety, capable of handling emergency and normal usage at the tremendous speeds involved, is built into all trains and terminals. As we have said before these trains float free from all contacts with the walls by some means, that we have not solved yet. The trains are entirely sealed when in operation and carry their own atmosphere. The cold-light used in the trains evidently revitalizes and conditions the air in the trains in the same manner, as is done in the underground city.
ACCESS TO SECRET TREASURE VIA TUNNEL
By Portal examination we have found, that the Inca's fabled hoard of wealth was concealed in a tunnel mouth-end in the Andes mountains. It still remains there, untouched by our party. Why?
Just consider yourself living in the midst of untold wealth (according to present worldly standards) with all wants of material necessities and substance at hand for use, of living amongst luxury as is not yet known in modern times, of being a part of this Eden, where the monetary unit called by us money, can buy nothing. This is a place, where one finds a peace of mind and soul beyond and above the hurry-scurry of this, our present day so-called civilization. To give one an idea of the size of the Tunnel Train Terminals, which handled local traffic out into the system, and from which many single branch lines stem or pass through, the average length and width is about four miles. The depth from top to bottom is about three hundred feet. There are over ten levels for storage and for offices. In these Terminals were found three-wheeled vehicles for loading and unloading as well, as passenger carrying, and ramps to accommodate them. Elevators reached all levels. There were official's offices with Portal machines as part of the equipment, file and record rooms to handle all the detailed traffic of commerce, that at sometime must have moved through them. There were tremendous rooms for clerks and all of their necessary equipment and dispatcher's rooms with tremendous control boards to allow contact with the trails as well, as other Terminals. The elevators made contact with the tops of these Terminals which, by the evidence found at one time, were on the surface of the Earth, Some now are buried deep by the shifting of land masses, In some localities on this Earth it was found, that these Terminal top entrances were close to the Earth's surface, and not many hundreds of feet of excavation of debris would be needed to free the entrances for usage. It is here, that a very strong question arises in our minds as well, as yours: Why such an elaborate transportation system, so well designed and built to last for ages, should be in evidence; unless we should come to this conclusion, that at one time in the Earth's (pre) historic past a very great and expanded civilization must have been spread all over the then Earth's surface, possibly by colonization from the Motherland at the Antarctic continent, or possibly by a great mass transplanting of the human species from the Planet now known to us as Mars. Only time will tell the answers and believe us truly when we say, that there seem to be millions of questions, that need asking and solving.
PORTAL ANALYSIS OF THE DOLE FLIGHT TO HAWAII
In the long ago history of Humankind, during the time of the civilization of LeMuria, its scientists developed great machines to act as transmitters and receivers of metals and certain organic substances. These machines were used to transport these material substances between Earth and the moon. Living organic matter was carried by Space Ships traversing the space between Earth and moon. Air is still to be found in the deep caverns of the moon and life still exists there . But the Human Race has long since degenerated from its original status to a condition beyond belief due to the fact, that contact with the Earth was broken off 21,000 years ago, when LeMuria sank beneath the waves of the Pacific ocean. The descendants of Humanity of the moon, who lived and worked there traveled between moon and Earth. Their mythology is colorfully alive with reference to fire spitting and fire breathing dragons... (Space Ships)
We have previously stated and we insist, that mythology is but a garbled, distorted and mistranslated history of the ancient Humankind. Research will unfold a valuable addition to the understanding of today's human races; and as we remove the veil of mystery step by step, will reveal their common kinship. We moderns have for too long smugly considered ourselves as superior in achievement and learning, and think, that mythology is a mixture of superstitious belief and vague mysteries, to be interpreted in some far off manner, as a thing apart from our everyday life. Yet we constantly cry to the very heavens for help to be rescued from the chaos of our own thoughts and acts. Mythology is a long pattern of humanity's achievements and mistakes, and the glory achieved by humanity when they follow the right path...The great machine transmitters and receivers, that once linked the moon-peoples with Earth, have long ago stopped working, with the exception of one transmitter on Earth and one partially operative receiver on the moon. The transmitter still working here on Earth is situated on a submerged part of LeMuria; now the floor of the Pacific ocean on a line midway between San Francisco and the Hawaiian Islands, perhaps a little-north. This location we cannot at the present time positively identify, but it is this area, that both surface vessels and airships avoid. How big it is we do not know, though it seems to quite large in area. Vessels entering its sphere of influence disappear and are never heard from again. It was here, that the historical "Dole Flight" was lost in 1927. The San Francisco "Examiner's" plane carried a radio signal generator powered by an air-driven generator, which made known the speed of the plane. That and the radio operator's remarks, before going into the silence, are ample proof of something strange in this area, but it is no longer mysterious. That was history and may be found in detail in the back files of the San Francisco newspapers, especially the Examiner. The transmitting machine seemed to push, and at the same time disintegrate, any metal or organic substance above it, toward the moon. The receiver functioned as a collector of the beam and re-assembled into its original form the material sent. They operated automatically. On the moon, near the partially functioning receiver, are scattered bits of wreckage, amongst which are bits of planes, all that is left of the Dole flight. The bodies of the humans are lost in space, possibly in an orbit circling the Stars.
4 - RAINBOW CITY AND THE HEFFERLIN MANUSCRIPT...
Commented by Branton from TheConspiracyConnection Website
"The Masters took another guise in a new alternative-reality scenario, which was first revealed to the public by Ray Palmer during the Shaver Mystery craze.
(Palmer was the one, Shaver himself accused of ‘bending’ his stories to fit Palmer’s own pet occult and historical theories - Branton). The September 1946 issue of AMAZING STORIES contained four short articles written by a W. C. Hefferlin.
Each described a wonderful new invention, which had come to the author, in Palmer’s words, ‘from Tibet by mental telepathy.’ One of them was a ‘circle-winged airplane’, which sounded like a cross between a conventional airplane, a donut, and a dinner plate. Another was the GHYT—for Gas HYdraulic Turbine—motor, which Hefferlin implied was decades ahead of the internal combustion engine without being too specific about how it worked; he fetchingly introduced it with the phrase ‘Speed, “Speed”, and more SPEED!’ Still another was a method for burning water for fuel by releasing its hydrogen and oxygen through electrolysis (unfortunately the electrolysis required the burning of some other fuel; Hefferlin neglected to mention this). The final invention was a spiral power beam, which today sounds vaguely like a laser, but just as vaguely like a science-fiction ray gun. It was described as if anyone with good mechanical sense could build it from Hefferlin’s ambiguous instructions, yet it was clear, that he had never built the beam device itself. The article ended in a gaseous climax: ‘POWER! Blasting material destruction! Or, ‘building blocks’ for the expansion of all Humankind!... It is yours, now. What are you going to do with it? Build or destroy?
In the October 1946 AMAZING STORIES, Hefferlin claimed, that he had invented a wonderful method to eliminate static from the radio, although he made some major factual errors—stating, for example, that lightning is ‘of direct current nature,’ when in fact it oscillates.
“Palmer was suspicious of Hefferlin’s claims, he hinted, that although ‘there are many people, who ‘say’ they are recipients of unusual information from Tibet,’ they might be unfortunates MISLED by the telaug whisperings of the dero.
But whatever their origin, the Hefferlin’s article could not inspire much confidence in the reader, who studied them carefully, and it appears, that Palmer enjoyed having readers take potshots at Hefferlin. One reader, wrote that after reading Hefferlin’s article on static, he could only‘heartily suggest, that Mr. Hefferlin buy a good book on radio and electricity and learn a little about the subject, before he writes any more articles.... I honestly cannot see how anyone with a high school education could read Mr. Hefferlin’s article without laughing.’
“Hefferlin had given a few specific directions for building the circle-winged plane or the GHYT motor or the POWER beam, but in each of the articles he left out several essential details, and without them the instructions were useless. When a doctor wrote Palmer and pointed out it would be impossible to build the POWER! beam device with the information Hefferlin had supplied (‘Never in my life have I seen or heard of such a poor set of instructions’), Hefferlin replied in the next issue, that ‘full construction information’ could not be placed in the hands ‘of the GENERAL public,’ and that ‘we must consider the seriousness of the International Situation.’ He also made the ambiguous statement, that the articles were ‘but a brief schematic of the entertainment field pertaining to the Rainbow City, its contents, etc.’
What was ‘the Rainbow City’?
 Palmer tacked on the titillating line that Rainbow City,‘is the headquarters, a deserted city of... (the Elder Race) under the ice of the [South] Pole, where all the gadgets mentioned and thousands more are perfectly preserved for thousands of years.’ Palmer also suggested, that Rainbow City be given a seat in the then-new United Nations, but with those teasers, Rainbow City and William C. Hefferlin disappeared from the pages of AMAZING.
“In 1927, according to Gladys, the Hefferlins were a young, mystically-minded couple living in San Francisco, and there they met and became friendly with a man named Emery (The identity of ‘Emery’ was long a controversy in Borderland Sciences and Shaver Mystery circles. Many thought he was Emery Deutsch, one a well-known radio violinist; Deutsch denied it. - Kafton-Minkel) who shared their interest. It goes without saying that the chances of being deceived through such an uncertain form of ‘communication’, by ones own subconscious mind or by malevolent paraphysical impostors, is very high and the opportunities to PROVE such allegations are almost non-existent when compared with face to face communication and substantiation, and in fact many, many accounts allegedly given through psychic channels from ‘aliens’ have later PROVEN to be false. Because of this one must take the following with a grain of salt - Branton).
“The Ancient Three... immediately ordered construction of a fleet of 350 circle-winged planes, powered by GHYT motors burning water for fuel, and using POWER! beams weapons. (supposedly after the blueprint provided to ‘Emery’ by the Hefferlins - Branton). Under the direction of the Three, work progressed rapidly, and when the fleet stood ready at last, an expedition was ordered to search the wastes of Antarctica for signs of Rainbow City... it was critical, that the city be repopulated and brought to life, if the cosmic plan was to be fulfilled. Emery was assigned to the search, and he spent painstaking months flying over the Antarctic, looking for clues, that none, but the initiated could detect. But on Thanksgiving of 1942, Emery sent a joyful message to the Hefferlins. Rainbow City had been found.
“The Hefferlins were understandably anxious to learn more about the Ancient Three, and little by little, in their psychic conversations with Emery, they heard the story of The Three and the concealed history of the Human Race. Countless millions of years ago, ‘Emery’ told them, Humanity ruled an Empire of Planets, stretching over A HUNDRED GALAXIES. But at some point in their conquests, the ancient humans encountered the race, which was to become their deadly enemy, the Snake People. The Snake People and the ancients battled for a thousand years, with the advantage passing first to one side, then to the other. But it became clear, that the Snake People had won. They chased the Human Race from Planet to Planet, scattering the remnants of the Human Empire to a few lonely, inconsequential worlds.
(That Chasing was necessary to mix Humans with other races, esp. Reptilian ones, of those Galaxies and raise their vibration! It is necessary at the end of Life of Our Old Universe, though it is hard on Humans! LM).
One of them was Mars, and the Red Planet was for hundreds of generations of the ancients a hospitable home. But as time passed the ancients realized Mars was dying—its oxygen and water were slowly dying. The Great Ruler of Mars sent a fleet of spaceships to Earth... They settled in Antarctica and built seven great cities there, modeled after the cities on Mars; each had a distinctive color and was called the Green City or the Blue City or the Red City. But the greatest of all was Rainbow City, so named because it was constructed entirely of plastic of all colors of the rainbow... Under their guidance (of the Ancient Three) the colony flourished mightily. It was Humanity’s golden age, but it was not to last forever. A great catastrophe, probably a surprise attack by the Snake People, struck the Earth and tipped it over on its axis. As in Doreal’s history—but with the parties REVERSED—the people of Antarctica quickly found their paradise icy and uninhabitable. The survivors of the disaster abandoned the great cities to settle in the wilds of the north, and after thousands of years of adversity they lost their technological knowledge. Memories of the glorious days of the ancients became myths and legends. But even after all that time the Great Cities of the Antarctic still existed, buried now under thousands of feet of ice.
(Walter Kafton-Minkel comments: “The circumstances surrounding the discovery of Rainbow City in the Hefferlins’ story are reminiscent of H.P. Lovecraft’s horror story ‘AT THE MOUNTAINS OF MADNESS’ [1963]. In the tale, a scientific expedition bored a hole into the Antarctic ice crust and discovers a tunnel filled with the well-preserved corpses of alien life forms. Nearer the South Pole, the expedition discovers a great deserted city hidden behind mountains higher than the Himalayas and finds carvings telling the story of a race of ‘Elder Things’, which settled at the Pole nearly a thousand million years ago... When the ‘great cold’ came, the Old Ones settled first in the oceans, and then traveled down to a sea in the interior of the Earth.” - Branton). Rainbow City sat deserted for a million years. it alone of the seven cities was free of ice, for hot springs beneath the city kept it and the surrounding valley at room temperature. Encircled by walls of ice ten thousand feet high, Rainbow City has remained hidden from Antarctic explorers to this day—except for Emery and his band. They occupied the city and found it consisted of six levels, one on the surface and five beneath it. Since the technology of the ancients was infinitely superior to our own, the city was found with all its incredible machinery running as well, as it had when the city was built two and a half million years ago. Almost everything in Rainbow City was built of plastic. W.C. wrote, that the roads, leading into the city, ‘are paved with plastic.’ The clothing Emery and his colleagues found hanging in the ancient closets ‘is woven of a plastic thread softer, than the finest modern silks, lighter in weight, and... fire proof.’
 All of their jewelry was of a plastic so hard ‘the surface of a diamond is cut and powdered as if it were ordinary glass.’ W.C. also wrote that Rainbow city is filled with gardens of ‘great shade trees and flowering plants, luxurious beyond belief, whose individual blooms often measure three feet in diameter.’ They are visited by enormous butterflies with wingspreads of seven or eight feet; their bodies would ‘fill a large sized turkey platter.... They are as large as full sized eagles and are beautiful beyond words.’
(W.C. didn’t mention anything about the four- or five-foot caterpillars such butterflies imply, but perhaps the people of Rainbow City didn’t mind encountering huge, hungry larvae in their gardens (which had somehow maintained themselves for over 2 MILLION years - Branton) because they were larger themselves. Emery estimated, after looking at the clothes and furniture the ancients left behind, that they averaged about eight feet tall.

“While preparing Rainbow City for resettlement by the Ancient Three (who were supposedly still around after 2 ½ million years! - Branton) and their specially-selected followers, Emery and the others discovered many incredible devices abandoned by the ancients. Like Saint Germain’s magical dishwasher, ‘vibratory flames’ kept the plastic clothes, carpets, and dishes of the city eternally spotless. Other vibrations supplied the artificial sunlight for the underground gardens. Ancient books read themselves aloud when a button was pushed. The ancients surpassed themselves, however, as transportation engineers. One of their most remarkable inventions was the ‘portal,’ a closet-like room with two doors that would warp space and deliver people or cargo to any point on the globe when the user merely concentrated on the destination. According to W.C., one of Emery’s comrades was Kilroy, ‘a red headed Irishman.’ Kilroy was overjoyed when he learned to work the portal, and in his spare moments he would trip from place to place all over the world, appearing just long enough to scrawl ‘Kilroy was here’ on a convenient wall. The explorers also found and tested the ancients’ enormous subway system. It was the NE PLUS ULTRA of subways, with hundreds of thousands of miles of tunnels from the Central Terminal beneath Rainbow City and snaking under all the continents and oceans. Enormous trains a hundred feet in diameter had flown through the centers of the tubes, held in place by vibrational power; the cruising speed of the trains was a touch over two thousand miles an hour. Emery’s group explored a few of the nearby tunnels, and took one of the ancient trains on a short run beneath Antarctica, but the majority of the worldwide tube system was sitting unexplored and empty, as it had since the great disaster struck a million years ago. There is something in W.C.’s description of the tunnels to tickle the scalp of any science fiction lover—an incredibly old network of huge tunnels under our feet, silent and sealed off into thousand-mile sections behind impervious steel doors, their entrances long buried by earthquakes and landslides. Emery located a few of the great sub-terminals of the system under Asia, Africa, and the Americas using the portals, and he found them filled with cashes of unused atomic weapons—mostly personal ‘blaster types.’ The Hefferlins themselves discovered the end of one of the subterranean branch lines near their home, ‘some two hundred feet or more up the side of a mountain’ west of Sheridan, Wyoming. ‘This tunnel seems to have been twisted and sheared off.’ Was this the work of the Snake People? ‘When we have time,’ W.C. wrote, ‘we shall use the portals to find the answer.’
“...There were seven temples scattered across Asia, Africa, and South America, all provided with special vibratory jewels, or ‘thought machines;’ from these temples the Ancient Three had for several decades broadcast their wishes to the minds of the non-Western world. Their message was that ‘each people, country, nation must earn its independence from the European Empire Nations.’ In the future, ‘no nation will exploit another nation, put burdensome taxes upon them, nor enslave them in any way. And war will be abolished.’ All races would be equal. Under the guidance of the Ancient Three, ALL NATIONS would merge into a WORLD GOVERNMENT on the model of the United States...
 (Note: Do we have a contradiction here from the earlier statement? How can World Government protect a nation’s INDEPENDENCE? And also, just WHERE will the center of power be for this World Government - Branton)
“The Three were sending squadrons of circle-winged planes into the skies of every continent to search for more traces of ancient cities, that might be revived; when people saw the strange craft, they mistook them for alien spaceships and called them ‘flying saucers. When the Hefferlins first announced the existence of Rainbow City, they were deluged with questions from the alternative-reality community: Where, exactly, WAS Rainbow City? How can I contact the Ancient Three? Can I go to Rainbow City and work for the New Age?
Gladys Hefferlin cautioned her readers that such people were doomed to disappointment. Only certain individuals had been chosen by the Three to go to Rainbow City— not because they were ‘worthy,’ but because they were needed there. Rainbow City was not open to the curious. ‘No one can buy his way into Rainbow City,’ she wrote; adding: "We ourselves, who are the North American spokesmen, cannot enter Rainbow City at this time. Therefore we cannot promise entry to anyone else.’
The Hefferlins faded into obscurity in the early 1950s, but Rainbow City was not forgotten. In 1960, UFO writer Michael Barton, known to his readers as Michael X, published a small book titled RAINBOW CITY AND THE INNER EARTH PEOPLE, a curious mishmash of the holes-in-the-poles hollow-earth idea, the Hefferlin Manuscript, and the Shaver Mystery. Here we learn, that the Inner Earth people are far from a homogenous group; some are Masters, some are dero, and some are ordinary humans. But since the New Age is coming, the Masters—with the help of ‘Guardians,’ their friends from Venus—are slowly ‘removing’ the Dero and other destructive Beings from the Planet.
‘Both the astral and physical levels of the inner ear,’ Barton wrote, ‘are being cleaned out in preparation for the coming Golden Age.’ (another title for the so-called ‘New Age’ - Branton). The Masters and the Guardians used Rainbow City as their way-station when passing in and out of the South Polar Opening.
(As one can see, this whole account has a rather ‘New Age’ slant to it, as do most ‘revelations’ which come through mediumistic, occult or psychic ‘channels’. This very fact should cause one to have caution - Branton)
“Barton claimed to have discovered these facts in psychic conversations with a number of astral entities through a channel he called ‘Telethot....There was another writer who kept Rainbow City alive as well—a man, who proposed, that the hidden war between planets, between the human race and the Snake People, continues secretly to THIS DAY... Robert Dickhoff told us, that the day was not far off when it might be necessary to choose between Mars and Venus in an interplanetary Armageddon.”
(Note: Dickhoff supposes, that the interior of Venus is largely inhabited by Reptilians—although others claim, that some humans also live there—whereas the interior of Mars is largely populated by the human species. Dickhoff was the one, who wrote, in his book ‘AGHARTA’, that an early Asian prince learned of an even more ancient cavern system below the Himalayas. This might be the one below the Potala shrine in Lhasa Tibet, within which according to other sources there are also  perfectly preserved ‘caskets’ containing the remains of a race of ancient human giants. However the caverns below central Asia were found by this prince to be the abode of the ‘serpent people’ according to Dickhoff, large lizardian hominoids, which it was discovered were trying to psychically attack and control minds on the surface through a sinister form of black witchcraft and sorcery. Leading an army of warriors into the caverns, Dickhoff’s Buddhist sources told him, this Asian prince managed to drive out the reptilians and apprehend the prehistoric underground city for themselves. The reptilians from that point on supposedly began using the spelling ‘Aghartha’ rather than ‘Agharta’ in their propagandial psychic messages delivered to their occult human pawns, who were oblivious to the fact, that the so-called Ascended ‘Masters’ behind such messages, whom they trusted, were actually reptilians. This was a type of signal, that these reptilian sorcerers, according to Dickhoff, used. Presumably, the serpent race intended to take back Agharta for themselves one day. However, as in Doreal’s and the Hefferlin’s accounts, even though some of the information seems to support the ‘Grand Scenario’ as it is laid out in the mutually corroborating COSCON files and elsewhere, other allegations seem to be embellishments resulting from the occult leanings of the sources, and because of the largely paraphysical origin of many of these ideas it is very likely that such ‘revelations’ are nothing more, than psychic propaganda designed to throw humanity off track from the REAL and documentable historical truths - Branton)

Info about Agartha (from our  link: newearth.html)

Mariana Stjerna - Agartha- The Earth's Inner World

http://www.soullink.se/books_from_us/?ID=429
Description:
Mariana Stjerna made contact with Timothy Brooke, a Canadian, who appeared to her briefly and then "dictated" this book. He was saved by Agarthans from a shipwreck off the coast of Canada mid-20th century, and is now alive and well in Agartha. In this lovely Novel, he recounts his story and describes life in this five-dimensional paradise. Excerpt from the book "Agartha - The Earth's Inner World":

1. Saved by Beings from Inner Earth
An escape into eternity, or from eternity? With this thought I awoke from my meditation. I might have been asleep or awake. Sometimes it’s difficult to tell the difference between Dreaming and Reality. You can actually experience Reality in your sleep. Intangible things become tangible there. For me, it was a strange journey. And for me, it has become Reality. But you are welcome to doubt my story — until it can be proved. I have no proof … yet!
A tall, young man with fair hair, cheerful blue eyes, regular features, and a shapely mouth — a handsome, young man, in fact — had appeared, while I was meditating. He started talking, and in my head I could hear every word he said. I was amazed!
“Hi Mariana!” he said. “My name’s Timothy, but I’m called Tim. My surname is Brooke. Originally I’m from Seattle, USA, but I’ve ‘emigrated,’ and these days I live inside the Earth. You probably won’t believe me at first, but I think I can convince you. That’s my mission. It’s time for people on the Earth’s surface to know, that we exist. Now I’m going to tell you my story.
My father was a sea captain. He owned a small cargo boat, which plied its trade along the coast between Seattle and Vancouver, Canada. I was brought up as a sailor, pretty much against my will, even though my mother didn’t want me to go to sea. She thought her constant worry about my father was enough. My mother was Swedish and my father of British stock. That’s why I’m bilingual. They met on a cruise in the mid-20th century. Then I came along, and later on, my sister. All three of them are dead now, but I survived a shipwreck when I was nineteen. In spite of Mother’s tears and pleadings, that I wouldn’t go to sea, I was father’s first mate by this stage, instead of staying in high school. Father was a resolute, but fair man, and I loved him. A terrible storm swept relentlessly over us, with waves as high, as houses. Our little boat had weathered storms before, but this was like a volcano. We were close to the coast, which was rocky and inaccessible. Father wanted to anchor as close to the shore, as possible, so we steered towards land. Our cargo was timber and it was heavy, but we didn’t get very far, before we were caught in a whirlpool, which lifted the boat like a glove and threw it against the nearest cliff. I remember a terrible crash and my father’s otherwise stern face being close to mine.
“I love you, my boy,” he cried, with tears in his eyes. “If we ride out this storm, I’m never going to force you to go to sea ever again.”
Those were his last words. The ship was torn apart, and I was in the sea, clinging to a log floating on the cold waves. I remember passing out. Father was gone, and the four others in the crew had disappeared. Suddenly, I felt someone human nearby, and a boat was carrying me steadily forwards. Was this death? I lay in the bottom of the boat and tried to raise myself up on my elbows, but fell straight back down again. A friendly face with clear-cut features and long, fair hair bent over me, and at first I couldn’t tell if it was male or female. I soon realized it was a man. The boat entered a kind of well-lit tunnel decorated with paintings. It wasn’t long before we were moored at a jetty. The fair-haired man and another one with dark hair lifted me up and helped me ashore.
“Where am I, where’s my father? Where are the rest of the crew? Did the timber go down?” The questions gushed from me in a rush.
“Your father couldn’t be saved, nor the crew or the cargo. You were clinging to a log, which brought you straight to us. That saved your life. We were on the lookout for wrecked ships because of the storm. You’re inside the Earth now. Welcome!”
The man spoke excellent English. “I’m Mannul Zerpa, and I’m taking you to Our World for some rest.”
When I was younger, an old sailor told me many stories. One of these was about a World, that existed inside the Planet, and it completely fascinated me. Of course, I’d thought it was just a sailor’s yarn. And yet here I was, in the middle of it, right in the middle of an old sailor’s tale! I pinched myself hard to make sure I wasn’t Dreaming. This couldn’t be true — but it was. “When can I return to Seattle?” I asked.
“You’ll have to take that up later with someone else. Look around you! You’re walking on solid Earth.”
The light was strange, when we came out of the tunnel or hole in the rock, where the boat was tied up — a strange Glow in a strange summery landscape. I had left Seattle on a dark November morning, windy and drizzling. There had been leaves on the ground, and the sky was gray. Here the air was clear, with a friendly Sun beaming down on us. Glorious flowers lined our path. There were green trees and bushes everywhere. It was like a beautiful morning in a Canadian forest. I had been in forests like this many times with my father and uncle when I was younger, but this seemed sparser and lighter somehow, with more flowers.
“We’re just coming to the village, where you’re going to stay,” announced my fair-haired savior, with a smile. My savior, literally!
“I have to thank you,” I stammered. “You saved my life. It’s just that I feel so confused. I’m actually inside the Earth, below the soil, in some kind of village in a farming area?”
“You’ll find out more when we get there,” Mannul informed me. “I’ve saved lots of people from drowning. Your ship isn’t the only one to go down outside these mountains. But it’s only the sea out there, which is treacherous, the sea, which belongs to the outer Earth. In here it’s calm and always summer.”
And I had to make do with that. We walked through the most beautiful landscape I have ever seen, before reaching a village with tall, round buildings. They seemed weirdly luminous, probably because of the stones they were made out of. I could hear birdsong in the luxuriant trees, and I saw squirrels and a small hare, which crept behind a clump of grass. It was like the outside Earth, yet very different. Somehow, it was too perfect, like a film! The houses surrounded what seemed to be a small market square, with a well in the center. We entered one of the houses. A hall with an arched roof led into a semi-circular room with floor-to-ceiling windows. The furniture in the room was what I would deem modern — comfortable, beautifully-designed chairs and tables, yet different from furniture on Earth. Everything glowed, as if the furniture itself and the surrounding walls were alive. And the roof! It didn’t exist! It was open at the top, with sunlight filtering softly through woven leaves and branches. Mannul gestured for me to sit on a sofa by one of the unglazed windows, where I could see the amazing view outside. The friendly, fair-haired man disappeared after placing a cup in front of me. He would return soon, he said. He told me to drink up before his return. I tasted the drink. It was wonderful, like a pale wine with a slight tang of honey. The first mouthful shot through my body like an arrow of fire, and I came around at once. Good grief, I thought, I’ll be drunk!  But I wasn’t, even after drinking it all up. However, I did experience intense clarity of thought and great wellbeing. When Mannul returned, he wasn’t alone. With him was a man, who was at least six and a half feet (two meters) tall. He had gleaming, long, brown hair and was clean-shaven and lithe (marked by effortless grace). His huge, beautiful eyes were set in a youthful face, yet I got the feeling, that he was older, than time! I stood politely and bowed, and he gave me a friendly smile and hugged me.
“Welcome to Wonderland underground, Timothy,” he said. “I know how you got here, and now I’ll tell you where you are.”
“Are you a Wise Master?” I interrupted, “I’ve heard people like that exist inside the Earth.” The man laughed heartily.
“There is wisdom everywhere, young man,” he responded. “The man, who believes himself wise, is stupid. Stupidity always tries to mislead wisdom. But if you’re seeking wisdom, you need only look around carefully. Nature is full of wisdom, which surface-dwellers are doing their best to destroy.”
“Then, who are you?” I asked, inquisitive as usual.
“My name is Dariel. You don’t need to know more, than that just yet. I’m one of the nine on the Committee here. We bid you welcome, and wonder if you would like to stay a few days as an honored guest from the surface.”
I bowed again and accepted the invitation. You don’t turn down an invitation like that.
“Will you help me to get home afterwards?” I asked. “My mother is bound to worry, that I’ve drowned like the rest of them.”
“Yes, we’ll help you get home, if you still want to go.” Dariel gave me a long, keen look. “We don’t force anybody to stay here, but few return home, and those, who do, are never believed, when they tell people about us. This is a pleasant place to live. We don’t fight about money, and most of our needs are taken care of. We keep track of the surface and the people there. We know, that their supposed development has only brought disaster. Everything is easier here. You’re going to love it.”
Dariel stooped and took my hands. He looked right into my eyes, and I was filled with an indescribable inner peace. I was still grieving profoundly for my father and missing my mother and Littl’un, my sister. But, in a flash, the grief and longing lessened, and I wanted to learn more about this peculiar country I was in. It was, as if I had been stroked softly by an angel’s wing, leaving me happy and at peace. In the distance soft music was playing, not at all like modern music from above ground, more like Mozart or one of the old Masters.
“Mannul will take you on a tour of our borders, beginning a few days from now. First you will visit Telos, which is where surface-dwellers end up, if they happen to fall into our World. Timothy, I’m your friend. Please call on me, if you need questions answered or help of any kind. We’ll meet again when the time comes.”

2. Agartha — A Paradise Inside the Earth

“A country, where sorrow doesn’t exist!” I exclaimed, as Mannul guided me through a village, that was laid out like a huge smile. Mannul grinned too.
“You’re right,” he replied. “But most people, who live here are just ordinary people like you and me. There is sorrow, but it is treated differently here. You allow it to dominate you, but we take control over sorrow and setbacks. Friendly hands reach out when you need help — physical or psychological. On the surface, you haven’t discovered the joy of helping each other. Your thoughts are on money. Help costs money, and not everyone can afford it. But Tim, everyone has a heart, and that costs nothing. You only have to listen to it. Your heart (not heart, but Spirit gives advice, LM) gives you good advice, but you have to talk the same language. Experience and understanding will help you.”
I don’t know what happened next; it all went so fast! Mannul held my hand and I felt like an apprehensive, expectant seven-year-old, going off to school for the first time. I didn’t have much time to see the scenery, which whisked by. There seemed to be water below me at one stage, and small, white geese (as they were known at home) bobbing on the dark-blue water. Then there was sand on golden sandy beaches, and finally emerald-green grass. At last, with a slight thud, we came in to land.
“Look around you!” Mannul burst out.
I did. If Mannul hadn’t been holding on to my hand, I probably would’ve fainted, but there really was cause for my confusion. The air and lovely surroundings were alive — not with a peaceful, eternal breathing, but completely tangible, lively, and almost wild. Every single bush, tree, and flower produced noise, bordering on a cacophony. Small figures sailed smoothly to and fro and round and round. They wound their way between the plants and onto the plants and inside them. The summer meadow was alive in more ways, than one. Elementals and people crowded together here. I could see people — adults and children — and I could hear rousing music. Everyone was dancing.
“Are they having a dance right in the middle of the morning?” I asked, slightly shocked at such enthusiasm so early in the day.
“Of course!” replied my guide, looking at me, as if I was weird. “When someone wants to dance at work, we organize a hop and sing.”
“Does anything get done, then?” I ventured to ask.
“More, than if we didn’t dance,” was the retort.
I sighed. This was another country, and I needed to be open to new ideas. All countries have their own customs, and this was as true on the inside of the Planet, as on the outside. There were huge differences. We stood awhile, watching the dancing.
It was like folk-dancing really, although I’ve only seen Canadian and Swedish folk-dancing, so I don’t claim to be an expert. The musicians danced, as they played, and their fiddles and other instruments, that I didn’t recognize, sounded like folk-music from Dalarna, Sweden, where my grandmother lives. I hadn’t visited my grandmother for a few years, but I remembered how wonderful Swedish midsummer was. This was similar, but without any drunkenness or fighting. I looked inquiringly at Mannul, and, chuckling, he took my hand and swung us out among the dancers. Soon I was holding a soft female hand and watching a smiling young girl swing me around. But the dance didn’t last forever, regardless of my desires. My “underground” guide pulled me away.
“We have to get on!” he exclaimed, laughing at my disappointed expression. A completely lovely landscape passed before my delighted eyes, and we arrived at a village. There were fewer houses, but built in the same style: beehive-style, as I called it, although rounder, than beehives and without tops. I wondered if they had rain, storms, or snow here.
“No,” Mannul read my mind (that too!). “We have a perfect climate here. We have what you would call early summer all year round, and pretty much full bloom.”
“How come you have a perfect climate when we have rain, snow, and storms on Earth?” I wondered in surprise.
“Doesn’t our weather seep through somewhere?” Mannul guffawed (hearty burst of laughter). I couldn’t understand what he was laughing at. There was a bench nearby, and he gestured for me to sit down.
This is how he explained the amazing climate underground:
“Everything has to do with belief,” he said. “We feel completely safe here. There is no fear, worry, evil, envy, or jealousy. We have learned to live in complete safety and believe in an eternal Force, which is always here to help and protect us. Negativity disrupts the lower atmosphere and the stratosphere. Weather patterns reflect patterns of Thought.
“Destruction on the Earth’s surface means, that meteorological forces are equally destructive. They are affected by the ambiance (an atmosphere or a character of a place) on Earth, which is far from harmonious. There is religious conflict. Envy and suspicion, fueled by money and drugs, destroy rather, than build up. If we weigh the good and bad on Earth, my dear Tim, good loses every time.”
“Good grief!” I exclaimed incredulously. “You don’t mean, that the weather depends on how people think? Surely the weather is regulated by other forces entirely.” (I couldn’t think of anything other, than the National Weather Service, but felt, that wasn’t quite what I meant in this context.)
“Here you could say, that we’re in the lap of the Earth,” said Mannul, smiling. “This in itself represents security, because your adverse conditions can’t penetrate the thick crust between us. We honor, thank, and caress Mother Earth literally every day, and in return she provides protection and love. You surface-dwellers would feel better, if you focused on your counterparts in Agartha (the name of this Interior World) and took strength from here when you are depressed or troubled. If only you would ask us for strength.”
“We don’t know about you,” I replied bitterly. “How can we ask someone for help if we don’t know they exist?”
“Then it’s time for us to approach people on Earth,” was the reply. “But we don’t want to encourage those, who sow the seeds of dissent and discord. That is why we have shut ourselves off for so long. And, by the way, what about that God you worship? He’s worshiped with great pomp the whole World over. You pray to him, fight wars on his behalf, argue about him, and lay all the blame at his feet. What kind of a religion is that? You might think it’s logical, but we don’t. This is why it would be difficult to allow Earth people here, unless they are specially chosen, or are people, who arrived as you did.”
“I want to return to the surface and tell everyone about you,” I said. Mannul just nodded, and helped me up from the bench. I couldn’t see many people in this village. There were children playing in much the same way, that children on the surface play. There were sandpits and swings, and adults to look after them. There were pools where children were swimming. The pools were wonderful, with slides, which children love. Leafy vegetation surrounded small, sandy slopes, where children could slide into the water. There were exciting, winding, stone steps to scamper up and down, and more besides. The children seemed to live in a fairytale land.
“There are quite a few children here …” I began. I wondered how they got here, but I didn’t dare ask. Mannul burst out laughing, which I was getting used to.
“Listen to me, young man!” he snorted (exhaled noisily through the nostrills) wildly before continuing.
“Do you need sex lessons? It’s exactly the same here, as on the surface. But we call it Love here, which is rare up there. Sex is depraved (morally corrupt, perverted) there. Here it’s something positive, that we respect. We don’t have marriage here, but a ‘union’ of body and soul. And a union is always a good excuse for a party.”
“Infidelity, mistakes, indiscretions (rudeness), divorces …?” I continued.
Laughter bubbled from Mannul as he answered, “You’ve got it wrong again, son. Those words don’t exist in our vocabulary. Up there you live like you are just bodies. We are Souls with a much Higher Level of Consciousness. But we have as much fun, as you do — the difference is, that we stay together all our lives.”
“For hundreds of years,” I chuckled. “You’d really have time to get tired of each other. You need to try different things … even with sex, right?”
“I don’t see why.” Mannul really didn’t seem to understand. “That’s not how Love works here, anyway. Come on, let’s carry on. We’re going to a kind of symposium, that they’re having beneath Mount Shasta in Telos. They’re discussing surface-dwellers, so I want you to come with me.”
I was filled with curiosity. Maybe I could reach the Earth’s surface from there. Yet, Mount Shasta was in California, and I wanted to get home to Seattle. There would be flights, but I had no money. I said as much.
“Don’t worry, son. We’ll sort it out. If you want to go home and the others agree, we’ll find money for the journey. Let’s do one thing at a time.”
I thought about the incredibly cute girl I had danced with, and considered staying. Mannul read my thoughts easily, but just squinted at me and grinned. “Her name is Sisilla,” he said.

3. An Important Mission for Tim

The rest of the journey was by hovercraft, as it is called, and was double-quick. I didn’t have much time to see my surroundings, just glimpses of mountains, forests, and lakes, which flew past — or which we flew past. It was more fun, than flying in a plane. We landed with a splash in the canal. Not with a hefty thud, but gently, like a dancer in Swan Lake. Here, finally, was a house. which looked like a house. It was low and elongated, built in the round, but I couldn’t see a roof here either. It was a shimmering pink — unusual for a house. Around it were masses of beautifully arranged flowers, in all colors imaginable.
“This is what you would call the Town Hall. We call it the Meeting House. Sometimes we have planning-meetings and organize help. This is where you can ask for help getting home.”
We went inside. I was overwhelmed by the beauty I encountered inside the building. The walls were painted with lovely natural images, and between the flagstones on the floor grew low, green plants with white and yellow flowers. There were tall, gracious, fair human forms moving around everywhere. We ascended a spiral staircase in the center of the room. The building didn’t have a roof, and the top floor consisted of a sort of suspended platform. It didn’t move, which would have made me seasick. Mannul smiled, took my arm, and led me to a large, airy, apparently floating room. There were nine people there, men and women. They were sitting in a ring of comfortable chairs, each with a small green table before them. There were flowers everywhere. The walls were of woven branches, some with exquisite blossoms. When they saw us, someone brought two chairs and asked us to sit. That was just as well, as by now my legs were like jelly. I noticed a venerable (worthy of respect) person sitting in the center, his blue eyes focused on me. His hair and beard were long and white, yet his face was unwrinkled, and he looked youthful and happy. He raised his hand in greeting, and I did likewise.
“Welcome, young man from the Earth’s surface,” he said in a clear voice, in English. “I’m Arniel, leader of the symposium. We hope you are happy and will stay with us.”
“I’m amazed and delighted at everything, that I’ve seen,” I replied. “However, I miss my mother and my sister, and I would like to go home and visit them first. Afterwards, I would like to return here for good.”
“Your wish will be granted,” said Arniel. “There is one condition. We want the surface people to know, that we are here. You are welcome to return, but first you must spread the message of our existence.”
“They’ll never believe me,” I mumbled, but Arniel held up his hand.
“Don’t give up, whatever they think. If you get into difficulties, we will come to your rescue. It is time to tell the surface people, that we are here and they are not alone. We have no wish to partake in their pollution and other misery. Please emphasize that. If they carry on, they will cause their own annihilation, total extinction. This won’t affect the Planet itself, just the people. It will be serious, and it will happen soon.”
“Can’t we be saved?” I wondered, terrified.
“We hope so. We’re working on helping the Earth, as otherwise we may be affected too. You must be our messenger, Timothy.”
“I’ll do my best,” I stammered.
The imposing (grand, impressive) Elder held out a small whistle to me. “If you’re in trouble, blow this. You won’t hear anything, but the signal will reach us at the speed of thought. Don’t lose it.”
I bowed and thanked them over and again, until Arniel, laughing, stopped me with his hand. “Don’t worry about money, my son. Mannul will give you plenty. You may need to stay a good while. He will take you as far, as the Portal on Mount Shasta.”
Mannul pulled my sleeve, and I bowed slightly more quickly this time. I didn’t have time to see, who the others were at the green tables, but I’m sure I didn’t know them. I felt completely dazed.
“You’ll need some suitable clothes,” said Mannul, looking at my thin, white shirt and tight, blue trousers. He hustled me out of the building, down a narrow alley, straight to a tailor’s. It couldn’t have been anything else; there were clothes hanging everywhere. A man emerged from the interior and greeted Mannul warmly.
“Bring the boy some nice clothes,” said my guide. “Give him a bag filled with all he’ll need for an Earth visit. And one of those wallets, that they use above ground. I’ll put money in it for him.”
“Am I going to California right away?” I asked.
“Yes. There are regular flights to Seattle from there.”
“What if I want to get back?”
“We’ll cross that bridge, when we come to it. Let’s do one thing at a time. The tailor will outfit you first. I’ll wait for you here.”
I returned to my guide wearing jeans, a pale blue pullover, and a navy jacket, and felt slightly awkward seeing Mannul’s ankle-length gown. At the same time, I felt great, and incredibly pleased to be going home to my nearest and dearest. Mannul handed me a bulging wallet. It included my passport. I have no idea how he had gotten hold of it.
“It’s a new passport, that we made in surface-style. Don’t you think we know what you need in order to avoid the long arm of the law?”
Well, obviously, only I hadn’t gotten that far. I stomped after Mannul, my backpack a secure weight on my back. We wound our way through the picturesque town of Telos and reached a tunnel. There were some small vehicles there, and Mannul and I got into one of them. He pressed a couple of buttons, and it started immediately.
“Don’t give up, however unkind that people are,” he warned. “And if, against all odds, you meet an Earth girl, tell her about us. She’s only worth bringing here, if she believes you.”
“I might want to stay at home,” I replied. “My mother may need help. She’ll be living on a widow’s pension, which won’t go far.”
“I’ll ask the stars for guidance,” said Mannul, giving me a shrewd look. “You have to come back, to turn in a report to Arniel, if nothing else. If you want to return to the surface afterwards, we’ll discuss it then. I don’t think, that’s what the stars have in store for you.”
“What stars?” I asked, looking around the tunnel. There was only a weak, flickering light from one or two lanterns. But Mannul just laughed, and the tunnel grew much lighter.
The truck stopped in front of a long staircase. I gave my kind companion a hug and started up the stairs, my steps quickening, as I climbed. Finally, I stood on a platform, and an iron door opened, onto what I knew at that time, as Life. I walked slowly out into the rain and wind on the great mountainside. Mount Shasta witnessed yet another small human leave its dark embrace and grope his way to what is known as Reality.

4. Sad Tidings in Seattle

I don’t remember coming down Mount Shasta, but at the foot of the mountain was a small town, complete with motels and shops. I traveled from there by bus and taxi to the nearest passenger airport and was soon settled in a comfortable seat on a flight to Seattle. I was thinking about my mother and sister, and there was a furtive tear on my cheek, when the stewardess arrived with the beverage cart. I remembered my mother as a fairly tall, beautiful woman having curly, blond hair with a few gray strands framing a smooth, rosy face with eyes like violets. My dear mother wasn’t just attractive, but sensible, warm, and loving! And red-headed, mischievous Littl’un, a younger sister to be proud of, but who still needed the protection of an elder brother. She was always much too willing to get into mad scrapes with her friends. When I left home, she was seventeen, and worryingly popular with the boys. My family was everything to me, and I missed them intensely. The closer I got to home, the more worried I became. I was arriving, of course, with a well-filled wallet, which I would have to explain. I was smartly dressed and much wiser, than when I had set out. But you don’t earn money on the high seas. Well, I would just have to come up with some yarn, before I dared tell the truth. Then I remembered, that actually, it was the truth I was here to tell, and, sighing, I finished up the generous amount of food served on the plane. To my relief, it wasn’t beef, but finely-sliced chicken with plenty of vegetables. After a vegetarian diet, your stomach reacts to what we call normal food, especially meat. I knew Seattle airport well. Seattle is on the coast, and our house is near the large harbor where the cargo boats are moored. Our house, like many in the area, had its own jetty. As I alighted from the airport taxi, I was whistling the happiest tune I knew. What a great feeling! I was back at my beloved childhood home. I rang the bell. I kissed the door handle and rang again. I rang the special code, which my sister and I used. Nobody answered. Mother and Littl’un were both out, and I didn’t have a key. Then I heard a woman’s voice, that I recognized. It was the kind lady next door, known as Big Tillie. I turned around and there she was.
“Is that really Timothy Brooke? Weren’t you drowned? Are you a ghost?”
“I’m alive and kicking. I didn’t drown, but all the others did. I haven’t had a chance to get in touch with my family. Do you know where they are?”
I thought Tillie was going to faint, and I put my long arm around her shoulders to support her. She burst into tears.
“You’ve been away three years,” she sniffed. “Your mother and sister are both dead. Your sister secretly got married just before the terrible news came. She died, giving birth six months after her marriage. Your mother sickened after hearing about the shipwreck and died a few months later. I think she died of sorrow, after losing her entire family. The house has been up for sale for a long time, but it has not sold, so I guess it’s yours. Your brother-in-law, Bertie, moved to Vancouver. I think he remarried.
“I’ve got the address of your mother’s lawyer. You must find out, if your mother left a will. Come in and I’ll make some tea to fortify you. You can stay here, until you get yourself sorted out.”
I went with kind, old Tillie. A cold hand gripped my heart. I had no family left. There was only me. I was the loneliest person in the World. I sank down on Tillie’s sofa and cried. This time they weren’t tears of happiness. I felt sorry for myself, though
I knew it wouldn’t help, and I was overwhelmed with grief. I still had a difficult mission to carry out, in spite of all this bad news. Tillie was a great help. She called the lawyer right away, and I took a taxi to pick up the house keys. He had not been able to sell the house without proving there was no-one to inherit. The lawyer had been in no hurry to investigate. He seemed relieved, that I had turned up and that Tillie could vouch for me. So I had a roof over my head. It felt weird entering the empty house. My old bedroom was dusty and untidy, just as I’d left it. Littl’un’s room had changed. There were baby things in it, including a cradle — probably our old cradle. On a table an unfinished baby cardigan was thrown, likely the work of my mother."

















Земля является полой, а внутри неё находится ещё одно Cолнце
15 февраля 2014
earth-chronicles.ru
Математик Леонард Эйлер выдвинул теорию - Земля является полой, а внутри нее находится еще одно солнце! Ранее в своем научно-фантастическом романе «Плутония», посвященном также Арктике, российский геолог и географ академик Владимир Афанасьевич Обручев заглянул… вглубь Земли. И увидел, что наша Планета изнутри полая!

Пятна на Солнце

О чем же идет речь в романе? В начале 1914 года геофизик и астроном Николай Иннокентьевич Труханов, уже несколько лет не встающий с кресла из-за своей болезни, выдвигает гипотезу, согласно которой Земля внутри пустотелая. В ее недрах существует свой животный и растительный мир, освещаемый собственным светилом. Чтобы доказать эту гипотезу, Труханов организует полярную экспедицию на «землю Нансена», где, по его расчетам, должен располагаться вход в подземный мир. В состав экспедиции входят геолог, зоолог, метеорологи, ботаник и золотоискатель-авантюрист. Перед тем как отправиться в путь, путешественники получают от Труханова запечатанный конверт… Итак, экспедиция преодолевает горный хребет и начинает спуск. Ее участники оказываются на дне впадины и вновь начинают подъем. Но, судя по показаниям гипсотермометра, члены экспедиции не поднимаются, а спускаются на невиданную доселе глубину. Солнце над ними стоит в зените и почему-то покрыто темными пятнами. Тут ученые вскрывают конверт, данный им Трухановым, и узнают, что цель их экспедиции – доказательство того, что Земля внутри пустотелая и внутри нее имеется своя жизнь. В романе «Плутония» на фоне увлекательных приключений дается очень подробное описание древних животных, с которыми столкнулись путешественники, и горных пород, встречающихся им в глубинах планеты. Становится интересно, почему известный геолог, академик, директор института и руководитель многочисленных экспедиций В.А. Обручев написал такой фантастический роман.
Куда стекаются воды

Несколько лет назад мне довелось читать статью академика Евгения Воробьева, где тот писал, что в 1947 году контр-адмирал Военно-морского флота США Ричард Бёд во время исследовательского полета над Северным полюсом заметил с воздуха на льду странное пятно. А потом ему показалось, что он видит мираж: вместо белой ледяной пустыни под самолетом простирались леса, реки, луга, на которых паслись животные, похожие на мамонтов. Когда через много лет дневники Ричарда Бёрда были опубликованы, им, конечно, не поверили. И это неудивительно. Ведь согласно современным геологическим представлениям, под земной корой находится раскаленная мантия. Эффект полярных сияний некоторые ученые объясняют воздействием «подземной» атмосферы Правда, были ученые, которые сомневались в общепринятых истинах, касающихся строения Земли.
Один из них, английский астроном Эдмунд Галлей, в 1692 году предположил, что поверхность Земли представляет собой оболочку толщиной около 1000 километров. А внутри находится ядро размером с Меркурий, которое обогревает внутреннюю часть планеты, где существует своя жизнь. И вот еще одно очень интересное утверждение астронома. Эффект полярных сияний он объяснял тем, что «подземная» атмосфера, вырываясь в «надземную», начинает светиться.

(Английский астроном  Эдмунд Галлей, швейцарский математик Леонард Эйлер, амер. Джон Кливз Симмс-младший опирались на информацию из старинных книг разных народов 17-18 веков, которые у них имелись, а не на собственные открытия, добытые на Полюсах, и выдавали их за свои теории и гипотезы!
Да атмосфера светится, но разными цветами, о которых этот астроном не говорит, цвета показывают разные вибрации физических цивилизаций 3го Уровня Сознания, которые населяют Землю под землёй или на земле. Но уже давно больше показываются Цвета Вибраций не-физических цивилизаций 4го Уровня Сознания (Синий-Индиго, Фиолетовый, Лиловый-Magenta, Розовый и Белый), так как Земля (и мы на ней) уже очень близки к Переходу на не-физический Уровень Сознания, где Вселенская Игра будет продолжаться! Это объясняет такое невероятно огромное количество Новых цивилизаций, прибывших на Землю последнее время: все негативные торопятся попасть на Землю до Перехода! В связи с этим больше и больше Форм Жизни, сделанных из Плазмы, а не из плотной материи, будут прибывать на Землю и больше в её воды! Многочисленные фото Плазменных Форм Жизни вы найдёте на многих Страницах нашего сайта. ЛМ).


Современник Галлея, великий швейцарский математик Леонард Эйлер, академик Петербургской академии наук, выдвинул похожую теорию. Наша планета Земля является полой, а внутри нее находится еще одно Солнце, которое сияет над обитаемыми материками. Были и ученые, которые не только выдвигали теорию полой планеты, но и пытались организовать экспедиции, чтобы проникнуть в подземный мир. В 1818 году Джон Кливз Симмс-младший предложил конгрессменам и видным ученым США свою гипотезу: «Земля полая, содержит несколько твердых сфер, концентрических, лежащих одна в другой, и имеет на полюсах отверстия… В ней мы найдем теплые и богатые земли, изобилующие полезными ископаемыми и животными, а может быть, и людьми, как только минуем 82 градуса северной широты». Гипотезе об «отверстиях на полюсах, куда стекаются воды» некоторые ученые дали положительную оценку.
 Странные фотоснимки со спутника «эсса-7»

В СССР гипотеза Обручева о подземном мире произвела впечатление не только на любителей фантастической литературы, но и на руководство страны. По мнению исследователя В. Креславского, активность советских антарктических исследований в 1930-1940-е годы объясняется не чем иным, как желанием властей проверить «сумасшедшую» гипотезу ученого. Не только советское правительство предпринимало попытки проникнуть через отверстие на полюсе в подземную Плутонию. Известный политический деятель и исследователь Антарктики Мигель Серрано в статье, повторно опубликованной в 2006 году, выразил твердую уверенность в существовании подземного мира: «…важно выяснить излагаемые аргументы и теории, которые предполагают полую Землю, я вижу их лишь повторением или возрождением древней идеи, как они выражаются во многих мифах и легендах, которые являют человечеству существенное значение…» Отношение к реальности существования Плутонии изменилось в конце ХХ века после появления у исследователей космических снимков полярных территорий.
На них ученые увидели очень странное отображение северного и южного сияний. Долгое время причиной полярного сияния считалось свечение разреженных слоев воздуха под воздействием протонов и электронов, проникающих в атмосферу из космоса. Правда, Нансен и другие ранние исследователи Арктики писали в своих воспоминаниях о полярных странах, об огненных сполохах сияния, поднимающихся от горизонта и уходящих кверху, к зениту. На эту информацию серьезные ученые не обращали внимания до тех пор, пока в 1968 году американский метеорологический спутник ESSA-7 не передал на Землю странные снимки Северного полюса.
При полном отсутствии облаков, что на таких снимках бывает крайне редко, в районе полюса видна громадная дыра – отверстие. Фотография эта подлинная – экспертизы проводились неоднократно. Странные космические снимки были получены и на Антарктиде. Изображения, полученные с помощью искусственных спутников NASA, наглядно демонстрируют, что полярные сияния исходят изнутри Земли и образуют своего рода кольцо вокруг отверстия вблизи Южного полюса. Американский сторонник идеи полой Земли Джонс Мак-Ниббли называет три основных признака, доказывающих реальность существования подземного царства. Во-первых, на снимках Антарктиды хорошо видно, что на одну сторону пятна, интерпретированного как вход в полую Землю, снизу наползает туман. Откуда бы он мог взяться, если бы там не было отверстия в подземный мир? Во-вторых, именно от участка ледового континента, где находится пятно, вход в подземное царство подходит близко к океану, и там происходит образование многочисленных айсбергов. Это связано, по мнению Джонса Мак-Ниббли, с явлением «истечения льда от темного круглого участка, местоположение которого можно определить как 84,4 градуса южной широты и 39 градусов восточной долготы». В-третьих, если приглядеться к направлению воздушных потоков, то становится заметно их движение к зоне, расположенной ближе к Земле Королевы Мод и вообще к африканской стороне Антарктиды. Ветры возникают вследствие смены более легкого теплого воздуха, поступающего из подземного мира, более тяжелым холодным. Джонс Мак-Ниббли даже сделал вывод о том, что и другие планеты Солнечной системы являются полыми образованиями. В качестве примера он приводит имеющийся в Интернете инфракрасный снимок Венеры, на котором видно, что температура атмосферных газов резко понижается по мере приближения к Северному полюсу. А потом вдруг в самом центре неожиданно обнаруживается «пятнышко тепла» – это и есть точка географического полюса."



Полая Земля всегда имела много необычных миров-цивилизаций и одной из них может послужить описание приключения Роберта Монро из его книги "Далёкие Путешествия", стр. 82-90. Этот отрывок был переведён мною с английского на русский :

"Щелчок! (Молнеиносная Перемена в уровне Сознания или Встряска, перемена Миров в результате перемены волны/частоты.)

Я оказался в городе или что-то похожее на это. Одинаковые здания стояли во всех направлениях, и ни один из них больше 3-4х этажей высотой. Они были не особенно привлекательные или необычные, имели входы со стороны, казались мне окнами и дверьми. Улицы и пространство между домами не то, что были очень широкими, но были заполнены людьми, существами похожими на меня или на то, что я в тот момент представлял. Никаких машин, грузовиков или другого транспорта, телеграфных столбов, линий передач, тротуаров. Был яркий день, но Солнца над головой я не мог найти. По мере того, как я прохаживался и смешивался с населением, люди замечали меня, но казалось не реагировали, как-будто я был инопланетянин. С каждым шагом я чувствовал себя свободнее и публика казалась более человеческой. Каждый житель был погружён в себя и преследовал какую-то цель, как на работе, которая не терпит никакого абсурда всего процесса. Я не заметил никакого телесного языка и фактически не мог отличить мужчин от женщин, что было необычно для меня, пришлось согласиться что такой разницы не существовало. Не способный привлечь внимание людей на улице, я вошёл в одно из зданий и очутился в большой комнате, которая напоминала приёмную средней гостиницы. Вокруг стояли люди и похоже разговаривали. Я подошёл к мужчине, который как бы стоял за гостиничным прилавком. Он смотрел на меня с ожиданием и я понял, что мне нужно придумать какую-то причину: "У вас здесь есть ресторан?"
Я пытался сделать это естественно, но понял, по его растерянному лицу, что сделал ошибку. Тогда я применил свой небогатый опыт Не-Вербальной Коммуникации (NVC): "Имеется ли в вашем распряжении то, чем можно подзарядиться?" (из этого отрывка будет ясно, что мужчины берут Энергию или подзаряжаются от Женщин! Женщина может быть из его же Высшего Существа или из другого Высшего Существа. Также из этого отрывка вы поймёте что есть такие подземные Миры, которые испытывают часто землетрясения в виде волн, к которым приспосабливаются и к которым привыкают! Сейчас на поверхности Земли такое стало происходить очень часто во многих точках Земли! В обоих случаях и под землёй и на Земле эти Волны в Земной Коре вызываются проникновением Новых Цивилизаций на нашу Землю. ЛМ).
Мужчина ярко засветился и махнул мне вправо. Идя в указанном направлении, я почувствовал себя само-удовлетворённым, что прошёл экзамен! Они не говорили, но поняли меня, мою слабую Не-Вербальную Коммуникацию. Теперь мне будет легче и я начал представлять какую пищу они употребляют, уверенный, что она будет необычной. Передо мной появилась круглая арка и темнота позади - нет не темнота, просто подсвечена по другому, другая смесь цветов! Я с уверенностью прошёл через арку в цветную обстановку и, очутившись внутри, почувствовал как сильнейшее излучение ударило в меня подобно стене горячего пламени, я отшатнулся назад!
Это не был ресторан, мужчина ошибся! Со всех сторон надвигалась давящая сексуальная женская привлекательность: просящая, приглашающая, предлагающая, обещающая - это уже было слишком! С огромным трудом я попятился назад через арку, тяжело дыша и стараясь успокоиться. И, как только взял себя в руки, посмотрел наверх: передо мной стоял служащий этих комнат в сопровождении двух других мужчин - наверное полиция, официальные лица, КГБ или что-то в этом роде.
Один "Чекист" подошёл поближе: "Ваше удостверение, пожалуйста!?"
Я начал искать свой кошелёк в карманах, только не обнаружил карманов в комбинизоне, в который был одет, но на мне был пояс с небольшим карманом, прикреплённым к нему. Я порылся в нём, там была карточка, похожая на типичную кредитную карту. "Чекист" взял её у меня, тщательно проверил и посмотрел вверх:
"С Земли, да? Никогда не слыхал о таком городе. На другой стороне океана что ли?"
Я взял себя в руки: "Ну да, вы видите..."
"Чекист" помахал картой передо мной: "Нам не очень нравится что вы нас посетили, и в таком случае вам нужно подчиняться правилам."
Я воодушивился: "Конечно, я понимаю!"
"У нас не ходят в частные заведения и не пользуются ими, не платя вперёд. Всегда сначала нужно платить."
"Чекист" повернулся к служащему и дал ему мою карту: "Сколько он вам должен? У него не так мног на счету."
Служащий бросил карту в свой карман на ремне: "Это должно покрыть расход."
Я начал протестовать: "Но это всё, что у меня есть, я не могу..."
"В таком случае мы должны пометить вас, чтобы вас было видно," второй "Чекист" сделал шаг вперёд и взял мои руки: "Мы не можем позволить вам шататься и нарушать порядок, не имея имени."
Я недоумевал: "И что вы собираетесь делать?"
Второй "Чекист" вытащил маленький плоский ящичек из кармана и открыл его: "Не двигайся, больно не будет."
Он взял мою руку и прижал мои пальцы в коробке. Я подумал, что они взяли отпечатки пальцев, но я ошибся: чёрная краска быстро распространилась по всем моим пальцам, пока не покрыла всю руку. Я уставился на неё, ошеломлённый; они засунули мою другую руку в ящик и сейчас у меня было уже две чёрные руки! Я пытался стереть краску, но она впиталась в кожу. Первый "Чекист" посмотрел на мою руку, удовлетворённый:
"Так подойдёт! По крайней мере люди будут предупреждены, что вы идёте." Второй "Чекист" добавил: "Будут держать ухо востро. Советую вам идти домой. Таким как вы здесь делать нечего: у вас нет никаких документов. Первый "Чекист" посмотрел на меня в упор: "Мы будем за вами следить!" Затем оба повернулись, прошли через комнату и вышли на улицу.
Я собрался у стола служащего: "Извините, но я не знал что это частное заведение."
Служащий слегка волновался: "Ну а других там нет!"
Я удивился: "Вы имеете ввиду, что все эти здания - частные?" Служащий слегка потупился.
"Тогда что все эти люди делают эдесь? Их наверно около сотни!" Я достаточно сильно подчеркнул это, чтобы обратить его внимание.
"Естественно, это - их частные владения."
"Всей сотни?"
Служащий поманил меня к столу и я последовал. Он указал на ящик на стене сзади него. На нём было 5 рядов больших чёрных точек, которые напоминали дыры: по двадцать в ряду.
Он гордо указал жестом: "Это - наше личное владение: лучшие в городе!"
Я уставился на ящик: "Вы залезаете в эти дыры?"
Он закивал головой: "Только тогда, когда "Волна" прибывает. Они посредине вот такие большие, показав своими руками ширину около 2х футов. Он было собирался продолжать, как вдруг вдали прогремел гром и пол начало качать! Тут же все, собравшиеся в комнате, повернулись и поспешили на запасной выход. Служащий побежал догонять их, крича через плечо: "Это - "Волна" идёт! Думаю, это то, для чего вы прибыли сюда: стать свидетелем этого явления, но сейчас вам лучше найти своё личное место и быстро!"
Комната опустела и я старался, как мог удержаться на, ритмически покачивающемся, полу. Я с трудом продвигался к выходу под усиливающиеся раскаты грома. Вдали была видна, быстро приближающаяся, Огромнейшая Волна, не вода, а сама почва, смешивая строения и улицы в крутящийся невероятный Ком размером в сотни футов. Позади Первой Волны я заметил Вторую и Третью Волну, каждая из которых была больше Первой. Там может быть было и больше, но я не имел шанса выяснить, так как Первая Волна набежала к тому месту, где я был, здание поднялось и покатилось и я в нём: вертясь, извиваясь, ударяясь о стены...отчаянно стараясь сосредоточиться на Координатах чего? Координаты...Координаты Луи/Z-55... Луи/Z-55...достичь и вытянуться...достичь и вытянуться...закрыться наглухо...наглухо.

Щелчок! (Молнеиносная Перемена в уровне Сознания, перемена Миров. Встряска-вибрация в результате перемены волны/частоты.

Стало спокойно: сердцебиение - нормализовалось. Я старался не трястись довольно долго, чтобы общаться и, наконец, мне удалось! Передо мной был Луи/Z-55, и я почувствовал его вежливое ожидание. Я каким-то образом взял себя в руки: "И это был твой дом? А где ты был до того как начать человеческое существование?"
Он вздохнул: "Это тебе не Кентакки!"
"А ты что, собираешься туда опять?"
Луи/Z-55 внимательно слушал. Он излучал яркое, почти Белое Сияние: "Нет, не туда."
Появился неожиданный и срочный сигнал к возвращению и, до того, как я успел ответить, я автоматически двинулся прочь, а он исчез...Я вернулся и кружил над своим физическим телом, всё ещё чувствуя силу сигнала для возвращения. Я проскользнул во Второе Тело, потом в физическое и сел на водяной постели. Тело не беспокоило, мочевой пузырь тоже: сигналов не было. Тогда что же потянуло меня назад? Я не мог найти причины."


Эдвард Сноуден раскрыл данные о НЛО. В мантии Земли живет цивилизация по сравнению с которой мы подобны муравьям

http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2013-07-07-46582
Эдвард Сноуден, сообщил о известных ему фактах касающихся НЛО. Согласно документам, которые  Сноуден скопировал в ЦРУ, правительству США уже давно известно, что НЛО реально существуют и управляются видами более продвинутыми, чем человечество. Эти виды не инопланетные, а наши земные, только более продвинутые. Они живут здесь миллиарды лет и намного обогнали нас в развитии.
Сноуден: "Высшие эшелоны власти не знают, что делать с НЛО, и скармливают гражданам официальную версию, что все они просто метеорологические зонды или природные явления. Но документы говорят, что НЛО - реальность. Транспортные корабли этой цивилизации летают не только в атмосфере Земли, но были замечены на морском дне, в гидротермальных источниках, вулканах и непосредственно на солнечной орбите. В ЦРУ хранятся данные систем слежения и глубоководных сонаров, но они имеют статус государственной тайны и даже ученые не имеют доступа к этим данным об этих объектах. Этот вид умнее хомо сапиенс и живет в мантии Земли.  Это единственное место, где условия были более или менее стабильными в течение миллиардов лет. Экстремофилы могут жить при различных температурах, они были в состоянии процветать и развивать интеллект в ускоренном темпе. Хомо сапаенс и они  эволюционировали с одинаковой скоростью, но их условия жизни в мантии Земли защищали их цивилизацию от многих катаклизмов, которые происходили на  поверхности земли. . .Президент получает ежедневные брифинги о деятельности этой цивилизации и перемещению ее аппаратов - НЛО. Аналитики считают, что их технологии, ушли так далеко вперед, что мы имеем мало шансов на выживание в любой потенциальной войне с ними. Общее мнение в том, что мы всего лишь муравьи с их точки зрения и есть небольшой шанс, что они не будут и дальше обращать на нас внимание. Но военные рассматривают и возможность агрессии и текущий план действий в чрезвычайных ситуациях включает в себя план - взорвать ядерное оружие в глубоких пещерах, чтобы "запечатать" врага в надежде разрушить их коммуникации, что будет препятствовать дальнейшим атакам из недр земли". Согласно последней информации (не подтвержденной официально) - Эдвард Сноуден принял предложение Венесуэлы по предоставлению политического убежища еще в пятницу и сейчас находится в Кара
касе.

The Hollow Earth Confessions of a Pilot
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6q4_XClQLsE

North Pole Inner Earth Expedition in 2013 - Brooks Agnew
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l5h463_KYlg


Two Earths


Giuliana Conforto
Guiliana Conforto, an Astrophysicist, Italy


EPOCHAL CHANGES INTO THE 2013-2014 WINTER

Sent on 17 September 2013 (Postato il 17 settembre 2013) by Giuliana Conforto
http://www.giulianaconforto.it/?p=2470#.UjiTnS-I_to.email

"Humans can be free from their own slavery. 
What is the cause of humans’ slavery? Many people would answer the world financial system, the global élite, Bilderberg, Rothschild and so on. Their contribution is surely true, but why do billions of people depend on these few ones, who manage the financial system? Because most of them trust the illusory, dominant field, which provides electricity and all the main means of communications. It is the electromagnetic field, that cannot explain the sublime intelligence of the living-forms. The most essential one is our human brain, in particular, our brain white matter (Sun Energy of Balance! LM), able to provide the synchrony, that we feel as consciousness, evolution and the imminence of huge, epochal changes too.
Just looking at governments and churches, all dependent on the world financial system, most media ignore what is going to occur in the next few months and the wondrous opportunity we all have to free ourselves from the scarcity syndrome, that has afflicted the known human history for millennia. Major changes are actually taking place regarding the sun, the Earth  and us, humans.
The sun’s magnetic field is going to flip from North to South into the next few months; it will impact the heliosphere – the magnetic egg, about 1 light-year wide – into which the entire solar system is imbedded. Solar scientists have recognized, that the sun’s powerful magnetic field flips every 11 years. Therefore “don’t panic”, says NASA. I do agree; panic is useless and harmful. We should rather realize why this flip is so unusual in respect to all the previous ones.
Recent satellite observations have revealed the largest breach yet seen in the Earth’s magnetic field. Space experts say, that the Earth’s magnetosphere is leaking, the solar wind penetrates deeper, whereas it was in the past they had affirmed that “the Earth’s magnetic field forms an efficient shield, that deflects charged particles of cosmic origin headed for Earth.” Why do experts believe, that cosmic rays are harmful? Because they pretend to ignore, that cosmic rays are propelling humans’ genetic evolution. The Earth’s magnetosphere has never been a protective shield, in my view; it is shaped like an apple and it traps two plasma screens, the Van Allen’s belts. We are not entirely safe because weakened field could leave our planet vulnerable to solar winds”,
These two are the elements of the 4D, holographic TV – the matrix – that astronomers call “observable universe”. The two plasma screens are quickly changing, as I wrote in my book Das Sonnenkind (in German), the translation of Baby Sun Revelation (in Italian). The Earth’s magnetic field is vanishing and the sun’s imminent flip could abruptly accelerate this process, deeply affecting the human minds too.
More and more people will be able to consciously use the light side of the Force, to discern the true from the false and to develop the extraordinary abilities of their own brains, i.e. to use their own hyperspace antenna or brain white matter. As I show in my short video - "The stars will fall from the sky" - the vanishing of the Earth’s magnetosphere is not a danger for humanity. It is that of the WOMB, into which we have been imbedded for millennia,
the Revelation, that the real UNIVERSE is ORGANIC and INTELLIGENT, ETERNAL and INFINITE. It is the REBIRTH of all the humans, who yearn for a sage, right and abundant world, the evidence, that no limits actually exist. We just need to use the light side of the Force – cosmic LIFE - the only one that links and moves infinite intelligent universes. This is what physicists call “weak neutral current”, as a fact a powerful nuclear force carried by an extremely copious flux of massive messengers that physicists have named Z bosons, as I wrote in my books. By using it,  abundant, peaceful and sage world is now possible, we can realize, that no limits exist and death is not the end.
I don’t ask you to believe me. I invite you to feel the Force, to realize that LIFE is not spirit. Life is the universal Force that links and makes infinite universes alive; Its light side is what we cannot see, but can feel as intuitions, sensations, foresights, feelings, eros, creativity, innovation, emotions..."

I don't agree with everything Guiliana Conforto writes in the above newsletter (the part in red), written in September 2013 and in her book , written in 2003 ! It is a combination of some Truth and some learnt scientific Lies! She says "the real UNIVERSE is ORGANIC and INTELLIGENT, ETERNAL and INFINITE".
No, our Universe (or any other) is not totally Organic (physical), but only the first 3 Levels of Consciousness (1st, 2nd, 3rd) are physical, all higher levels are non- physical! And soon it will lose these 3 physical Levels to become non-physical Universe, then later our Old Universe will lose all other colored Layers-Vibtarions and turn into White Universe of pure Energy of Balance stating from 5th Level of Consciousness! And the final stage will be of gradual Change of all Levels of Consciousness into White Suns, the Loss of all Levels of Consciousness and Departure of Old Universe into the Source of All Life! That's why our Universe (or any other) is not Eternal and Infinite, it has a Timeline: the Beginning and the End of Life of Old Universe! Guiliana yearns for
"sage, right and abundant world" or "abundant, peaceful and sage world is now possible", but what she means, is it physical world or not physical one, is it in our Old Universe or in the New Young One?
If she means physical world in our Old Universe, then
"sage, right and abundant world" is an illusion, which can't be achieved in 3D Level: the Life of our physical Old Universe will eventually end! Anyway, "Sage, right and abundant world" can only be Holographic and on 5th, non-physical Level and higher in any Universe, otherwise: there will be NO UNIVERSAL, GALACTIC AND PLANETARY GAMES, which produce White Sparkling Energy of Balance ! I also not quite agree with her Crystalline Core idea! It is not in Earth's centre, there is a Crystal Layer, which generates artificial Fabric of Time, which imprints on sandy ocean beaches, on the surface of water or sky in the places of Portals. I have made some of these photos in our areas in Australia, which can be found on this site.
Guiliana is using popular foggy expressions like "We just need to use the light side of the Force – cosmic LIFE" , but light can be of any color: red, orange, green, blue, yellow etc. depends on Vibration (not just white Light). She doesn't specifies what color is the light she means, avoiding words White Light. She doesn't seem to mention (in her writings) anything about White Sparkling Energy of Balance except brain white matter in our physical brain. She doesn't know how the Energy of Balance is created (like brain's white matter ), and where it is used apart from brain, refering constantly to physical scientific language and dubious findings of psudo-scientists like “weak neutral current” or "nuclear force" or  Z bosons" etc. ! No, not “weak neutral current” nor "nuclear force" nor "Z bosons" !

EVERYTHING IS DONE WITH ONE AND ONLY WHITE, SHINING Sun ENERGY OF BALANCE (OR UNCONDITIONAL LOVE) !

Below is the content and some pictures from the video "THE STARS WILL FALL FROM THE SKY" by Italian astrophysicist Guiliana Conforto. There are more pictures of this scientist on other links:



Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

Pictures are from Guiliana Conforto's video: 3. "THE STARS WILL FALL FROM THE SKY"
http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=-5t8I6uhsVs


Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

On the above picture, the Earth (on the left) has White Inner Sun in the centre of Hollow Earth (below North Pole), surrounded by Red, Orange, Yellow and Green Low Vibrational Energies or Boiling Energy, then a layer of Aquamarine Vibration, a Border-Wall between low Vibrations of Boiling Electryfying Energy and higher Vibrations of Wavy Energy of Blue- Indigo, Violet (Plasmasphere), Magenta, Pink - they are closer to  Balance ! Internal Aquamarine Layer is destroying physical stuff inside/outside Earth (including Earth's Crust). This video was made in 2011.

Ниже важная статья на русском об уходе плазмы из плазмо-сферы Земли :
"Астрономы впервые поймали ветер в плазмосфере Земли"


http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2013-07-03-46387
2013 » Июль » 3

"Астрономы проанализировали данные спутников Cluster и обнаружили в магнитосфере Земли постоянное движение частиц, уносящее вещество из внутренней части магнитосферы во внешнюю, говорится в статье, опубликованной в журнале Annales Geophysicae.
(Это - невязкая, супер-лёгкая Плазма, получающаяся в результате распада всего материального внутри и снаружи Земли, она уносится в Новую Вселенную! ЛМ).

Земля окружена плазмой, которая находится над верхним слоем атмосферы и составляет внутреннюю часть магнитосферы Земли. Состояние этой плазмо-сферы определяет поведение радиационных поясов в магнитосфере Земли, насыщенных заряженными частицами, крайне опасными для космических аппаратов и космонавтов. Кроме того, она замедляет прохождение сигналов от GPS-спутников. "Понимание источников пополнения вещества плазмосферы и механизмов его потери, а также зависимости этих процессов от геомагнитной активности нужно для уяснения динамики магнитосферы и физических механизмов некоторых явлений космической погоды", — сказал Янис Дандурас (Iannis Dandouras) из Исследовательского института астрофизики и планетологии в Тулузе (Франция).
Дандурас проанализировал данные "квартета" спутников Cluster, запущенных Европейским космическим агентством. Он обнаружил устойчивое движение частиц плазмосферы со скоростью более 1,3 километра в секунду. По оценкам ученого, плазмосферный "ветер" уносит во внешнюю часть магнитосферы около килограмма плазмы в секунду. Движение частиц наблюдалось даже тогда, когда магнитное поле Земли не возмущал солнечный ветер. Плазмосферный "ветер" забирает вещество из ионосферы и одновременно поставляет материал для внешней части магнитосферы. Его существование было предсказано учеными 20 лет назад, однако наблюдать его удалось впервые, утверждает автор статьи. Его возникновение — следствие дисбаланса различных сил, управляющих движением плазмы. Подобное движение частиц может существовать и на других планетах, считают ученые. Оно уносит вещество из атмосферы в космос и таким образом влияет на непригодность этих Планет для жизни."

Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS


Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS


Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

Giuliana Conforto video SHADOWS OF IDEAS

www.giulianaconforto.it

Anomalous Ring in Antarctica, Nov 2012

Sky of Antarctica, Nov 2012 !


Inner Earth

I recommend to watch a video about Hollow Earth! Below you will find 33 photos from this video:
3D-модель Полой Земли

www.youtube.com/user/RoomSecrets
http://earth-chronicles.ru/news/2012-06-28-25708

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kvymLTh417U&feature=plcp










На нижнем снимке изображена Точка Нулевой Гравитации. Это та самая Стена-Граница Аквамариновой Энергии, которая разделяет Цветовые низкие Вибрации физического Мира от Цветовых высоких Вибраций нефизического Мира. Аквамариновая Стена-Граница постепенно рушится уже 20 лет, это значит что Точка Нулевой Гравитации в середине слоя Земной Коры тоже рушится! В результате мы скоро не сможем быть примагниченными к поверхности Земли, мы делаемся легче, воздушнее, идёт Смешение физических и нефизических Форм Жизни из разных цивилизаций Вселенной все вместе, а также прибытие Новых цивилизаций. Пространство и Время - искусственные Иллюзии, созданные Электро-Магнитным Полем !

























































How the Inner Earth really looks!

Aquamarine Hollow Earth with internal Violet Sun! This is how the Inner Earth really looks! Aquamarine Arctic zone. North Polar Opening!
"Messages from the Hollow Earth" (by Dianne Robbins). I haven't read this book, but we took the picture on the cover of this book and changed
it the way it should look!


North Polar Opening to Hollow Earth!

North Polar Opening to Hollow Earth!

The Hollow Earth (by Raymond Bernard) 

Aquamarine Arctic zone

"По многим легендам и сказаниям, на Севере находился вход в подземные царства, куда ушли легендарные племена древних обитателей земли. Мистики считают, что именно вблизи Северного полюса скрыты от непосвященных вход в легендарную Гиперборею, Шамбалу и даже Плутонию. А недавно одно авторитетное издание сообщило, что "летающие тарелки" навещают нас не из космоса, а из-под земли, вылетая из огромных дыр на Северном полюсе. В подтверждение версии о жизни под землей приводятся факты: при приближении к полюсам воздух становится теплее, в воде плавает древесина, компас ведет себя странно.
КРАСИВЫЙ МИФ
О возможной жизни внутри Земли люди задумывались еще со времен Платона, считавшего, что Земля пронизана туннелями и полостями. А ученый Эдмонд Галлей, изучая магнитное поле Земли, пришел к выводу, что оно слегка варьируется и, следовательно, их должно быть несколько. Отсюда следовало, что внутри Земли есть еще одна сфера с собственным магнитным полем. Затем идея "полой Земли" долгое время эксплуатировалась писателями-фантастами. В фильме братьев Вачовски "Матрица" остатки человечества после того, как цивилизация на Земле была разрушена в ходе войны, построили внутри планеты город Зион, который потом защищали от нападения Армии машин. А многие ученые пытались доказать состоятельность идеи "полой Земли" с помощью различных расчетов и опытов. Но не стоит забывать о том, что идея о пустотах внутри Земли пришла к нам из глубокой древности. А еще 75 лет назад карта "загадочного" Севера на треть состояла из белых пятен и можно было строить какие угодно предположения...
ПОЧЕМУ СТРЕЛКА СХОДИТ С УМА
Приверженцы "теории полой Земли" считают, что ее подтверждает не только существование нескольких магнитных полей (Э. Галлей). Они говорят, что полярное сияние - это газ, просачивающийся через тонкую земную кору на полюсах планеты. Кроме того, сторонники этой теории обращают внимание на то, что стрелка компаса просто сходит с ума в районе полюсов. И наконец, многие исследователи отмечали, что с севера дуют теплые ветра, что подтверждает существование значительных пустот.
- Действительно, магнитных полей существует много. Есть даже магнитные поля, отражающие участки старых платформ, - говорит Марк Садиков. - Что же касается ветров, то они могут меняться в зависимости" от местных условий, и разница в температурах, естественно, существует. - Существует два магнитных полюса - южный и северный, и они широко перемещаются, - напоминает Марина Таврило. - Их досконально изучили и пришли к выводу, что каждый полюс не постоянен и достаточно активно мигрирует...Космонавты же наблюдали, что вся наша Земля, как аурой, окутана свечением, тем самым сиянием, которое мы видим на земле только на полюсах. Мощь полярного сияния имеет потрясающее воздействие не только на психику людей, она даже вызывает помехи в радиосвязи, что и вызвало его пристальное изучение.
То, что стрелка компаса сходит с ума в районе полюсов, - это нормально. Я была в точке южного магнитного полюса, и мы наблюдали, как компас буквально не знал, что ему делать. Ведь самая большая напряженность магнитного поля Земли ВНУТРИ полюса, куда стрелка и стремится указать."


Alex Collier at the Conference, 2010.

Alex Collier at the Conference, 2010

HOLLOW EARTH PROOF - Alex Collier Lecture
Video
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nHR8vk6fCrw&feature=related

Primary Regressive E.T. Groups

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0vqGRFTmANI&feature=related

http://wn.com/Beta_Canis_MajorisAlex  http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0vqGRFTmANI&feature=relatedCollier

http://www.abovetopsecret.com/forum/thread487418/pg1

Here are the Videos on Youtube, which I find useful in Hollow Earth subject:

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=z22RqApTcXo&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6q4_XClQLsE&NR=1

Inside the Hollow Earth_clip4.avi
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oDu3juXYexE&feature=related

Inside the Hollow Earth_clip7.avi
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0HfGBSFRlPE&NR=1

http://www.ourhollowearth.com

http://www.oneuniversalmind.com/lp/inner-light?sr=1&gclid=CNz1y7j39aYCFQPxbwod1hQFGA

http://www.thewatcherfiles.com/russia-aliens3.html

http://books.google.com.au/books?id=1ENo7Tmbk2wC&pg=PA3&lpg=PA3&dq=mirages+in+North+and+South+
Poles&source=bl&ots=tmfkahKTSx&sig=4pL9nXjjG320MPr1K1rbHgqL3J&hl=en&ei=gWioTJyTK87XccqExZgN&sa=
X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=9&ved=0CDQQ6AEwCDgU#v=onepage&q&f=false


There is another Sun and human civilization Inside the Earth!
For several years the scientists preserved the secret of the shocking data of interpretation of photographs of our planet from space. In the ice of the North Pole area a huge hole could be clearly seen. Soon a similar hole was discovered in Venus. Astronomers were shocked and questioned if these planets are hollow inside and what they have in their cores.
New Physics, new Geography
Russian Physicist Fedor Nevolin became famous after composing the theory of "New Physics". In other words, he explained the birth of the Earth in a different way. First our planet was a huge cold lump wandering in the Universe. Being influenced by the Sun and the Universe energy, it was heated up to lava state and then started cooling up. The crust covered the Earth. Meanwhile, the stuff under the crust continued boiling turning into gas, Nedelin believes. Gas expands when being heated. In the core of our planet hollow space aroused, and a part of gas went outside. Big gas throwing out took place in the North and South Poles. Deep big holes aroused there. Nedelin is sure the Earth is absolutely hollow inside and can even have a small Sun there. The Sun energy  accumulates in the center. If one supposes that the Earth is hollow inside and has its small Sun, there can be life as well. This idea was indirectly confirmed by the report on an American high rank military commander to the North Pole. The report was made secret, and its details became known to the world press only recently.


UFO cloud formation over Romania October, ( 2009) Independence Day Style
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fOw2PqwZIPM&feature=related

UFO WEIRD PHENOMENON IN THE SKIES OF MEXICO AND LATIN AMERICA FEBRUARY 2010
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=91DngoT5Hi8&feature=related

Are U.F.O.'s Hiding in Clouds?
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TwUHiL-VsV4&feature=related

Federation of Light - UFO Cloud Ships?
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jwpsTZIkEiA&feature=related

Very strange phenomena in the Saudi Arabia sky
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MClTtal-2KA&feature=related

Weird Effect in Sky I
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8-H3xlKU1gA&feature=related

Cloaked UFO in Italy Google street view
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dm146T4gH1g&feature=related

UFO or halo clouds over Moscow explained - official explanation by a Russian Scientist
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dm146T4gH1g&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cb7cwmSfhE8&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G5VUTNLI4Uo&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5W8dMCiqSKU&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G5VUTNLI4Uo&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=afm1aWuL8ww&NR=1

3 Suns and Rainbow! To get Pictures
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MtERlDPIs94&feature=related

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0_wmS9DleJ4&NR=1
www.ice-halo.net

The man who flew inside the Hole

Map of Hollow Earth

Map of Hollow Earth

Map of Hollow Earth

Map of Hollow Earth

In 1947 Vice-Admiral of the US Navy Richard Bird went for a research flight over the North Pole. Near the Pole he noticed an unusual spot colored in mixture of yellow, red and violet. On approaching the spot the pilot could see something like a mountain chain. Bird flew over it and saw (this was his first impression) a mirage оf forests, rivers, meadows with animals resembling mammoths. He could also see weird flying machines and - a city with buildings built from rock crystal. He realized himself to be a second Columbus discovering a new continent! The air thermometer scale began lifting and stopped at +23 degrees Celsius. This was impossible for the North Pole. Radio for the connection with the air base did not work- Bird's wife, who read his register for the flight, told that Vice-Admiral contacted the representatives of the underground civilization, who overtook us for one thousand years of development. The inner planet surface residents resembled people in appearance, but were more beautiful and had the look of spirituality. They had no wars, they found new sources of energy which allowed to use vehicles engines, receive food and light from nothing. Those people told Bird they tried to contact the outer surface of the Earth residents, but all their attempts were rejected, their flying machines were shot. Finally they decided to assist human beings only when they will be on the brink of self-destruction. "Inner" Earth residents showed Bird all their civilization achievements and then escorted the pilot to the Pole hole to let him out to our outer World. On return home he discovered, that the plane used the fuel for extra 2750 kilometers of flight.
The authorities recommended Vice-Admiral never tell anybody about the World he saw and put him under strict control for the rest of his life. Yet some scientists still make conclusions, that inside our planet there might be huge cavities having the inner Sun, moderate climate, unique plants and animals, special civilization. Geologists and geophysics say: "People have the right to pursue dreams".
Geography scholars explain the existence of the "hole" in the photo as a usual phenomenon:


Antarctic Portal

Antarctic Portal

- The photo was made on November 23. It is known that the North Pole has a black hole over it from September 22 to March 22, because of the polar night. The Sun is unable to lighten this area because of the equator axis incline!
Probably specialists in Geography are right. Yet, look at the photo. What is there inside the back spot from the polar night? Maybe it is a passage to the Earth core not explored by scientists? What does science say?
We addressed the issue of the underground passages existence to the scholar.

Sergei Petrunin - reporter for publishing house "Provintsiya"

http://escholarship.org/uc/item/73c6w2g1;jsessionid=6A51E6FE3BFA3F3315B3592A0366FB32#page-3

http://www.detailshere.com/hollowearth.htm

Is our Earth hollow?

To subscribe to the hollow earth group, send an email to:  allplanetshollow-subscribe@egroups.com

See much more information and a free condensed book to download at : http://www.hollowplanets.com/
The hollow earth theory has gained a lot of momentum of recent as more and more evidence mounts that our earth may be shaped like a donut with 1400 mile wide holes and entry points at both the north and south poles masked with holographs to give the appearance of ice encapments when in fact they do not exist. It is suggested our earth's crust is about 800 miles thick with a complete environment and inner sun at it's interior instead of molten magma; and that this region is inhabited by advanced beings accounting for many of the UFO sitings, that originate from within the earth, instead of being extraterrestrial. Some of the article below is fiction, but many parts are true; read the treatise below the article to separate fact from fiction.
From the SUN, February 25, 1992:

Scientist finds tropical paradise inside the Earth: There's a hole in the Pole!

UFOs come from Inner Space -- NOT Outer Space!
From the top of the world: Weather satellite picture showing view of the North Pole.
"THERE'S A HOLE in the North Pole and it leads to a tropical paradise located at the center of the earth."
That's the word from a highly respected scientist and explorer, who led a research team to the top of the world last year. The mission was meant to check out astounding satellite photos revealing a large, dark opening at the North Pole.
"We have found a fabulous world," says Edmund Bork, who led a team of international explorers through the hole in the Pole last summer. Tropical Vegetation!
"It has its own sun, a shallow, warm water sea and lush, tropical vegetation."
What's more, the land within is inhabited by a highly advanced and very peaceful race of humans. The Danish explorer refuses specific details on what he and the five other members of his team found. However, he says they were led to the 1,400-mile wide opening to the inner earth by a satellite photo released by the U.S. Department of Commerce in 1970. The photo, taken in late November 1968 reveals a huge, black opening at the top of the world. There is a similar hole at the South Pole, Bork claims.

"The Earth is shaped like a huge doughnut," he says. "We live on the outer side of the doughnut."
Normally, the hole cannot be seen from the air, because of the heavy cloud cover over the North Pole, and because the inhabitants of the hollow Earth keep it covered with electronic "light screens."
The light screens give the illusion of vast fields of ice and snow through holographic manipulation of the real snow and ice, that surrounds the opening, says Bork. But the screens fail from time to time, especially during periods when the sun is in an intensive sunspot phase as it was in 1968.
"The hole is there and all we had to do was walk through the illusion," he says. Because the hole is so large, the slope down is very gradual and the explorers were hardly aware they were entering another world.
Bork and his associates were elated, but not surprised, to find the Earth is hollow -- and inhabited. Belief, that the world is hollow, is thousands of years old, he explains. "Legends of a hollow Earth and people,  who live there, go back to the ancient Egyptians and Greeks. Even the American Indians believed people lived under our feet."
A number of other men claim to have entered the hole in the North Pole.
They include William Shavers, a Navy pilot who crashed at the North Pole during World War II, and a tribe of wandering Eskimos, who told a Canadian reporter in 1958, that they had found "a green land at the top of the world." Leif Erickson and other Norse sea explorers claimed to have found a "lush green land" near the Arctic circle. "Later map makers thought they were talking about Greenland, but Greenland is hardly green, much less lush," Bork says.


Impressive Evidence

Impressive evidence came with a radio transmission from Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd, the great American polar explorer, as he flew over the North Pole in 1926. "He said he saw below him a land of mountains, forests, green vegetation, lakes and rivers," says Bork. "There was no mention of snow and ice, and the land he described belonged somewhere in the temperate zone, not at the North Pole. It sounded a lot like what the Norsemen described and what we discovered."

-- JOHN COFFIN
SUN, February 25, 1992, pg. 11

COMMENTS ON THIS ARTICLE:

Some satellite photos DO indicate anomalous areas near the north pole that could indicate the existence of a polar opening.
The earth IS hollow with a relatively thin shell of around 800 miles in thickness from the outside surface to the inner surface.
The earth DOES contain a small interior sun, that gives light and life to the interior world and emits a solar wind, that lights up the Auroras and fills the Van Allen Radiation Belts with highly charged particles.
The possibility of the interior inhabitants hiding the opening with holographic images of snow and ice is tantalizing and is a possible explanation why very little is known about it.
The polar opening is large enough, that the curvature into the interior is so slight, that it would not be readily noticeable to polar explorers.
There ARE numerous legends from all over the world that the earth is hollow, including the Eskimos, American Indians, the Greeks, the Vikings, the Egyptians and others.
There ARE several stories of pilots stumbling onto the polar opening and even finding land with lush vegetation up near the pole.

Admiral Byrd did fly over the pole in 1926, as confirmed in Admundsen's book, THE FIRST CROSSING OF THE POLAR SEA. And his relatives believe to this day, that he discovered, that the earth is hollow and inhabited within by a race of highly advanced peaceful humans beings with the added note, that they are "very large in stature."
Many of the UFO's, or flying saucers seen around the world DO originate from that nation living on the earth's inner surface, as evidenced by their flight patterns being generally north and south indicating they come out through the polar openings when visiting the exterior of the planet.


http://www.scribd.com/doc/13229125/World-Top-Secret-Our-Earth-is-Hollow

http://www.ourhollowearth.com/PolarOpn.htm

http://www.voyagehollowearth.com/hollow_earth_trip_info.html

Voyage to Hollow Earth Trip Information

The Russian IceBreaker YAMAL

At Murmansk, Russia, (at about 33 E Longitude, 69 N Latitude) expedition members will board a world class Nuclear Icebreaker, a literal motel on ice, with the utmost in comfort and amenities, that has 75,000 horsepower, and cuts through the arctic ice like butter. Our first stop will be the geographic North Pole north of Franz Josef Land.
It was from Franz Josef Land that Olaf Jansen and his father sailed northeast through a lead in the ice on July 1, 1829, and accidentally discovered the North Polar Opening into Our Hollow Earth.
From the geographic North Pole, we will direct our course south through the ice at 12 knots towards the New Siberian Islands on Meridian 141 East Longitude.
It is estimated that within about 600 miles from the north pole on this meridian the expedition will reach the open ocean of inner earth.
On the above map, directionals have been added to Jan Lamprecht's drawing of the Arctic (as blue lines) where they all cross at about 84.4 N Latitude, 141 E. Longitude, including a line indicating the direction Olaf Jansen sailed northeast of Franz Josef Land into the polar opening. This is the most probable location of the North Polar Opening into Our Hollow Earth.
Indeed, it is thought most probable that we will find the North Polar Opening in the direction the Russians have sighted a mirage of Sannikov land north of the New Siberian Islands, where also Admiral Peary, Lieutenant Green and MacMillan sighted Crocker land northwest of Cape Thomas Hubbard from Ellesmere Island in Northern Canada, of which also Dr. Cook took a picture of land northwest of his line of travel towards the north pole from Ellesmere Island in 1906 and named it Bradley land, and towards which Captain Keenan also sighted land northwest of Harrison Bay, Alaska, as adeptly described by Jan Lamprecht (name pronounced "Yawn") of South Africa in his 1998 book, Hollow Planets. This legendary land seen by many arctic explorers today exists on NO map.
If we are successful in finding the polar opening, then within 1,700 miles from any farthest north Arctic land bordering the Arctic Ocean we should reach the inner continent just as Admiral Richard E. Byrd did on his 1947 flight beyond the pole, as described in Amadeo Giannini's 1959 book, Worlds Beyond the Poles. At that time, Giannini wrote, "This United States Navy's polar exploratory force was preparing to embark upon one of the most memorable adventures in world history. Under the command of Rear Admiral Richard Evelyn Byrd, U.S.N., it was to penetrate into land extending beyond the North Pole supposed end of the Earth ... As the hour approached for the air journey into the land beyond, Admiral Byrd transmitted from the Arctic base a radio announcement of his purpose, but the announcement was so astonishing, that its import was lost to millions, who avidly read it in the press headlines throughout the world...The words of the message were momentous: 'I'd like to see that LAND BEYOND the Pole."..."That area BEYOND the Pole is THE CENTER OF THE GREAT UNKNOWN!"
Subsequently, "...the admiral and his airplane crew accomplished a physical flight of seven hours duration in a northerly direction beyond the North Pole. Every mile and every minute of that journey beyond was over ice, water, or land that no explorer had seen...As progress was made beyond the Pole point, there was observed directly under the plane's course iceless land and lakes, and mountains where foliage was abundant. Moreover, a brief newspaper account of the flight held that a member of the admiral's crew had observed a monstrous greenish-hued animal moving through the underbrush of that land beyond the Pole."
It is the intention of this expedition to search out and explore that area Beyond the Pole, that Rear Admiral Richard Evelyn Byrd discovered. It is estimated that within 1,500 miles of the Pole, the expedition should reach the inner continent.
The coastline of the inner continent could then be followed looking for the River Hiddekel and sail up the river to the City of Jehu to meet the inner earth inhabitants, just as Olaf Jansen and his father did in 1829.

Within Our Hollow Earth at the City of Jehu, expedition members could take an inner earth monorail train to visit the lost Garden of Eden located under America on the highest mountain plateau of the Inner Continent. It is also the capital city of Inner Earth, according to Olaf Jansen. Perhaps in this City of Eden we can visit the palace of the King of the Inner World, as did Olaf Jansen and his father.
It is the opinion of the author of World Top Secret: Our Earth Is Hollow! The estimated round trip to and from North Countries of Inner Earth via the North Polar Opening is about 20 days. Steve Currey, our expedition organizer, will bring along his sat phone, which can be used to send email to friends back home from the top of the world. Internet updates may also be made to this website so we can share with our friends back home the progress we're making, at least as long as we can make connection with the communications satellites. If you would like to join us on this historic trip for a real-life attempt to visit Our Hollow Earth via the North Polar Opening as an expedition member, just call 1-800-937-7328 (RAFT)

According to Bernard, p. 117, "The skies in the Arctic and antarctic circles reflect the surface of the Earth, water and ice. No great enterprise is undertaken without first consulting the water-sky."
The sky shows a reflection of the ice and the pathways through it, which good explorers know to consult for the best passageway.

Water-Skies - Mirage in Arctics!

Water-Skies - The skies in the Arctic and Antarctic Circles reflect the surface of the Earth 

Holow Earth

Holow Earth

Alaska Science Forum
June 3, 1985
http://www.alienshift.com/id52.html
The Hollow Earth Theory
Article #718
by Larry Gedney

This article is provided as a public service by the Geophysical Institute, University of Alaska Fairbanks, in cooperation with the UAF research community. Larry Gedney is a seismologist at the Institute.
Illustration from the October 1882 issue of Harper's New Monthly Magazine, showing the appearance of Symmes' Hole near the North Pole.
One can never be sure just how serious they are about it, but there does exist a group of people, who call themselves the "Flat-Earth Society" (remember the news item about the old gentleman, who was invited to Cape Kennedy to watch an Apollo moon launch, but came away convinced that it was all a hoax?). There is another group, equally vocal, who believe that the Earth is Hollow. Several years ago, a group of "believers" informed a member of the Geophysical Institute staff that there was an opening to the center of the Earth in the Alaska Range, and that this was an entry and exit point for flying saucers.
Modern-day proponents of the hollow earth theory can refer nonbelievers to the book The Hollow Earth (Bell Publishing Company, 1979) by Raymond Bernard. Bernard, judging from the initials he lists behind his name, holds just about every advanced academic degree, but is apparently somewhat of a recluse. As a spokesman for the publisher states in a foreword to the book, "I will not enter into any correspondence regarding this book--or the author. Whether you accept or reject the content of this book is your privilege. No one cares."

The crux of the hollow earth theory is that the earth is a shell with walls about 800 miles thick. In the polar regions there are holes 1400 miles across, with edges that curve smoothly from the outside of the shell around to the inside. A sea or surface traveler could proceed over an edge of the hole, like an ant crawling over the lip of a coffee mug from the outside to the inside, and not be aware, that he was actually entering the interior of the Earth. Bernard explains, that the holes have never been seen from the air because pilots are fooled by their compasses into believing, that they are crossing the pole, when they are actually following the hole's "magnetic rim". Thus aircraft never really fly over the geographic poles, which naturally mark the centers of the holes themselves. As irrefutable proof of his claim, he cites Admiral Byrd's statement, "I'd like to see that land beyond the Pole. That area beyond the Pole is the Great Unknown."
The hollow earth theory actually seems to have been originated in the early 1800s by John Symmes, an earnest American, who devoted the greater part of his later life to convincing the world, that the earth was formed by a series of concentric shells. Symmes believed, that there were miles of wondrous unclaimed domain beneath our feet, with lush vegetation and fish and game for the taking. Apparently, there were those, who took him seriously. As reported in the October 1882 issue of Harper's New Monthly Magazine, a Mr. Howgate had recently been in the news, proposing, that an expedition be made to discover "Symmes' Hole." His plan was to have a number of men acclimate themselves to higher and higher latitudes, moving further north each year. They were to observe the animals, that presumably wintered over within the earth each year and emerged during the spring to bear young. Eventually, the colony of men were to follow the animals in the fall to find where they entered into that marvelous land at the center of the earth. Sadly for this romantic concept, if today's believers are correct, the only thing that they would find there now are flying saucer.

For a long time I have been intrigued by the concept of the Hollow Earth. I remember reading Raymond Bernard's book on the subject ( The Hollow Earth - 1979 ) in the mid 1980's and felt a strong affinity for the whole idea. Next, I read a strange book called "Etidorhpa" by John Uri Llyod written in the late 1890's about a person, who traveled from the Outer Surface to the Inner Surface of the Earth and carrying when he arrived at the center of the Earth crust. But before I lose our readers, let me define what the Hollow Earth Theory states!
According to Mr. Bernard (see diagram above) our world is hollow, with the crust of the earth being 800 miles thick. There exists two openings at the North and South Pole, each hole having a circumference of 1400 miles wide. At the center of the earth is not a molten core but an inner sun, which is six hundred miles wide and is 2900 miles from the Inner Surfaces. The diameter of the lip at the opening at the poles is 1200 miles long, thus a person can not see the other side of the opening.
Therefore, there exists three worlds on our planet, the outer surface, where we live, the middle earth, which purportedly is lined with many caverns, tunnels (made by someone), Inner Cities and people, who live there and lastly the Inner Surface. How Gravity works then is the following. For the people, who live on the outer surface, Gravity holds them down. For the people, that live in the middle earth, the closer they get to the center of the crust (i.e. - 400 miles down), the less effect gravity will have upon them. In the book, "Etidorhpa", when this individual traveling down into the earth reached the center of gravity, i.e. where there is no gravity --- he was able to move by the power of his mind, his heart stoped beating and he didn't need to eat. He described gigantic vegetation, that lives under the earth as this lesser pull of gravity allows things to grow larger. Lastly for the people, who live on the inner surface, they would also feel gravity pull on them to walk on this surface, but since there is an inner sun they would have sunlight 24 hours a day. There is supposedly land masses and water bodies, that exist on the Inner Earth, the same as the outer surface except the vibration and energy in the Inner Earth is more pure and of a higher vibrational frequency (some say a 4th dimensional frequency).

For people, who have claimed to travel to the Inner Earth, they state, that the people they encounter in this region, are usually very tall. Some other individuals have speculated, that descendants of Atlantis and Lemuria live in this Inner Utopia and therefore they are thousands of years ahead of us technologically and spiritually. Some others say, that possibly the Mayans may have gone into this location as well, to explain where they disappeared. Again, according to our channeler Michael Kant, he claims that 12 Galactic Races came to our Earth long ago and created their first city underground in the 4 Corners area. Each race brought with them a crystal skull and body, which contained the gentic coding of their race and cosmic knowledge. Six tribes decided to stay on the surface of the Earth and Six tribes went into the Inner Earth. Now all twelve tribes exist in the Inner Earth. It is also believed, that other Extraterrestrial races have bases in the Inner Earth as well. Michael describes in our book being taken by a Pleiadian Space Ship and given a tour of the Inner Earth.
In 1982, while traveling on faith throughout the western part of the U.S., I had the fortune to meet Ed Palmer in Portland, Oregon, who is the founder of the Cosmic Science Research Center. Ed told us a very strange tale about how he was an exchange baby, that he was originally from Orion, but when he was very small, the true Ed Palmer was exchanged for him. He claimed, that when he has had a physical examination, that there were some differences in his body and also, that he had some type of mental plate in his head, in which if a UFO comes close, he hears a buzzing sound. Even though Ed was in his 70's or 80's, he definitely had more energy and excitement of life, than I at this time (being 27). In any case, Ed gave us a pamphlet, that he shared with others about the Hollow Earth. In this pamphlet it said, that all planets are Hollow (in Bernard's book, Mr. Bernard explains, that what appears to be the Pole Cap we see on Mars, is actually the light of Mar's Inner Sun, shining out of the pole. Furthermore Bernard states, that the Aurora Borealis, that is only visible up north is the reflection of the inner sun off clouds passing over the opening of the pole.

(This is not right. Auroras are the colors of Vibrations of those Beings, who live in Inner Earth! For instance, if you see Red Color of Auroras, it means very low level of Beings mainly reptillian or sirians live there. If you see Blue-Indigo Aurora, then there would be Beings of Higher
Vibration,
more Balanced People! Often you see multicolored Auroras. It means there are many races of different Vibration, who live in Inner Earth esp. now at the end of Life of Old Universe! LM).

Also that some explorers of the North Pole have discovered: the closer they get to the Pole, the warmer it gets instead of the colder. Could the Mammoths discovered frozen in Siberia with fresh food in their mouth be actually Mammoths, that live in the Inner Earth, which has a warmer climate, and somehow got lost and wondered into the outer surface? and that Ed even had a ride on a UFO to the moon, which is hollow and that the ETs use the moon to construct spacecraft inside, hidden from our prying eyes. Ed explains, that when a planet is formed, it is first just gas, which is rotating. He said, that the heavy particles eventually expand out and create the Planet's surface and the lighter particles contract to form the Central Sun. Another connection with the Inner Earth relates to Admiral Byrd. It is purported, that when the Admiral went to explore the North Pole, that he actually entered into the Inner Earth at the opening at this pole. Included below, you will see a purported diary by Admiral Byrd, that discusses he made contact with an advanced people in this area, who showed him their world and asked for him to take a message back to the surface dwellers and government of their concern about a future vision they had of our destroying our world and since this is their home as well, they of course wanted to prevent this. If such a people do exist, it is theorized, that possibly some of the UFOs we see, are not extraterrestrial, but intraterrestials...
It would require a spacecraft, that can negate the force of gravity to fly out ouf the Polar Openings as gravity would pull any boat or airplane to follow the outer-to-inner surface."


Holow Earth


Our Earth was always hollow, like all planets/moons/suns in 3rd physical Density. Lots of civilizations occupied the spaces underground for one reason: to merge together. Some writers in their books tried to describe it, but not many. Alex Collier is one of this writers. Inside the Planet: The Hollow Earth, p. 225, from "Defending Sacred Ground" by Alex Collier:

"All planets, suns and moons that are real, that were created by part of the creation, are hollow. There are no exceptions.
I want you to look for Life magazine, an issue, that was published on November 10, 1967. It shows a photograph of the Earth taken by the lunar orbiter, which shows a 1,600 mile diameter egress into the planet at the north polar area. Now, we are always taught, that the Earth is round, a sphere. Being somewhat pear-shaped, this is mostly true. However, persisted legends of flat areas. The top of the planet, having been hit a glancing blow by a planetary body billions of years ago, is very flat. Most space photographs of the Earth either delete the top of the planet to some degree, or the photo's are doctored to show what the public expects to see. The magnetic north pole is at 23.5 degrees latitude. About 200 miles south of the circular dip at the top of the planet is a 78 mile diameter opening into the planet. It's technically in northern Canada. Now, according to the Andromedans, the nature of gravity is different, than we are told. We are told that, because a planet spins on its axis, the centrifugal force "creates gravity". Well, according to the Andromedans, that is not at all accurate, and that gravity is produced by highly penetrating radiation in the electromagnetic spectrum at a frequency of about 1 trillion cycles per second.


from Holow Earth Insider

Because our planet is hollow, it contains different caverns throughout its shell. It can support many times the life we think it can, because there is a lot more livable surface area, than we are taught there is.
The following is a description of what it is like to descend into the interior of the Earth, given to me by the Andromedans:

"When you go five miles into your Earth, you will rapidly lose body weight. The reason for this is the limited ability of gravity radiations and gravity effects of the Earth above counteract the gravity effects of the Earth below. Their counteracting effects are enhanced by the mass of the Earth above, which will transform some of the infrared radiations, emanated by matter into a gravity-producing radiation per the laws of redistribution. When you reach a depth of ten miles, you will notice, that it begins to get lighter around you".
Vasais (one of the Andromedans) said, that there are no shadows to be found anywhere in the interior of the Earth at a depth of 100 miles, because the light is contained in the particles, that come from all directions and not a single source. In other words, the air itself seems to glow, along with everything else (with Wavy Energy. LM). Plant and animal forms flourish and grow larger, than on the surface of the Planet. At a depth of some 700 to 729 miles, one reaches a space of almost zero gravity, because of the screening effect of soft particles. Going further about another 700 miles or so, you break out into the surface of the inner sphere, which has gravity due to the mechanics of the soft electrons and other balancing forces. An inner sun has formed, because the particles of light concentrate at the center. Now, the orbit of the Earth has been changed three times, according to the Andromedans. During the time of Atlantis, is was possible to see both of the suns in our solar system, and the benefit of this is that you had day and twilight instead of day and night. But then, the planet was moved.
Q: Why was the planet moved?
A: I don't know. That's a question the Pleiadians will have to answer. It was moved into its current orbit about 14,300 years ago. We cannot see the other sun now, and apparently is was done on purpose according to a larger agenda. This movement of the planet caused a lot of geological activity and flooding."

http://www.thehollowearthinsider.com/news/index.php

Holow Earth- Dennis Crenshaw

Subterranian World • Shaver & Palmer Part 2 ::new:: – 9-th, 2002 - 30: 2 • Secret Underground Tunnels: Past & Present Part III – 8-th, 2001 - 08: 0 • Shaver & Palmer Part 1 – 8-th, 2001 - 08: 0 • Secret Underground Tunnels Past & Present: Part II
A Closer Look – 7-th, 2001 - 01: 2 • Secret Underground Tunnels Past & Present:
The Meso-American Connection – 6-th, 2001 - 24: 0 • Big Foot, the Abominable Sandman, Nessie and The People who live Under Mt. Shasta – 6-th, 2001 - 23: 
Admiral Byrd and the North & South Poles • Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd And the Quest for the Inner Passage Part I – January 0-th, 2002 - 09: 2 • Admiral Byrd?s 1939 Antarctic And the Mysterious Snow Cruiser – 6-th, 2001 - 23: 2 • The Missing Secret Diary of Admiral Byrd: Fact or Fiction? – 6-th, 2001 - 22: 0
Historical Secrets • He Comes From Beyond the Pole – January 2-th, 2001 - 21: 1 • Free energy? No utility bills? – 7-th, 2001 - 01: 2 • History in Perspective – 6-th, 2001 - 16: 0
Hollow Earth • Guest Research/Writer: Bruce Walton: Etidorhpa – 2-th, 2008 - 25: 1 • Raymond Bernard?s Search For Paradise ::new:: – 9-th, 2002 - 30: 2 • Raymond Bernard?s Search For Paradise – 8-th, 2001 - 08: 0 • Brinsley Le Poer Trench: 1911 - 1995 The Open Minded Skeptic – 7-th, 2001 - 10: 1 • The Secret of the Mammoths – 6-th, 2001 - 22: 0 • Theory into Fact: Gravity, Magnetic Poles & Ringing Bells – 6-th, 2001 - 19: 0 • The Inner Sun: A Scientific Look – 6-th, 2001 - 13: 0
Insider's Reports • Insider's Report 2004 #1 – 6-th, 2004 - 05: 1
http://www.qsl.net/w5www/hollowearth.html

By Dennis Crenshaw
http://www.thehollowearthinsider.com/

This intriguing question has attracted the attention of free thinkers, scientists and a wide assortment of crackpots back through the ages.

Plato wrote of enormous subterranean tunnels both broad and narrow that made up the earth's interior. Dr. Edmond Halley, of comet fame, believed that all heavenly bodies were hollow and in a speech before the members of the Royal Society of London stated "Beneath the crust of the Earth, which is 500 feet thick, is a hollow void". Then there was Leonard Euler (1707-1783), noted mathematician and one of the founders of higher mathematics. He stated that "mathematically the Earth has to be hollow". He also believed there was a center sun inside the Earth's interior, which provided daylight to a splendid subterranean civilization.

Next came Captain John Cleves Symmes, war hero of the War of 1812. Once his studies led him to believe in a Hollow Earth, he used his knowledge to convince James McBride, a Miami Ohio millionaire. Mr. McBride used his political connections to Rep. Richard M. Johnson (D) of Kentucky [later vice-president under Van Buren 1837-18411] to petition congress to finance an expedition to claim the lands inside the earth for the U.S. The petition, by a vote of 56-46 was tabled.

The Hollow Earth was next theorized by William Reed in his 1906 book "The Phantom of The Poles". Based on his studies of early Arctic explorations and scientific evidence, he states that the Earth is not solid as widely believed, but hollow with openings at both ends. In the summary of his revolutionary theory, Reed states "The Earth is hollow. The Poles, so long sought, are phantoms. There are openings at the northern and southern extremities. In the interior are vast continents, oceans, mountains and rivers. Vegetable and animal life are evident in this New World and it is probably peopled by races unknown to dwellers on the Earth's surface"

Marshall B. Gardner reached the same conclusions after 20 years of research and published his finding in "A Journey to the Earth's Interior, or, Have the Poles Really Been Discovered?" in 1913, revised 1920. He was unaware of Reed or his theory at the time. Mr. Gardner puts forth the argument that neither Cook nor Peary reached the True North Pole since, according to the theory, it does not exist. Mr. Gardner states "Scientific societies that considered Cook's and Peary's claims concluded that in neither case could it be said authoritatively that the explorer had reached the pole".

This controversy still exists today.

Science fiction writers have had a field day with the theory. Jules Verne's "Journey to the Center of the Earth", Edgar Rice Borrough's "Tarzan at the Earth's Core" and scores of other authors have let their talents run wild in the Inner World. Grade-B film makers know a good theme when they find one also.

Then there are those people who claim to have visited the interior of our planet. Olaf Janson's "The Smoky God"" is one such story that comes to mind.
Another is "EDIDORPHA or The End Of The Earth" by John Uri Lloyd published in 1895.

Ray Palmer was one of the first researchers and reporters on the UFO scene during the 50s and 60s. In his ground breaking publications "Flying Saucers" and "Search Magazine", he speculated that, because UFOs have been seen in earth's sky throughout history , they may very well be from our earth, in fact, evidence seemed to indicate that UFOs could very well come from a subterranean world inside our earth.

Then on the cover of "Flying Saucers" magazine issue #69 - June 1970 and in issue #92 of "Search Magazine" published in July of 1970, the late Mr. Palmer published a photo that is still a controversy. Excerpts from his Editorial in the above mentioned "Flying Saucers" magazine tell it best;

"On the cover this month we reproduce the most remarkable photo ever made.
It was taken by the ESSA-7 satellite on November 23, 1968 the North Pole photo lacking clouds in the polar area, therefore reveals the surface of the planet. Although, surrounding the polar area, and north of such areas as the North American continent and Greenland and the Asian continent, we can see the ice-fields 8-foot thick ice we do not see any ice fields in a large circular area directly at the geographic pole. Instead we see THE HOLE. In 1981 I came into possession of another group of NASA photos showing earth from deep in space which, not only substantiates the ESSA-7 photos, but adds weight to another feature of the hollow earth theory."

At this point any practical person will start to ask themselves, if this is all true why isn't it common and accepted knowledge. As Ray Palmer said in one of his articles

"A government that will not tell you what they know about UFOs would certainly keep the origin of them a secret".

Then there are those researchers who say some of us spend entirely too much time looking at the poles.

Certain researchers swear the earth is shaped like a giant doughnut and that holes at the poles provide an entrance into the inner lands. "Not so" shouts another group. "Entrance to the interior world can be gained only by entering a cave and discovering the subterranean tunnels".

Most of the people who claim to have visited the inner lands arrive there through old mine shafts, caves and subterranean tunnels. Others claim to have traveled through extent volcanoes. There is good solid evidence supporting all these theories. Evidence also supports the possibility of other hidden entrances to the inner realms in The Bermuda Triangle and other strange areas around the world.

One of these areas of interest in the Pacific Northwestern area of the United States. It was in this area that the name "flying saucers" was first heard.

On June 24, 1947, Kenneth Arnold, a businessman and commercial pilot from Boise, Idaho, was flying past Mount Rainier, in Mount Rainier National Park, State of Washington, when he sighted a strange formation of nine luminous saucer-shaped objects. He related this unusual experience to newsmen and news of the mysterious objects dubbed "flying saucers" was spread nationwide.

UFOs are quite common in the area. In fact the thousands of miles of untrodden land that makes up the extreme Northwestern part of America hides many unexplained mysteries. This is the land of Bigfoot& Sasquatch (as the local Native Americans call him). In connection with our research into different possibilities we offer the following interesting story which was reported in the January 1975 issue of "Saga" by B. Ann Slate;

In April 1974, Psychic Joyce Partise of Southern California held a sealed envelope in her hands. Unknown to her, that envelope contained a photograph of a Sasquatch footprint. Ms Partise said "These things are coming from outer space - it's an outer space war! The first area will be Portland, Oregon. There's a mountain with a hole in it. Someone should investigate this mountain because they're down in there already. You know those hairy things that run around, the ape man? He's not an ape. They're underground, in contact with outer space and their intentions toward mankind is total destruction!.. this gorilla man - there's a civilization of thousands of them their eyes are extremely light sensitive from being underground. These tunnels I'm seeing is part of their habitation. They've dug them. I think it may even go into California".

Just south of the Oregon - California border the snow-capped peak of mysterious Mt. Shasta keeps her secrets. Locally there are whispers of certain merchants quietly doing business, for gold, with strange young looking men with piercing blue eyes wearing unusual clothing and footwear, who mysteriously, upon completing their business fade away into the wilderness. Are these mysterious consumers from the legendary underground city of Telos, said to exist under Mt. Shasta? Could they actually be descendants of the lost continent of Lemuria? Could the strange men seen in the small communities of the area be on a munchies run for their underground friends? Anything is possible in the realm of the underground.
In The Inner Earth
On February 19, 1947, Admiral Richard E. Byrd left Base Camp Artic and flew northward.
What happened on that flight?
For years rumors have persisted that on his historic flight to the North Pole, Admiral Byrd flew heyond the Pole into an opening leading inside the Earth. Here he met with advanced heings who had a sobering message for him to deliver to Mankind an the Surface World.
Upon Byld's return to Washington, on March 11, 1947 he was interviewed intently by top security forces and a medical team. He was placed under strict control and ordered to remain silent on the behalf of humanity. Being a militaly man, he felt he had to comply.
Here, from Admiral Byrd's secret log and diary, is the message meant to have been heard 45 years ago!
Excerpt of The Hollow Earth (no ISBN):
"During his Arctic flight of 1,700 miles BEYOND the North Pole he reported by radio that he saw below him, not ice and snow, but land areas consisting of mountains, forests, green vegetation, lakes and rivers, and in the underbrush saw a strange animal resembling the mammoth...."
"In January, 1956, Admiral Byrd led another expedition to the Antarctic and there penetrated for 2,300 miles BEYOND the South Pole. The radio announcement at this time (January 13, 1956) said: "On January 13, members of the United stated expedition penetrated a land extent of 2,300 miles BEYOND the Pole. The Flight was made by Rear Admiral George Dufek of the United States Navy Air Unit." Byrd said on March 13, 1956, "The present expedition has opened up a vast new land."
Admiral Byrd said in February, 1947 before his North Pole flight, "I'd like to see that land beyond the Pole. That area beyond the Pole is the center of the great unknown."
Excerpt of A Flight to the Land Beyond the North Pole:
"I bid you welcome to our domain, Admiral." I see a man with delicate features and with the etching of years upon his face. He is seated at a long table. He motions me to sit down in one of the chairs. After I am seated, he places his fingertips together and smiles. He speaks softly again, and conveys the following. "We have let you enter here because you are of noble character and well-known on the Surface World, Admiral."
"Surface World," I half-gasp under my breath! "Yes," the Master replies with a smile, "you are in the domain of the Arianni, the Inner World of the Earth. We shall not long delay your mission, and you will be safely escorted back to the surface and for a distance beyond. But now. Admiral, I shall tell you why you have been summoned here. Our interest rightly begins just after your race exploded the first atomic bombs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki, Japan. It was at that alarming time we sent our flying machines, the 'Flugelrads,' to your surface world to investigate what your race had done. "That is, of course, past history now, my dear Admiral, but I must continue on. You see, we have never interfered before in your race's wars, and barbarity, but now we must, for you have leamed to tamper with a certain power that is not for man, namely, that of atomic energy. Our emissaries have already delivered messages to the powers of your world, and yet they do not heed. Now you have been chosen to be witness here that our world does exist. You see, our culture and science is many thousands of years beyond your race, Admiral." I interrupted, "But what does this have to do with me, Sir?"
The master's eyes seemed to penetrate deeply into my mind, and after studying me for a few moments he replied, "Your race has now reached the point of no return, for there are those among you who would destroy your very world rather than relinquish their power as they know it..."
I nodded, and the Master continued. "In 1945 and afterward, we tried to contact I your race, but our efforts were met with hostility. Our Flugelrads were fired upon, yes, even pursued with malice and animosity by your fighter planes. So, now, I say to you, my son, there is a great storm gathering in your world, a black fury that will not spend itself for many years. There will be no answer in your armies, there will be no safety in your science. It may rage on until every flower of your culture is trampled and all human things are leveled in vast chaos.
"Your recent war was only a prelude of what is yet to come for your race. We here see it more clearly with each hour...do you say I am mistaken?"
"No," I answer," it happened once before, the Dark Ages came and they lasted for more than five hundred years." "Yes, my son," replied the Master, "the Dark Ages that will come now for your race will cover the Earth like a pall, but I believe that some of your race will live through the storm, beyond that, I cannot say. We see at a great distance a new world stirring from the ruins of your race, seeking its lost and legendary treasures, and they will be here, my son, safe in our keeping. When that time arrives, we shall come forward again to help revive your culture and your race.
"Perhaps, by then, you will have learned the futility of war and its strife...and after that time, certain of your culture and science will be returned for your race to begin anew. You, my son, are to return to the Surface World with this message..."
With those closing words, our meeting seemed at an end. I stood for a moment as in a dream...but, yet, I knew this was reality, and for some strange reason I bowed slightly, either out of respect or humility, I do not know which.
Suddenly, I was again aware that the two beautiful hosts who had brought me here were again at my side. "This way, Admiral," motioned one. I turned once more before leaving and looked back toward the Master. A gentle smile was etched on his delicate ancient face. "Farewell, my son," he spoke, then he gestured with a lovely, slender hand a motion of peace and our meeting was truly ended.
Quickly, we walked back through the great door of the Master's chamber and once again entered into the elevator. The door slid silently downward and we were at once going upward. One of my hosts' spoke again, "We must now make haste, Admiral, as the Master desires to delay you no longer on your schedule timetable and you must return with his message to your race."
From A Flight to the Land Beyond the North Pole; The Missing Diary of Admiral Richard E. Byrd. Inner Light Publications, Box 753, New Brunswick, NJ 08903. $10.00.

Vostok station, Antarctica

Located near the South Geomagnetic Pole, and at the lofty height of around 3,500m above sea level, the Russian research station at Vostok is perpetually cold, but never more so than on July 21, 1983, when it registered the coldest recorded air temperature on the planet: -89.2°C. The key geographical feature around Vostok is Lake Vostok. One of the world's largest lakes, it is buried beneath 4km of glacial ice.
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/travel/picturegalleries/6536908/The-worlds-most-surreal-landscapes.html?image=1


Creators of Inner and Outer Earth Life

Dolores Cannon gave us a very persuasive example of how our bodies have been created initially, in her book  "THE CONVOLUTED UNIVERSE", BOOK 3, Chapter 28,  (p. 469-497):

THE DESTRUCTION OF A PLANET

"...D: Why do these people come to Earth?
S: Well, the Earth is great. Everything is coming to Earth. Beings from everywhere are going to put part of themselves on Earth. All over, every kind of Being is going to be on Earth. Everything. (To himself)
The Earth is hurt too, isn’t it? Yep. The Earth got hurt too. That’s bad.

D: Why are they going to do that?
S: They’re the ones that are making it happen, or it’s their idea. They’re in charge of it. They’re developing that plan, and they’re bringing everything to Earth. They’re bringing things from all over. Everything! All kinds of things. And you know how they do that? It’s with light. Strands of light. They change strands of light. When they take these little strands of light, anything can happen. They change everything. It can make anything happen with it.
D: Where do the strands of light come from?
S: Oh, my gawd! Their minds?
(No, the Strands of Light come as a Beam from the Portal of the Source of All Life, but only for the Life of a Universe, this Beam creates Mind-Field. When the Life of Old Universe is over, the Beam is switched off ! LM)
They take it in their mind and then they make stuff form. They put a point of light into something and then it takes shape around it. I knew they were here from a past trip. I didn’t know them very well. They have a way of creating things. They make things. They take light and they make any form out of it. The light goes in the middle. They can take one cell and change it by changing the light in the middle. They can make anything different just by changing the pieces, the part of the light. It’s not what I’m used to doing, but that’s how they do it. They make things happen that way. This looks like it’s a permanent group here, but they stay away from others. They stay to themselves. In fact, they take charge of everything, but the others don’t really know they’re here.

D: You said the other ones were coming to leave parts of themselves, too.
S: Yes. They’re in charge of who comes in. They let in whatever light they want. The light is in everything (Wavy energy is in everyone and everything on Earth? which make everything to shine! LM).
There are animals on Earth, and everyone of them has a little piece of light. And if you change that piece of light, it becomes a different looking animal. So they can change any animal they want just by changing what’s in the light."
Were they using the light to somehow manipulate or change the DNA?
(That piece of Light or Spirit they are manipulating for creating a different animal/human is called "Assemblage Point of the Spirit of a human", see Carlos Castaneda's Info   , LM).

D: But you said there were black people.
S: Yes, they’re not like me. They’re heavier, bigger. They’re more solid, too.
D: Are those people from Earth?
S: Yes. The group is working with that. They’re making them happen. How do they do that, I don’t know. The bodies came from animals, but the Beings themselves are not animals. The body’s very animal, so they’re changing them around. They’re getting bigger and they’re developing more abilities. And they look different, less hair.
D: Do you know if somebody tells this group to do these things?
S: It looks like they decide what they’re going to do. They’re from someplace else, too. They’re on Earth to make this happen.
D: To do the creating. (Yes) And the other one who come can create, also?
S: I don’t think so. They’re not that advanced yet.
D: But you said the other groups come and leave parts of themselves.
S: Oh, yes. They’ll bring a group of everything, like all the animals. Every group of animals came from a different place. Like reptiles came from one place, and mammals came from another place. And then they take the light and change it. And then the animal changes.
D: So the animals can exist on Earth?
S: Oh, yeah! The animals can exist on Earth. They can make any animal to fit any condition.
D: That’s what I meant. That part of the light is in them so they can stay here and survive.
S: Yes. If they change the light, the animal changes. They really know what they’re doing! Wow! They change something inside the cells, and the cells all change. The ones, that are in charge, are from a different dimension, than I am. They’re much lighter. And I’m thinking, that I am lighter, than these creatures, that are on Earth. But I’m not as light as these ones, that are running the show. They’re light. They have enormous energy! They can use energy. They just take it and manipulate it. More than I can. I can’t do that. They take this enormous energy and they manipulate it and make different forms. They make a different animal. They make all sorts of different animals. They can take this stuff out of their cells, and change it from one animal to the other. And zip! In a matter of a little time, they have another animal! They are creators...And Mars was too close, almost as close as it could get. Darn, if we’d only been on the outer side of the Sun. We wouldn’t have been wiped out.
D: Was there life on Earth when this happened?
S: Yes, those Beings, that were the Creators, were there. They were creating, and there were all sorts of life, but it wasn’t life, that we were compatible with. That’s the trouble, we weren’t compatible with that life. We didn’t have the bodies, that could live on Earth. We couldn’t live in that environment. We had our own environment. And as you travel around everywhere, there are physical bodies. Not everybody has physical bodies. Physical bodies are dense. And physical bodies are according to conditions. They can be made any way you want. They can be made to fit almost any condition on any planet, but not the great big gas planets like Jupiter. We couldn’t go near Jupiter. It’s too big, too strong...
S: Martians came to Earth. We were all allowed to come to Earth.
D: In spirit form you mean?
S: No, we obtained bodies. They (the creators, the advanced Beings, LM) took another monkey, or it was bigger than a monkey. It had a different color skin, a yellow skin. If you start back there, they made all of us genetically compatible. Isn’t that interesting? They made all of us from different things. They made the black ones out of gorillas and chimpanzees- they played with their cells. Their physical characteristics came a lot from the ape...(but only physical bodies, LM).
S: But ours were from a slightly different monkey. It was medium sized or smaller. And they took the DNA from that and made it slightly built. And did something with our little brown almond eyes. And our little, slighter builds- smaller bodies. And we are the yellow skins. (The little greys from Mars.) That’s they made us. That’s what was done, that’s where we came in. The Martians found a home on Earth eventually.
Not right away. It took them a long time. We were homeless for a long time.

D: But you mean these Creator Beings (our Higher Selves, LM) were the ones, that were making the bodies?
S: They helped. The Earth itself had to agree. The planet itself had to allow it to happen. It had never happened before where one planetary consciousness shared itself with another. Never happened before. Never! The Earth decided to share its body with another planetary consciousness. And this other planetary consciousness were those from Mars. After these bodies were created, Martian souls came into them. We all did...I was an Advanced Being. Only Advanced Beings could travel.
D: And Sam’s spirit decided to enter a human body on Earth.
S: Yes, we’ve all come back to Earth. We had to come back to Earth and go back to the 3rd dimension (3rd physical Level of Consciousness, LM) in physical bodies to learn more, to advance spiritually back to the 4th and the 5th and the 6th dimensions...

In some of my other sessions reported in this book, others have said the same thing. They normally remained with the Source, etc., and only came to Earth during the time of major shifts. These were the times when the most help was needed...
S: Gotta be able to raise a body. It was done before, but nobody believes it. Everybody can do it. I have to be able to raise a body.
D: What do you mean?
S: There’s a transformation. I don’t know exactly what it is, I’m still doing it. See, we could get all of our energy from the light. The Universe is full of light, the Universe is all light. And it’s only in a three dimensional body, that you can’t get enough light. When you’re in your light body, you can get enough light so you could live. You always live. Always, always, always. Light bodies can be put to sleep, but they generally always live.
D: So it’s difficult to do that in a physical, solid, dense body.
S: Yes. Some places, they do it all the time. Their physical bodies don’t end, or they have very long lives. But on Earth, it’s because it’s so negative, so tired, so heavy. And on Earth, you don’t know who you are. You lose your connection when you come to Earth. You don’t see your light body when you come to Earth. You don’t know that you are a Light Body. Boy, is it tough to find out too! Wow! On Earth, it’s hard!
And everybody’s so lost! - I was supposed to come here. I’m supposed to spiritualize a body. It’s been done before. And nobody seems to know it. It can be done. Some have done it, by living in the light.
They raised a 3rd dimension body to the 5th dimension. That’s what they do.

D: But he has been here now in a physical body living a physical life.
S: Yes, I have. I didn’t have clue about any more, than that either, for a long time. I didn’t know a thing. I didn’t really have a clue. I lost all my memories. Really lost my memories. I can’t believe, that you get upon this planet, and you lose all your memories of who you are."

This is what R.Monroe was writing about in his books. As you can see, our physical bodies were not created by 'Gods' as all religious people think, but by highly advanced Beings - our Higher Selves, who are the higher part of you!


monkey   


How it all Began!

http://www.v-j-enterprises.com/holearth.html#docs

HOLLOW EARTH WEB SITE
(I found a lot of misunderstanding in these writings, I advise the author to translate and read "Plutonia" to understand things better! LM)


Joshua,
You're welcome to take anything, which you think is useful and put it on the WWW. We've only just started. Is your WWW page about your book or the Hollow Earth in general or what?
Re: How did I get interested?
My original interest in the Hollow Earth was sparked back in the late 1970's while I was studying the books and prophecies of T Lobsang Rampa. The main reference is contained in a single chapter in the book "Twighlight". In it he answers a reader's question and states, that as far as Tibetans are concerned, the Earth is Hollow and there are people living inside. The outer crust is 800 - 1000 miles thick and there is a hole at each pole of approximately 1,400 miles in diameter. Inside live the REMNANTS of Atlantis, Lemuria and a couple of other civilisations. They are ruled by a man, whom the Tibetans call: The King of the World. According to the Tibetans, the Dalai Lama is the Outer World representative. The Inside contains more land, than sea, and the population is approximately 800 million. Their flying saucers come out of the Poles from time to time.
I kinda freaked at the time, because it seemed so unbelievable. Later, in a library I saw that famous composite photo of the hole as seen from above. I could find no further books on the subject and let the entire thing rest. Mentally I simply said "There's perhaps a 10% possibility, that the Earth is hollow - I'll evaluate it at some later date". And for well over 10 years I was happy to let it rest. I didn't REALLY believe, that a hole 1,400 miles in diameter could remain hidden for so long or go unnoticed in some way and was thus somewhat skeptical about the whole idea of such a huge entrance. Satellite photos gave nothing away.
My interest was rekindled late in 1993 when I was on Compuserve. I was chatting to a fellow, whom I regarded as one of my very best friends, and in who's research I had a great deal of faith. His name is Jeff. He actually kicked the whole subject off and we began talking. True to form, Jeff had read lots of really OLD stuff about the Hollow Earth, and brought forth item after item about it. I was very impressed and that set off an obsession, which has still not ended. What was very sad for me was, that in spite of Jeff's great knowledge, he himself actually ended up rejecting the possibility of the Earth being Hollow. But his objections didn't make much sense to me. He also suggested, that I do my own thinking on the matter, but from a mathematical perspective. He said he'd like to see whether I could mathematically prove/disprove the theory. I accepted the challenge. Astronomy had always been a favourite subject of mine so I began thinking about the things I knew about astronomy. I did some reading. Then I began to realise, that there are some anomalies, which would make sense.
For example, back in the 1970's two Soviet scientists from the Soviet academy of sciences proposed the theory, that the Moon was a Hollow Alien Spaceship, placed in orbit around the Earth.

I must digress at this point: Although Jeff rejected the idea of the Earth being Hollow, he actually accepts the Soviet proposal, that the Moon may be Hollow - even he admits, that the edvidence for there being a Hollow Moon is very strong. I had been aware of that book myself back in the 70's and my own acceptance of the Soviet theory had somewhat softened my idea to the fact, that perhaps the Earth too was Hollow.
There has often been speculation, even amongst astronomers and scientists, that Phobos, one of the Moons of Mars may be Hollow. Its strange orbit is cited as one of the reasons - plus many strange markings on it and a "huge" crater, which covers about 1/4 of its surface area. I'd like to point out that Sitchin (12th Planet) is quite comfortable with the idea, that Phobos is a hollowed out little moon (about 20 miles in diameter).
As I looked at the numbers I began to realise, that our estimates of mass are really relative. If all the planets were hollow we wouldn't really know. It also occurred to me that if Planet X, from which the asteroid belt had maybe been created, had been Hollow, then its break-up could be all the more easily explained. For example, if a planet like the Earth only has a crust and is Hollow Inside, then a big whack from a large object would cause it to shatter - and pieces would fly all over the place. If such a planet had been solid, then shattering would not likely occur. Sure a big chunk could be carved out of it, but it wouldn't SHATTER. I had noticed too, evidence piling up, proving beyond any doubt, that comets were merely asteroids with ice/gas and that they were really one and the same thing. Much of the "missing mass" of Planet X could also be accounted for if it was hollow. Another Soviet Cometary specialist has stated, that all existing comets, are really no more than 100,000 years old. Comets and asteroids are becoming less. Of course there may be a few, which have great orbital periods of 10 or 100 thousand years, but the vast majority have been swallowed up by the Sun, Jupiter, etc.
Another thing worth noting is that there are some flying saucers, which travel directly from the South Pole along S. America northwards. Some of them move as regularly, as clockwork. I also heard somewhere, that Canada had a very great number of sightings per capita.
It had always bothered me too: If Atlantis had ever existed, then where did the people go? Why would such a simple catastrophe have wiped EVERYONE out? Surely there must be survivors? Why didn't they just go and live somewhere else?
I also decided, that seismology is a *MUST* to go and have a look at. And that's what I did. I read up about seismology to see if there was anything, which might have been misinterpretted and which might disclose, that the Earth was Hollow.
I then discovered why it is they say the Earth's core is a LIQUID (not liquid but Plasma of Energy of Balance is in the centre or Sun, though there is ocean water on the surface of Interiour. LM). The reason is because certain waves can ONLY travel through SOLID material. These waves can not travel through: liquids, gases or a vaccum. However, scientists simply "assume" that the core is a liquid - they do not explore the possibility, that the core is a gas or even a vaccuum. I also discovered, that approximately 7,000 miles from an earthquake you will find a "shadow" area where certain types of waves never appear. Could the core/hollow be blocking out these waves? Then at about 10,000 miles or so these waves reappear. I also realised the complexity of such waves and how they are reflected and saw, that it is quite easy to misinterpret them. Later I acquired a very good seismic modelling program, which runs under windows (and which I'll upload if anyone wants). It is a most excellent program, which shows how the waves move through the Earth PLUS, what the various monitoring stations will actually see on their print-outs. As you look at this you will see, that our methods of watching seismic waves leaves much to be desired. When waves come up we have no idea where they were - we really can't tell much.
But look too and you will see a great many waves bouncing off the "mantle" - we are told this is due to a change in density. (It makes sense: Density of physical Spheres is higher towards the centre, but not in the Centre where a combination of a few Suns is! LM).
Keep in mind, that a Hollow object makes the wave movements many many times more complex, because waves bounce back and forth between the Two Thin Crusts and this will complicate the hell out of the whole thing. And when you look at the seismic model you will see, that waves are reflected, re-reflected, re-re-reflected and so on. The Earth sometimes "vibrates" for an hour or two after a big quake.

Probably the BIGGEST argument against the Hollow Earth is a PSYCHOLOGICAL one. Most people, including myself, just can not believe, that it could possibly have been missed - or was it?
After Jeff kicked the whole thing off, another friend, Chris, managed to help me locate a number of old books, written in 1908 and 1913 and 1920. Later I was to learn, that the Hollow Earth debate has been going on for about 200 years - but previously, prior to 1908, it was a debate, in which scientists took part.
What killed the debate was when Admiral Robert Peary claimed in 1908 to have discovered the North Pole.
That was really the death knell of the whole idea. In 1914, the Austrians were going to send an expedition to the North Pole. As part of its mission they were to check for the Hollow Earth's entrance. They did this on the strength of a book by an American called: Marshall Gardner. Gardner wrote one of the best books on the subject ever. It is a 400 page book, of which I have a copy, which contains notes from the journals of many famous explorers, including Amundsen, Peary, Lt Greely and many others. Gardner has a patent registered in the USA as the "discoverer of the Hollow Earth". Gardner pointed out the inconsistencies in Adm Peary's own log. The fact that only he and an Eskimo are the only witnesses, that this was the North Pole. The fact, that on one occassion he wrote, that you struggled like hell to even do 16-20 miles per day through the snow, yet on the last 2 days of his journey he did a staggering 40+ miles per day.- and so on. How he left the others of his team behind and they weren't witnesses. Peary had also made previous claims of discovery on earlier missions and these had been DISPROVEN. Months before Peary, another American had claimed to have reached the Pole. His claim was refuted shortly afterwards. Peary's claim was investigated by the US congress (in 1920 I think) and TOTALLY REFUTED. Apparently these are public records, which can be obtained. The US Congress held a hearing and refuted Peary's claims. Yet, to this day Peary is regarded as the discoverer of the North Pole.

Gardner's studies were detailed - but he wasn't the only one. I later discovered, that the Smithsonian Institue was originally formed in 1842 to fund an expedition by Lt Wilkes to find the entrance to the Hollow Earth. Lt Wilkes failed.
What you must understand is this: The poles are not just flattened, they curve inwards. Now keep in mind, that all navigational methods are based on the assumption, that the Earth is a sphere. Nowhere on the face of the Earth, except the poles, does the Earth depart from this shape. Thus navigation works everywhere except there. As you go over the lip of the entrance and begin the inward descent you think you're on the other side of the Earth - you are totally unaware, that you are entering a huge hole - a hole so big, that the Space shuttle on its highest orbital level of 750 miles could comfortably fly inside. Although you can not see the other side, there is a new phenomenon known to all Polar explorers: The Water sky.
If you look at the sky, it acts like a mirror and you see BEYOND the horizon. This phenomenon is mentioned by all Polar explorers. Lt Greely even noticed the shortening of the horizon. He found he could never see very far. Many many abnormalities were noted by explorers:

- Warm winds from the north, coloured snow containing huge amounts of pollens from unknown plants, animals moving NORTH for winter, polar bears moving north away from their prey, enormous flocks of birds numbering in the millions (coming from the North), temperatures far warmer, than expected.

I later discovered that a Polish scientist had calculated the temperature of the Earth, taking into account latitude as the determining factor. From 40 degrees north and south the real temperatures begin to differ from the predicted temperatures.
By the time we get to the poles we find the poles to be a staggering 30 degrees warmer, than they should be.

Also, during that initial exercise of mine, I studied geomagnetism. I had never felt comfortable with the "dynamo-in-the-core" theory. The idea, that currents in the core could create a magnetic field. I have many reasons for rejecting this idea.
For example, in order for there to be convection currents in the first place, there have to be temperature differentials of a big enough degree. Some magma in the core must be a lot hotter, than the other. This must also imply some sort of cooling process or some process, which keeps one part warmer, than the other. Without an adequate temperature differential currents won't arise in the first place. We can rule out cooling, because some scientists have found, that the Earth is not cooling. But even if we do have these currents, I still don't see how magnetism is generated.
Heat is not a friend of magnetism. As a substance is heated, so it loses its magnetism - of course that's not quite an appropriate argument here.

More appropriate is: Can a liquid/semi-liquid generate a magnetic field? As far as I know this has never been done. ..Surely, a snails-pace movement is not adequate to generate a magnetic field, which stretches beyond the Moon? Also, why should there be a single focal point for this magnetic field anyway? The core is rotating along with the rest of the Earth (Physical Crusts rotate, but their Suns are always in the cenre and don't rotate, LM) and non-pysical Layers of Core - there can't possibly be any friction, in the same way that the atmosphere rotates with the rest of the Earth. If the atmosphere did not move along with the Earth we'd have 1,000 mph winds blowing at the equator - instead, even a 100 mph wind is a great rarity). I wondered instead, if a nuclear Sun positioned in the core could be the source of the geomagnetic field. There seemed to be evidence, which could support this. All lava is slightly radioactive. Scientists speculate, that the Earth's heat is derived from radium, which decays. (NO, THE HEAT derives from GROWING INTERNAL SUN, THAT'S CALLED EVOLUTION ! LM).
But hold on: Radium is the lesser brother of Uranium. Decaying uranium becomes radium. So if there's radium then it might we have been uranium to start with.
In West Africa there can be found a "natural nuclear reactor". A place where sufficient uranium occurred naturally to kick off a nuclear explosion. So I surmised: Wouldn't it be more logical, during the formation of the Earth for heavy substances like Gold, Uranium, Lead to have been in the Core instead of iron (the real Core is Sun, the Energy of Balance, not metal ! LM)? But, you don't need much Uranium to kick off a nuclear reaction. Also sometimes these things are self-enriching if enough of it is around. This would explain why in prehistoric times, huge volcanoes spewed out lava, which filled entire continents.
(No, it's not so. Volcanos spewed out lava as a result of New Civilizations entering Earth from all corners of our Old Universe. They have Sizzling, Electrifying Energy and hit volcanos with Lightning or Gamma Rays, which start eruption. This way they preparing a cavern for themselves underneath Volcano. Lava is multiple layers of our old Holograms. Central Sun is expanding and the Earth has been expanding, because more and more
New Civilizations turned up on Earth and will be even more! LM).

It would explain why there is evidence of the Earth expanding by 20%... I discovered too, that the Aurora baffles science. That particles similar to those from the Sun are somehow appearing in the upper atmosphere of the Poles - but there are far too many of these particles to be accounted for by the Sun alone. So where do they come from? They come from the Inner Sun - which is also the source of the Aurora and the light. This also explains why the Aurora is linked to the geomagnetic field. The geomagnetic field is not stable. In fact, it wobbles A LOT, and at a high rate. It moves large distances within short periods of time. This can be explained by having a Central Sun wobbling around a central point. In short, I pose this question: If scientists are willing to accept that decaying radium causes most of the Earth's heat - then does it take much leap of the imagination to suppose, that just a little bit more radium/uranium in one point deep within the crust could have kicked off a self-sustaining nuclear reaction? Even a Sun of as little as 28 miles in diameter would weigh many millions of tons. It would hollow out the Earth easily and all the lava would pour out on to the surface. Later things would cool down inside.

Gravity is an issue all by itself, but rest assured that Newtonian gravity works like a DREAM even in the Hollow Earth scenario. I have tested that idea to its fullest.
Eventually, I decided that the evidence, to my way of thinking, was in favour of the Earth POSSIBLY being hollow. I could see no great objections to the idea. It would explain many things, which scientists currently regard as anomalies and which they are HARD PUT TO EXPLAIN.
Since then...my friend Jeff just fobbed off the best arguments I put forth. He countered with his own arguments - which to me did not make much sense. In a nutshell, the main thrust of his argument was this: If there's this huge hole, then why don't people end up wandering into it and seeing the Inner world? How can two teams, crossing the Antarctic, manage to meet at one point?
Answer to the first question:
The hole is very very big. From the Outer lip to the Inside of the sphere you are looking at a circle (through the crust) with a diameter of 800 - 1000 miles. To get even half way, you have to travel about 1200 - 1300 miles in a straight line. If you wander even slightly to one side or the other the journey will become much longer. Also, compasses tend to go haywire... If you go in at a skew angle you could walk into the hole, by several hundred mile and out again, perhaps crossing a distance of a 1000 or more miles and never once even know, that you were in the hole. This is a feature of enormous size and larger, than most countries. If you do not consciously go looking for this hole and taking careful bearing using the stars (until they disappear), etc you can easily miss the mark.

Question 2: The standard procedure when your compass goes haywire is to move away from the pole in question (north or south). When your compass behaves normally you then carry on with your journey. The "north/south pole" is merely 90 degrees latitude - and since we assume the Earth is a sphere we assume therefore, that only one spot in each hemisphere can give us a reading of 90 degrees latitude (by the Sun or any other heavenly body). The manner, in which 2 teams coming from opposite sides can meet is simply, because they will be moving away from the rim whenever the compass goes crazy. It is not to say, that these expeditions met on a spot marked "X". As they zig-zag around this rim they will (unknowingly) be moving in a circle and it is easy to see how they will run into each other. NB: The expeditions in question did not approach each other directly from 180 degrees, so it is easy to see that they must meet. If they approached directly from 180 degrees, then the possibility exists that the one team may go one way round the rim while the other goes another way round the rim.

Jeff also posed the question: If the US base at McMurdo sound is a mere 400 miles from the Pole, then how come they didn't notice anything? To me this was a stupid question.
Answer: The US base at the Pole is not "at the Pole". It is on the rim of the "Area of Inaccessibility". This means, that the South Pole base is on the rim of a hole 1,400 miles in diameter and you are at least 1,200 miles from the 1/2 way mark going inside. So you can wander 1,000 miles on either side of the South Pole Station and see nothing. McMurdo Sound is 400 miles further away still. There's no way at a distance of 1,200+400 miles, that anyone at McMurdo Sound will see/notice a thing. You get lost at the Poles - be sure of that. Amundsen, discoverer of the South Pole, got thoroughly lost near the North Pole. Amundsen's diaries showed, that he got TOTALLY LOST FOR 6 MONTHS! He tried to go from Franz Joseph land to Spitsbergen and got totally lost. When he finally got back to territory he recognised, he was hundreds of miles from where HE'D CALCULATED HIS POSITION TO BE.
During the BBC documentary "Pole-to-Pole" a number of people including the BBC crew were on a small plane going across Antarctica. As they looked out, they made some very telling remarks. One guy said "Gee isn't it amazing how those old explorers could find their way across this continent? Just look how flat and featureless it is, no land marks to go by except the occassional hill. Amazing." He doesn't know how right he may have been.
And even today its no different. That BBC reporter got his distance from Tromso, Norway to the North Pole wrong, as did the UPI release for the distance from Port Barrow to the North Pole.
Cartographers also got it wrong. US Navy cartographers were pissed off with US Army cartographers, because their maps didn't match. Entire mountain ranges had to be thrown into the dustbin. Explorer after explorer discovered islands, mountains, seas, which others couldn't ever find again. I am convinced though, that the US Govt, the Russians and maybe a few others know what's going on there.
The Hollow Earth thing was sad for me in a way, because Jeff and I fought about it a great deal, and as far, as I was concerned, he just wouldn't listen to reason, to independantly acquired facts or anything else. He shot it down on the basis of a few arguments, which underestimated the navigational problems. He said, yeah, but the Earth is flattened at the Poles. Well, that just doesn't match the facts. Go and look in any book. The Earth's polar diameter is only given as a mere 26 miles less, than the equatorial diameter. 26 miles in a distance of 7926.5 is nothing. If I were to draw a scale drawing of the Earth, you wouldn't even notice that it wasn't a circle. Anyway, scientists of old debated the existence of a POLAR BASIN - that the entire Polar region was DEPRESSED. Some thought it was depressed and others thought it lead to a hole inside. But that does not explain it all.

Amundsen, while in his ship, The Fram, found himself viewing a Red SUN - the "Mock Sun" at a time, when the Sun wasn't supposed to be above the horizon. Many explorers have had a glimpse of the Inner Sun - the "Mock Sun" - because it appeared in places, where the Sun could not possibly be (that coinside with what the team of russian explorers found in Hollow Earth in 1913. This info and more is in "Plutonia". LM).

In the end, this whole interest of mine probably broke up my friendship with this guy - which to me was quite a blow. I had another interesting episode, which also harmed another close friendship. Another guy I know, who once worked for the NSA, and who loved photography responded when I told him about the Hollow Earth. He said he had a photo, which he'd obtained at Goddard Space flight centre in the 1970's. This photo was of the Earth. He'd borrowed some negatives and made copies one weekend. When I remarked, that I was wondering if the Earth was Hollow, he of course turned to his big colour photo. And there on it he saw the hole - a side view- with clouds flowing into it. He scanned part of it in black and white and e-mailed it to me. He'd always been friendly, but warned me not to talk too much, because the NSA monitors all computer communications. He'd always said, that making a copy and mailing it to me would be no problem. As soon as he had a chance (he was the CEO of a company), he would mail me a copy. But suddenly he began acting weird, when I pressed him on the issue. Later he more or less disappeared and only resurfaced at odd times. He behaved in a weird manner,  which others noticed too. Some of us wondered whether he'd been "silenced".
Later, Dennis Crenshaw also told me, that a similar thing had happened to a buddy of his, who was making progress with Hollow Earth research. Dr Laslo Spengler, another researcher I recently met has warned me too of the subversion of UFO organisations and of the BENEFITS of doing it alone - doing your research without others peeking over your shoulders. As I will later show, the same happened to Al Bender back in the 1950's - and you will see how Al was silenced.
I have long held the opinion, and many will hate me for saying this, but UFOlogy IS GOING NOWHERE. People are rushing down the wrong path, watching Area 51, chasing reptilians, looking at crop circles and trying to catch cattle mutes. No big coverup is needed, because people are already looking in the wrong place for the wrong thing. Back in the early days, the researchers were on even ground with the US Govt, but once the Govt's silencing campaign, in the form of MIBs had succeeded, the need for silencing became less and less and today they only silence the VERY FEW, who DARE go against the grain and who dare postulate, that the Earth is hollow and that an advanced civilisation may be on our doorstep. These few are the only people, who actually stand a chance of upsetting the cart. I have no doubt, that as one gets closer to the truth, the US Govt will begin to play rough. Finally, I have only spoken about The Hollow Earth so far. To me, there are other issues:
1. Subteranean civilisations.
2. Hollow Planets/Moons.
(2) If the Earth is hollow naturally, then we no longer have to buy into the theory, that the Moon is hollow artificially - it could easily be a hollow construct naturally. It opens up a whole new field: Where are all the Aliens, who claimed to come from Venus, Mars, etc? Was Adamski a liar? Were all the others liars? Maybe NOT! Maybe they were telling the truth, but because we believe the Planets to be devoid of life, we think that the Aliens are lying. Perhaps it is that the Aliens are telling the truth and it is we, who are being lied to by our side. Let me prioritise some Planets/Moons in order of evidence that they may be hollow:
1. Moon.
2. Earth.
3. Phobos.
4. Mars.
5. Mercury.
6. Callisto(?) (Moon of Saturn)
7. Venus.
8. Neptune/Uranus.
If other Planets are inhabited, in this Solar System, then many things in UFOlogy (which didn't make sense before) now begin making A LOT OF SENSE. For example, you can easily see why Hollow Earthers would get mighty upset at the thought of 3 superpowers near the poles having a vast number of nuclear weapons. At the ease with which nuclear attack submarines like "Scorpion" and "Thresher" can easily sail into their world underneath through the pack ice and sneak around underwater, being able to instantly launch nuclear missiles, which can blow up their cities.
You can see why Aliens might take a dislike to Russian and American probes near the planet Mars. You can begin to understand WHY THE US GOVT MUST ENGAGE IN THIS ENORMOUS COVER-UP.
It opens up a line of thinking and questioning which people have been ignoring for DECADES.

Re: Subteranean civilisations....
I see Subteranean civilisations as a whole different kettle of fish, and as a much more difficult subject. It is a subject, which does not sit comfortably with me. I have read of Richard Shavers, Teros(?) and Deros... Legends of Leprechauns, etc may be based on truth, but no real accounts exist of these things (that I know of)...
The Hollow Earth is a different concept. There's sunlight, equatorial temperatures globally, safe from comets, etc. Great stuff. Its the ideal place to live. Subteranean civilisation - bah humbug.
However, I acquired a very old book: The Coming Race, written in 1871, by the Rt Hon Lord Lytton. Lytton's story is so amazing, that I can't believe that UFOlogists haven't dug into it in detail. Here is a man describing something akin to nuclear power; and giving commentaries on a wipe out of the surface civilisations - and all this happened back in 1871. There is just so much in that book. But, worse still, while combing through anomalies I *DO* find evidence, that indeed Lord Lytton may well be telling the truth. And so I am prepared to consider, that some races do have little underground villages, in which they live and come out from - from time to time. The people Lord Lytton met are known to us today as "The Mothmen". He predicted, that they would come out and begin looking around - and they did. The earliest Mothmen sightings I could find were in 1877 - and they have been seen even in the 1960's. Lytton's book is another, which I'd like to discuss and go through with all of you... Lord Lytton's book is something else altogether! Jan's Definition of the Hollow Earth

From: "Jan Lamprecht"
To: Subteranean.List
Date: Mon, 18 Sep 1995
Subject: 1# What do I mean by "Hollow Earth?"
Reply-to: pbs@iafrica.com

Hey Jan.
BTW, could you very briefly tell just what you mean by "Hollow Earth"? I'm not too familiar with the concept and having hard time getting the over all picture. Personally, I think it's very possible, that there is a subteranean civilization (probably Atlantis-related)... but, are you basically saying, that all planets are literally hollow?
GORO

Hi Goro,
Yes, I'm basically thinking along the lines of ALL/MOST Planets/Moons actually being hollow - like a tennis ball. You could say that I'm "testing" this hypothesis by looking around at literature, anomalies, doing some thinking, etc.
I'm still examining the evidence, thinking about the various aspects and just pondering the whole issue. I like to take my time and think things through. Sometimes I dawdle on like this for years. Don't be fooled into thinking, that I haven't had a look at seismology or geology or gravity or other issues. I have.
The basic postulate is simply, that the entire Earth is hollowed out. That most of what we see resembles a tennis ball. There's a hard/flexible outer shell, which can take meteor impacts - up to a certain size. But at the Poles there are 2 gigantic holes somewhere from 800 - 1200 miles in diameter (at their widest point). These huge Holes can be entered and you can sail or fly or walk all the way into the interior. Gravity still works as normal, but it holds you "up" the other way. The Holes are so big, that you don't even know they're there (except from space).
Thus a ship would sail as normal. Winds would blow and so on. The atmosphere flows in as well. The atmosphere isn't very thick. 99% of the atmosphere is contained in the first 30 miles. So if you will consider a Hole perhaps 1200 miles wide, curving gently inside, through a crust of 900 miles in thickness, then at the NARROWEST part you will have a gap of about 300 miles or so. It is quite possible therefore that in the middle of this hole is a pure vacuum. That "space" as we know it, exists in the middle of this hole and that as this Hole once again widens on to the inside, that we find ourselves in a vaccuum in the centre of the Earth.
(No, there is air to breath there, not vaccuum! LM).
 Inside the Earth, like on the outside, will be oceans, mountains, rivers, continents and atmosphere. But that atmosphere, like on the outside will be 30 miles high. Now if the Earth's crust is say 900 miles thick, then we find, that beyond the inner atmosphere is a vaccuum of:
7900 - 900 - 900 - 30 - 30 = 6040 miles in diameter. That would be big enough to fit the Moon into it. The Moon being only 2160 miles in diameter. But no, there's no moon inside.

Although a fellow by the name of Symmes (fearless captain), postulated, that inside the Earth was another Earth and another (5 or 8 levels within each other). But Symmes was somewhat different.

What I'm talking about is much simpler - the same thing, that Olaf Jansen says he saw and the same thing the Tibetans talk of. That inside we have a world, which is exactly the same as on the outside. In this Inner vaccuum, is a little Sun...
A compass on a ship on the outside would point towards the North. As you get closer to the hole, the compass would begin pointing DOWN. If you don't physically adjust your compass down then it might begin spinning around. As you go deeper into the hole and reach the inner surface you would find your compass returning to normal again. It would still point "north" but that would now be south.

The Earth's motion through space is not perfectly constant. In fact the Earth speeds up and slows down in its motion. Thus our little Inner Sun would wobble around (like a passenger in a bus).
But how would the Inner Sun stay in the centre and not crash to the side? Well, this is where I can point to a most "bizarre" connection with that book "My contact with Flying Saucers". (Its not about the Hollow Earth, but its about physics - Alien style). The Alien Captain tells us about the repulsion of light. What is interesting is that the theory of gravity alone would be unable to account for a Central Sun holding its position. The Central Sun would move - inevitably - because of the Earth changing its speed and direction. Gravity as we know it would cause the Central Sun to crash into the side of the Earth. The moment the Central Sun moved even a little to one side, gravity from the closest side would draw it to the wall and the Central Sun would crash into the side. But, the Alien Captain explained a great deal about the pressure of light. Since this Central Sun emits light, the light would of course push against the Earth. So let's say the Earth slows down a little.
The Central Sun should come crashing into the side. Well, in this case as it comes closer to one side, the pressure of light - due to its nearness, would push harder on the Earth and impart a bit more momentum to it. This is negligible really.
More importantly, the light of the Sun would be reflected back onto the Sun itself thereby pushing it back.
The Central Sun would thus wobble back and forth and move around in sympathy to changes in the speed and direction of the motion of the Earth.
Light from the Inner Earth would shine out through the Holes. But since the Holes are really very tiny, it would not happen often. Note the Maedler phenomenon I mentioned with regard to Venus? That only on 2 occassions so far: 1686 and 1833, have astronomers observed light shining out of both Venus's Poles. At other times, the light shining out would be indirect light and it would form the Aurora.
(The various Color Vibrations of different civilizations inside Earth, would cause Auroras to turn up through the Holes! LM).

The Aurora chops and changes and to a certain extent moves and behaves in sympathy with the Earth's magnetic field and the emissions from the Central Sun...The problem they, scientists, found was, that the Sun could NOT be the cause of the Aurora. The problem being that we do not receive enough particles from the Sun in the upper atmosphere of the Earth to cause the Aurora. Their calculations show that there are more "sun-like" particles up there in the atmosphere at the Poles,  than there should be by the action of the Sun alone. So they are stumped...
One could ask oneself many questions about conventional Aurora theory. Like: Why are auroras only around the poles? Why aren't there more Auroras all over the place? Why only the poles?

That Central Sun also produces heat. And if we have winds blowing in and out from the Inner Earth to the Outer Earth, then we should have some sort of heat exchange. The same is true of water. Note those Antarctic pollyanas I spoke about.
In the early days of Arctic exploration scientists calculated the expected temperatures for the latitudes as explorers moved north. Invariably they found, that northern latitudes were far warmer, than they should be if heat from the Sun alone was the source. I have come across calculations done a few decades ago by a Polish scientist in this regard. His calculations of the Earth's temperature show, that the temperatures at the poles are 30 degrees warmer, than they should be. So our scientists then say that it is warm equatorial air warming the poles. But does that really make sense? Is there really enough equatorial air going far enough to the poles and retaining its heat long enough to keep them 30 degrees warmer?
I often wonder if air exchange may cause havoc with all those super-computers, which are calculating next week's weather!
Where on the Earth would you expect to find the most fish? Believe it or not, the Polar regions have a greater density of fish life, than the equator and warmer areas. Fish have a type of anti-freeze in their blood. But that does not explain why they should thrive more in such regions. Or is it that fish from the Inner Earth - where the people do not fish as much as we do - spill over and swim out of the holes?
The same is true of bird life. There are accounts too of bears and other creatures in the Arctic going NORTH for winter.
There really are a lot of issues to look at. But there are enough strange things, which makes one wonder. The pattern which I have stumbled across - and only really appreciated fully recently - is that most types of Fortean phenomenon are related to the Hollow Earth/planets or Subteranean issues in one way or another. It seems to me that Forteana - if nothing else - is pointing the way. I never expected this.
One thing, which I found interesting, was that scientists have attempted to find the "centre" of the Earth's magnetic field. They found it was 82 miles off centre. But that's not the whole story. The Earth's magnetic field does not just gradually move westwards as we are told. From what I've read, the Earth's magnetic field actually moves in a jagged orbit of approximately 30 miles PER DAY. As the Earth rotates daily, and the Inner sun wobbles, this wobble is traced out as a jagged ellipse DAILY. This - if nothing else - should clearly show, that this could not possibly be caused by currents. It shows, that at any one moment, the position of the centre of the magnetic field is at a certain spot INDEPENDANT of the Earth's physical position. I have many problems with ALL convection current theories in the Earth. I do not believe any of them. I have a particular argument dealing with convection currents in the Core, plus the fact that gravity will grow less and less as you get closer to the centre of the earth (assuming its solid).
I have tried to get more data regarding the motion of the Earth's magnetic field. But, because I'm not in the USA I do not have access to the USGS magnetic data BBS. However I think it is worth studying. If one could study the correlation between the movement of the Earth in space, its rotation and that magnetic centre - you might just be able to prove that the Earth's magnetic field is being generated by a specific body. Did you know that when atom bombs are exploded - that there is an Aurora in that area for several days afterwards? That proves: Aurora can be produced in latitudes other, than the Poles.

This brings us to the formation of the Earth. Geologists have discovered, that the Earth is not really cooling down, but that it generates its own heat.

Immediately it would melt the surrounding rock, produce enormous temperatures and soon immense quakes would shake the earth and enormous volcanoes would spew forth lava. Huge amounts which would form the first continents. As it melts everything around it, eventually, this wobbling nuclear reaction would hollow out the Earth...This would leave the entire Earth's crust honeycombed with large caverns and tunnels - in which subteranean life could exist at a future time. Later when things cool down, and a vaccum forms inside, water and air could be sucked inside. This is all very hypothetical and scanty...
It is truly a fascinating subject, and the mere thought of Hollow worlds is quite exciting. Was the "Garden of Eden" inside the Earth? Well, Olaf Jansen - who claims to have gone there emphatically says Yes!
Could it be that "normal" life is actually intended INSIDE worlds. Could we be the "abnormal?" I say this because if one overcomes the idea of a Central Sun - then you immediately see many advantages in that sort of idea. I have done some basic calculations and a Central Sun of 28 miles in diameter would present the same size in the sky as our Sun does. If its luminosity is in similar proportion, then that would be enough to light up and warm up such a world. Now think about this: Comets and meteors can destroy life. But, they can not harm any life at all which exists below the Crust. The impact of even a small object 100 miles across could probably destroy all life on Earth. And an object 100 miles across - in space - is nothing - its like a spec of dust. Yet, even such an impact would have almost no effect on life on the Inside. It might produce an earthquake at best. Think too of climate. Here we live on the outside. Latitude=temperature. Go a little north and you get cold. Go to the equator and you get warm. Then you have day and night too. But, inside a globe, ALL POINTS are equidistant from that Sun. You could have an entire world with all of it having a tropical climate. Isn't this more sensible? Isn't this more conducive to life perhaps?
There is an interesting idea, which the Buddhists have. They believe in cycles. In regular Earth changes, quakes - the ends of Ages. They believe, that the Earth is a special place, a School. Just a few weeks ago I mentioned that other book about UFO contact from Under the sea. There, Aliens also spoke of regular pole shifts and Alien peoples coming from far and wide to watch, study and help us through this catastrophic thing. But wait a minute! What about THEM? If they live as we do, then surely it should be happening to them too (since many of them are human and live under similar conditions). Why don't THEY have Pole shifts? Why aren't they afflicted by Earth changes? WHAT IS SO SPECIAL ABOUT US THAT EVERYONE SEES US AS A SORT OF EXCEPTION?
I have an idea - its a bizarre idea - but could it be that WE are among the very few, who live on the OUTSIDE of our world? That our world is special - not because it has life - but because it has life on the Inside AND the Outside. Could that be the secret?
(Not quite. All Civilizations of our Old Universe are gathering and have a unique Human experience here on Earth, like nowhere else! LM).

Have a look around. Whether you read about spiritulism, reincarnation, buddhism, UFOs...whatever. There is ONE THEME, that keeps coming back to us over and over. It goes thus:
(a) There is life on many many Planets. Many are Earth like.
(b) Earth is a SCHOOL, Earth is DIFFERENT from other Planets.
(c) Life on Earth gets wiped out regularly.
(d) Why are so many civilisations out there, which do NOT seem to be wiped out regularly?
The question I keep asking is: Why? What should make Earth different from other places? This bizarre answer is most intruiging. Could it be that *WE* have our entire point of view REVERSED from the NORM in the Universe, because we live on the Outside? Thus when we go searching for life, we look only on the outside. So we see bare worlds - deserts and we say to ourselves that *WE* are the only life. YET, perhaps these same desert Worlds have great civilisations inside their hollowed out interiors. But we just don't recognise it?
I want to point you to a bizarre coincidence which occurred in our group (the UFO/Prophecy group) many weeks ago. The significance of it will not have struck either you or most of the others at that time. So let me refresh your memory.
Tarabich had predicted (over 100 years ago) that we would go into space and all we would find there would be DESERT WORLDS. We would search but find no life. Then, much later, we would FIND LIFE on those same Worlds, because we would understand something, which we didn't understand before.
(No, because our vibration will be higher! LM).
Was Tarabich predicting HOLLOW WORLDS? It's worth thinking about.

Oh yes, I nearly forgot something. You mentioned "remnants of Atlantis" living underground. This brings me to another interesting point. Imagine a continent/island of very advanced people with space ships, etc. Quakes rock the place. Now what's stopping them from evacuating and going to live ELSEWHERE on the Earth? Why should most of those people die from something as innocuous, as some quakes? Why can't there be enough SURVIVORS enough to start new cities elsewhere? Not even in a nuclear war will you find EVERYONE dying. Apart from them flying to another Planet (which would seem pretty much an OVERREACTION) - wouldn't it seem more likely that they found a much nicer place to live?
Why live in underground tunnels and caverns when you can live on the surface in the sunshine? Why didn't they pick out the most beautiful place on the rest of the Earth and MOVE THERE? There must have been plenty of places to go.
Or is it, that they knew of a place, which IS nicer than anywhere on the surface and that they DID go there? And that may be where they are living today - in the Inner Earth - along with survivors from Lemuria, Mu and all the other civilisation?

Life on Earth thus works like this:
(a) New colonies of humans/beings are seeded on the surface after a Pole shift.
(b) If they develop enough and survive long enough to see it through to the next pole shift and all their cities are destroyed, then they move inside the Earth, where things are much safer. If they have figured out, that the Earth is Hollow and they have the technology to move.
(c) Go back  for the next Class.
This is a "conspiracy" on the part of Higher Beings and this is what "graduation" from the School of Planet Earth is all about. We get stuck here on the Outer Earth and we have to figure things out for ourselves. We begin as barbarians and savages and see if we can make it to eventually qualify for membership of a greater order in the Universe.
Kinda weird eh?
There's something which I think you might not have come across, is the series of books written by Don Wilson. He wrote a book about a theory postulated by Soviet Scientists in the mid 1970's wherein they reckoned that our Moon was hollowed out - a spaceship in fact. There's actually tons of evidence for that. The Moon is a very strange place. It was not always there. The Soviets showed, that the Moon has a very tough outer skin and all craters are very shallow REGARDLESS of the width of the meteor, which struck and formed them. The *ONLY* exception is this newly photographed crater at the Moon's South Pole. It is much deeper, than any of the other craters. The average density of the Moon is the same as aluminium and you know how light that is...All sorts of funny clouds have come out from the Moon. Many of the anomalies on the Moon have been documented by astronomers and are known as TLPs. I found the arguments for the Hollow Moon to be extremely strong. I can't see how anyone can think otherwise once you've gone through the data. The seismic data is extremely impressive too, because it had scientists literally falling off their chairs when the first seismic information was in. There was also an analysis done by a scientist at NASA in 1962 wherein he concluded that the Moon must be hollow. What is interesting - and you should keep this in mind - is that if one object is hollow, then it is likely that most everything else might be too. In Astronomy, MASS is dealt with on the basis of RELATIVE masses. So if the Moon is Hollow, then so could the Earth and everything else be - because GRAVITY (our gravity) is based on masses - relative masses and distances.
If only one object was Hollow, then it would stand out like a sore thumb. But what if they all were?
Polar anomalies on different planets in the Solar System? Did you see that ZIP file of photos?
For a long time I have been intrigued by the concept of the Hollow Earth. I remember reading Raymond Bernard's book on the subject ( The Hollow Earth - 1979 ) in the mid 1980's and felt a strong affinity for the whole idea. Next, I read a strange book called "Etidorhpa" by John Uri Llyod written in the late 1890's about a person, who traveled from the Outer Surface to the Inner Surface of the Earth and carrying when he arrived at the center of the Earth crust.

According to Mr. Bernard (see diagram above) our world is Hollow, with the Crust of the earth being 800 miles thick. There exists two openings at the North and South Pole, each hole having a circumference of 1400 miles wide.
At the center of the Earth is not a molten core, but an Inner Sun, which is six hundred miles wide and is 2900 miles from the Inner Surfaces.
The diameter of the lip at the Opening at the poles is 1200 miles long, thus a person can not see the other side of the Opening.

Therefore, there exists three Worlds on our Planet, the outer surface, where we live, the middle Earth, which purportedly is lined with many caverns, tunnels (made by someone), Inner Cities and people who live there and lastly the Inner Surface. How Gravity works then is the following. For the people, who live on the outer surface, Gravity holds them down. For the people that live in the middle earth, the closer they get to the center of the crust (i.e. - 400 miles down), the less effect gravity will have upon them.
In the book, "Etidorhpa", when this individual traveling down into the Earth reached the center of gravity, i.e. where there is no gravity --- he was able to move by the power of his mind, his heart stop beating and he didn't need to eat.
He described gigantic vegetation, that lives under the Earth as this lesser pull of gravity allows things to grow larger. Lastly for the people, who live on the inner surface, they would also feel gravity pull on them to walk on this surface, but since there is an Inner Sun, they would have sunlight 24 hours a day.
There is supposedly land masses and water bodies, that exist on the Inner Earth, the same as the outer surface, except the vibration and energy in the Inner Earth is more pure and of a higher vibrational frequency (some say a 4th dimensional frequency).

For people, who have claimed to travel to the Inner Earth, they state, that the people they encounter in this region, are usually very tall. Some other individuals have speculated, that descendants of Atlantis and Lemuria live in this Inner Utopia and therefore they are thousands of years ahead of us technologically and spiritually. Some others say, that possibly the Mayans may have gone into this location as well, to explain where they disappeared.
Again, according to our channeler Michael Kant, he claims that 12 galactic races came to our Earth long ago and created their first city underground in the 4 Corners area. Each race brought with them a crystal skull and body, which contained the gentic coding of their race and cosmic knowledge. Six tribes decided to stay on the surface of the Earth and Six tribes went into the Inner Earth. Now all twelve tribe exist in the Inner Earth. It is also believed, that other Extraterrestrial races may have bases in the Inner Earth as well. Michael describes in our book being taken by a Pleiadian Space Ship and given a tour of the Inner Earth.

In 1982, while traveling on faith throughout the western part of the U.S., I had the fortune to meet Ed Palmer in Portland, Oregon, who is the founder of the Cosmic Science Research Center. Ed told us a very strange tale about how he was an exchange baby, that he was originally from Orion, but when he was very small, the true Ed Palmer was exchanged for him. He claimed, that when he has had a physical examination, that there are some differences in his body and also that he has some type of mental plate in his head, in which if a UFO comes close, he hears a buzzing sound. Even though Ed was in his 70's or 80's, he definitely had more energy and excitement of life than I at this time (being 27). In any case, Ed gave us a pamphlet, that he shared with others, about the Hollow Earth. In this pamphlet it said, that all Planets are Hollow (in Bernard's book, Mr. Bernard explains, that what appears to be the pole cap we see of Mars, is actually the light of Mar's Inner Sun shining out of the pole. Furthermore Bernard states, that the Aurora Borealis, that is only visible up north, is the reflection of the Inner Sun off clouds passing over the Opening of the Pole. Also, that some explorers of the North Pole have discovered: the closer they get to the Pole, the warmer it gets instead of the colder. Could the Mammoths discovered frozen in Siberia with fresh food in their mouth be actually Mammoths, that live in the Inner Earth, which has a warmer climate, and somehow got lost and wondered into the outer surface and that
Ed even had a ride on a UFO to the moon which is hollow and that the ETs use the moon to construct spacecraft inside, hidden from our prying eyes. Ed explains, that when a Planet is formed it is first just gas, which is rotating. He said, that the heavy particles eventually expand out and create the planet's surface and the lighter particles contract to form the Central Sun.
(This is not right. Sun is a Higher Being, full of White Energy of Balance, a Huge Soul and you treat it like an object, made of particles! LM).

Another connection with the Inner Earth relates to Admiral Byrd. It is purported, that when the Admiral went to explore the North Pole, that he actually entered into the Inner Earth at the Opening at this pole. Included below, you will see a purported diary by Admiral Byrd, that discusses he made contact with an advanced people in this area, who showed him their world and asked for him to take a message back to the surface dwellers and government of their concern about a future vision they had of our destroying our world and since this is their home as well, they of course wanted to prevent this. If such a people do exist, it is theorized that possibly some of the UFOs we see are not extraterrestrial but intraterrestials. It would require a spacecraft, that can negate the force of gravity to fly out of the Polar Openings as gravity would pull any boat or airplane to follow the outer-to-inner surface. Another spiritual channel we have been in communication with is Christine Hayes of the Star of Isis Foundation in San Antonio, Texas. She claims to be receiving telepathic information from the people, who live in the Inner Earth.
Lastly, a good source on Internet for Hollow Earth related information is the mailing list created by Jan Lamprecht of South Africa. She has been fascinated with the Hollow Earth for a long time. If you would like to join her mailing list, she can be contacted at email address: pbs@iafrica.com. Below is a list of information we have been given permission to share which comes from the mailing list (we added some entries from our files to the resource section):
http://www.v-j-enterprises.com/holres.html
Hollow Earth Resources

NEWSLETTERS:
Delve
Attn: Gene Du Plantier
17 Shetland St
Willowdale, Ontario M2M 1X5
Canada
--------------------
The Hollow Earth Insider
Attn: Dennis Crenshaw
P O Box 918
Yulee, FL 32097
USA.
Tel: (904) 225-9181
Fax: (904) 225-2858
--------------------
Hollow Hassle
c/o Thera
Attn: Mary Davis
POB 747
Aurora, CO 80040
USA.
Tel: (303)343-8300
(Hollow Earth study group)
--------------------
ISCE
Attn: Dan Weiss
P O Box 890
Felton, CA 95018
USA.
Tel: (408) 335-9329.
--------------------
Temple Doors
c/o Star of Isis Foundation
Attn: Christine Hayes
P.O. Box 4872
San Antonio, TX 78285
USA.
Tel: (512)737-1733
(Channel for Thoth and Inner Earth Beings,shares information
about Inner Earth Tribes connection with ancient Crystal Skulls)

BOOKS:
Beckley, Timothy Green
SUBTERRANEAN WORLDS INSIDE EARTH,
THE SMOKY GOD AND OTHER INNER EARTH MYSTERIES
(Sky Books, Box 769, Westbury, NY 11590)
Bernard, Raymond
FLYING SAUCERS FROM THE EARTH'S INTERIOR
THE HOLLOW EARTH, New York, Bell, 1979
(Contact: Health Research, Box 70, Mokelumne Hill, CA 95245)
Byrd, Admiral Richard, THE FLIGHT TO THE LAND BEYOND THE NORTH POLE
(Hollow Earth Society, Attn: Captain Wilhelm Shoush, POB 142, Stanford, MO 65757)
Gardner, Marshall, A JOURNEY TO THE EARTH'S INTERIOR, (1920)
Health Research, Box 70, Mokelumne Hill, CA 95245)
(Health Research has the best selection of Hollow Earth books)
Inner Light, Attn: Tim Beckely, POB 753, New Brunswick, NJ 08903; (212)685-4080
(Publisher of UFO/Hollow Earth books)
Jansens, Olaf, THE SMOKEY GOD
Kane, Dr.

(One of the books is about Dr Kane, an American, and his Polar expeditions in the 1850's. What amazed me were the continual references to the Open Polar Sea! Remember Sir John Franklin who got lost trying to find the NW Passage? He too believed in an open polar sea. Dr Kane who was sent to search for him believed that Franklin might have ended up in the Open Polar Sea! There are a number of accounts in the book of explorers seeing this open ocean at latitude 81-82 degrees north.
- There were references to the many emminent Geographers who predicted the existence of this Open Polar Ocean.
- Even more amazing was a map - which I will scan for you. It is a map of Smith Sound. The stretch of Ocean between Greenland and the USA/Canada. It is a map compiled by Dr Kane as commander of "The Second American Grinnell Expedition". This map shows as they proceeded up Smith Sound, a line of ice at just above 80 degrees latitude. Then as they proceeded further north at about 81-82 degrees, they spotted an Open Polar Sea! It is all on this map.
- There is even a letter in this book, from the Secretary of the US Navy, to Lt Kane, instructing him to check out the reports of this Open Polar Sea.
- What amazes me, is the continual mention of the number of emminent explorers and scientists of that time who either reported this open polar ocean, or who believed in its existence. There are also continual references to the Polar Basin - the description of which as I pointed out in a prior e-mail is of the Ocean being lower than the surrounding land - an impossibility IMHO..... Jan)
Lloyd, John Uri, ETIDORPHA - Or the End of the Earth
Pocket Books, NY, NY 1974
(original manuscript written in 1894)
Online Book Catalog: http://illuminet.com/~ron/inet.html
(may have some Hollow Earth books you can buy)
Pawels, Louis & Bergier, Jacques, THE MORNING OF THE MAGICIANS
THE PHANTOM OF THE POLES, (1908)
Rudder, Lena Ellen
(Tema Press, POB 14762, Ft. Worth, TX 76117; (817) 831-2586
- author of a book about the Hollow Earth)
Wilson, Don, OUR MYSTERIOUS SPACESHIP MOON, (Hollow Moon)

Sources of Information:
Jan Lamprecht" pbs@iafrica.com
Steve Wingate steve@linex.com
Joshua Shapiro CrystalSkullExplorers@gmail.com
Marilyn159@aol.com
From: "Jan Lamprecht"
To: List
Date: Wed, 25 Oct 1995 14:43:22 +0200
Subject: 1# Admiral Byrd's grandson interviewed on radio here
Reply-to: pbs@iafrica.com
Jan,
I listened Thursday night to Harley Byrd, the Admiral's alleged grandson. It was quite strange, because he claims to have his grandfather's secret diaries. This is what he claims: Basically, when Admiral Byrd was on his way back from his first North polar flight (somewhere not far from Iceland), he spotted a vast city. This, the Admiral writes, "is impossible." The city was not a human city, however. Soon Adm. Byrd was approached by strange aircraft and forced to land. He walked through the alien city, and was led into a hall. There, according to Harley Byrd, the Admiral saw all manner of creatures: - Sasquatch, large and small greys, but mostly "Aryans," who were human and blond. (They had swastikas painted on their flying discs.) One of the members of the Admiral's expedition was German, and evidently took careful notes. As it happens, Harley Byrd is passing out a similar satellite photo as the one you have, and insists it shows a polar opening. (I have not seen it.)
I listened to this "alleged" Harley Byrd character for nearly two hours, and my conclusion is that he's a fraud. He talks nonsense, makes all manner of bizarre claims about greys, sasquatch, Aryans, and other alien types, and assiduously commercializes the whole for profit. It has been stated by someone here in California that Harley Byrd is actually a Jewish huckster whose name ends in "itz," and merely poses as Byrd's grandson to sell these bogus diaries.
Curiously, Harley Byrd admits to being a former military intelligence officer who now works in Hollywood (on TV production and as an actor). Byrd insists on being called "Dr. Byrd," though given his activities it is not clear what his doctorate is for. He is close friends with Dr. Frank Stranges, author of *The Stranger at the Pentagon*, another wild yarn about a Venusian who had an office there. Stranges is another one who peddles the hollow earth line.


American 'South Pole' Program in Pictures

Antarctica!

Aurora Borealis!


Aurora Borealis!


Aurora Borealis!


Aurora Borealis!


Antarctic Pyramids!

Antarctic Pyramids!

Arctic Circle planes

Arctic Circle Helicopters

Planes in Arctica!

Planes in Arctica!

Penguins!


Antarctic Lake Vostok! Pinguins of Japan!

One of the Antarctic penguins

Penguins in Antarctica!

Penguins in Antarctica!

Aquamarine Layer around Earth!

Aquamarine Layer around Earth!

Arctic villages

Arctic villages

Camps in Arctica!

Camps in Arctica!


Aquamarine skies of Antarctica!

Aquamarine skies of Antarctica!

Antarctic Pyramids!

Visible Geo-Glow!

Visible Geo-Glow!

Visible Geo-Glow!

Visible Geo-Glow!

Visible Geo-Glow!


South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program


South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program


South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program

South Pole, American Program



Legacy From the Stars


"LEGACY FROM THE STARS", written by DOLORES CANNON in 1996.

CHAPTER 12: A FUTURE BEING TALKS TO NOW

"...One woman saw herself working in a space station laboratory, that was orbiting the Earth. She was part of a scientific team that was growing food by hydroponic methods in the absence of gravity. Another saw herself working in a submerged underwater laboratory doing the same thing, harvesting food from the sea, kelp, seaweed, etc. In both cases they reported, that something had happened and the Earth was no longer able to grow sufficient food. Experiments were being done to provide food for the remaining people of Earth. I have had these type of scenarios come forth not only during group progressions in the United States, but also when I conducted them in England and Australia. I can only hope these people are seeing a possible alternate future, and not a future, that necessary has to be. The following case could also be a probable future.
Pam was a former school teacher, that had moved to our area with her husband... On this day in the spring of 1988 when I went to their house for the session, we had no idea what direction it would take. Her husband, Richard, was present and operated his own tape recorder. There are many methods of induction, but Pam preferred the tunnel method... In this method I had her walk down a long tunnel, using deepening techniques at the same time. She was instructed to keep walking until she could see a light at the end of the tunnel (it means to get to her Higher Self, but not straight away ! LM).
She would then tell me what she saw as she emerged from the tunnel into the light. She was so accustomed to this technique...
D: Now you’re out of the tunnel. Look around and tell me what you see.
P: The tunnel is not a mental trick. It actually does exist. And it seems that I am in the planet, under the ground. As I walked down the tunnel, I saw a being standing there and I just moved into this being. I was fascinated by the merging, that seems to take place. So as I continued walking down the tunnel I was aware of wearing a silver suit, that covered my entire body. It was a surprise because I now feel as though I am in two places at once. I can move and be with this body. I feel it is me, but I’m also observing from a distance. I feel like the reporter. I am fascinated with the tunnel. It is cool, and the walls are totally smooth and seamless. They are purposely constructed, domed so it’s like an arch. There seems to be light, but I don’t really know where it’s coming from. There are no light bulbs. It just seems like the tunnel is bright. As I put my hand on the side of the tunnel, I could receive information. So it is like a storage center for much information. As you were speaking I came to the end of the tunnel, and I was looking into a room, that was filled with computer-type things. It looked like the inside of Star Trek, with computer banks all around. The room was round from floor to very high - not all the way to the ceiling, because it couldn’t be reached - but there were many, many technology-looking things and technicians, who looked just like me. We all seemed to be dressed the same, except that I didn’t see faces. Then I seemed to go back into the tunnel... I saw a bright light at the end of the tunnel. And when I got there, it was Blinding Light. That was all I saw, just White, bright. And it was very familiar, because I know this place. So I said to myself to calm down and look around. And when
 I did, it seemed there was another round room. In the middle there was this big pyramid-shaped object, but it was made out of mineral. It looked like half of a fluorite duodecahedron (phonetic).
(Richard seemed to understand.) But it was huge. I don’t want to call it a crystal, because it didn’t actually look like a crystal, that I’m familiar with. And it did seem crystalline or glass-like, and to be of immense energy and power. It seemed that my function had something to do with this bright room and this pyramid-shaped power source in the middle...

D: Was it transparent?
P: You couldn’t see all the way through it clearly, but, yes, I would consider it transparent, with a violet color cast.
D: Then it was not opaque.
P: Not totally. If there were something on the other side of it, you couldn’t actually see all the way through it, so it wasn’t transparent like glass. But it wasn’t totally opaque either.
D: And it was shaped like a pyramid?
P: It had four sides that came down. It was on some kind of flat base. The base that I see now looks pretty much like a light box base that I’ve seen. I’m talking really big though, bigger than a human being. That’s all that was in this room, but it was filled with light. I am wondering now if the light came from the crystal object or somewhere else.
D: You said it was used for some type of power?
P: It seemed to be filled with power and energy. Not necessarily generating, but potential energy.
D: What do you think this power is used for?
P: I thought if I put my hands on it, I would find out. So...
D: Are you allowed to do that?
P: I seem to be sort of in charge of this room. So it seems I can do what I want to. (She laughed)
D: I was wondering if it would hurt you in any way.
P: In response to that question, the answer came, that if my intent were not right I would be hurt, yes. But I don’t have malice or bad intent, so... Um, that’s interesting how it would be able to ascertain what my Intent is...  It could know my Intent, because of my vibrations. We are vibrating every moment, and what we hold in our minds does affect our vibration. It is attuned to vibrations, so that was the answer to my query about how it knows what my intent is.
D: Then what would happen if you touched it?
P: I’ll give it a try. (Long pause) It seems to contain anyting you wish to know.
D: Like an information bank or something?
P: It is much like the walls of the tunnel, which seem metallic. This seems to be the entire repository. It seems to be - this is all too weird- the repository of all, everything, that people have thought they “know”.
A repository of all Thought, that has transpired.

D: I thought when you said it produced power, maybe it was power, that was being used for generating, for instance.
P: I’m pretty sure, that it isn’t generating, but that it is Potential Energy. And I believe, that it is held in abeyance, until called for. At which time whatever the call is, it can generate what that is. What is so strange about it is its multi-purpose. You can be as mundane with this great source of power, or as cosmic as your Intent guides you to be. I might even be able to generate electrical power for the entire planet.
D: All you have to do is touch it, and you’re able to do these things?
P: Because thought is a specific vibration. I don’t know how it’s stored in there. But the Intent of your Thoughts is a Vibration, that connects you with what you are looking for. If my Intent were to generate electricity, (surprise) I could do that.
D: It comes from your mind...
P: Yes. I get stuff like... All thought is vibration, and once it is Thought, it continues to exist. Thoughts aren’t destroyed. Thoughts are Energy.

This description of the crystal pyramid sounded very familiar to me... there was a similar device in the library at Qumran, the home of the Essenes on the cliffs overlooking the Dead Sea in Israel. A huge pyramid-shaped crystal sat on a pedestal, and the Master of the Mysteries was the only person, who knew how to use the energy, that it generated. The students would channel their energy to him, so he could direct it in many different ways. In my book “Keepers of the Garden” there were Energy Directors on other planets, whose job was to direct energy to be used by the population. That energy could be used as electricity or took many other forms, depending on what was required. Giant crystals were also used to generate energy in the ancient civilization of Atlantis. But in that case the use of energy was abused, and this was a contributing factor in Atlantis’ destruction.

D: And you said, you are more or less in charge of this room?

P: Yes. It’s a very stark room (bare, harsh in appearence, blick, grim, sharp). It’s dome-shaped. Very big, round. The only thing in the room, as I look around, seems to be this pyramid. It has four sides, but it comes in also on the four sides a small amount before it rests on the base. It looks so much like a fluorite crystal on a light base. But that is all that seems to be in the room. And there are many of these round rooms. It’s similar to a whole ant-farm down here underground. The rooms and the tunnels all seem to be lined with metallic substance, and they all seem to be filled with information.
D: But you think you are associated with that room?
P: It’s a job, and I like it. I can go anywhere in the tunnel though. I don’t feel restricted. I’m walking down one, and at the end of this tunnel is a door. It’s actually two halves together. They slide up and I can go into this big cavernous room. But right now they’re closed and I’m just standing there looking at these huge doors.
D: Is that a room, that you often go into?
P: It doesn’t seem off limits. I think I’ll have to ask the doors to open. So I will. Now I’m looking in the room. I’m going in a few steps. It’s just a bare round, domed room. It’s totally flooded with Blue Light. I can’t see where the light’s even coming from. It feels good in there.
D: What’s the purpose of that room?
P: (Sudden laugh.) Wow! It seems that Beings, that are off the Planet, can be transported into this room, so they can materialize themselves. This is the incoming chamber. The whole room is filled with the Blue Light, but there’s a column of more intense light beaming down. A beam. And as I stand and look at the column of light, there’s a bunch of glitter now. And I know, that something is going to materialize in the column of light. Somebody’s coming in.
D: Is this what it looks like, glitter?
P: Like a whirling glitter. Like molecules reassembling, but they’re all made of light, so they sparkle. It seems, that this is a very critical time. The time of teletransportation, when the - I want to say the “essences” - are made physical. So it’s really an intense and important time. It seems, that at this time of physical manifesting in this room, there are no usually observers, because this is so critical. I cannot think of the correct term. The process is delicate. And surely we want nothing to happen in this phase, that would in any way inhibit or change or affect the Being or Beings, who are coming in.
D: Then normally no one is watching when this happens?
P: That is correct. That is why there is no object in this room. No anything except this light. In the column in the center of the room I see just swirling and glitter, and I know, that this will assemble into a Being. I know that I’m trying not to breathe very much, because even the act of breathing could affect this very delicate operation. So I’m trying not to inhibit or injure this delicate procedure in any way. I will step outside and allow the doors to close for a moment.

All during this section about the teletransportation room her voice was noticeably quivering as well as her hands and body


P: I am awed, that I saw the glitter. It seems, that I must not be privy to every big thing, that happens under here in this city.

D: Then it is unusual to see that part?
P: It feels very unusual, very special.

This sounded very similar to Star Trek, “Beam me up Scotty.” But then I wonder where did Gene Roddenberry get his ideas? Maybe science fiction is really more science fact, than we realize. In one of my UFO cases a woman reported a room onboard a craft, where her molecules were broken down into what appeared to be whirling glitter, and then reassembled.

D: Are Beings transported this way very often?
P: This is a room specifically designed for that purpose, although it does not seem to be used very often. It seems, that it is an occasion, that merits great excitement.
D: Then you don’t have visitors come this way very often, in your life then.
P: No. Only those, who spend most of their time off the planet. I just realized, that I seem to spend most of my time between the room with the large crystal and this room, where the teletransportation takes place.
And I realized, that one of my functions is to graciously receive visitors. I must be some kind of greeter. I did not know that.

D: Is there equipment there, that you have to operate?
P: No. The equipment is doors, that open and close. That is operated by Thought. So I don’t actually have mechanical apparatus to manipulate. My functions seems to be one of greeting and making guests feel at ease and comfortable. It seems, that I have a highly developed empathy with a large range of different Beings. This is a quality not shared by all Beings in the tunnel. So that actually qualifies me for the job of Greeter. For empathy is not something you could read in a textbook, or even be taught by another individual. It comes from personal experience. So I must be really old, I guess.
D: These type of feelings are something, that the others are not as familiar with?
P: Hmmm. It just seems, that I have more. And it seems, that I have this job, because it most - I was going to say “perfectly”, but I don’t like that word. - It best fits my qualifications. It’s very hard to feel empathy for some of the visitors, that we receive, when they are so different from us. And yet I seem to be okay with it. I’m not shocked or judgmental or afraid.
D: You mean that some of the Beings, that come through the teleportation room do not have the same physical characteristics?
P: That’s correct.
D: Can you tell me something about these other Beings?
P: I am familiar with hairy-looking things, that definitely don’t look like us. More like - well, this is a strange way to say this, but they are similar to artist’s renditions of Bigfoot-type Beings. I am also familiar with something, that is like a mask.
D: What do you mean?
P: Their faces look rubbery, like a mask. Looks like masks. Like Star Wars’ characters.
D: Do you think it might not be their real faces?
P: Well, it’s their natural appearance. There are millions of different types of Beings, that exist. Or more than millions, an infinite number. I’ve seen some pretty strange ones, so I was just trying to describe in general.
D: What do you look like?
P: (Sigh) I can tell you what we look like from the back.
D: Do you feel uncomfortable looking at the faces?
P: The face I see is the face, that’s on the cover of Communion, and... It doesn’t bother me. It’s just that I feel too left brain, although twelve years ago I also saw this form while in meditation. It has a larger head, than proportionate to the way the human head is to the body. The head is larger, thin neck and thinner arms and legs. Small body, maybe four feet or around there. All covered with the same garment. The face... I just am more comfortable always looking at the back. I can even look at the back of myself. It’s weird.
D: Can you see your hands?
P: Yes, the fingers are longer. (She laughed.) Well, that’s funny. I should have more fingers, there are only four. Actually, as I’m looking at it now, they look skeleton-like. Very bony and long.
D: What about your feet?
P: Covered. I can’t see my feet. I can feel I am standing secure. I don’t actually observe any difference though.
D: Okay. Do you eat any food?
P: Well, I don’t know, so I’ll look around and see.
D: See what comes to mind. What kind of sustenance would you take?
P: Well, this is really interesting. (She laughed.) It’s some kind of very sweet liquid, like a nectar. It’s a liquid diet, it’s sweet, and it smells wonderful.

From her facial indications it was evident that she could really smell it.
D: Does it remind you of any particular smell?
P: Of flowers. I thought immediately, that it came from flowers.
D: How do you take into your body?
P: I guess I drink it. My mouth’s watering. (She laughed.)
D: See yourself doing it. How would you take it into your body?
P: (Confused) Well, I almost felt like I breathed it in, in a vapor form. That’s why it smelled so good. I inhale the elixir, but I can taste it. We do have mouths, and we do swallow. You can inhale through your mouth as well, as through your nose. It’s a very thick essence. (She seemed confused as to how to convey this.)
D: It has more substance, than just the odor then. Does it have a color?
P: I would say golden would be good color name.
D: Do you have any teeth?
P: I don’t appear to have teeth, no. I don’t have the chewing sensation, but I do swallow. A tongue. There is taste. But smell is really predominant.
D: That’s one of the main senses? Would that be a right word?
P: Well, in the joy of eating. (She laughed.) Smelling is almost euphoric. It’s a wonderful sensation. The aroma is so perfumed. And we know by inhaling this aroma we are perpetuating that physical form, so it’s joyous and conscious thing. Humans aren’t aware, that when they eat food they’re actually replenishing their living Being. Most humans don’t keep those thoughts in mind when they eat. But we are aware.
D: Are you also sensitive to other smells?
P: Well, we have highly developed olfactory senses.
D: Do you vocalize? Do you use words in communication?
P: Very interesting. We do have absolute thought transference, so it is not necessary at all to speak words. However, it seems that we do have vocal cords, because we make a sound, that’s melodious. And by making different tones we access different - umm, the word is “emotion”. Hmmm, how interesting. Tones, yes, we make, and we understand when we hear a tone, what the person is intending.
D: Is there anything else, that is different about the body and the way it functions?
P: Well, we don’t have your usual elimination system.
D: None at all?
P: It’s through the skin. In humans also, the skin is part of the elimination apparatus. But with us, through the skin and suit. More like evaporation. Not an unpleasant or offensive thing in any way to any one.
D: Then those organs are nonexistent?
P: They seem to be more like the appendix, sort of remnants, but not functioning.
D: What about lungs? The respiratory system?
P: It seems that we breathe, definitely. Let’s see, lungs seem to be there, heart. There are organs.
D: Blood? Circulatory system?
P: Yes, I see blood... I see a heart and I can see all of that. In fact, it seems very similar to the human body internally, although some of the organs just don’t function any more, because there’s no reason.
D: Have they become atrophied?
P: Yeah, atrophied would be a word. But there is a word beyond atrophied, that I can’t access right at this moment.
D: I was thinking if they weren’t functioning they eventually would just shut down, and disappear.
P: As the appendix still remains in humans through many, many, many years of physical evolution, so too we maintain organs, that we no longer use.
D: What is your skin like?
P: Very thin. As a matter of fact, it’s just about transparent. You can definitely see veins.
D: What color is the skin?
P: Almost transparent. But very, very, very, very light. Almost white.
D: Does it seem like human skin, or is it a different consistency to the touch?
P: These are interesting questions, because skin is not something that we look on very often. As I try to really look at a body, everything, even hands and faces, seem to be covered by a protective film, that looks like skin. Even though I have on a suit, under the suit I have a film, that entirely envelops my body, face and hands. The skin is just too fragile, too porous. It has to be protected. All parts.
D: You mean the skin can be damaged easily?
P: Oh, yes. Even by just blowing really hard on it.
D: Does this film look like your skin?
P: Yes. To anyone, who is not one of us, they would assume, that it is our skin.
D: It is covering the head and every part of the body under the suit?
P: Right. But there are holes for our nose and our mouth and our eyes, so it just looks like skin.
D: This way it would be rather expressionless, wouldn’t it?
P: Oh, we don’t have very much in the way of physical facial expressions, because our thoughts and emotions are immediately known to each other. Unlike humans, who must use many, many gestures and facial expressions in order to impart, what they are attempting to say to another.
D: Yes, we use body language.
P: It is not necessary, so it seems the facial muscles have long since atrophied too.
D: Because I was thinking this mask, so to speak, would...
P: That’s a very good way to think of it. Mask-like. Because most Beings... Let me think, (pause) I can’t think of any Beings, that don’t, so I’ll say all that I’m aware of. All Beings, who are trying to interact with Humans, don’t use vocal or facial or body language to make their thoughts known. It is all through the realm of mental telepathy. So Humans misinterpret movements and stiff faces, as scary or mean or something. When in fact it’s just because Humans can’t read their minds. Their minds are loving.
Imagine how strange we must look to these aliens with our faces constantly moving, especially our mouths grimacing, as well as talking. Then add to that how we use our hands to emphasize points of conversations with gestures. We must look pretty bizarre or even frightening to these gentle creatures, who long ago learned to communicate in a more fully honest way, with complete mind-to-mind telepathy where no mistakes can be made in interpretation. The first requirement of mental communication is complete honesty, because it would be useless to use trickery when your every thought is known. It also explains why a face with no expression appears frightening to us or makes us feel uneasy. Without body language we have nothing to relate to. Maybe we will relearn the telepathic form of communication in the future. I say relearn it, because in my work with hypnosis and exploring the past I have discovered, that the people of Atlantis were extremely adept at using the powers of the mind. These abilities were taken away (and justly so), so they could not be further abused. We are on our way to regain them. Let us hope, that this time we will use them in the proper ways. I continue with my questioning about the physical makeup of this underground future dweller.

D: Is this elixir the only thing, that you see yourself taking into your body?
P: Light is the other thing, that is essential for continuance in this particular form.
D: Can you explain what you mean?
P: We must have light baths pretty regularly.
D: What is that?
P: While we’re in inner space (beneath the surface) we go to a round room, in which we lie on tables. Also very stark, like concrete picnic tables. And we’re bathed in light. We actually sleep in a light bath also, a different color. It’s an Indigo, when we are sleeping. But when we are taking our fuel bath, it’s much brighter. I see it varying in color, depending on the specific need of the individual.
D: Did you say “fuel” bath?
P: Fuel, yes. Because like the elixir - that is what I want to call the food - the light is fuel.
D: And the different colors are different types of energies, that you would need or what?
P: It depends on how long we’ve been away from the light bath. It’s almost like recharging a battery. It is just as constant, as food and water for humans. Light and elixir are absolutely essential continuing things
to keep the body going. If the time period, for some reason, has been an extended one... and by extended, it seems that I only mean “hours”, not days.

D: You couldn’t go too long without it then.
P: No, and if a long period had ensued, more than whatever the prescribed time is, then the intensity would be increased. I see, that low ebb (a decline, diminishing) requires a sharper red-orange-yellow. Very, very intense. If you went at the prescribed time you would be bathed in a relatively golden glow. That’s very beautiful at the end of the bath, because it transmutes into a very soft pink. It’s very uplifting and mellow, and you’re ready to go back about your business. But while you’re receiving the yellow-gold, the regular intensity, if you “light” on schedule - instead of “eat” on schedule. (Smiling about her pun.) While you’re receiving that, it’s not quite as mellow. It’s just a feeling of rejuvenation.
D: Then it’s more intense if you’ve gone longer without it.
P: Absolutely.
D: What would happen if you didn’t get it at the required time?
P: I think the physical Being ceases to function.
D: They get weaker and weaker?
P: Let me see. (Pause) Well, there would be no reason, that you couldn’t get to the light. The variable would be, if for some reason your job kept you from getting there at the necessary time. But it seems, that no matter what, if you could not, if you had no strength to get to the room, that somebody would carry you to the room.
D: Then there would be no reason you couldn’t get to it.
P: Right, If you couldn’t get there on your own, you would be taken care of. I also know, that we can go to the surface. At which time we are constantly bathed in a light, that is very, very rejuvenating. Very intense. And we can operate for a period of time, but there reaches a point of saturation. At which time we go back to the less intensity of our Underground World. It seems, that on this planet my society, that I’m viewing now, lives most of the time inside. This could be Earth. I don’t have names or anything going through my head, as I ask myself.
D: What is the source of that light on the surface?
P: Ummm. It’s an external orb. Probably another planet reflecting light or a sun. Looks like our sun to me as I look at it.
D: What about the terrain on the surface? Does it look like Earth or is it different?
P: I unfortunately see no vegetation.
D: Do your eyes seem to function?
P: Yes, they function quite well, although they must be protected. They are covered with a solid black shield of some sort. It reminds me of sunglasses. The eyes are very delicate and sensitive, just like the rest of the body. I don’t see the body being able to survive without these protective devices. I have something like a helmet on while I’m on the surface. I have a pack on my back with tubes, connected to the helmet. And just my same silver suit. I think it should be noted that we receive light through this suit. I don’t see us ever taking off the suit.
D: Maybe you use it to process the light in some way.
P: I don’t know. The only thing that’s different is this pack and the helmet.
D: Do you have ears?
P: (Pause) I can hear. Frankly, looking from the back, I don’t see any.
D: Any kind of opening or anything.
P: Well, yes, there is like an opening. If you were to cut your external ear off, you’d still have an opening. Yes, that’s what it is, because I just turned to the side. It’s not as big a hole as a human ear opening, even without the auricle. But I’m totally capable of hearing, really well, actually.
D: I was curious as to why you had to live underground. Do you have any reason, that comes to mind?
P: Only the gas.
D: The gas?
P: One of the reasons we wear a helmet on the surface is because of the odor. Of course, the gases themselves are rather poisonous, so we wouldn’t want to breathe them anyway. A small “hit” of the gas without the helmet wouldn’t automatically make the physical form collapse and die. It would be some exposure. It’s not that potent. But the smell is very strong and unpleasant.
D: I was thinking you might be more sensitive, than humans would be.
P: To smells, yes.
D: Could you think what that gas smells like? Was there a predominant smell in it?
P: My very first response to that was “rotten eggs”.
D: Sulphur.
P: A rotten smell. It’s thick too.
D: The air is thick, you mean, or the smell.
P: It’s a predominant haze, so the gas seems thick. The atmosphere seems so full of this.

I returned to asking questions about the Being’s physical composition.

D: Are you any sex? Male or female?
P: I’m not a sex, but I seem to be a class.
D: What do you mean?
P: We don’t differentiate by sex. And that made me think of reproduction, and I can’t answer that yet. I want to answer your question about class. It seems, that it is a privilege to be able to go to the surface at this point in our history. Not all of us are allowed to the surface. So instead of sexual differentiation there is some kind of “pecking order”, I guess (system of ranks and priviledges, LM).
D: Like some type of a caste order, you mean?
P: No, because I feel, that it’s a very loving, open, equalitarian society. And yet I feel there are privileges, extended to some, and I’m in that privileged class.
D: That’s what you mean by “class”. But there’s no sex, per se. Are you Androgynous?
P: Androgynous, to my way of thinking, means possessing both male and female characteristics. I’m looking for physical attributes, because I am only thinking about Earth reproduction. But, in fact, we have cloning down pat. No, there is no sexual reproduction.
D: Can you explain what you mean? How the procreation process would be done?
P: (Sadly) Unfortunately I see no new entities. I only see cloning. Because we are sexual creatures we tend to think, that every other species, throughout the Cosmos, must be the same. But I am getting the information, that Androgyny is the Norm throughout the Universe. I do not perceive any male, female per se. There are different personalities, who could be considered feminine or masculine. Sexuality is unique to Humans. It is very unusual to reproduce by using two separate sexes. This is why extraterrestrials are so fascinated with our method of reproduction.
D: Then we are the unusual ones, with our two separate sexes.
P: That we have taken it to this degree, yes. You might even consider it two separate species. (I found that remark intriguing.) Reproducing the species is something necessary to any life form. Sexual reproduction, however, does seem to be of, although a fun form, a Lower Vibration.
There are times of absolute transcendence (going beyond), that takes place during the act of love. During the act of sex however, this rarely occurs. So it is not what happens every time there is sexual reproduction. The moments of transcendence, that are experienced by Earth Beings are also experienced by those, who do not have Human form.
But they don’t necessarily come from the same reasons, from a physical union. When the intelligent Being reaches the point of Total Awareness of the Cosmic Flow, of being one with All That Is, just having that spark of remembrance occur, is quite euphoric and sensual. However, I do not see Extraterrestrial Beings in the act of mating. I do see in my mind a pregnant Androgynous Being, so there apparently is actual physical reproduction. And so I am asking, “Does that mean, that there are male and female?” And the answer came that, “No, there are Parent Beings.” That is a little unclear, so I am asking, “Can anybody be a Parent Being?” And the response is something to the effect, “If that is your desire when you have realized, that you are capable of anything.” That if you wish to have live birth, then that seems to be possible. This is a very difficult area to explain, because different dimensional Entities do not perpetuate themselves in the same way, that fourth dimensional Beings do. This is very difficult ground, because when you have the capability of dematerializing and rematerializing, you don’t have an actual need for creating new Beings. This, of course, is a generalization. But I might say, that although we (here in our underground city) are Androgynous, we can manifest - let me not use that word, because that gives an incorrect picture. We can act the way we feel most comfortable acting. And some of us “act” ways, that can be Earth-labeled “masculine”, and Earth ways, that can be labeled “feminine”.

D: Then you mean at times you do have this feeling of being more masculine. You more or less play a part, masculine or feminine?
P: No. Those are terms, that we have to use because we are talking Earth terms. I just mean, that all of us are not carbon copies of each other. Some of us enjoy the more physical strength roles, which could be termed masculine. We don’t call them that. This is just a method or manner of approach. A way of being.
D: It’s more of a personality type thing? I imagine you have personalities.
P: Of course, personality does exist in other Beings, not just those from the Earth plane. This concept is very difficult to explain. Because you, the questioner, come from a Planet of two sexes, that are actually very different, in order to try to understand masculine and feminine attributes, you would tend to think in Earth terms. It is by using Earth terms, that the confusion sets in. So I’ll just change it. I will change masculine to lion, and I will change feminine to swan. So some of us are comfortable in dealing with things in a lion-like manner. Others are more comfortable to deal with things in a softer swan-like manner. It does not mean we are lions and swans. It only means, that our basic way of approaching work or life. I personally feel more comfortable with the attributes of the lion. I do identify more strongly with those characteristics.
D: I can understand that. You seemed to be feeling sadness, because there were no children there. Was this feeling or emotion coming from the Being or was it coming from you?
P: It seems, that these Beings definitely have emotions. Emotion is almost the precipitate of thought (impulsive in thought and action, rash). Emotion is a catalyst for movement. Emotion is a very valuable, viable force. And these Beings most assuredly possess emotion. Although my human labeling of the Emotion may be different, than is actually felt, Emotion is felt, definitely. I think I could have superimposed the label of sadness. However, Emotions definitely exist.
D: Then this Being is capable of feeling ... anger?
P: Hmmm. Because we work in human terms, yes, I guess you would have to call these feelings “anger, joy, sadness”.
D: Love?
P: Love. I don’t know. Let me see if they would be labeled such by the Beings. Well, the response was, “This is just a matter of semantics.” So I shouldn’t be so picky. (She laughed.) Yes, sadness, yes, you can term it that.
D: And they can feel love?
P: Absolutely.
D: All right. I guess I was trying to distinguish whether or not they are more robot-like.
P: Doesn’t seem to be a bit robot-like.
D: And we have already established, that you are apparently different in your internal make-up. Then the procreation is done by cloning.
P: Yes, and procreation unfortunately is not an appropriate term, because there are no new... (She had difficulty finding the word.)
D: Specimens? Or what?
P: Yes. There are no babies.
D: Then you would all be as carbon copies of each other.
P: Well, of the original ones of us, who arrived. It is like unlimited life.
D: If you’re exact clone there would be no evolutionary process in the disappearance of the unnecessary organs.
P: No, it was not evolutionary. The organs atrophied from non-use.
D: Is this cloning done in a certain type of setting, or have you ever seen where it’s done?
P: Let me think. That is an interesting question. I know this is done if something happens to an original inhabitant. I say the word “original” meaning “original from craft”, not indigenous to this Planet. Let me think.
If an accident were to occur and the life force were to leave, then that “person” would be cloned. But that person’s “knowingness” transfers so immediately into the clone, that the clone is the alive person then.
So it is like continuous life. There is no break in thought, memory, or awareness. So you asked, have I observed this? I have. (Surprised) I have!

D: I’m trying to get these terms straight. To me, cloning would start with a cell and have to grow and develop...
P: (Interrupted) NO! It does not have to grow. That I see. You have two containers similar to a sarcophagus, but the top of the sarcophagus is transparent, so you can see in. The only example I’ve seen is of somebody, who was crushed. Their physical form could not continue.
D: It was by accident?
P: Yes. So they took the body and put it in sarcophagus No. 1. Sarcophagus No. 2 was totally empty. The essence of the crushed body wasn’t crushed, only the physical form was crushed. Through mechanical means, as well as Thought transference, the same body materialized in the empty sarcophagus No. 2, though not crushed and broken. The “essence”, that was in fact making this transfer transferred into the new undamaged body, thereby leaving a crumped up shell. It’s like the same person is now in the second sarcophagus. It’s almost like a moth crawling out of a chrysalis. There was no growing. This was very quick.
D: Then through this process the exact body was recreated cell by cell, particle by particle.
P: Memory by memory. The entire thing.
D: The cell memory was able to reproduce itself by this machine?
P: Well, I said through technical, as well as thought transference, because the essence willed this to happen.
D: The person whose body was crushed?
P: Yes. See, the essence wasn’t crushed, and cannot be.
D: It wanted to continue, so it reproduced with the help of this machine and the technology- an exact copy of itself and entered into it.
P: Yes.
D: Okay. Because I thought that the Soul, so to speak, wouldn’t remain with the body, and it couldn’t be reproduced.
P: I perhaps used the wrong term when I said “cloned”, because this process is a...
D: (Interrupted) It’s a duplication process.
P: A duplication. Thank you.
D: Because I was thinking of our terms of cloning. We take a cell and let it develop and grow, and it takes a long time. And then it might turn into another duplicate.
P: That’s Earth. (She laughed.)
D: Yes, that’s Earth. That’s the only thing we have to go on. (Laugh) Well, then if essence didn’t want to continue, the new body would just be, what, an empty shell?
P: It wouldn’t work. It just wouldn’t happen.
D: You mean, if someone put the body in the sarcophagus and turned the machine on, and the essence didn’t want to reenter...
P: Then it wouldn’t occur.
D: Then that is the only way you would die, is if the essence didn’t want to continue?
P: Death doesn’t seem to happen. You see, death would only occur to this species if a planetary catastrophe occurred, in which no one could pick up a body and put it into the sarcophagus. The Intent would remain. The essences would not die, but they could not have physical form any longer, if there wasn’t one left to start this process.
D: But I thought the essence might decide they wanted to go and do something else.
P: That’s right, then nothing would happen in sarcophagus No. 2, because the Intent is what propels all Energy into matter.
D: It is interesting that it is individual Intent. The Intent of the others involved is not as important, as the individual intent, if I’ve got it right.
P: I think you have it absolutely right.
D: Then they don’t procreate... (Uncertain how to ask it.)
P: Wait. I’m asking these questions too. My question is, “How does this society exit, if they don’t have offspring of some type?” The answer is: We came to this Planet, but for some reason procreation was not possible here. So all that has happened and this is very sad has been the cloning of those, who originally arrived. I feel sadness, because I think we did live on the surface at one time. It is not possible to live there for any length of time anymore.
D: When you come out of the tunnel onto the surface, do you come out right on the ground?
P: Yes, the physical Earth itself. There is like an elevator to an airlock. We don’t want the gases, that are enveloping the surface to go inside the Earth. So there is a ... It’s like an airlock. Actually in the distance
I can see buildings and spires, and what would look like life on the surface. I guess I could go and see. (Pause) Well, no inhabitants are there. This was either already there, when we got here, or abandoned.
I don’t know. I don’t have a memory of contact with indigenous Beings of the Planet, that we’re now living in. And it seems, that the response was that, this society... ummm, (Surprised) is not indigenous to this planet either.
D: You said you could see a city of some sort.
P: I do see the city, and so now I’m asking, “Did the population depart before we arrived?” And my answer is, “Yes, long before we departed our Home Planet.” And then my next question was, “Why?” And it was because of the change in the atmosphere. I can see a luminous orb ,giving light to this Planet. I cannot look on the Earth Sun for any period of time. But I can look on this luminous orb, because of the filter of gas, that I’m looking through.
D: You mean it is different, than the Earth’s Sun.
P: Well, I have seen the Earth Sun look like this. On very, very hazy, cloudy days I can look at the disk and see it. And that’s what this luminous orb looks like.
D: You’re looking at it through some kind of a haze then.
P: Yes. And that is the reason the indigenous population is no longer there. The Planet could not sustain life, because of the change in the gaseous mixture of the atmosphere.
D: Do you think they left because of that, or were they destroyed? Is there any record of that information?
P: (Long pause) I don’t see bodies or bones or ... And I don’t see records telling, that we are leaving and this is why I can go to where I can look on the city, but I don’t think I have walked around there, or dug around there.
D: Are there any kind of lifeforms on the surface?
P: (Long pause) It seems so barren. I’m not aware of any. Although it seems there are lifeforms like viruses, some microscopic living things, but no complex Beings.
D: What about vegetation or trees?
P: No plants.
D: Then there is no form of life except that, which exists underneath the Planet. Your people. Is that correct?
P: Yes. Although I think we brought plants with us. There are these flowers. I really think, that’s what the elixir is. It’s a nectar of an actual living flower. It looks kind of like that.
D: It’s something, that could be grown beneath the surface then.
P: Yes, but we have our light sources. This is where we live.
D: Well, it sounds like you wouldn’t have much reason to go to the surface then, would you?
P: Curiosity. (She laughed.)
D: That’s always a trait. (Laugh) Well, apparently your people can’t live in that atmosphere either.
P: No, I don’t think we can breathe. No, not without equipment, and it seems, that after a while not without the light, for some reason... not for periods of time, anyway.
D: Did your people know they wouldn’t be able to function on the surface when they chose to come to that Planet?
P: (Long pause) I don’t think so. Not to the extent, that they found when they got here. I truly believe, that our people thought they had scouted a Planet, that could sustain surface life. Probably through seeing the cities. Not realizing.
D: They had to create this city beneath the Earth.
P: Yes. We brought everything. We brought our all-information source. I guess I should call it the Crystal, because that’s what I continue to think of it as. We’re very industrious Beings.
D: Did you travel very far, or did you just go to another Planet in your own solar system?
P: (Pause) It seems, that a large amount of time elapsed, because during the trip inventions, that we are using were created. These were things, that we had no use for on our Home Planet, but thought to make them en route.
D: They thought they would need them where they were going. Is that right?
P: The possibility must have existed. I am also aware, that we knew there was not vegetation on this planet. So there was already a question as to whether we would live on the surface.
D: That’s probably why they brought their own food source with them. Wouldn’t they have been able to go somewhere else when they found out the atmosphere was so bad?
P: That’s a very good question. Although it doesn’t seem there was a desire. Let me... I’ll just put my hands on the Crystal.
D: And see what you can find out?
P: Uh-huh. (Sudden laugh.) Oh! This is really confusing. But it seems, that this group, that I’m talking about and I am now familiar with, has been on this Planet long enough to have a very definite attachment and Emotion involved with this Planet. But they came here from a Home Planet, that completely blew up, was destroyed and does not exist, except in its little tiny particles and fragments.
D: Then did your people leave it before it blew up?
P: Yes! Definitely! In mass exodus. The knowing, that it would happen was planetary, giving us the ability to leave.
D: What caused the destruction of the other Planet?
P: (Sadly) We tracked the meteor for many, many years. We were aware of being immediately in the path for a long time. When it became absolutely obvious, that the collision would take place, we had to abandon. This was a totally natural celestial phenomenon. A collision of a meteor not much smaller, than the entire size of our Planet.
D: Then it was nothing, that the people themselves did.
P: No. We had forewarning, that this, very sad, but natural thing was going to occur. We had no way of changing the trajectory. It was enormous.
D: How did you leave the Planet?
P: On craft.
D: Did you know where you were going when you left?
P: (Pause) I think so, yes, because many craft landed on this Planet.
D: It was, like you said, a mass exodus (departure).
P: Yes. They didn’t all come to this Planet though. I have the real feeling of some going to other Planets. I feel we could travel and visit our brothers and sisters, if you wish to call them that.(Surprised) Oh! There was a reason for them to come to this Planet. They’re here for a purpose.
D: What?
P: As if in the grand scope of the Cosmos, it is another relay station of getting data closer to the primitive lifeforms, i.e.: Humans. (She laughed.) (what a Nonsense! LM).
D: Let’s see if I can understand what you mean.
P: I do. There was a need to leave the Home Planet, because it was facing destruction. Then the choice came of where to go. I think, that our people believe they were going to find a similar sister Planet, and set up life very similar to what it had been. However, it seems, that there is a master planner. There is more to this, than individual will. There was the plan of things, in order to get these people, who were quite content on their Home Planet, in order to shake them out of their contentedness, to remove their Home. Thereby forcing them to take flight. Otherwise other people would have taken on this job, other Entities. Now the purpose was to get physically closer in light years in terms of time and distance, because we are talking about Earth now. I can see the whole progression.
D: You got the information from the Crystal. Do you mean this Planet you’re talking about is Earth?
P: No. But these are the people, who are charged with the commission of giving this new information to Earth. I’m sorry, that I’m not making myself clear. ... I understand.
D: It’s always hard. They say the language is inefficient to translate these things. The Planet you’re on, is it close to Earth?
P: It’s right out there, but it’s vibrating differently. It is actually in a different dimension, but proximity-wise, not far.
D: Is it the same solar system? Of course, with dimensions I know it’s hard to explain.
P: I think for understanding it would be easier to say that it is close.
D: It is in proximity. It would just be invisible to us, because it’s in another dimension.
P: Correct.
D: Then are your type of Beings capable of going between dimensions?
P: Well, yes. You see, we have discovered that capability. We operate in that manner. And we wish to share this information with Earth dwellers, because they, too, need to have this information. Or they will perish with their Planet.

(Yes, we will, because we will will lose Human form, which we don't need anymore, to graduate into a non-physical form of 5th Level of Consciousness. We don't need physicality, but those who does, would find it on another Physical Planet in another Physical Universe, LM).
D: Do you mean it is a similar situation?
P: (Big sigh) I don’t know what I mean. (Big laugh.)
D: (Laugh) I think you’re doing very well. Then is your race of Beings aware of Earth?
P: Oh, yes..."


Internet Articles about the Life On and Under Ground


Giants from Hollow Earth

Giants from Hollow Earth

Giants from Hollow Earth

Mega-geomagnetic storm: The end of the Internet?

September 24, 2010

A gigantic solar storm has started as the eleven-year solar flare peak, known as the solar maximum, nears. Scientists fear that the result could be a repeat of the massive radiation storm which physically burnt out telegraph cables in the nineteenth century. Could this spell the end of the Internet in the near future?
For now, the activity is reduced to growing solar flares, which have begun to build up, the first stage of a new wave of solar storms, which run in eleven-year cycles, the last peak being registered in the year 2000.
It is not hearsay, but a fact, that solar radiation can affect short-wave communications, disrupting satellite transmissions and disturbing cell phone, GPS, TV and radio reception, even electricity flow along power lines. The 2003 flare was massive. It was the largest recorded since October 1989, caused by an explosion in the magnetic field which gathers above a sunspot.
There was major concern at the time for the crew of the International Space Station, as it passed through the worst part of the radiation storm and the control center ordered them to sleep in a compartment away from their normal sleeping quarters.
New Scientist magazine then quoted leading specialists who claimed that this was the largest solar flare in decades and confirmed that turbulence from the gigantic explosion on the solar surface could disrupt communications, as it was hurled into space from the outermost layer of the solar atmosphere, called the corona.
Now scientists confirm the Sun has again started emitting gigantic flares, as the 2011/2012 solar maximum begins. Particle clouds several times the size of planet Earth blast outwards at over one million miles per hour and slam into the Earth’s magnetosphere.
Yet what is happening today is only the beginning of a new cycle of solar activity, which peaks every 11 years. As far back as 2006, scientists were already predicting the new wave of activity, claiming that “Navigation, power and communications systems that rely on GPS satellite navigation will be disrupted by violent solar activity in 2011, research shows. A study reveals Global Positioning System receivers to be unexpectedly vulnerable to bursts of radio noise produced by solar flares, created by explosions in the Sun’s atmosphere” (New Scientist, September 29, 2006).
The peak is expected through 2011 and 2012 and scientists have confirmed that it could widely disrupt aviation and emergency systems, since aircraft use GPS signals for ATC (Air Traffic Control).
Saturn’s Northern Lights: Incredible new Nasa images show planet’s glowing poles
Posted on September 25, 2010 by the truth behind the scenes

Glowing like a mysterious planet from an episode of Star Trek, this is actually Saturn’s aurora as it shimmers green light.
These new images show Saturn’s aurora over a two-day period and are helping scientists understand what drives some of the solar system’s most impressive light shows.
The false-colour image was composed from 65 single shots taken by the spacecraft Cassini on 11 November 2008.
Scientists hope studying Saturn’s aurora will give them more information about our own Northern and Southern Lights.
This image is composed from 65 single shots taken by the spectrometer on Cassini on 11th November 2008. The green glow around the south pole is an aurora like on Earth.
The new, false-colour images show Saturn’s aurora glowing in green around the planet’s south pole over a 20 hour period, about two days on Saturn.
‘Detailed studies like this of Saturn’s aurora help us understand how they are generated on Earth and the nature of the interactions between the magnetosphere and the uppermost regions of Saturn’s atmosphere,’ said Linda Spilker, Cassini project scientist, based at NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory.
Auroras on Saturn occur in a process similar to Earth’s northern and southern lights
The Hollow Earth - video

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L9VoLStjf0A&feature=player_embedded

The Ultimate Woowoo

Part 1: Introduction
One concept, and potential bombshell of a game changer, has always stood out. It did so by stealth. Hollow Earth just pretended to be another loony idea that, you know, some people just seem to get a kick out of. Only after looking at it in detail and absorbing the available information did I realize how much it actually means. Would mean. Apparently, does mean. And it can only be true or false. There is no middle ground, only hollow ground or solid ground.
The range of the implications of the earth being hollow are important. Hugely, massively (pun) important. They go as far as explaining dozens of anomalies that surround us. All freaking kinds of parallel, alternative, weird and conspiratorial ideas. In a word: woowoo ideas. Ideas which are becoming mainstream, and not that it matters what a majority of any kind thinks or what opinions it holds. The masses are dark (doesn’t) matter in the larger scheme of things.
This first part about the Ultimate Woowoo intends to synthesize as much as possible what one has to look at and know about to get a basic idea. There is also an emphasis on visual evidence in this introduction to the Hollow Earth.
Below is a four-minute video with a collection of images-only (with music) related to Hollow Earth. You see so many strange images that you may want to stop the video repeatedly. But we will get to most of the weirdness further into this article anyway, in upcoming additional parts. Look at this video as a visual introduction to the Hollow Earth.
Watch Video: The Hollow Earth
I can tell you right away, this is going to be a little irritating. Why? Because while sifting through a lot of material, and trying to condense it into one conveniently-sized article, it became larger and larger. And the chances for a manageable, readable article became smaller and smaller.
They say something to the effect that the more far-out a claim, the more solid the evidence for it has to be. In one sentence: “Solid Evidence for the Hollow Earth, please!”
Below is a series of still images from the NASA video, which is the aurora australis of the south pole, overlaid on the ‘Blue Marble’ image of Earth. If you can zoom into your desktop, now would be a good moment to do it.
Above: NASA IMAGE satellite, 2005: Aurora Australis

http://earthobservatory.nasa.gov/IOTD/view.php?id=6226

From the NASA website: 'The IMAGE observations of the aurora are overlaid onto NASA's satellite-based Blue Marble image. Imager for Magnetopause-to- Aurora Global Exploration (IMAGE) satellite launched in 2000.'] - download animation (5 MB, QuickTime)
The Ultimate Irritating Mystery — And (this takes the biscuit) It Is GrowingWith the Hollow Earth thing, there is just so much data in so many different disciplines that most people who get into this in a serious way either try to write a book about it, or actually get around to write and publish one. Several articles out there on the web touch on the main points, and they are all on the rather long side. You can fill a small library with books about the subject. So, take it from me: there is no short and conveniently catchy way to present the evidence for the Hollow Earth. Less so if you add the fact that the Earth is hollow and it is growing. That’s right. We have a hollow and expanding Earthunder our feet. Apparently. Yes, it is yet another deeply irritating mystery. Sorry for the cognitive dissonance, I am still tuning my wet piano.
Several authors have done a thorough job at combing through the evidence. Just as an example, one writer and researcher has a bibliography of some 50 arctic expedition books in his piece of 450 pages, and he gives these most diverse and astounding anomalies a cold and hard look. This author, Marshall B. Gardner, sent a copy of “A Journey to the Earth’s Interior, Or Have the Poles Really Been Discovered?” to the US government in 1920 and challenged them to refute it. The Feds haven’t gotten around to it yet, and it was a few decades ago. The bell rang a long time ago if you ask me.
One single article with most of the points that indicate that our earth is hollow … that sounds a lot easier than it is done. You end up writing a freaking book, or an endless piece of an article that you, the reader, might not have time for right now, while I don’t get paid for it right now, actually, ever.
The Ultimate Heresy
So here is the solution: we saddle the horse the wrong way. We just assume for ten minutes that the earth and all planets are obviously hollow in nature, and inhabited, at least in the case of Earth. We then deliver the evidence and documented observations as proof to those asking for this proof that the Earth is in fact a hollow sphere. And not a nice, solid, slightly flattened sphere around a progressively cooling liquid core. Or flat.
One more thing before we get into the subject for real. If it is true that the earth is a hollow sphere, and inhabited by beings who are by all accounts much superior to us, then it means that the implications are staggering. It is hard tothink of bigger implications than the Hollow Earth. It changes everything. It is the biggest and most direct game-changer I could find in the field of alternative science. It is like coming around a corner and there you see Bugs Bunny, Santa Claus and the Pink Panther playing poker. Looks like they did not tell you something important. Very irritating.
It would also mean that the Hollow Earth is the best-kept secret of all the many well-kept secrets that are kept somewhere. In the woowoo corner, for example. The totally bananas wing. Where they keep those flat-earthers.
So here we go, hurry up and wait and, eventually, there you are.
The ultimate woowoo idea, only a few centuries ago, was that the earth was a sphere. You know, a roundish thing, a big marble in space, made of mostly rock. It was, of course, a flat surface, as everybody could check out for himself, with the oceans around the land masses ending a seaman’s (already tough) life in a free-fall into the abyss.
It is said that those keeping the real shape of the world a secret did so because it was good for business, and it kept curiosity in check. Good for certain business, and a check on inconvenient curiosity. This way, insisting that the earth was flat, nobody knew where the highway was, and kept plodding along country dirt roads. Physically, mentally and spiritually.

The Ultimate Secret

This Hollow Earth thing is the best-kept secret of them all. If it is not true, it is not a secret. Aliens by the dozens who are milking us and mixing with us genetically is absolutely mainstream when compared to the Hollow Earth. But only the inclusion of not-yet-mainstream cosmology like the Quantum Vacuum, the Electric (nature of the) Universe, the fact that gravity is not at all explained, and a good dose of pattern recognition eases the way into the Hollow Earth “zone”.

Actually, if you stack the two against each other, which model explains the observations a lot better than the other, the clear winner is: Hollow Planets. Including our Earth. It will take some time to explain it all, which is why there is some space reserved for more parts of this article.
Fast forward to 2010, where the proverbial woo woo topic, one that causes your otherwise still somewhat presentable reputation to make a big sucking sound, is the Hollow Earth gig. It is definitely on top of the list. The concept that the earth is a shell, a couple of hundred miles thick, with two polar openings that connect inner and outer surfaces, an inner sun and … check this out … intelligent life. Really intelligent life, not like us pack-hunting, weapon- wielding primates with an inferiority complex, but really cool, intelligent life that, in a word, knows how to have a good party at the right times.
Yes, of course they live inside and know how to get out quickly, too. Through the polar openings, for example. Those got them going about these cool flying discs, and the rotating fields helped, too.
Jupiter is hollow with an interior Sun. Look at this brilliant light shining at the Pole.
Let this roll around in your walnut for a second. It used to be the most freaky concept around, and only seconds ago when measured in earthly civilization’s time. All sorts of immediately handy arguments were stoning you before you could even get halfway through the points you wanted to make, back then, about the Earth being round. You were actually burned at the stake, and it was not fun.
Switch back to the Hollow Earth of today. “Woowoo land” you say, “through and through, complete nonsense – impossible – we would know about it – give me a break – they can’t keep a secret like this – what about the satellite photos – what about gravity – what about that other thing – are you saying you are wasting your time with this?” … and so on.
Look at it as the best-kept secret ever – for now. Rumors and even evidence of it abound, but no official statements or photos are shown at school, university, or prime-time teevee. Actually, that is not true. See the case of Admiral Richard Evelyn Byrd (US Navy) and many other sober people further down the Hollow Earth path.
The Ultimate ‘Did You Know That … Never Mind’
Here is a list of the wide range of evidence which we will now present to the un- believing outer earth visitors who want to know why they have never heard about the Hollow Earth before, and feel that they have been somewhat left out.
Concepts
All planets are spheres, not only the Earth: the Moon, Saturn, Jupiter, the Sun itself. Standard planetary formation theories: how were they formed, what made them spin, and still does: completely woowoo. A massive planetary body with an incandescent and progressively cooling core would crack into pieces while cooling and shrinking. Gaseous planetary bodies like the sun and the large planets of our solar system can not generate a magnetic field; but they all have one. All the solar system’s outer planets emit more energy than they receive from the sun. A spinning planetary body in formation has zero gravity in its center, so mass does accumulate where gravitational and centrifugal forces are balanced within the area of the spinning matter, and that form would be a sphere with openings at the top and bottom, like a hurricane of matter in space – not as a solid body with a solid center (the center has zero gravity). If planets were formed from cosmic dust which started to condense into a body like Earth, then the angular momentum would still continue to increase, which it doesn’t – the earth’s spin is steady, not slowing down or speeding up. Larger planets with more mass should spin more slowly than smaller planets with less mass – but they don’t: the largest, Jupiter, spins a lot faster (once every 10 hours) than Mercury, which is just a tiny fraction the size of Jupiter and needs 58 Earth days for one spin around its axis
General Observations. Both Earth and Moon ring hollow for hours after struck with meteorites, as measured by seismic stations on Earth and on the Moon* Earthquakes do not occur deeper than 450 miles, but down there, the supposedly molten magma would not create and release friction via earthquakes – a viscous or molten mass equalizes tension, it does not accumulate tension because it is flexible. Gravity experiments in mine shafts show that the balls pointing to the center of gravity point away from the center of the Earth, instead of towards it, as measured by the distance at the top and bottom of two lead balls hanging from very long wires into a mine shaft
Observations at the Earth’s poles: welcome to Mr. Woo’s pole anomalie. The temperature, as one gets past a certain latitude, increases as one approaches the poles, which is not supposed to happen; arctic (and in less cases, antarctic) explorers have reported in their ship’s logs to have taken off their climate gear (this was before Goretex). Floating flora and fauna near the northern polar region’s ocean: seeds, flowers and trees are found at latitudes where none should be, and they are often very fresh, not decomposed from many months of floating in the ocean currents that might have brought them from far away. Spiders, bees, mosquitos, moths and flies were found once past the cold and icy region below the north pole; northern Greenland is the mosquito capital of the world. Many bird species in the northern hemisphere migrate north – before winter; birds in the southern hemisphere migrate south in their winter, too – if the poles are the coldest regions, it makes no sense, but flocks of millions of birds like the auk have been observed doing this, and they must have a very good reason. Presence of seal, auk, goose, seagull, duck, rabbit, wolf, fox, bear and other large animals at extreme northern latitudes (the exploration of Antarctica is much more scarce compared to Arctic explorers). The origin of icebergs: around the north pole, they are made of frozen sweetwater – not frozen saltwater. There is little if any precipitation of rain or snow (sweetwater) in the polar regions. Saltwater freezes to sea ice at low enough temperatures. There is no supply of sweetwater to explain the existence of icebergs which are hundreds of feet high, up to hundreds of miles long and dozens of miles wide* Icebergs around the north pole are colored by red pollen of an unknown plant, as well as dust – a lot of it; including earth material on top of them. Massive wave-like or tidal movements in the arctic polar region have been witnessed by many explorers, waves which cracked and moved the ice floes around the explorer’s ships in a very, very major way that had their hair stand on end. Floating and deposited driftwood (including exotic species) is extremely abundant and sometimes stacked 15 feet/5m high along the coasts in the polar region of Spitzbergen and Greenland, up to 86 degrees latitude north . Mammoth, elephant, woolly rhinoceros, hippopotamus, lion and hyena have been found in the ice from the north pole that is also deposited on the coasts of Siberia; entire forests of mammoth ivory have been found there. The stomach content of (un)frozen mammoth has been found to contain tropical (undigested) plants that do not occur anywhere in the northen polar region; supposedly, the last time the mammoths were clomping around was during the last Ice Age (not the Pixar animation films 1, 2 or 3), but many were found with their (un)frozen meat good enough to give it to the sled dogs in Siberia for dinner (or late lunch) [Note from the editor: If these mammoths came out of Inner Earth via the huge freshwater rivers that flow outwards and freeze as they pass the northern polar opening, then the theory of a massive crustal shift of the Earth which supposedly transported mammoths who had been peacefully chomping on tropical plants way up north, in two days, causing them to insta-freeze as a result of a polar reversal, has one argument less; see Charles Hapgood, Maurice Cotterell, Patrick Geryl, Clif High and others]
Instrument Anomalies at the Earth’s poles. Approaching the magnetic pole, the compass needle points down towards the dial – and passing the “horizon”, where the surface or Earth curves inward at the poles, like an apple into its center, only much more pronounced – the compass needle starts pointing up, behaving now like a vertical and not a horizontal instrument . The magnetic north pole is not a specific point, it is a large area around the geographic north or south poles, which do not exist as solid points on a surface, they are points in empty space; magnetic and geographic poles have a different axis, as you know; the compass stops working in a horizontal plane, and actually indicates the location of a magnetic “pole” over a vast area. You can circle the area around the geographic pole and always get a “north” readingwith the compass. In short, there is no specific point, but an area where magnetic “north” or “south” is shown with a compass
Hullo Earth FAQ: The Questions We Can’t Promise To Answer Right Now
Some speculative, fuzzy quantum unlogical and in no way binding answers to the Hollow Earth FAQ. Just to keep it fun on our way out.
What about gravity?
Center of gravity is in the approximate center of the 800-mile thick eggshell of the Earth, and works inside and outside of the planetary shell; the center of gravity is not at, or towards, the center of the Earth. What about the inner sun?
What about it? What about the inner world?
A huge topic, hang in there for a sneak peak, and prepare to fasten seat belts . What about the outer world and the inner world together? WTF?
Yes . Can one see the openings when getting closer by land or air?
No, but strange phenomena occur, like ‘watery skies’, the reflections along the lip of the arctic hole where the ocean is reflected by the atmosphere. You would love to see it.. Why haven’t I heard about this before? I mean, seriously?
Secrets are best hidden out in the open; the woowoo areas are best . I have most if not all the Hollow Earth classic books and websites. Have all these books about all these facts been suppressed, or banned, forgotten, ignored, ridiculed?
Guess. What about Admiral Byrd’s expeditions? Wasn’t he in the newspapers?
Excellent question, he will be focused on. He was indeed on radio and in newspapers, and commanded among other expeditions “Operation High Jump” — a navy fleet that went after the disappeared German submarines and thousands of German people after world war #2 — it was to the south pole if I remember correctly. What is science saying about this?
Corporate, private or state ‘science’ that gets loaded into textbooks for indoctrination can not deal with this for reasons that are obvious; this science has the role that the high priests used to have when the earth was flat [Editor's note: and now 'it is too late to loose the weight you used to need to throw around' - Pink Floyd]. Why don’t I see this on NatGeo, History, Discovery, and other high- quality corporate brainwashing networks?
I was hoping you would ask. Can we see the polar openings from space?
Absolutely, depending on your exact location and the weather patterns, your security clearance and the effectiveness of the selective memory delete process after you have seen it, please look into this device now. Are satellite images of the polar regions censored?
Of course not. Hey, pigs fly, buddy, some at least … they fly north before winter, these dumb animals
Epilog to the Hollow Earth Introlog
… And the earth used to be flat. Then, a solid ball, like a magma ball in space with a solid crust. When in fact it is a sphere which rings like a bell for weeks and months when struck by meteorites and earthquakes … speaking of which … time to end this introduction. Just in time.
Source: Viewzone
Related Articles:
Hollow Earth Hypothesis – Subterranean Civilizations – Agartha
Hollow Earth – Is Agartha a Real City?
HOLLOW EARTH – Holes in the North and South Poles


Along the South Coast of South Island of New Zealand there is a very Low Gravity compare to most of the places on Earth. It's not the only one Low Gravity place on Earth. The Truth is that it is because of their vicinity to the huge Openings in the areas of South and North Poles!

Antarctic seabed a huge 'graveyard'

http://www.bigpondnews.com/articles/Environment/2010/05/15/Antarctic_seabed_a_huge_graveyard_462226.html

Scientists have dug up a new explanation for very low gravity levels that can be detected along the Antarctic coast south of New Zealand.

They're blaming the anomaly -- and similar phenomena in areas south of Asia, in the northeastern Pacific and in the western Atlantic -- on huge 'slab graveyards' that lie buried deep near the planet's core.
Country-sized slabs of rock buried long ago released water that reduced the density of overlying rock, and low-density rock has less mass, and less gravitational pull, researchers led by Caltech geophysicist Michael Gurnis and his colleagues reported in Nature Geoscience.
Scientists have known that gravity's tug is super-low south of New Zealand, and at the other sites, but have previously thought that hot spots along the core-mantle boundary were creating buoyant plumes of rock that rose within Earth's mantle.
But the new research shows the lowered density of the rock is likely because of changes in the composition of rock, not its temperature.
Dr Gurnis said that south of New Zealand, seismic waves travel slower than normal at 'shallow' depths - 1000km or less - but faster than normal deeper down.
Sound waves travel faster through dense material, which indicated that lighter, less dense material was lying over a layer of very dense material.
Most likely, the top layer's relative buoyancy stems from its water-rich composition, the researchers said.
That water could have been injected in the mantle in slow-motion collisions between lighter and heavier tectonic plates. As dense slabs slipped downward through the mantle, water in those rocks and the seafloor sediments on them was released.
'When that water was added to the surrounding rocks, it lowered their melting point and reduced their density,' Dr Gurnis said.
Saturday, May 15, 2010 » 09:21am

There is also another unusual and touristy place to visit in South Australia, which is an underground mining town, called Coober-Pedy.


The picture below is from the magazine "Hollow Earth Insider"


Planned railway connecting 2 continents
Planned super-tunnel connecting 2 continents


Hollow Earth's Picture Gallery

The inside map of Hollow Earth      External opening  

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth


The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth


The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth

The outside Hole in the Earth


The inside map of Hollow Earth

The inside map of Hollow Earth

The inside map of Hollow Earth   The inside map of Hollow Earth   An opening in Hollow Earth 

The inside map of Hollow Earth

The inside map of Hollow Earth


The inside map of Hollow Earth


The inside map of Hollow Earth

The inside map of Hollow Earth   unexplored area near North Opening     

The inside map of Hollow Earth; Map of the planes' routes permitted over the Antarctica 

The inside map of Hollow Earth

The map of the unknown huge piece of land the size of Greenland near the North Opening (unexplored area)!

Map of the planes' routes permitted over the Antarctica


Internal Sun in Hollow Earth

Internal Sun (the Soul of our Planet) in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

Geo-Glow

Geo-Glow

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth

An opening in Hollow Earth    Inside Earth  


External opening

External opening

External opening


The outside Hole in the Earth

External opening

Hollow Jupiter

Opening in Jupiter


Opening in Jupiter

Opening in Jupiter! All the Planets-Suns and Moons are hollow!

 Photo-Gallery



These are my personal photos of blue and amber-yellow vibrations, which I accidentaly pictured in my village through a Portal. They surprised me: photos seemed to be from other Colored Planets Earths-Suns inside of our Planet!





Frozen Waterfall!

Frozen Waterfall!

Saturday, 29 January 2011
http://www.thesun.co.uk/sol/homepage/news/special_events/green_week/article1672828.ece

About Icebergs!

LIKE graceful sculptures of white rising from the sea, these icebergs are an undeniably beautiful sight.
But as magnificent as the photographs are, according to the man who took them, they are also a dire warning of how our climate is changing.
German travel photographer Rolf Hicker has spent the last 15 years off the coast of Newfoundland, Canada, cataloguing the bergs. Ominous ... these icebergs are a sign that the world is warming at an alarming rate.
As increased temperatures melt the polar ice caps, sea levels are rising and icebergs like these are breaking off into the ocean at a far faster rate than before. Rolf, 42, says: "I remember for years we hardly saw any icebergs. But in 2007 there was a record number, with four or five times more than there had ever been in one season.
"For me this is a clear sign that something very bad is happening in the Arctic."
He adds: "Icebergs have always fascinated me, they are all different. I love Newfoundland and Labrador because they are the best places to watch bergs."
Floating just metres from the shore, the glittering towers of ice are nothing short of staggering - as Rolf's pictures prove.
Measuring as high as a 20-storey building and with the potential to weigh more than ten million tons, some of these blocks are more than 15,000 years old.
Bubbles
And, as the saying goes, we only see the tips of these vast chunks of ice - 90 per cent of their mass is under water.
Most of the icebergs in the North Atlantic come from about 100 berg-producing glaciers along the Greenland coast. These glaciers are among the fastest-moving in the world, with speeds of up to 4.3 miles year.
Approximately 40,000 medium to large icebergs calve - break off - each year in Greenland and are then carried south in the cold current.
The brilliant white of these blocks is because the ice is full of tiny bubbles that reflect white light. Their interior temperature ranges from -15°C to a wintry -20°C.
The size of the bergs can also vary massively, from very large - greater than ten million tons and hundreds of metres long - to small "growlers" the size of a grand piano.
The shapes vary too, from huge flat-topped "tabular" bergs to smaller U-shaped ones. Putting them in categories helps scientists to understand their melting patterns. The largest northern hemisphere iceberg on record was encountered near Baffin Island in 1882. It was 8.7 miles long, 3.7 miles wide and had a freeboard - height above water - of about 22 yards. Ice island ... bergs can weigh millions of tonnes.
The mass of that berg was in excess of nine BILLION tons - enough water for everyone in the world to drink 1.7 pints a day for more than four years.
For photographer Rolf, it was the beauty of the bergs that first attracted him to the area. A professional photographer since he was 16, he has produced award-winning travel photographs which take in a vast array of animals and natural phenomena.
He goes through a stringent routine of preparation before each shoot and says: "There is a lot of planning that goes into each photograph - too much.
"We pick the main shots then give them priority for light. The rest get standard light. You can only really get two outstanding shots a day." As well as being nice to look at, Rolf says his incredible images highlight issues which are important to him. Earlier this month Nasa satellite pictures showed how the North Pole has become an island for the first time in human history.
The startling images showed that melting ice has opened up the fabled North-West and North-East passages - making it possible to sail around the Arctic ice cap.
The opening of the passages has been eagerly awaited by shipping companies who hope they will be able to cut thousands of miles off their routes. But climate-change scientists say the development is yet another sign of the damage that global warming is inflicting on the planet.
As Rolf says: "It almost seems like there are no four seasons any more. Everything is way more extreme than usual."
And as this collection of photographs shows, extreme conditions might make for some remarkable pictures - but they don't say much for the future of the planet.
Friends Of The Earth's climate change campaigner Robin Webster says: "These images highlight the harsh reality that climate change is already affecting our natural world.
"Experts warn we are on a climate collision course that will change our way of life for ever unless world leaders change direction now and lead us to a greener future. "The UK government must stop attempts to wriggle out of EU targets for green energy and strengthen the Climate Change Bill to include emissions from aviation and shipping.
"Images of melting Arctic ice are a sign of things to come - the harsh reality is that climate change is set to have a devastating effect on people and wildlife all over the world.
"The loss of our mighty Arctic glaciers is a warning signal for us all, but it is just one of the changes which may trigger runaway global warming which cannot be reversed.
"Rising sea levels and Arctic shrinkage will change the world as we know it. Indeed, we are already dealing with the consequences."

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Ice Tunnel in Antarctica!

Ice Tunnel in Antarctica!

Ice Melts in Norway, Jan. 2010

Ice Melts in Norway, Jan. 2010

Breaking of the ice!

Icebergs in Canada!

Breaking into icebergs!

Iceberg in Canada!

Picture of Ice Canyon

Picture of Ice Canyon

Breaking of the ice!

Breaking of the ice!

Ice Gates!

Ice Gates!

Iceberg!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Iceberg in Canada!

Igloo Hotel in Canada!

Igloo Hotel in Canada!

Igloo in Canada, censored photo!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Igloo in Canada!

Invisible to the eye Energy of the New Consciousness of Sun, of New Earth and Advaced Humanity is building up above Elliott Heads rivermouth, Australia, 17 Jan, 2010. The Sun is a way higher in the sky.

Elliott Heads rivermouth, Australia, 17 Jan, 2010






Link to Site Map listing other articles, books and useful websites:  SITE MAP